在《相应部》中显示巴利原文
Saṃyuttanikāye
《因缘品复注》显示巴利原文
Nidānavaggaṭīkā
第一 因缘相应显示巴利原文
1. Nidānasaṃyuttaṃ
佛陀品第一显示巴利原文
1. Buddhavaggo
第一 缘起经注显示巴利原文
1. Paṭiccasamuppādasuttavaṇṇanā
1 注疏师说「第一缘起经」,是因为第二经等也都依缘起之理而宣说。此处的「tatra」一词,乃用以说明作为世尊「住」这一行为的修饰语而说出的地点与时间,因此注疏师说「当那时……(中略)……阐明」。因为「taṃ」这个词是对已说之义的指代,所以在这里,它应是指代地点或时间,而非其他。以上是对「tatra」一词指代性意义的初步释义。然而,在类似场合中,「tatra」一词能揭示出说法所特定的地点和时间,故说「或在适于言说的处所与时间」。因此,「tatra」的意思是:世尊为说法而召唤、开示比丘们的那个处所,或那个时间。接着再以「确实如此(hi)」等词来确立此义。显示巴利原文
1. Dutiyasuttādīnipi paṭiccasamuppādavaseneva desitānīti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ paṭiccasamuppādasutta’’nti. Tatrāti padaṃ ye desakālā idha viharaṇakiriyāya visesanabhāvena vuttā, tesaṃ paridīpananti dassento ‘‘yaṃ samayaṃ…pe… dīpetī’’ti āha. Taṃ-saddo hi vuttassa atthassa paṭiniddeso, tasmā idha desassa kālassa vā paṭiniddeso bhavituṃ arahati, na aññassa. Ayaṃ tāva tatrasaddassa paṭiniddesabhāve atthavibhāvanā. Yasmā pana īdisesu ṭhānesu tatrasaddo dhammadesanāvisiṭṭhaṃ desaṃ kālañca vibhāveti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle’’ti . Tena tatrāti yattha bhagavā dhammadesanatthaṃ bhikkhū ālapi abhāsi, tādise dese, kāle vāti attho. Na hītiādinā tamevatthaṃ samattheti.
难道世尊不是曾站着对婆希亚说「现在还不是时候」等语而拒绝说法,随后就在那条路中间,依然站着为他宣说了佛法吗?这确实是事实。但这正是「在不应说法的时候而不说法」的例证,因此他说「现在还不是时候」。至于那里所说的「我们已经进入村落了」,这也是为了说明那是不适合说法的时间。因为当时,婆希亚由于长途跋涉的劳累,色身不堪受法;由于极度欢喜的冲击,名身也不堪受法。世尊为了期盼这两方面都平息下来,为了遮止戏论,才以「还不是时候」为由间接地予以拒绝。而「在不应说法的地方而不说法」的例子,则有「那时,世尊离开道路,坐在某棵树下」,以及「从住处出来,坐在精舍阴凉处已敷设的座位上」等等,这些都在此处被「等(ādi)」一词所概括。在「诸比丘,那个愚人在这里造了恶业之后」等句子中,「kho」字只是填补音节;在「不尊重、不顺从而住,实在是苦」等句子中,是表示限定;在「贤友,究竟到什么程度,当导师住于远离时,弟子们却不修学远离呢」等句子中,是表示初始时间,即作为句子的开端。其中,填补音节仅是言辞的修饰;而表示初始时间,则是指它作为句子的开端。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca yattha ṭhito bhagavā ‘‘akālo kho tāvā’’tiādinā bāhiyassa dhammadesanaṃ paṭikkhipi, tattheva antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhitova tassa dhammaṃ desesīti? Saccametaṃ. Adesetabbakāle adesanāya hi idaṃ udāharaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘akālo kho tāvā’’ti. Yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhamhā’’ti, tampi tassa akālabhāvasseva pariyāyena dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa hi tadā addhānaparissamena rūpakāye akammaññatā ahosi, balavapītivegena nāmakāye. Tadubhayassa vūpasamaṃ āgamento papañcaparihāratthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘akālo kho’’ti pariyāyena paṭikkhipi. Adesetabbadese adesanāya pana udāharaṇaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi, vihārato nikkhamitvā vihārapacchāyāyaṃ paññatte āsane nisīdī’’ti evamādikaṃ idha ādisaddena saṅgahitaṃ. ‘‘Sa kho so bhikkhave bālo idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 3.248) padapūraṇamatte kho-saddo, ‘‘dukkhaṃ kho agāravo viharati appatisso’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.21) avadhāraṇe, ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.31) ādikālatthe, vākyārambheti attho. Tattha padapūraṇena vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ kataṃ hoti, ādikālatthena vākyassa upaññāsamattaṃ, avadhāraṇatthena pana niyamadassanaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā āmantesi evā’’ti āmantane niyamo dassito hotīti.
为什么说“世尊是表示世间敬重”呢?前面不是已经说过“世尊”这个词了吗?虽然前面已说过,但那一处是为了突显在前述地点进行“住”这一行为的主体的殊胜,并非针对“呼唤”;而此处是为了“呼唤”这一行为,所以在经文中再次说出“世尊”,正是为了这个意义。为阐明此义,他说“世尊是表示世间敬重”。“堪闻法之人语”,是指对将要宣说的缘起教法堪能听闻者的称呼。在四众之中,唯有比丘是这类教法的特别合宜之器,为了显示他们以殊胜的方式成为教法的领受者,所以在此指出“比丘”;接着为显示词义,他说“再者”。其中,乞求者即称为比丘,意思是因有乞求的习性、乞求的法则故为比丘。已进入乞食行者,因也进入了佛陀等所进入的乞食行、次第乞食行,依此行持、随转,故为比丘。凡是舍弃或多或少的财富,从在家出家为无家者,他舍弃了以农耕、牧牛等方式谋生,仅由接受出家形相便进入了乞食行,故为比丘。或者由于生计依赖他人,即使是在精舍中受用集体供养的食物者,也进入了乞食行,故为比丘;又或者,显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavāti lokagarudīpana’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu pubbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti padaṃ vuttanti? Yadipi pubbe vuttaṃ, taṃ pana yathāvuttaṭṭhāne viharaṇakiriyāya kattuvisesadassanaparaṃ, na āmantanakiriyāya, idha pana āmantanakiriyāya, tasmā tadatthaṃ puna bhagavāti pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti. Tassatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavāti lokagarudīpana’’nti āha. Kathāsavanayuttapuggalavacananti vakkhamānāya paṭiccasamuppādadesanāya savanayogyapuggalavacanaṃ. Catūsupi parisāsu bhikkhū eva edisānaṃ desanānaṃ visesena bhājanabhūtāti sātisayena sāsanasampaṭiggāhakabhāvadassanatthaṃ idha bhikkhugahaṇanti dassetvā idāni saddatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’ti āha. Tattha bhikkhakoti bhikkhūti bhikkhanasīlattā bhikkhanadhammattā bhikkhūti attho. Bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti buddhādīhipi ajjhupagataṃ bhikkhācariyaṃ uñchācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā anuṭṭhitattā bhikkhu. Yo hi koci appaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito, so kasigorakkhādīhi jīvikakappanaṃ hitvā liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā bhikkhu. Parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā vā vihāramajjhe kājabhattaṃ bhuñjamānopi bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāya pabbajjāya ussāhajātattā vā bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhūti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
按照《分别论》中所说的方法,即“以破旧衣为衣者是比丘,破坏诸恶不善法者是比丘,由于已破坏诸恶不善法而成为比丘”等。“令知”:指在觉了中,意为证知。“乞食的习性”:即具有以乞食维生的习惯,而不是以耕作、经商等方式维生的习惯。“乞食的性质”:如“圣者存续是为了……”所说,是指乞食的体性,而不是请求、欺骗的体性。“于乞食中善行”:指忆念“应当起来,不应放逸”这一教诫后,于中不放逸。另外,这里的“习性”指本性,但此处则指“如是的决心”。“法”指义务。其他注疏师则解释说:“习性指依誓愿而受持;法指传承而来的惯例;善行指恭敬而作、殷勤而行。”显示巴利原文
Ādinā nayenāti ‘‘bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu, bhindati pāpake akusale dhammeti bhikkhu, bhinnattā pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 509) āgatanayena. Ñāpaneti avabodhane, paṭivedaneti attho. Bhikkhanasīlatā, na kasivāṇijjādīhi jīvanasīlatā. Bhikkhanadhammatā ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhantī’’ti (jā. 1.7.59) evaṃ vuttabhikkhanasabhāvatā, na yācanākohaññasabhāvatā. Bhikkhane sādhukāritā ‘‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’’ti (dha. pa. 168) vacanaṃ anussaritvā tattha appamajjatā. Atha vā sīlaṃ nāma pakatisabhāvo. Idha pana tathādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammoti vataṃ. Apare pana ‘‘sīlaṃ nāma vatavasena samādānaṃ. Dhammo nāma paveṇi-āgataṃ cārittaṃ. Sādhukāritā sakkaccakāritā ādarakiriyā’’ti vaṇṇenti.
“比丘们”这一称呼,对两类人有不同作用:一类是虽处于比丘身份,却因出身骄慢等而掉举、自大的人;另一类是于在家时从未有求于人,因而认为乞食行极为卑劣的人。对于这两类人,通过“比丘们”一词,依次地说明:一方面,宣说这一生活方式为卑贱者、穷人、极度卑贱者所奉行,依靠在他人家中乞食维生,以此抑制掉举的习性;另一方面,宣说这一生活方式也为高贵者所奉行——例如从拥有大量财富的刹帝利家族等出家的人,以及佛陀等为了清净活命而奉行——以此抑制怯弱的习性。应当这样联系起来理解。“比丘们”一词,从称呼形式看是面对面地呼唤;从文脉和词义功能来看,是为了引发听者倾听,并令其恭敬地听闻与作意。为了显示这个意义,所以说“以此比丘们”等。显示巴利原文
Hīnādhikajanasevitavuttinti ye bhikkhubhāve ṭhitāpi jātimadādivasena uddhatā unnaḷā, ye ca gihibhāve paresu atthikabhāvampi anupagatatāya bhikkhācariyaṃ paramakāpaññaṃ maññanti, tesaṃ ubhayesampi yathākkamaṃ ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vacanena hīnajanehi daliddehi paramakāpaññataṃ pattehi parakulesu bhikkhācariyāya jīvikaṃ kappentehi sevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti, adhikajanehi uḷārabhogakhattiyakulādito pabbajitehi buddhādīhi ājīvasodhanatthaṃ sevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento dīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karotīti yojetabbaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vacanaṃ āmantanabhāvato abhimukhīkaraṇaṃ, pakaraṇato sāmatthiyato ca sussūsājananaṃ, sakkaccasavanamanasikāraniyojanañca hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhavoti iminā’’tiādimāha.
其中,“善加作意者”(sādhukaṃ manasikārepīti):指在听闻时善加作意,在作意时善加作意。怎样才使听闻等成为善加进行呢?即怀着崇敬与尊重,心想:“依此行道,确实能掌握全部教法的成就”,并于说法等过程中远离轻慢等过失。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,成就五法者听闻正法,便能趣入决定,于善法中入于正性。何等为五?不轻视说法,不轻视说法者,不轻视自己,心不散乱、一心一意地听闻法,并如理作意。诸比丘,成就此五法者听闻正法,便能趣入决定,于善法中入于正性。”(《增支部》5.151)因此说“因为善加作意是教法成就之所依”。所谓教法成就,即是戒等的圆满;由于它在证得最上果之前生起;由于随顺导师之行而成就戒等功德;由于依三乘之道,能够生起随法行,故成为一切教法的受持者。显示巴利原文
Tattha sādhukaṃ manasikārepīti sādhukaṃ savane sādhukaṃ manasikāre ca. Kathaṃ pavattitā savanādayo sādhukaṃ pavattitā hontīti? ‘‘Addhā imāya paṭipattiyā sakalasāsanasampatti hatthagatā bhavissatī’’ti ādaragāravayogena kathādīsu aparibhavādinā ca. Vuttañhi ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato suṇanto saddhammaṃ bhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ. Katamehi pañcahi? Na kathaṃ paribhoti, na kathikaṃ paribhoti, na attānaṃ paribhoti , avikkhittacitto dhammaṃ suṇāti ekaggacitto, yoniso ca manasi karoti. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahi dhammehi samannāgato suṇanto saddhammaṃ bhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammatta’’nti (a. ni. 5.151). Tenāha ‘‘sādhukaṃ manasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampattī’’ti. Sāsanasampatti nāma sīlādinipphatti. Paṭhamaṃ uppannattā adhigamavasena. Satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā sīlādiguṇānuṭṭhānena. Tiṇṇaṃ yānānaṃ vasena anudhammapaṭipattisambhavato sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā.
「以临近故」(santikattāti):指处于邻近的状态。「以近行故」(santikāvacarattāti):指在一切时中与会合的状态。「如所教诫」(yathānusiṭṭhanti):即随顺教诫,完全领受教诫,这是它的含义。「有些比丘」(ekacce bhikkhūti):指那些专心于缘起法之教导的比丘。前面已用“世尊的说法是普为一切众的”等语,显示了唯以比丘为召请对象的原因;现在为了显示召请比丘而说法的用意,才提出“世尊究竟为了什么目的”这样的质难。其中,「在想其他」(aññaṃ cintentāti):指心思跑到了别处。「心散乱」(vikkhittacittāti):指心未得定。「在省察法」(dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāti):指用心回忆昨日或先前听过的法。当召请比丘而说法时,能够从一开始就专注于说法,为了以否定的方式显示此义,故说“他们未被召请”等。显示巴利原文
Santikattāti samīpabhāvato. Santikāvacarattāti sabbakālaṃ saṃvuttibhāvato. Yathānusiṭṭhanti anusāsaniyānurūpaṃ, anusāsaniṃ anavasesato paṭiggahetvāti attho. Ekacce bhikkhūti ye paṭiccasamuppādadhamme desanāpasutā, te. Pubbe ‘‘sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi bhagavato dhammadesanā’’tiādinā bhikkhūnaṃ eva āmantanakāraṇaṃ dassetvā idāni bhikkhū āmantetvā dhammadesanāya payojanaṃ dassetuṃ kimatthaṃ pana bhagavāti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tattha aññaṃ cintentāti aññavihitā. Vikkhittacittāti asamāhitacittā. Dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāti hiyyo tato paradivasesu vā sutadhammaṃ pati manasā avekkhantā. Bhikkhū āmantetvā dhamme desiyamāne ādito paṭṭhāya desanaṃ sallakkhetuṃ sakkotīti imamevatthaṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘te anāmantetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“Bhikkhavoti”:当依连声规则视为i字母的脱落,即“bhikkhavo iti”。此iti一词确实具有原因、结束、词义异称、类别、确定、例示等多种含义。例如,在“诸比丘,它被破坏,故被称为‘色’”(《相应部》3.79)等句中,见于表原因;在“诸比丘,因此你们要成为法的继承人,不要成为财食的继承人”(《中部》1.29)等句中,表结束;在“如此远离种种表演观看”(《长部》1.13)等句中,表“等”义;在“摩犍提乃是那个婆罗门的称呼、共名、施设、言说、名称、命名、名号、言辞、音节、表达”(《大义释》73,75)等句中,表词义异称;在“诸比丘,如是愚者有怖畏,智者无怖畏;愚者有灾祸,智者无灾祸”(《中部》3.124)等句中,表类别;在“阿难,若被问‘老死有此缘吗’,应回答‘有’;若再问‘老死以何为缘’,应回答‘以生为缘而有老死’”(《长部》2.96)等句中,表确定;在“迦旃延,‘一切有’这是一边,‘一切无’这是第二边”(《相应部》2.15; 3.90)等句中,表列举。在此处也应视为表列举。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhavoti ca sandhivasena i-kāralopo daṭṭhabbo ‘‘bhikkhavo itī’’ti, ayañhi itisaddo hetuparisamāpanādipadatthavipariyāyapakārāvadhāraṇanidassanādianekatthapabhedo. Tathā hesa ‘‘ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.79) hetumhi dissati, ‘‘tasmātiha me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) parisamāpane, ‘‘iti vā evarūpā visūkadassanā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.13) ādiatthe ‘‘māgaṇḍiyoti tassa brāhmaṇassa saṅkhā samaññā paññatti vohāro nāmaṃ nāmakammaṃ nāmadheyyaṃ nirutti byañjanaṃ abhilāpo’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 73, 75) padatthavipariyāye, ‘‘iti kho, bhikkhave, sappaṭibhayo bālo, appaṭibhayo paṇḍito. Saupaddavo bālo, anupaddavo paṇḍito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.124) pakāre, ‘‘atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṃ. Kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti ce vadeyya, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iccassa vacanīya’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.96) avadhāraṇe, ‘‘sabbamatthīti kho, kaccāna, ayameko anto, sabbaṃ natthīti ayaṃ dutiyo anto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.15; 3.90) nidassane . Idhāpi nidassane eva daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhavoti āmantanākāro tamesa iti-saddo nidasseti ‘‘bhikkhavoti āmantesī’’ti. Iminā nayena bhaddantetiādīsupi yathārahaṃ itisaddassa attho veditabbo.
前面已说“世尊召唤”,此处说“比丘们回应世尊”,其中“bhagavato”是属格,它所关联的正是“召唤”这一行为,因此解释为“回应了世尊的召唤”。而“bhagavato”一词,根据其与“回应”的关系,便成为与格。至此,具备了时节、处所、说法者、大众、宣示等条件的序言已经说完,这便是前后的连结。有人可能问:“结集法与律的时候,为什么要安立序言呢?难道不应该只结集世尊亲口所说的话吗?”答:是为了让教法能够长久住世、不被遗忘、令人信受。因为将教法与时节、处所、说法者、因缘、大众、宣示等相互关联而安立,就能使它长久住世、不会忘失,并且可信,正如世间的裁决需要与时節、行事者、作者、听众等因缘相连属一样。因此,大迦叶尊者曾问:“阿难尊者,《缘起经》是在哪里说的?”等等,询问处所等事项;持法藏者阿难尊者在回答时,便以“如是我闻”等语,讲述了这部经的序言。显示巴利原文
Pubbe ‘‘bhagavā āmantesī’’ti vuttattā bhagavato paccassosunti idha bhagavatoti sāmivacanaṃ āmantanameva sambandhīantaraṃ apekkhatīti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘bhagavato āmantanaṃ paṭiassosu’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatoti idaṃ pana paṭissavasambandhena sampadānavacanaṃ. Ettāvatā yaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitanti sambandho. Etthāha – kimatthaṃ pana dhammavinayasaṅgahe kariyamāne nidānavacanaṃ, nanu bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabboti? Vuccate – desanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakanimittaparisāpadesehi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti asammosadhammā saddheyyā ca, desakālakattusotunimittehi upanibandho viya vohāravinicchayo. Teneva cāyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādasuttaṃ, āvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti āyasmatā ānandena imassa suttassa nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ.
而且,为了彰显大师的成就圆满而说序言。因为如来,也就是世尊,没有事先规划、没有随从认可、没有他人来请等迹象,这就成就了正自觉者的体性。正自觉者确实不需要事先规划之类,因为他在一切所知法上智行无碍,而且所知诸法是平等无际的。同时,因为没有师传、愤恚、悭吝、顺从弟子等嫌疑,便成就了诸漏尽者的体性。诸漏尽者绝对不会有这些过失,他利益他人的行为极为清净。这样,由能显示遣除那些毁坏戒、见成就等、作为说法者之杂染的无明与渴爱毕竟不存,以及显示智成就、断成就的自觉与清净相,由此成就前两种自信;进而,对障道法与导出法没有迷惑,又成就后两种自信。如此,世尊具足四自信,而他自利利他的行持,通过序言得以昭示:在处处随顺当时在场大众的意乐,以依处而起的辩才开演教法。而在本处,则应以二根本、远离两边、贯通三时、含摄四种理趣、甚深微妙的缘起,来显示觉悟之道,应这样联系起来。因此说“为昭示大师的成就圆满而说序言”。显示巴利原文
Apica satthu sampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubbaracanānumānāgamatakkābhāvato sammāsambuddhabhāvasiddhi. Na hi sammāsambuddhassa pubbaracanādīhi attho atthi, sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya ekappamāṇattā ca ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasatthusāvakānurodhābhāvato khīṇāsavattasiddhi. Na hi sabbaso khīṇāsavassa te sambhavantīti suvisuddhā cassa parānuggahappavatti, evaṃ desakasaṃkilesabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhisīlasampadādūsakānaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ accantābhāvasaṃsūcakehi ñāṇasampadāpahānasampadābhibyañjanakehi ca saṃbuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi, tato eva ca antarāyikaniyyānikadhammesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo attahitaparahitapaṭipatti ca nidānavacanena pakāsitā hoti, tattha tattha sampattaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato, idha pana mūladvayavasena antadvayarahitassa tisandhikālabandhassa catubbidhanayasaṅkhepagambhīrabhāvayuttassa paṭiccasamuppādassa bodhiyā nidassanato cāti yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthu sampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
同样,为了彰显教法的成就圆满而说序言。因为世尊的一切作为都以智慧与悲心所统摄,没有无意义的举动,也不是为了自我利益;所以,正自觉者的全部身业、语业、意业,纯粹是为了利益他人而发起,当这些示现出来并被宣说时,便随其所宜,成为以现法利益、来世利益和究竟义利益来教诫有情的教法,而不是诗词创作。这就是导师的行仪,与时节、处所、说法者、大众、宣示等一起,在各处通过序言文句得以彰显。而在此处,则是通过开显十二支缘起的方式来彰显的。因此说“为昭示教法的成就圆满而说序言”。显示巴利原文
Tathā sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthikā pavatti, attahitatthā vā, tasmā paresaṃ eva atthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabbaracanā. Tayidaṃ satthucaritaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesehi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanehi yathārahaṃ pakāsīyati, idha pana dvādasapadikapaccayākāravibhāvanena tena. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
再者,藉由彰显大师的权威来显示教法的权威,故有此序言,旨在显示大师的权威。应知这是依据前文所述之理,以“世尊”一词来开显的。而“世尊”一词,阐明如来断除贪、嗔、痴等一切杂染、垢秽、恶行等过失,彰显其不共、极为清净的智与悲等殊胜功德,由此显示他在一切众生中最尊最上。如此一来,此中意义便已全面开显。此处正是在说明序言的作用。显示巴利原文
Apica satthu pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ, tañcassa pamāṇabhāvadassanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti ca iminā padena vibhāvitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti ca iminā tathāgatassa rāgadosamohādi-sabbasaṃkilesamaladuccaritādidosappahānadīpanena vacanena anaññasādhāraṇasuparisuddhañāṇakaruṇādiguṇavisesayogaparidīpanena tato eva sabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ayamattho sabbathā pakāsito hotīti. Idamettha nidānavacane payojananidassanaṃ.
“所安置的”(nikkhittassā),即所宣说的。因为说法就是将应说的戒等义理,安置于应受教化众生的相续心流之中,故称为“安置”。因此,先简要说明世尊说法之生起的类别,然后说“先审察经的安置方式,所说便得明了”——当说法的缘起被揭示为“此处说法如是生起”时,由于正确了知经典的序分,注释便易于理解。由此,对于可能有人提出的“为何世尊唯独以缘起的方式开始说法”这一诘问,便可善巧地回答:“这是顺应他意乐的经典安置方式。”于此,种种经典虽有数百千种的差别,若依杂染分、清净分等纲要统摄,总归不出十六种。若依自意乐等安置经典的方式,则成立为四种相,故说“有四种安置经典的方式”。在此,若自意乐、事缘,与顺他意乐、随请问等交互结合,则可能出现如下分类:自意乐兼顺他意乐、自意乐兼随问、自意乐兼顺他意乐与随问、事缘生兼顺他意乐、事缘生兼随问、事缘生兼顺他意乐与随问。这是因为意乐与请问能相互结合而产生这些情况。如是,虽……显示巴利原文
Nikkhittassāti desitassa. Desanāpi hi desetabbassa sīlādiatthassa vineyyasantānesu nikkhipanato ‘‘nikkhepo’’ti vuccatīti ‘‘suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hotī’’ti sāmaññato bhagavato desanāya samuṭṭhānassa vibhāgaṃ dassetvā ‘‘etthāyaṃ desanā evaṃsamuṭṭhānā’’ti desanāya samuṭṭhāne dassite suttassa sammadeva nidānaparijānanena vaṇṇanāya suviññeyyattā vuttaṃ. Tato heṭṭhā ‘‘kasmā bhagavatā paṭiccasamuppādavaseneva desanā āraddhā’’ti kenaci codanāya katāya ‘‘parajjhāsayoyaṃ suttanikkhepo’’ti parihāro sukathito hoti. Tattha yathā anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādipadhānanayena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvanti āha ‘‘cattāro hi suttanikkhepā’’ti. Ettha ca yathā attajjhāsayassa aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāhi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati ‘‘attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca, attajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko cā’’ti ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisambhavato, evaṃ yadipi aṭṭhuppattiyā ajjhāsayenapi saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati, attajjhāsayādīhi pana purato ṭhitehi aṭṭhuppattiyā saṃsaggo natthīti. Nayidha niravaseso vitthāranayo sambhavatīti ‘‘cattāro hi suttanikkhepā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadantogadhattā vā sambhavantānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattārova dassitā, tathādassanañcettha ayaṃ saṃsaggabhedo gahetabboti.
此处释词之义:被安放,故称“安置”(nikkhepo);经即是“安置”,故为“经的安置”(suttanikkhepo)。或者,安放的动作即为“安置”,经的安置即“经的安置”,其义为“说经”。自己的意乐即“自意乐”(attajjhāsayo)。以此为因缘而具足,故称“自意乐者”;或者说,此经以自己意乐为因缘,故为“自意乐”。对于“他意乐”(parajjhāsayo),也应以同样方法理解。依随请问而生的法,具此特性,故称“随问者”(pucchāvasiko)。作为说经缘起之事由,其生起称为“事缘生起”,而“事缘生起”即是“事缘”(aṭṭhuppatti);具此特性,故称“有事缘者”(aṭṭhuppattiko)。或又可说:经凭此而安立,故此即是“经的安置”,亦即“自意乐”等本身。于此词义分别中:自己的意乐为“自意乐”;他人的意乐为“他意乐”;被询问者称为“请问”,指通过请问而应了知之义理。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipīyatīti nikkhepo, suttaṃ eva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Atha vā nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo. Attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vasena pavattadhammo etassa atthīti, pucchāvasiko. Suttadesanāya vatthubhūtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppatti, sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti suttanikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitvā ñātabbo attho. Tassa pucchāvasena pavattaṃ dhammapaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasikaṃ, tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pulliṅgavasena ‘‘pucchāvasiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā aṭṭhuppatti eva aṭṭhuppattikoti evampettha attho veditabbo.
于此,由于不依赖他人根器成熟等条件,纯粹凭如来自心的意乐说法以安立正法,故将「自意乐」另立为一种经典的安置方式,是合理的。至于「他意乐者」与「随问者」,既然是以他人的意乐和请问作为说法生起的因缘,并依此因缘而有说法,那么将它们摄入「事缘」时,怎会有矛盾呢?或者,对于「随问者」与「有事缘者」,因其随顺他意乐而生起,又怎会在摄入「他意乐」时产生矛盾呢?对此不应责难。因为所谓「事缘」的判定,是专指那些脱离了他人誓愿、遍问等因缘,纯粹作为说法缘起而生起的事件。因此,才另行安立「他意乐」和「随问者」的类别。同样地,以褒贬、染着生起等作为说法因缘的,便称为「事缘」,如《梵网经》、《法嗣经》等。若是不依他人提问,唯以对方的意乐为因缘而说法,即是「他意乐者」;若是纯粹依随提问而说法,即为「随问者」,此义昭然。应当理解为:纯粹凭自己的意乐而说法,是为了安立正法。显示巴利原文
Apicettha paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ suttanikkhepabhāvo yutto kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā. Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanāpavattihetubhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ anavarodho, pucchāvasikaaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti? Na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi brahmajāladhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇaāmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhuppattī’’ti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayaṃ eva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena eva desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭovāyamatthoti. Attano ajjhāsayeneva katheti dhammatantiṭhapanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dasabalasuttantahārakoti dasabalavagge anupubbena nikkhittānaṃ suttānaṃ āvali, tathā candopamahārakādayo.
「令解脱成熟的法」指信根等。「意乐」指倾向。「忍」指以智慧洞察而安忍。「心」指心识。「引导向」指誓愿。「觉的状态」指觉悟的自性,或者通达的方式。显示巴利原文
Vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā saddhindriyādayo. Ajjhāsayanti adhimuttiṃ. Khantinti diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiṃ. Mananti cittaṃ. Abhinīhāranti paṇidhānaṃ. Bujjhanabhāvanti bujjhanasabhāvaṃ, paṭivijjhanākāraṃ vā.
「略示即知者」:「略示」意为以智略示,即仅凭智慧略示的当下便了知法义。「广说方知者」:指了知被详细开演的义理。「应被引导者」:指需要藉由略示等方法加以引导的人。「文句为最者」:指以文句为最高追求的人。「在开示的当下」:指所开示的法于略说中被点出的那一刻。「法现观」:指以智慧与四谛法契合。若有人能在以「四念处」等略说的方式安立纲要后,便随顺教法策动智慧,从而证得阿拉汉果,即称为「略示即知者」。若有人在安立简要纲要之后,于详细分别义理时方能证得阿拉汉果,即称为「广说方知者」。「由略示」:以略示为因缘,即正在略说或教人略说;有的版本作“uddisato”,义同。「由遍问」:即正在遍问。「次第得法现观」:指按次第证得阿拉汉果。「不依此生而得法现观」:指依于那个有身,无法生起道、果,乃至连禅那或观都无从引发。此人因把文句奉为至高而安住于此,故称「文句为最者」。显示巴利原文
Ugghaṭitaññūti ugghaṭanaṃ nāma ñāṇugghaṭanaṃ, ñāṇena ugghaṭitamatte eva dhammaṃ jānātīti attho. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāritameva atthaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Uddesādīhi netabboti neyyo. Byañjanapadaṃ paramaṃ assāti padaparamo. Saha udāhaṭavelāyāti udāhāradhammassa uddese udāhaṭamatte eva. Dhammābhisamayoti catusaccadhammassa ñāṇena saddhiṃ abhisamāyogo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena saṃkhittena mātikāya ṭhapiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho puggalo ‘‘ugghaṭitaññū’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ saṃkhittena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samattho puggalo ‘‘vipañcitaññū’’ti vuccati. Uddesatoti uddesahetu, uddisantassa uddisāpentassa vāti attho, ‘‘uddisato’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Paripucchatoti paripucchantassa. Anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hotīti anukkamena arahattappatti hoti. Na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hotīti tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ puggalo byañjanapadameva paramaṃ katvā ṭhitattā ‘‘padaparamo’’ti vuccati.
「独行者」:指因乐于远离而独自安住的人。「双行者」:指两人意趣相投,以智行等的方式一同游行者。其余数目,亦可依此类推。「由开显七种空而成为空」:因开显七种空,故名为“空”;正因如此,它柔软而微细。在说明“世尊随顺他人的意乐而发起此经”之后,那些被称为“他人”的众生又分两类:未作预备修行者,与善加清净前分道者。为了以譬喻显示佛陀对这两类众生的化导行迹,故说“yathā hi”等语。「不令色生起」:不似书写那样去造作而成。「未作加行」:对于观的修习,未作精勤加行。「戒……乃至……成就」:应如此配合理解——以未受持的戒为“戒成就”,以极清净的戒为“定成就”,以正直之见与正业为“见成就”。显示巴利原文
Ekacarāti vivekābhiratiyā ekavihārino. Dvicarāti dve ekajjhāsayā hutvā ñāṇacariyādivasena vicarantā. Esa nayo sesesu. Sattasuññatāpakāsanena suññataṃ. Tato eva saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ. ‘‘Paresaṃ ajjhāsayavasena bhagavā idaṃ suttaṃ ārabhī’’ti vatvā te pana ‘‘pare’’ti vuttapuggalā aparikammikā suparisodhitapubbabhāgapaṭipadā cāti duvidhā, tadubhayesu satthu paṭipattiṃ upamāmukhena pakāsento yathā hītiādimāha. Rūpaṃ na samuṭṭhāpeti likhanavasena na uppādeti. Akatābhinivesanti vipassanābhāvanāya akatānuyogaṃ. Sīla…pe… sampadāyāti asamādinnasīlaṃ sīlasampadāya, suparisuddhasīlaṃ samādhisampadāya, anujukatadiṭṭhijukammaṃ diṭṭhisampadāya yojentoti yojanā.
「此」:指涉前分道的修行。「戒」:指四遍清净戒。「见」:指业属己见及业道正见。「三种方式」:依“内”、“外”、“内与外”,如此就所缘境之别而有三类方式。如前所述,为显示戒正是“见清净”的特胜助缘,也是修习之所依,故说“依于戒,安立于戒”。显示巴利原文
Yanti yaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ sandhāya. Sīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Diṭṭhi cāti kammassakatādiṭṭhi ceva kammapathasammādiṭṭhi ca. Tividhenāti ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā ajjhattabahiddhāti evaṃ visayabhāvato tippakārena. Yathāvuttadiṭṭhivisuddhiyā visesapaccayaṃ sīlaṃyeva bhāvanāya adhiṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlaṃ nissāya sīle patiṭṭhāyā’’ti.
“Sudhantasuvaṇṇaṃ(已纯净的金)”:指除去了一切黑杂质的金子。“Caturassādidhoto(捶打成四方等形)”:指妥善打磨过的整块宝石。就缘法而言,无明等作为缘的法,对于由它们各自所生的缘已生法,所起的因缘等作用,即名为“缘相”。而此缘相,本质上即是无明等本身,因此说“缘起即是缘相”。基于此理,才有“正是缘相”等说法。显示巴利原文
Sudhantasuvaṇṇaṃ apagatasabbakāḷakaṃ. Caturassādidhoto suparimajjitamaṇikkhandho. Paccayadhammānaṃ avijjādīnaṃ tassa tassa paccayuppannassa hetupaccayādibhāvo paccayākāro. So pana atthato avijjā evāti āha ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādanti paccayākāra’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘paccayākāro hī’’tiādi.
“vo”一词,若置于词尾,是表相反或特殊义;当依附于名词时,则唯为彰显特定主体、客体、行为等语法功能;当依附于小品词“hi”时,则纯粹是语言的修饰。因此有“vo……乃至……dissatī”等说法。“对彼法的教导”:此指对缘起的教导。因为在此处,它为“ta”(彼)一词所指示。“谛听”:既然是通过耳识了别的话语,其所指便不唯是缘起。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ vo-saddo padaparaṭṭhito paṭiyogīatthavisesavācako, nāmaparabhūto pana taṃ taṃ kattukammakaraṇādisādhanavisiṭṭhameva pabodheti, hi-nipātaparabhūto pana vacanālaṅkāramattamevāti āha ‘‘voti…pe… dissatī’’ti. Taṃdesananti tassa paṭiccasamuppādassa desanaṃ. Sā hi idha ta-saddena paccāmasīyati. ‘‘Suṇāthā’’ti sotaviññeyyatāvacanato na kevalaṃ paṭiccasamuppādo.
此词与“sādhu”同义,因为增加“ka”音只为扩展词形。因此,对“sādhu”一词所作的释义,自然也适用于“sādhukaṃ”,这是其要旨。“Sādhu bhante”这句话,意为“我恳请您,尊者!”,故表“请求”。也可回应为“Sādhu bhante”,意为“是的,尊者!”,故表“接受”。“Sādhu sādhū”为“善哉!善哉!”,故表“随喜”。“Sādhu dhammarucī”意指好乐正法、希求福德之人,即善士。“Paññāṇavā”指具智慧者。“Addubbho”指不欺诳者。“Daḷhīkamme”指令坚固,即恭敬而行。“Āṇattiyaṃ”则是“指令”。其实,在说出“谛听!善作意!”之时,“sādhukaṃ”一词不仅表达了应恭敬而行听闻与作意的要求,也传达了指令。因此,应知此词既有恳请之义,亦有指令之义。显示巴利原文
Ekatthametaṃ padaṃ ka-saddena padavaḍḍhanamattassa katattā, tasmā sādhusaddassa kato atthuddhāro sādhukasaddassapi kato eva hotīti adhippāyo. Sādhu bhanteti yācāmahaṃ bhanteti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘āyācane’’ti. Puna sādhu bhanteti evaṃ bhanteti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchane’’ti. Sādhu sādhūti aho ahoti ayamettha atthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘sampahaṃsane’’ti. Sādhu dhammarucīti puññakāmo sundaroti attho. Paññāṇavāti paññavā. Addubbhoti adūsako. Daḷhīkammeti thirīkaraṇe sakkaccakiriyāyaṃ. Āṇattiyanti āṇāpane. ‘‘Suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti hi vutte sādhukasaddena savanamanasikārānaṃ sakkaccakiriyā viya tadāṇāpanampi vuttaṃ hoti. Āyācanatthatā viya cassa āṇāpanatthatā veditabbā.
现在,应知此处的结合方式如下——这是其关联。防止耳根散乱,在于将耳根导入听闻,从而止息其他行为,“倾耳谛听”正是此义。防止意根散乱,在于制止其他思虑。“前面的”指“谛听”一词。“在这里”指“谛听,作意”二词,或在此场合中。防止颠倒执取文句,是因为它能对治耳门所生散乱;如实听闻者,必不颠倒执取音声。防止颠倒执取法义,是因为它能对治意根的散乱;恭敬受持法者,必不颠倒执取法义。通过安立“谛听”一词,引导趣入听法。“于受持与审察中”——在其中,仅“审察”一词,便包含了以智慧衡量、决断等,以及由此达成的善巧。“具文”中,能表达所欲之义的,即是“文”,乃自性之辞。与文句俱者,即是“具文”,为文句具足之义。应被敬奉、应被亲近的,即是“义”,指四遍清净的戒律等。与义俱者,即是“具义”,为义理具足之义。在“法甚深”等语境中,“法”是指经典文本;“教导”是指对……显示巴利原文
Idānettha evaṃ yojanā veditabbāti sambandho. Sotindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ savane niyojanavasena kiriyantarapaṭisedhanabhāvato, sotaṃ odahathāti hi attho. Manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ aññacintāpaṭisedhanato. Purimanti ‘‘suṇāthā’’ti padaṃ. Etthāti ‘‘suṇātha, manasi karothā’’ti padadvaye, etasmiṃ vā adhikāre. Byañjanavipallāsaggāhanivāraṇaṃ sotadvāre vikkhepapaṭibāhakattā. Na hi yāthāvato suṇantassa saddato vipallāsaggāho hoti. Atthavipallāsaggāhanivāraṇaṃ manindriyavikkhepapaṭibāhakattā. Na hi sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ upadhārentassa atthavipallāsaggāho hoti. Dhammassavane niyojeti ‘‘suṇāthā’’ti vidahanato. Dhāraṇūpaparikkhāsūti ettha upaparikkhaggahaṇeneva tulanatīraṇādike diṭṭhiyā ca suppaṭivedhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabyañjanoti ettha yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjayatīti byañjanaṃ, sabhāvanirutti. Saha byañjanehīti sabyañjano, byañjanasampannoti attho. Araṇīyato upagantabbato attho, catupārisuddhisīlādiko. Saha atthenāti sāttho, atthasampannoti attho. Dhammagambhīrotiādīsu dhammo nāma tanti. Desanā nāma tassā manasā vavatthapitāya tantiyā desanā kathanaṃ. Attho nāma tantiyā attho. Paṭivedho nāma tantiyā tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Yasmā cete dhammadesanāatthapaṭivedhā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāḷhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ dhammo…pe… sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti.
在此,应当了知:由于证悟极难达成,法义与教导之智亦极难成就,因此教导本身难以深入;而证悟既无法被生起,其相关之智的生起亦极为困难,故证悟同样是难以深入的。所谓“开示”,是指概要性的宣讲,类似于简要展示。正如在《分别经》中,先言“我将开示”,继而再言“我将演说”。对其加以详细分别阐述,便是“演说”。此处正取此义,故说“我也将详细地为他演说,此是前言已述”。或者,清晰明了的讲说,亦名“演说”。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya dukkhogāhatā, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā tabbisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Desanaṃ nāma uddisanaṃ saṅkhepadassanasadisaṃ. Tathā hi vibhaṅgasutte ‘‘desessāmī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘bhāsissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassa niddisanaṃ bhāsananti idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘vitthāratopi naṃ bhāsissāmīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Paribyattaṃ kathanaṃ vā bhāsanaṃ.
“音声如舍利鸟”:意谓如舍利鸟的鸣啭,甜美悦耳、令人喜爱。“应辩”即指音声。“宣说”:即被发出、被讲说之义。当此言被宣说时,便生起踊跃之心——也就是当听闻“你们谛听!善作意之,我今当说”之时,众人心念:“看来导师不仅略作开示,更将为我们详细演说!”于是心生踊跃,成为欢喜踊跃之人。显示巴利原文
Sāḷikāyiva nigghosoti sāḷikāya ālāpo viya madhuro kaṇṇasukho pemanīyo. Paṭibhānaṃ saddo. Udīrayīti uccārīyati, vuccatīti attho. Evaṃ vutte ussāhajātāti evaṃ ‘‘suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘na kira satthā saṅkhepeneva desessati, vitthārenapi bhāsissatī’’ti sañjātussāhā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā.
“云何”一词,可知其问法是从普遍共通的角度而发,并非从某一特定、有差别的角度。因此,为显示其属无差别的提问,便称之为“欲说之问”,并借此话题,通过释义的方式,总示《大义释》中提及的所有提问种类,即所谓“问有五种”等。其中,借此问使未曾见者得以明了,是为“令未见者明了之问”;借此问与已见者比对印证,是为“令已见者比对之问”。此处“比对”即是通过讨论以作决断。借此问斩断疑惑,是为“断疑之问”。为征询许可而发问,是为“征询许可之问”。如“诸比丘,汝等意下如何?”此问实为“汝等何见?”,即是征询许可之问。“欲说之问”,则是出于想要宣说的愿望而发问。显示巴利原文
Katamoti tassa padassa sāmaññato pucchābhāvo ñāyati, na visesatoti tassa pucchāvisesabhāvaṃ kathento ‘‘kathetukamyatāpucchā’’ti vatvā teneva pasaṅgena mahāniddese āgatā sabbāpi pucchā atthuddhāranayena dasseti ‘‘pañcavidhā hi pucchā’’tiādinā. Tattha adiṭṭhaṃ joteti etāyāti adiṭṭhajotanā. Diṭṭhaṃ saṃsandīyati etāyāti diṭṭhasaṃsandanā. Saṃsandanañcettha sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ. Vimatiṃ chindati etāyāti vimaticchedanā. Anumatiyā pucchanaṃ anumatipucchā. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha bhikkhave’’tiādipucchāya hi ‘‘kā tumhākaṃ anumatī’’ti anumati pucchitā hoti. Kathetukamyatā kathetukamyatāya.
“相”:指为令了知而有所征问的任何一种事物的特性。“未曾知”:指以任何形式的智慧都未曾了知的状态。“未曾见”:指未以能见的智慧,如同以眼观视那般,被亲眼见到。“未曾衡量”:指未以能衡量的智慧去判断过“它只是这么多”的状态。“未曾审察”:指以能审察的智慧,尚未完成审察作用的状态。“不显著”:指对于智慧来说还不是明显可知的状态。“未被阐明”:指尚未被智慧清楚认识到的状态。显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇanti ñātuṃ pucchito yo koci sabhāvo. Aññātanti yena kenaci ñāṇena aññātabhāvamāha. Adiṭṭhanti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena cakkhunā viya na diṭṭhataṃ. Atulitanti ‘‘ettakaṃ ida’’nti tulanabhūtena ñāṇena na tulitataṃ. Atīritanti tīraṇabhūtena ñāṇena akatañāṇakiriyāsamāpanataṃ. Avibhūtanti ñāṇassa apākaṭabhāvaṃ. Avibhāvitanti ñāṇena apākaṭīkatabhāvaṃ.
在五种问中,为了指出诸佛完全不会遇到的那些问题,并归结出此处所指的问题,而说了“其中”等语。这很容易理解。如果缘起就是缘相,那么世尊在开示缘起时,为何宣说了诸行等缘所生法呢?因此说道“于此”等。之所以也宣说缘所生法,是因为通过显示缘所生法,也就说明了缘法作为缘的状态。为了显示“缘相即是缘起”,而说了“食相应”等。他将巴利经典下文所说的动词“生起”引入并连接起来,否则便无法理解为“诸行由何所造”或“诸行造作什么”。就流转而言,随顺次第而说的“以无明为缘”等,是属于顺次的缘起之说。显示巴利原文
Pañcasu pucchāsu yā buddhānaṃ sabbato na santi, tā dassetvā idhādhippetapucchaṃ nigametuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva. Yadi paṭiccasamuppādo paccayākāro, atha kasmā bhagavatā paṭiccasamuppādadesanāya saṅkhārādayo paccayuppannā kathitāti āha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Paccayuppannampi katheti paccayuppannadassanena paccayadhammānaṃ paccayabhāvassa kathitabhāvato. Āhāravaggassātiādi ‘‘paccayākāro paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sambhavantī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ parato vuttaṃ kiriyāpadaṃ ānetvā yojeti, aññathā saṅkhārā kiṃ katāti vā karontīti vā na ñāyeyya. Pavattiyā anulomato ‘‘avijjāpaccayā’’tiādikā anulomapaṭiccasamuppādakathā.
而“正是对无明”等,则是逆序的还灭之说。因为依此而于诸行彻底离染,故称为“离染”,也就是道。“无余灭”:指毫无遗留地灭尽,即断除。“如是灭”:指如此以无生之灭而寂灭的诸行之灭。这样,通过宣说无明等的灭,即说明了阿拉汉果。“完整的”:指无余的。“无有情的”:指排除了由他人所施设的生命。通过显示无生之灭的方式而使之回转,也就是使之逆转。显示巴利原文
‘‘Avijjāya tvevā’’tiādikā pana tassa vilomato paṭilomakathā. Accantameva saṅkhāre virajjati etenāti virāgo, maggo. Asesanirodhāti asesetvā nirodhā samucchindanā. Evaṃ nirodhānanti evaṃ anuppādanirodhena niruddhānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā. Iti avijjādīnaṃ nirodhavacanena arahattaṃ vadati. Sakalassāti anavasesassa. Sattavirahitassāti paraparikappitajīvarahitassa. Vinivattetvāti anuppādanirodhadassanavasena viparivattetvā.
“心悦者”指心被喜悦与意乐所摄持的状态。当一个人处于这种状态时,便名为心怀欢喜,故说“欢喜之心”。在“应随喜彼之说”句中,“随喜”一词意为随喜、赞同。在“随喜已”句中,则是接受的意思。然而在此处,两种含义皆可成立,因此说“他们既随喜又接受了”。显示巴利原文
Attamanāti pītisomanassena gahitacittā. Tathābhūtā ca haṭṭhacittā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘tuṭṭhacittā’’ti. ‘‘Tassa vacanaṃ abhinanditabba’’nti ettha abhinandanasaddo anumodanattho. ‘‘Abhinanditvā’’ti ettha sampaṭicchanattho. Idha pana ubhayatthopi vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cā’’ti.
2. 《分别经》的注释显示巴利原文
2. Vibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
2 “第二的”即指第二部经。其中的“也”字,表示也在其余经中。虽说“在《清净道论》中已有阐明”,但为了指出其中一部分可适用于此处,故说“正如”等。“此”是指根本。“广说”即是为了阐明“我将分别”之义而展开的分别解说。第一经中的略示之说,则与顺次之说相似。所谓“再次显示轮转与还灭”,就是以“诸比丘,如是”等语来显示流转与还灭。由于最初已由略示与分别显示了还灭,由此也通过遮遣显示了还灭,故说“再次”。显示巴利原文
2.Dutiyepīti dutiyasuttepi. Pi-saddena tadaññesu suttesupīti attho. ‘‘Visuddhimagge vuttā evā’’ti vatvāpi tadekadesaṃ idha viniyogakkhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tanti mūlaṃ. Vitthāradesananti ‘‘vibhajissāmī’’ti padassa atthassa dassanavasena pavattaṃ vibhaṅgadesanaṃ. Uddesadesanā paṭhamasutte anulomadesanāsadisāva. Puna vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ dassentoti ‘‘iti kho, bhikkhave’’tiādinā pavattiṃ nivattiñca dassento. Paṭhamaṃ uddesavasena vibhajanavasena vivaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ, tato eva byatirekanayena vivaṭṭampi dassitameva hotīti punaggahaṇaṃ.
“彼彼众生”是指不依任何类别差异,而以总相遍摄一切众生来理解,故说“简略而言……是解释”。即以趣与生类来说:以五趣而言,并在每一趣中,再以刹帝利等、地居天等、象等生类而说。如“心、意”等词,唯是作用的差别;如“意”等词,是同义用词的差别;如“净白”等词,是属性的差别;如“心所、心脏”等词,是所依的差别;如“心的住立”等词,是其他事物不存在的状态差别;如“无贪”等词,是其他事物无作用的差别;如“无贪的状态”等词,是其他事物不存在的差别——不观待这些种种,而只阐明法的本身,这即是“自性解释”。衰老的事物依衰损方式生起的行相,是衰损性,因此说这是“行相解释”。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃtesaṃ sattānanti idaṃ kiñci pakārato anāmasitvā sabbepi satte sāmaññato byāpetvā gahaṇanti āha ‘‘saṅkhepato…pe… niddeso’’ti. Gatijātivasenāti pañcagativasena, tatthāpi ekekāya gatiyā khattiyādibhummadevādihatthiādijātivasena ca. ‘‘Cittaṃ mano’’tiādīsu viya kiccavisesaṃ, ‘‘mānasa’’ntiādīsu viya samāne atthe saddavisesaṃ, ‘‘paṇḍara’’ntiādīsu viya guṇavisesaṃ, ‘‘cetasikaṃ hadaya’’ntiādīsu viya nissayavisesaṃ, ‘‘cittassa ṭhitī’’tiādīsu viya aññassa avatthābhāvavisesaṃ, ‘‘alubbhanā’’tiādīsu viya aññassa kiriyābhāvavisesaṃ, ‘‘alubbhitatta’’ntiādīsu viya aññassa abhāvatāvisesanti evamādikaṃ anapekkhitvā dhammamattaṃ vā dīpanā sabhāvaniddeso. Jiṇṇassa jīraṇavasena pavattanākāro jīraṇatāti āha ‘‘ākāraniddeso’’ti.
“于时过尽的所作解释”指:自羯罗蓝时开始,先前的诸色到达衰老的刹那,随后生起的诸色皆顺应成熟之色,变得极为圆熟而生起。如此次第,在极为成熟的诸色圆满之时,便生起皱纹等的自性,因此“皱纹”等是在时间流逝中对衰老作用的解释。“自性解释”指:以结果的变异自性来解释,或者说,衰老所应得的果即是其自性,对此作出解释。然而,衰老并非仅仅指皱纹等。正如在水流等所经的河道中草木等会被折断一样,在名为成熟之道的那些圆满诸色中,所呈现的皱纹等,只能被理解为衰老所经过的迹象,而非衰老本身。显示巴利原文
Kālātikkame kiccaniddesāti kalalakālato pabhuti purimarūpānaṃ jarāpattakkhaṇe uppajjamānāni pacchimarūpāni paripakkarūpānurūpāni pariṇatapariṇatāni uppajjantīti anukkamena supariṇatarūpānaṃ paripākakāle uppajjamānāni khaṇḍiccādisabhāvāni uppajjantīti ‘‘khaṇḍicca’’ntiādayo kālātikkame jarāya kiccaniddesā. Pakatiniddesāti phalavipaccanapakatiyā niddesā, jarāya vā pāpuṇitabbaphalameva pakati, tassā niddesā, na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarāti udakādigatamaggesu tiṇarukkhasaṃbhaggatādayo viya paripākagatamaggasaṅkhātesu paripuṇṇarūpesu labbhamānā khaṇḍiccādayo jarāya gatamaggāicceva veditabbā, na jarāti.
因为当衰老降临时,寿命减损,诸根变得衰弱,所以寿命减损等是自性解释,因此说“最后二者为自性解释”。由此又说“但以这些……”等。显示巴利原文
Yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, indriyāni jajjarāni hontīti āyuhānādayo pakatiniddesā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘imehi panā’’tiādi.
因其相续不断而难以察觉,故为无间衰老:在宝珠等、缓慢的十法等以及一一蕴等中,刹那刹那的衰老变异等难以了知。而于其他者,即指宝珠等之外的其他事物,如菌类等,以及在有情一期生命中所经历的幼年、少年、壮年、老年等时期,或者在一日、两日、三日等时间流逝中的花等。在这些当中,衰老的差别易于了知,故称为有间衰老。显示巴利原文
Aviññāyamānantarattā avīcijarā maṇiādīsu mandadasakādīsu ekekadasakesu ca khaṇe khaṇe jiṇṇavikārādīnaṃ duviññeyyattā. Tato aññesūti maṇiādito aññesu ahicchattakādīsu, pāṇīnaṃ ekabhavapariyāpanne sakalaāyusmiṃ gahitataruṇayuvājarākālesu, ekadvittidivasātikkamesu pupphādīsu vāti attho. Tattha hi jarāvisesassa suviññeyyattā savīcijarā nāma.
“Cavanakavasenāti”,即依于死没诸蕴而言。于有一蕴、四蕴、五蕴之死,“死没”本身即是“死没性”,故说“以状态词显示其相”,意谓巴利圣典中所说的“死”,正是开示死之自性。“Bhaṅguppatti”,指正在坏灭的状态。以此“bhedo”一词,表诸蕴正在坏灭、具足坏灭相。“Ṭhānābhāvaparidīpananti”,即显示在任何情况下皆无安住之处。举“Ghaṭassevāti”为不相似譬喻:如瓦罐破碎后,尚有碎片等残余可得;而于死没诸蕴、于坏灭之中,则无任何差别相残留,为显此义,故说“antaradhāna”(消失、隐没)。“Maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇa”,即被称为“魔”的死,世人称之为“时死”。作为相续的彻底断灭、属于漏尽者的死,是为“断灭死”。以“ādi”一词,则含摄“刹那死”等。“Tassa kiriyā”,即终结者的作用,世间称之为“魔”,义即是死。或者,死没的时刻本身,因不可逾越而特称为“时”,故“它的作用”,其义即是死没诸蕴坏灭的过程本身。显示巴利原文
Cavanakavasenāti cavanakānaṃ khandhānaṃ vasena. Ekacatupañcakkhandhāya cutiyā cavanameva cavanatāti āha ‘‘bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassana’’nti, pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘cutī’’ti vuttassa maraṇassa sabhāvadassananti attho. Bhaṅguppatti bhijjamānatā. Tena ‘‘bhedo’’ti iminā khandhānaṃ bhijjamānatā bhedasamaṅgitā vuttāti dasseti. Ṭhānābhāvaparidīpananti kenacipi ākārena avaṭṭhānābhāvadīpanaṃ. Ghaṭassevāti hi visadisūdāharaṇaṃ. Yathā ghaṭe bhinne kapālādiavayavaseso labbhati, na evaṃ cutikkhandhesu bhaṅgesu, na koci viseso tiṭṭhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘antaradhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇanti maccusaññitaṃ maraṇaṃ. ‘‘Kālamaraṇa’’nti vadanti. Santānassa accantasamucchedabhūtaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ maraṇaṃ samucchedamaraṇaṃ. Ādi-saddena khaṇikamaraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tassa kiriyāti antakassa kiriyā, yā loke vuccati ‘‘maccū’’ti, maraṇanti attho. Cavanakālo eva vā anatikkamanīyattā visesena kāloti vuttoti tassa kiriyā atthato cutikkhandhānaṃ bhedapavattiyeva. ‘‘Maccu maraṇa’’nti vā ettha samāsaṃ akatvā yo ‘‘maccū’’ti vuccati bhedo, tameva maraṇaṃ ‘‘pāṇacāgo’’ti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“Catuvokāravasenāti”,即依四蕴有而言。因于彼处,并无名为色身的躯体可被舍弃。虽然于一蕴有中亦无躯体可舍,但鉴于彼处毕竟存有色身,故说“依一蕴有而有躯体之舍弃”。而“依四蕴有”句中的“ca”字,乃在显示“依其余二有而有诸蕴之坏灭”此一义理;因为于一切有中,皆有诸蕴的坏灭。“依其余二有”,即依于其余二种有而有躯体之舍弃。虽于一蕴有中存在色身,却无躯体之舍弃,故仅说“因有躯体之存在”。由于在人趣等处确有躯体之舍弃,故总括其义为:于人趣等处有躯体之舍弃。“Kaḷevaraṃ nikkhipīyati etenāti”,因此,死即是躯体之舍弃。“Ekato katvāti”,即合而观之,唯以总略的方式把握。显示巴利原文
Catuvokāravasenāti catuvokārabhavavasena. Tattha hi rūpakāyasaññito kaḷevaro natthi, yaṃ nikkhipeyya. Kiñcāpi ekavokārabhavepi kaḷevaranikkhepo natthi, rūpakāyassa pana tattha atthitāmattaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo’’ti vutto. Catuvokāravasena cāti ca-saddena ‘‘sesadvayavasena khandhānaṃ bhedo’’ti imamatthaṃ dasseti sabbattheva khandhabhedasabbhāvato. Sesadvayavasenāti sesabhavadvayavaseneva kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Yadipi ekavokārabhave rūpakāyo vijjati, kaḷevaranikkhepo pana natthīti ‘‘kaḷevarassa sabbhāvato’’icceva vuttaṃ. Yasmā manussādīsu kaḷevaranikkhepo atthi, tasmā manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepoti yojanā. Kaḷevaraṃ nikkhipīyati etenāti maraṇaṃ kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ekato katvāti ekajjhaṃ katvā, ekajjhaṃ gahaṇamattena.
“Jāyanaṭṭhenāti”等语,是以依处与生处两种方式,一一遍取一切众生之后,用以开示“生”。又有人主张:“这是依行为主体而说此二词。”然而,在“那些那些众生的生、再生”句中,由于使用了属格,因此两处皆是状态之表述。圆满的生,是“再生”。显著的出生,是“再出生”。“Tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ…pe… abhinibbattīti”,因是依于众生而转起,故为世俗的教导。显示巴利原文
Jāyanaṭṭhenātiādi āyatanavasena yonivasena ca dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyitvā pariyādiyitvā jātiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘kattubhāvavasena padadvayaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ jāti sañjātī’’ti pana kattari sāminiddesassa katattā ubhayatthāpi bhāvaniddeso. Sampuṇṇā jāti sañjāti. Pākaṭā nibbatti abhinibbatti. Tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ…pe… abhinibbattīti sattavasena pavattattā vohāradesanā.
‘Tatra tatrā’:在一蕴有、四蕴有及两种剩余色界中,于结生刹那生起的五处;在欲界中,依根具足与不具足,有七处、九处、十处,又有十处、十一处,应知依这些处而作归类。‘Santatiyanti’:即由那业令诸蕴显现,在业所造作的相续中。而这应知是就结生刹那而言。显示巴利原文
Tatra tatrāti ekacatuvokārabhavesu dvinnaṃ sesarūpadhātuyaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ pañcannaṃ, kāmadhātuyaṃ vikalāvikalindriyānaṃ vasena sattannaṃ navannaṃ dasannaṃ puna dasannaṃ ekādasannañca āyatanānaṃ vasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Santatiyanti yena kammunā khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo, tena abhisaṅkhatasantatiyaṃ. Tañca kho paṭisandhikkhaṇavasena veditabbaṃ.
业本身即是业有,因为‘从此而生起生有’。由业所引生的自体生起而存在,故称为‘有’;如此产生的果报与所作色也是如此。而注释中说:‘因为存在,故称为有’,由于将要说到生有,因此说‘业以果报之名而称为有’。显示巴利原文
Kammaṃyeva kammabhavo ‘‘bhavati etasmā upapattibhavo’’ti katvā. Kammena niyyāditaattabhāvupapattivasena bhavatīti bhavo, tathā tathā nibbattavipāko kaṭattārūpañca. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘bhavatīti katvā bhavo’’ti upapattibhavassa vakkhamānattā ‘‘kammaṃ phalavohārena bhavoti vutta’’nti kathitaṃ.
‘Upādiyanti’:众生以此烦恼欲执取,生起坚固的执取。这里不仅是工具格,也可作为行为主体格来理解,故说‘sayaṃ vā’(或者自己)。‘Taṃ’指所依欲。它既是欲,以有可欲之义;又是取,以有强取之义,故为‘欲取’。‘Etaṃ’指‘欲取’这个词。‘Puna etaṃ’即所谓的欲取。显示巴利原文
Upādiyanti sattā daḷhaggāhaṃ gaṇhanti etena kilesakāmena. Na kevalaṃ idha karaṇasādhanameva, atha kho kattusādhanampi labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ vā’’ti. Tanti vatthukāmaṃ. Kāmo ca so kāmanaṭṭhena, upādānañca bhusamādānaṭṭhenāti kāmupādānaṃ. Etanti kāmupādānapadaṃ. Puna etanti kāmupādānasaṅkhātaṃ.
“Sassatoattāti”一词,是为了说明后一种见解执取前一种见解而说的。正如这种见通过强化的方式,以后见执取前见,“没有布施”等见也是如此。然而,应知“我执”即“我语取”,此并非在显示见取。而“世间等”,则是摆脱了我执的执取,属于见取,应知在此是通过前见与后见的说法来表述的。显示巴利原文
Sassatoattāti idaṃ purimadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyamānaṃ uttaradiṭṭhiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā esā diṭṭhi daḷhīkaraṇavasena purimaṃ uttarā upādiyati, evaṃ ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikāpīti. Attaggahaṇaṃ pana ‘‘attavādupādāna’’nti idaṃ na diṭṭhupādānadassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Loko cāti attaggahaṇavinimuttaggahaṇaṃ diṭṭhupādānabhūtaṃ idha purimadiṭṭhiuttaradiṭṭhivacanehi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
由于那种邪执而受持并遵行牛戒、牛法等,所说的牛戒、牛法等即指这些。因此说:“牛戒……乃至……这些本身就是取”。“Abhinivesato”:即由于邪执。显示巴利原文
Yena micchābhinivesena gosīlagovatādiṃ samādiyati ceva anutiṭṭhati ca, so gosīlagovatādīnīti adhippetāni. Tenāha ‘‘gosīla…pe… sayameva upādānānī’’ti. Abhinivesatoti abhinivesanato.
“我语取”的意思是:作为“我”这种言说、施设与执取之原因的见解。而“仅仅是‘我’的言说而已”,是因为并没有“我”的实体存在,所以“我”这个词仅仅是言说而已。他们“执取”:即牢牢地抓取。显示巴利原文
Attavādupādānanti ‘‘attā’’ti vādassa paññāpanassa gahaṇassa kāraṇabhūtā diṭṭhīti attho. Attavādamattamevāti attassa abhāvā ‘‘attā’’ti idaṃ vacanamattameva. Upādiyanti daḷhaṃ gaṇhanti.
“在眼门等处生起”:这句话解释了渴爱之所以分为“色爱”等类别的原因——因为六门所缘的诸法,各有其特定的所缘。“在速行路中生起”:这是指出它的生起之处。譬如竹子无法凭自性站立,若无支撑,便只能依附他物;同样,由于所缘也是“取”的缘,所以说所缘也与此类似。“于色中”:此处的依处格,用于表达所缘(对境)。“那渴爱有三种”:这是关联性的说明。它之所以成为“欲爱”,是因为耽着于欲乐的滋味而转起。他们“如此地(以常见)品味”:因为与常见混杂在一起——常见作为俱生、依止、相应、无间、不离去等缘——所以通过耽着于“恒常、稳固、永恒”的倾向来品味。与“有”共存的渴爱,即是“有爱”。由于持有“它在一切时都存在、持续”的见解,省略了后续之词,便称为“有见”;同时也是因为以品味“有”的乐味而转起。依此道理,应理解此处“无有爱”的含义。认为“它会消亡、断灭、毁灭”而生起的见解,省略了后续之词,便称为“无有见”。“如是,这些成为十八种”:即所说的六种欲爱、六种有爱、六种无有爱,这十八种渴爱行境皆以渴爱为缘。“内的”:指在自身……显示巴利原文
Cakkhudvārādīsu pavattāyāti idaṃ taṇhāya rūpataṇhādibhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ chadvārārammaṇikadhammānaṃ paṭiniyatārammaṇattā. Javanavīthiyā pavattāyāti idaṃ tassā pavattiṭṭhānadassanaṃ. Sabhāveneva uṭṭhātuṃ asakkontassa veḷu viya nissayo ahutvā olumbhakabhāvena bhāvo upādānassa paccayabhāvato ārammaṇampi taṃsadisaṃ vuttaṃ. Rūpeti visaye bhummaṃ. Sā tividhā hotīti sambandho. Kāmataṇhā kāmassādabhāvena pavattiyā. Evaṃ assādentīti sassatadiṭṭhiyā sahajātanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatādipaccayabhūtāya saṃsaṭṭhattā niccadhuvasassatābhinivesamukhena assādentī. Bhavasahagatā taṇhā bhavataṇhā. Bhavati tiṭṭhati sabbakālanti hi bhavadiṭṭhi bhavo uttarapadalopena, bhavassādavasena pavattiyā ca. Iminā nayena vibhavataṇhāti ettha attho veditabbo. Vibhavati ucchijjati vinassatīti evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhi vibhavo uttarapadalopena. Evaṃ tāni aṭṭhārasāti yā cha kāmataṇhā, cha bhavataṇhā, cha vibhavataṇhā vuttā, etāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni taṇhāpaccayo. Ajjhattanti sakasantatiyaṃ. Bahiddhāti tato bahiddhā. Atītārammaṇāni vā hontu itarārammaṇāni vā, sayaṃ pana atītāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritānī’’tiādinā sambandho. Idāni aparenapi pakārena aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni dassetuṃ ‘‘ajjhattikassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ajjhattikassāti ajjhattikakhandhapañcakaṃ. Upayogatthe hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Upādāyāti gahetvā. Asmīti hotīti yadetaṃ ajjhattikaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena samudāyaggāhato asmīti gāho hoti, tasmiṃ satīti attho. Idha pana rūpādiārammaṇavasena attho veditabbo. Itthamasmīti hotīti khattiyādīsu ‘‘idaṃpakāro aha’’nti evaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena hotīti attho. Idaṃ tāva anupanidhāya gahaṇaṃ.
“如这些”:以“等”字含摄了“我是这样、我是别样、我将有、我将是这样、我将是那样、我将是别样、我是常、我是无常、我能是、我能是这样、我能是那样、我能是别样、愿我能、愿我能是这样、愿我能是那样、愿我能是别样”等。带有比拟的执取也有两种:从等同方面比拟,与从不等同方面比拟。为说明此意,故说“我是这样”与“我是别样”。其中,“我是这样”是从等同方面进行比拟的执取,意思是:“如同这位刹帝利一样,我也是如此。”而“我是别样”则是从不等同方面进行执取,意思是:“如同这位是刹帝利,我却与他不同,要么较差,要么更优。”这四种是基于现在的渴爱行境。而“我将有”等四种,则是基于未来而说,其意义应依前面四句所述之理来理解。“我是常”:我是恒常存在的,这是“常”的同义词。“我是无常”:我是非恒常存在的,这是“无常”的同义词。如此,这两句是基于常见与断见而说的。接下来的“我能是”等四句,是基于疑惑和寻思而说,其意义应依前面四句之理来了知。而“愿我能”等四句,则是以“啊,但愿我能成为”这种基于希……显示巴利原文
Evamādīnīti ādi-saddena ‘‘evamasmi, aññathāsmi, ahaṃ bhavissaṃ, itthaṃ bhavissaṃ, evaṃ bhavissaṃ, aññathā bhavissaṃ, asasmi, satasmi, ahaṃ siyaṃ, itthaṃ siyaṃ, evaṃ siyaṃ, aññathā siyaṃ, apāhaṃ siyaṃ, apāhaṃ itthaṃ siyaṃ, apāhaṃ evaṃ siyaṃ, apāhaṃ aññathā siya’’nti etesaṃ saṅgaho. Upanidhāya gahaṇampi duvidhaṃ samato asamato vāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evamasmi, aññathāsmī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Tattha evamasmīti idaṃ samato upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ, yathā ayaṃ khattiyo, evaṃ ahamasmīti attho. Aññathāsmīti idaṃ pana asamato gahaṇaṃ, yathāyaṃ khattiyo tato aññathā ahaṃ hīno vā adhiko vāti attho. Imāni tāva paccuppannavasena cattāri taṇhāvicaritāni. Bhavissantiādīni pana cattāri anāgatavasena vuttāni, tesaṃ purimacatukke vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Asasmīti sassato asmi, niccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Satasmīti asassato asmi, aniccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imāni dve sassatucchedavasena vuttāni. Ito parāni siyantiādīni cattāri saṃsayaparivitakkavasena vuttāni, tāni purimacatukke vuttanayena atthato veditabbāni. Apāhaṃ siyantiādīni pana cattāri ‘‘api nāmāhaṃ bhaveyya’’nti evaṃ patthanākappanavasena vuttāni, tānipi purimacatukke vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Evametesu –
有两种“见首”,四种“纯首”,以及以那些首为根的;
其中,以三个三个为一组,应分别解说为十八种。
显示巴利原文 Dve diṭṭhisīsā cattāro, suddhasīsā sīsamūlakā; Tayo tayoti etāni, aṭṭhārasa vibhāvaye.
的确,基于常见和断见而说的两种,名为“见首”;“我是、我将是、我能是、愿我能是”这四种,名为“纯首”;“我是这样”等,以三个三个为一组,共十二种,应知名为“以首为根”。在此,经典中是通过色等所缘而引出渴爱的,故注家说“依止于内在的色等”。应理解为:有十八种渴爱行境。因为此“我是”乃是“我是刹帝利”、“我是灌顶将军”等想生起的根本,故“我是”之想会生起。其余的内容,应依前述方法理解。在“归纳”中:当以简略方式归纳如前所述对渴爱的分类时,便有了“诸比丘,有此六种渴爱之身”等解说。这是对“于色之渴爱即色爱”等解说之义的阐释。“以欲贪的状态”、“依止于内在的”等,是对这些解说的详细展开。而“于色等所缘中,有六种”等,则是对其的归纳。显示巴利原文
Ete hi sassatucchedavasena vuttā dve diṭṭhisīsā nāma, ‘‘asmi, bhavissaṃ siyaṃ, apāhaṃ siya’’nti ete cattāro suddhasīsā nāma, ‘‘itthamasmī’’tiādayo tayo tayoti dvādasa sīsamūlakā nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Idha pāḷiyaṃ rūpārammaṇādivasena taṇhā āgatāti āha ‘‘ajjhattikarūpādinissitānī’’ti. Aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritānīti ānetvā sambandho. Iminā asmīti iminā abhisekasenāpaccādinā ‘‘khattiyo aha’’nti mūlabhāvato ‘‘asmī’’ti hoti. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Saṅgaheti taṇhāya yathāvuttavibhāgassa saṃkhipanavasena saṅgaṇhane kariyamāne. ‘‘Chayime, bhikkhave, taṇhākāyā’’tiādi niddeso. ‘‘Rūpe taṇhā rūpataṇhā’’tiādi niddesattho. ‘‘Kāmarāgabhāvenā’’tiādiko, ‘‘ajjhattikassupādāyā’’tiādiko ca niddesavitthāro. ‘‘Rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu chaḷevā’’tiādiko saṅgaho.
因为在眼门等每一门中,所生起的受,犹如所生起的识一般,并非单一,而是众多,所以将它们以聚集的方式总摄为一,说为“六受身”。因此注家说:“受的聚集”。眼界等,以依止的状态、以生起之门的状态而有种种不同的缘,它们犹如以腹持藏、养育(识与受)一般,故说它们如母。“以眼触为因”,即指以依止等为缘的眼触为因。“这个”,是指这个受,以“眼触所生受”等共通的方式而说。“在这里”,是指在“受”这词句中。“一切摄集”,即依善、不善、异熟、唯作而摄集一切。即使按照《分别论》中所出现的方法共通地说后,为了显示此处所特别想要的受,而说“然而依异熟来说”等。“眼处的触”,即依止于眼处而生起的触。这个方法也适用于其余诸句。因为在《清净道论》的“蕴论”中,以相等分别;在“处论”中,以特相、共相,以及词义之见等方式,已详细阐明了眼等,所以说:“所应说的……都已说了。”显示巴利原文
Yasmā cakkhudvārādīsu ekekasmiṃ dvāre uppajjanakaviññāṇāni viya anekā eva vedanā, tasmā tā rāsivasena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘cha vedanākāyā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘vedanāsamūhā’’ti. Nissayabhāvena uppattidvārabhāvena nānāpaccayā honti cakkhudhātuādayo, tā kucchinā dhārentiyo viya posentiyo viya ca hontīti tāsaṃ mātusadisatā vuttā. Cakkhusamphassahetūti nissayādicakkhusamphassapaccayā. Ayanti ayaṃ vedanā ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā vedanā’’tiādinā sādhāraṇato vuttā. Etthāti etasmiṃ vedanāpade. Sabbasaṅgāhikāti kusalākusalavipākakiriyānaṃ vasena sabbasaṅgāhikā. Evaṃ vibhaṅge āgatanayena sādhāraṇato vatvāpi idhādhippetavedanameva dassetuṃ ‘‘vipākavasena panā’’tiādimāha. Cakkhumhi samphassoti cakkhumhi nissayabhūte uppannaphasso. Esa nayo sesesu. Yasmā cakkhādīni visuddhimagge khandhaniddese lakkhaṇādivibhāgato, āyatananiddese visesato, sāmaññato ca saddatthadassanādivasena vibhāvitāni, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ vattabbaṃ…pe… vuttamevā’’ti āha.
朝向所缘的特相:具有朝向所缘而屈从的自性,若没有此特相,心便无法转起。变坏的特相如前已说。而受蕴仅是受本身。所谓一切羸弱的心,即指五种识。若问:那里难道没有命根与心住吗?答:确实有,但其作用不如思等明显,故仅在此处将它们从经典中提出。以彼大现起等为理由,在此大种解说中。此外另有抉择理趣:从“词义”、“聚”等,以及从相等抉择来说,还有另一种抉择理趣。若问:难道那不是已在“四界差别”中说过,而非在“色蕴论”中吗?答:虽是在彼处所说,但因以引用的方式说“在四界差别中所说的那些”,故可视为已在“色蕴论”中说过了。依止:即缘。因为缘于大种而生起的所造色,不舍大种,故说“执取它们”而生起。也有说“依靠”,因它们具有依止缘的状态。所谓“前时死”,必定是期望后时死的,这是依其余经文来说明意义。为了不通过语尾颠倒而显示义理,故说“或者,在聚集义中”等。以“聚集的关联”之属格叙述,来彰显聚集的意义,为表明此义而说:“依止于聚集”。显示巴利原文
Namanalakkhaṇanti ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ hutvā namanasabhāvaṃ tena vinā appavattanato. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Vedanākkhandho pana ekāva vedanā. Sabbadubbalacittāni nāma pañcaviññāṇāni . Nanu tattha jīvitacittaṭṭhitiyo ca santīti? Saccaṃ, tāsaṃ pana kiccaṃ na tathā pākaṭaṃ, yathā cetanādīnanti te evettha pāḷiyaṃ uddhaṭā. Yena mahantapātubhāvādinā kāraṇena. Etthāti etasmiṃ mahābhūtaniddese. Añño vinicchayanayoti ‘‘vacanatthato kalāpato’’tiādinā lakkhaṇādinicchayato añño vinicchayanayo. Nanu so catudhātuvavatthāne vutto, na rūpakkhandhaniddeseti? Tattha vuttepi ‘‘catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānī’’ti atidesavasena vuttattā ‘‘rūpakkhandhaniddese vutto’’ti vuttaṃ. Upādāyāti paṭicca. Bhūtāni hi paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ upādārūpaṃ ‘‘tāni gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ avissajjanato. Nissāyātipi eke tesaṃ nissayapaccayabhāvato. Pubbakālakiriyā nāma ekaṃsato aparakālakiriyāpekkhāti pāṭhasesena atthaṃ vadati. Vibhattivipallāsena vinā eva atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘samūhatthe vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samūhasambandhe sāminiddesena samūhattho dīpitoti taṃ dassento āha ‘‘samūhaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ (dha. sa. 584) āgatanayena ‘‘tevīsatividha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha hi hadayavatthu na niddiṭṭhaṃ, ‘‘yaṃ rūpaṃ nissāyā’’ti vā paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhāna. 1.1.8) āgatattā hadayavatthumpi gahetvā jātirūpabhāvena upacayasantatiyo ekato katvā ‘‘tevīsatividha’’nti vuttaṃ.
眼之识,即是眼识。这是以不共之因所作的释名。而在“行缘识”中,因为应取一切世间异熟识,故说:“这是三地异熟心的异名。”显示巴利原文
Cakkhussa viññāṇanti vā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Asādhāraṇakāraṇena cāyaṃ niddeso. ‘‘Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti ettha sabbalokiyavipākaviññāṇassa gahetabbattā ‘‘tebhūmakavipākacittassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ.
造作的特相:具有勤励的自性。以驱动:即以身表的驱动,也就是以身表而令起。以言语的破坏:即以语表之破坏而令起,也就是以语表而令起。为显示若不如此,驱动便不会发生,而说:“独自坐着思考时”。二十九种:于此应知,除去神通思,恰好有二十九种思是可理解的,因为它不是异熟识的缘。显示巴利原文
Abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇoti āyūhanasabhāvo. Copanavasenāti viññattisaṃcopanavasena, kāyaviññattiyā samuṭṭhāpanavasenāti attho. Vacanabhedavasenāti vacībheduppādavasena, vacīviññattiyā samuṭṭhāpanavasenāti attho. Evaṃ copanaṃ na bhaveyyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘raho nisīditvā cintentassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekūnatiṃsāti ettha abhiññācetanāvinimuttā eva ekūnatiṃsa cetanā veditabbā tassā vipākaviññāṇassa paccayattābhāvato.
在“于苦”一词中,这同一个依地语(处格)通过接合、依止、境界、遍摄四种方式,分化为多种用法而转起,因此说“以四种原因”等。即使是一种语尾的说明,也会以多种方式转起,正如转依义和复合词中的情形。此(于苦的无知)即是无知。苦谛:即具有心所依处相的苦谛。它的:指无知的。以依止缘的状态:即前生依止缘的状态;若是俱生依止缘的状态,则应说为其俱生的触等。以所缘缘的状态:即苦谛成为它的所缘,如此连接。苦谛:为业处单数。那:指那无知。它的:指苦谛的。为了显示“覆蔽”一词中所说的覆蔽相,故说“如实”等。与智不相应的心,在某种程度上也能如实通达诸相,因此先说“以阻止如实通达”,再说“此处不给予智的转起”。然而,前者说明了遮止通达智的生起,后者说明了遮止随觉智的生起。应如此理解其中意义。在此:即在此苦谛中。显示巴利原文
Dukkheti ekampi idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ saṃsilesananissayavisayabyāpanavasena attānaṃ bhinditvā viniyogaṃ gacchatīti ‘‘catūhi kāraṇehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekopi hi vibhattiniddeso anekadhā viniyogaṃ gacchati yathā taddhitatthe uttarapadasamāhāreti. Tanti aññāṇaṃ. Dukkhasaccanti hadayavatthulakkhaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ. Assāti aññāṇassa. Nissayapaccayabhāvenāti purejātanissayabhāvena. Sahajātanissayapaccayabhāvena pana taṃsahajātā phassādayo vattabbā. Ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena dukkhasaccaṃ assa ārammaṇanti yojanā. Dukkhasaccanti upayogaekavacanaṃ . Etanti aññāṇaṃ. Tassāti dukkhasaccassa. ‘‘Paṭicchādetī’’ti ettha vuttaṃ paṭicchādanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yāthāvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ñāṇavippayuttacittenapi ekadesena yāthāvato lakkhaṇapaṭivedho hotiyevāti ‘‘yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanivāraṇenā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ñāṇapavattiyā cettha appadānenā’’ti vuttanti vadanti. Purimaṃ pana paṭivedhañāṇuppattiyā nisedhakathādassanaṃ, pacchimaṃ anubodhañāṇuppattiyā. Evamettha attho veditabbo. Etthāti dukkhasacce.
对于俱生的无知,集谛成为事,因为它是依止缘的状态,故说“以事”。以所缘:即以所缘缘的状态。因为集谛成为无知的所缘,所以意思是“于苦之集有无知”。覆蔽在苦谛中已依所述的方法说明,但由于仅以一种原因,对于其他三谛便不可能成立,那么这唯一的原因是什么呢?因此说“以覆蔽故”。为详细说明这一点,故说“对于灭与道”等。缘于它:即缘于它,以它为所缘。后二谛:即灭和道。因为它们理趣甚深。难见:因为是极微细之法,且自性本来甚深,所以难见、难知、难通达。在那里:在前二谛中。成为盲目:即成为黑暗。于所缘不转起:即无力以彼为所缘。以应被言说之义:即以能说的状态如此呈现。由于自性相难见:从逼迫、聚集等的方式,“这是苦,这是集”,这般如实的自性相难见、难知,所以前二谛甚深。在那里:在前二谛中。以颠倒执取的方式转起:即以执取净等颠倒为缘的状态,无知转起。显示巴利原文
Sahajātassa aññāṇassa samudayasaccaṃ vatthu hoti nissayapaccayabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthuto’’ti. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena. Yasmā samudayasaccaṃ aññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘dukkhasamudaye aññāṇa’’nti vuttanti attho. Paṭicchādanaṃ dukkhasacce vuttanayameva ekeneva kāraṇena itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ asambhavato, kiṃ pana etaṃ ekaṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘paṭicchādanato’’ti. Idaṃ vitthārato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘nirodhapaṭipadānaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tadārabbhāti taṃ ārabbha taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Pacchimañhi saccadvayanti nirodho maggo. Tañhi nayagambhīrattā. Duddasanti saṇhasukhumadhammattā sabhāveneva gambhīratāya duddasaṃ duviññeyyaṃ duravaggāhaṃ. Tatthāti purime saccadvaye. Andhabhūtanti andhakārabhūtaṃ. Na pavattati ārammaṇaṃ kātuṃ na visahati. Vacanīyattenāti vācakabhāvena tathā upaṭṭhānato. Sabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattāti pīḷanādiāyūhanādivasena ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ayaṃ samudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 484; 3.104) yāthāvato sabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattā duviññeyyattā purimadvayaṃ gambhīraṃ. Tatthāti purimasmiṃ saccadvaye. Vipallāsaggāhavasena pavattatīti subhādiviparītaggāhānaṃ paccayabhāvavasena aññāṇaṃ pavattati.
现在,为了以另一种方式显示“于苦有无知”等的意义,而说“再者”等。其中,“仅以于苦”:即在称为无明的“于苦之无知”这一范围内。“以摄集故”:即由于总集。“以作用故”:即由于未通达的作用。“犹如无知”:即如同不给予对境自性如实通达的作用一般。通过“于苦”等,无明在那里转起并被特别指明,因此,为了显示在这所有情况中同样具有无差别的自性,故说“但以无差别而言”等。显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādīsu pakārantarenapi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dukkheti ettāvatāti ‘‘aññāṇanti vuccamānāya avijjāya dukkhe’’ti ettakena. Saṅgahatoti samodhānato. Kiccatoti asampaṭivedhakiccato. Aññāṇamivāti visayasabhāvaṃ yāthāvato paṭivijjhituṃ appadānakiccamiva. ‘‘Dukkhe’’tiādinā tattha avijjā pavattati, visesato niddiṭṭhaṃ hotīti katvā sabbattheva tathā avisiṭṭhasabhāvadassanaṃ idanti dassetuṃ ‘‘avisesato panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
此处并非指刹那灭,因为刹那灭于此并不相应、不能成立;又由于须着眼于离贪等,并以对治的方式遮破无明等,故此处所说的“灭”乃是它们彻底的不生起,因而说“灭即是不生起”。当知:“无明灭处,即是无明灭”,“行灭处,即是行灭”,如此,以一切灭句而宣说涅槃,故说“这就是涅槃”等。所谓流转与还灭,即是指流转与还灭。所谓“以十二”:应各自配合,即顺行以十二句显示流转,逆行以十二句显示还灭,此即于此处所显示。显示巴利原文
Khaṇikanirodhassa idha anadhippetattā ayujjamānattā virāgaggahaṇato ca avijjādīnaṃ paṭipakkhavasena paṭibāhanaṃ idha ‘‘nirodho’’ti adhippeto, so ca nesaṃ sabbaso anuppajjanamevāti āha ‘‘nirodho hotīti anuppādo hotī’’ti. ‘‘Avijjā nirujjhati etthāti avijjānirodho, saṅkhārā nirujjhanti etthāti saṅkhāranirodho’’ti evaṃ sabbehi etehi nirodhapadehi nibbānassa desitattā daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭanti vaṭṭañca vivaṭṭañca. ‘‘Dvādasahī’’ti idaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ ‘‘anulomato dvādasahi padehi vaṭṭaṃ, paṭilomato dvādasahi vivaṭṭaṃ idha dassita’’nti.
3. 《道经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Paṭipadāsuttavaṇṇanā
3 「以此错误而行,故为邪道」(micchā paṭipajjati etāyāti micchāpaṭipadā):因带来痛苦,故是轮回之路。即那邪行道。因此说「非出离道」。那么,福行如何是邪道呢?意谓:在成就之有中,它确实是带来快乐的。因是轮转之首(vaṭṭasīsattāti),即于轮转所属中为最上首之故。「至少」(antamāsoti)是就最上边际而说,非就最低边际而说。「愿我此福成为证得涅槃之缘」——如此发愿涅槃后所行。「仅一把叶之施」(paṇṇamuṭṭhidānamattanti),即仅一把菜叶之施。「未达」(appatvāti)此中含摄因之义,意为「未令到达」。或从彼时起行道,即说为「证得阿罗汉」,从彼时起,能带来彼果之道亦说为「已证得」,故说「未达」。「依顺」(anulomavasenāti)即依顺观缘起。「依逆」(paṭilomavasenāti)此处亦然。「问道」(paṭipadā pucchitāti)此句亦含「已开始开示道」之义,因在此以欲解说已开始之义理的提问而引入。在顺观缘起之开示中,亦以遮遣之门说「无明灭则明生,行等无有」,故说「涅槃已被分别」。然就其自体而言,彼开示唯显明流转。因最后将说「流转与还灭皆已说」。「于归结」(niyyātaneti)即于结论。「以果」(phalenāti):因以所应证之果,显示了能令到达彼果之道之因。正如因有三种:能知因、能生因、能令至因;果亦有三种:应知果、应生果、应令至果。故以应证之涅槃果,显示了作为能令到达彼果之因的道。因此说「以果显因」等。「此即称为」(ayaṃ vuccatīti):如此,此以涅槃为果者,即称为「正道」。「无余离贪、无余灭」(asesavirāgā asesanirodhāti):以断除之断,无明无余离染、无余灭尽故。两句皆说无生灭。彼即涅槃。第二释中,此是意趣:以彼道为能作,无余灭尽;无明之无余灭,依彼而有——为显示彼道。如是,当如此分别涅槃之词义时(Evañhi satīti),「具威力之道已被分别」(sānubhāvā paṭipadā vibhattā hotīti):能令无明无余灭尽之因的道,因与彼殊胜力相应,故于此被分别显示为具威力。因在此亦以邪道之摄取而分别了流转,故说「流转与还灭皆已说」。显示巴利原文
3. Micchā paṭipajjati etāyāti micchāpaṭipadā, vaṭṭagāmimaggo dukkhāvahattā. Taṃ micchāpaṭipadaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aniyyānikapaṭipadā’’ti. So puññābhisaṅkhāro kathaṃ micchāpaṭipadā hotīti? Sampattibhave sukhāvahova hotīti adhippāyo. Vaṭṭasīsattāti vaṭṭapakkhiyānaṃ uttamaṅgabhāvato. Antamasoti ukkaṃsapariyantaṃ sandhāya vadati avakaṃsapariyantato. ‘‘Idaṃ me puññaṃ nibbānādhigamāya paccayo hotū’’ti evaṃ nibbānaṃ patthetvā pavattitaṃ. Paṇṇamuṭṭhidānamattanti sākapaṇṇamuṭṭhidānamattaṃ. Appatvāti antogadhahetu esa niddeso, apāpetvāti attho. Yadaggena vā paṭipajjanato arahattaṃ pattoti vuccati, tadaggena tadāvahā paṭipadāpi pattāti vuccatīti ‘‘appatvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Anulomavasenāti anulomapaṭiccasamuppādavasena. Paṭilomavasenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Paṭipadā pucchitāti etena paṭipadā desetuṃ āraddhāti ayampi attho saṅgahito yathāraddhassa atthassa kathetukamyatāpucchāya idhāgatattā. Anulomapaṭiccasamuppādadesanāyampettha byatirekamukhena avijjādinirodhā pana vijjāya sati hoti saṅkhārānaṃ asambhavoti vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānaṃ bhājita’’nti. Sarūpena pana tāya vaṭṭameva pakāsitaṃ. Vakkhati hi pariyosāne ‘‘vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathita’’nti. Niyyātaneti nigamane. Phalenāti pattabbaphalena paṭipadāya sampāpakahetuno dassitattā. Yathā hi tividho hetu ñāpako, nibbattako, sampāpakoti, evaṃ tividhaṃ phalaṃ ñāpetabbaṃ, nibbattetabbaṃ, sampāpetabbanti. Tasmā pattabbaphalena nibbānena taṃsampāpakahetubhūtāya paṭipadāya dassitattāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘phalena hetthā’’tiādi. Ayaṃ vuccatīti evaṃ nibbānaphalā ayaṃ ‘‘sammāpaṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Asesavirāgā asesanirodhāti samucchedappahānavasena avijjāya asesavirajjanato asesanirujjhanato ca. Padadvayenapi anuppādanirodhameva vadati. Tañhi nibbānaṃ. Dutiyavikappe ayaṃ ettha adhippāyo – yena maggena karaṇabhūtena asesanirodho hoti, avijjāya asesanirodho yaṃ āgamma hoti, taṃ maggaṃ dassetunti. Evañhi satīti evaṃ padabhājanassa nibbānassa padatthe sati. Sānubhāvā paṭipadā vibhattā hotīti avijjāya asesanirodhahetupaṭipadā tattha sātisayasāmatthiyasamāyogato sānubhāvā vibhattā hoti. Micchāpaṭipadāgahaṇenettha vaṭṭassapi vibhattattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathita’’nti.
4. 《毗婆尸经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Vipassīsuttavaṇṇanā
4 「Vipphandantīti」:以眨眼故。「Animisehīti」:无眨眼者,即唯睁眼者。此如《大本经》中所说。「Etthāti」:于此「毗婆尸」一词中,或于此「无眨眼者」等所引经中。显示巴利原文
4.Vipphandantīti nimisanavasena. Animisehīti vigatanimisehi ummīlanteheva. Tena vuttaṃ mahāpadāne. Etthāti etasmiṃ ‘‘vipassī’’ti pade, etasmiṃ vā ‘‘animisehī’’tiādike yathāgate suttante.
大士因不眨眼而得“毗婆尸”之称,这是举出的一种原因。针对“这不成为原因,因为其他大士在最后有也有不眨眼的眼”这一质难,先说“然于此……”等,进而为显示另一种原因,又说“再者……”等。“Palāḷayamānassāti”:令喜悦者;此为不敬格的属格。“Aṭṭassāti”:义利。显示巴利原文
Mahāpurisassa animisalocanato ‘‘vipassī’’ti samaññāpaṭilābhassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ akāraṇaṃ aññesampi mahāsattānaṃ carimabhave animisalocanattāti codanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādiṃ vatvā tato pana aññameva kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Palāḷayamānassāti tosentassa. Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Aṭṭassāti atthassa.
“bhagavā”(世尊)中的“bhaga”(祥瑞),是指由殊胜福德之蕴所成的祥瑞,因此说为“bhāgyasampannassa”(具祥瑞者)。“sammā”(完全地),即完全地、如实地、依理趣、依原因,故说为“nayena hetunā”(依方法、依因)。词头“saṃ-”与“sāmaṃ”同义,故说为“sāmaṃ paccattapurisakārenā”(自己、由自力),其义为依自生智(sayambhuñāṇena)。“sammā”(完全地),自己依此而觉悟,故称“sambodho”(正觉),指道智;若解作“bujjhati etenā”(依此而觉悟)时,此处也包含了一切知智。趋向菩提的众生即“bodhisatto”(菩萨),这是前词的后词省略,犹如“sākapatthavo”之例。于“bujjhanakasatto”(觉悟的众生)一句中,在大菩提行道上觉悟,故为“bodhi”(菩提);又因与殊胜众生相关联,故为“satto”(众生),合称“bodhisatto”(菩萨)。显示巴利原文
Puññussayasaṅkhāto bhago assa atisayena atthīti bhagavāti ‘‘bhāgyasampannassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sammāti sammadeva yāthāvato, ñāyena kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘nayena hetunā’’ti. Saṃ-saddo ‘‘sāma’’nti iminā samānatthoti āha ‘‘sāmaṃ paccattapurisakārenā’’ti, sayambhuñāṇenāti attho. Sammā, sāmaṃ bujjhi etenāti sambodho vuccati maggañāṇaṃ, ‘‘bujjhati etenā’’ti katvā idha sabbaññutaññāṇassapi saṅgaho. Bodhimā satto bodhisatto, purimapade uttarapadalopo yathā ‘‘sākapatthavo’’ti. Bujjhanakasattoti ettha mahābodhiyānapaṭipadāya bujjhatīti bodhi ca so sattavisesayogato satto cāti bodhisatto. Patthayamāno pavattatīti ‘‘kudāssu nāma mahantaṃ bodhiṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti sañjātacchando paṭipajjati. Dukkhanti jātiādimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ. Kāmaṃ cutupapātāpi maraṇajātiyo, ‘‘jāyati mīyatī’’ti pana vatvā ‘‘cavati upapajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ na ekabhavapariyāpannānaṃ tesaṃ gahaṇaṃ, atha kho nānābhavapariyāpannānaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahaṇanti dassento āha ‘‘idaṃ…pe… vutta’’nti. Tassa nissaraṇanti tassa jarāmaraṇassa nissaraṇanti vuccati. Yasmā mahāsatto jiṇṇabyādhimate disvā pabbajito, tasmāssa jarāmaraṇameva ādito upaṭṭhāsi.
“以方便作意”(upāyamanasikārenāti):意即依方便、方法、理趣、道途而作意,因作意如此生起,故称方便作意。“获得了结合”(samāyogo ahosīti):即以如实通达之力获得了相应。“如理作意”(yoniso manasikārāti):这是表示原因的离格,故他在表原因时用工具格,说为“以如理作意”(yoniso manasikārenāti)。“有生时便有老死”(jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇanti):当菩萨探寻老死的原因——“究竟由何存在老死方生?以何为缘而有老死?”——他如是推究:“若此存在,彼则生;若此不存在,彼则不生,那么,这个就是它的原因。”透过如此把握那不颠倒(恒常随生)的原因,名为“有生时便有老死,以生为缘而有老死”的这种把握老死之因的智慧便生起了。当此智生起时,他便获得了现观与通达。这就是此句的义理。显示巴利原文
Upāyamanasikārenāti upāyena vidhinā ñāyena manasikārena pathena manasikārassa pavattanato. Samāyogo ahosīti yāthāvato paṭivijjhanavasena samāgamo ahosi. Yoniso manasikārāti hetumhi nissakkavacananti tassa ‘‘yoniso manasikārenā’’ti hetumhi karaṇavacanena āha. Jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇanti ‘‘kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti jarāmaraṇe kāraṇaṃ pariggaṇhantassa bodhisattassa ‘‘yasmiṃ sati yaṃ hoti, asati ca na hoti, taṃ tassa kāraṇa’’nti evaṃ abyabhicārajātikāraṇapariggaṇhanena ‘‘jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti yā jarāmaraṇassa kāraṇapariggāhikā paññā uppajji, tāya uppajjantiyā cassa abhisamayo paṭivedho ahosīti attho.
“iti”,是对前述方式的把握。“hi”,仅为小品词。“idaṃ”,表示以现量把握如前所述的流转,故说“evamidaṃ”(如是此)。此处,由于无明之集已被提及,所以称为“于十一处”。“将集总合”(samudayaṃ sampiṇḍetvā),即把行等之集总合为一而把握。因为观集之智一再生起,于是有了“集、集”这样的重复语。或者,“如是成为集”,并非只是为了显示生起;如同“缘起”一词是通过缘起的门径而说,这里的“集”一词,则是通过生起的门径而说缘的作用。而且,对于此处所指出的识等缘法,不论有多少,他都以总相、以欲说明的意乐而总摄地说“集、集”。因此说“以无明为缘,行等之集生起”。以见之义而称为“眼”(cakkhu),因为现量见到集的状态就是眼。以所知之义(ñātaṭṭhena),即所了知的状态。以了别之义(pajānanaṭṭhena),即依“无明、行等乃至缘法的运转,这就是此苦蕴之集”这样的行相而了别之义。以通达之义(paṭivedhanaṭṭhena),即“此无明等缘……”
},
{显示巴利原文
Itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Hīti nipātamattaṃ. Idanti yathāvuttassa vaṭṭassa paccakkhato gahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evamida’’nti. Idha avijjāya samudayassa āgatattā ‘‘ekādasasu ṭhānesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Samudayaṃ sampiṇḍetvāti saṅkhārādīnaṃ samudayaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā. Anekavārañhi samudayadassanavasena ñāṇassa pavattattā ‘‘samudayo samudayo’’ti āmeḍitavacanaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘evaṃ samudayo hotī’’ti idaṃ na kevalaṃ nibbattidassanaparaṃ, atha kho paṭiccasamuppādasaddo viya paṭiccasamuppādamukhena idha samudayasaddo nibbattimukhena paccayattaṃ vadati. Viññāṇādayo ca yāvanto idha paccayadhammā niddiṭṭhā, te sāmaññarūpena byāpanicchāvasena gaṇhanto ‘‘samudayo samudayo’’ti avoca. Tenāha ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārānaṃ samudayo hotī’’ti. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti samudayassa paccakkhato dassanabhāvo cakkhu. Ñātaṭṭhenāti ñātabhāvena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘avijjāsaṅkhārāditaṃtaṃpaccayadhammapavattiyā etassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo’’ti pakārato vā jānanaṭṭhena. Paṭivedhanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘ayaṃ avijjādi paccayadhammo imassa saṅkhārādikassa paccayabhāvato samudayo’’ti paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena. Obhāsanaṭṭhenāti samudayabhāvapaṭicchādakassa mohandhakārassa kilesandhakārassa vidhamanavasena avabhāsanavasena. Taṃ panetaṃ ‘‘cakkhu’’ntiādinā vuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Nirodhavāreti paṭilomavāre. So hi ‘‘kissa nirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho’’ti nirodhakittanavasena āgato.
5-10. 《尸弃经等》注疏显示巴利原文
5-10. Sikhīsuttādivaṇṇanā
5-10 不这样结合:即不以“尸弃佛也……”等语作总摄的方式这样结合。为何如此?为了说明其中的原因,而说“何以故”等。「因为不是在一座上宣说的」,为了使这个意义更清楚,而说「确实是在多处」等。虽然这些经是以分别宣说的方式被讲述的,但其义理的注释却是一样的,因为它们的义理没有差别。「诸佛已出兴于世」并非由他人告知,这是结合的意思。确实,大菩萨在最后一生中,没有需要借助他人教诫的事了。他们完全依照过去所行的道而行,即依照修习的行道,最后身的大菩萨们这样走,这是此中的常态。「而行」:指的是他们把心安立在四念处上,如实修习七觉支,以彻底现证圆满正觉的方式而进行。然而,为了显示他们最初的观修精勤是如何的,而说「确实,一切菩萨……」。属于诸佛的观,或者为了成佛的观,即佛观。显示巴利原文
5-10.Naevaṃ yojetvāti ‘‘sikhissapī’’tiādinā samuccayavasena evaṃ na yojetvā. Kasmātiādinā tattha kāraṇaṃ vadati. Ekāsane adesitattāti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘nānāṭhānesu hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yadipi tāni visuṃ visuṃ vuttabhāvena desitāni, atthavaṇṇanā pana ekasadisā tadatthassa abhinnattā. ‘‘Buddhā jātā’’ti na añño ācikkhatīti yojanā. Na hi mahābodhisattānaṃ pacchimabhave paropadesena payojanaṃ atthi. Gatamaggenevāti paṭipattigamanena gatamaggeneva pacchimamahābodhisattā gacchanti, ayamettha dhammatā. Gacchantīti catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu patiṭṭhitacittā satta bojjhaṅge yāthāvato bhāvetvā sammāsambodhiyā abhisambujjhanavasena pavattantīti attho. Yathā pana tesaṃ paṭhamavipassanābhiniveso hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbabodhisattā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Buddhabhāvānaṃ vipassanā, buddhatthāya vā vipassanā buddhavipassanā.
1. 食经注显示巴利原文
1. Āhārasuttavaṇṇanā
11 「带来」:指令其产生、令其生起,意为支撑。所谓「已生者」,是因为从结生的那一刻起,在世间便有了「已出生」的名称。然而,从结生那一刻直至从母胎出生,都还属于「求有者」。这是针对胎生者而言的「已生」与「求有」的区分。对于其他生类的众生,则是依据第一心等来说明的。这里的「sambhava」一词,于胎生者意为“产生”,于其他生类则意为“再生”。因为在第一心、第一威仪路的刹那,他们只是寻求、趋向再生,那时还不能算作「已生者」——他们在再生中尚未稳固。唯有诸漏尽者,才于一切处彻底断除了对再有的寻求,真正成为「已生者」。「不再有」这一决定性的表述,显示了排除未来再生的意义。而在“时已到,为已生者”等句中,「已生」一词当知是指诸漏尽者。此处的「或」字是总括的用法,正如“以火或水”等句中的用法一样。显示巴利原文
11.Āharantīti ānenti uppādenti, upatthambhentīti attho. Nibbattāti pasutā. Bhūtā nāma yasmā tato paṭṭhāya loke jātavohāro paṭisandhiggahaṇato pana paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchito nikkhanto, tāva sambhavesino, esa tāva gabbhaseyyakesu bhūtasambhavesivibhāgo, itaresu pana paṭhamacittādivasena vutto. Sambhava-saddo cettha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena pasūtipariyāyo, itaresaṃ vasena uppattipariyāyo. Paṭhamacittapaṭhamairiyāpathakkhaṇesu hi te sambhavaṃ uppattiṃ esanti upagacchanti nāma, na tāva bhūtā upapattiyā na suppatiṭṭhitattā, bhūtā eva sabbaso bhavesanāya samucchinnattā. Na puna bhavissantīti avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ dasseti. Yo ca ‘‘kālaghaso bhūto’’tiādīsu bhūta-saddassa khīṇāsavavācitā daṭṭhabbā. Vā-saddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho ‘‘agginā vā udakena vā’’tiādīsu viya.
此处意谓:依各自不同的缘力而建立有身的状态,正是食物所应给予的资助。因此说:“这是言辞上的区别……实为一体。”「对于有情已生的诸法」,是指有情相续中已经生起的诸法。正如说“住立百岁”时,是表示依于相续而转起;同样,「为了住立」也是指依相续的转起,其意为“为了不使断绝”,故说「为了不令断绝」。因为依相续而有法的生起,有情的相续才称为受到资助,所以又说「为了让未生起的生起」。以上是关于“住立”和“资助”的表述。这两者都应从两方面来理解,而不能仅仅依据字面上的关联。显示巴利原文
Yathāsakaṃ paccayabhāvena attabhāvassa paṭhapanamevettha āhārehi kātabbaanuggaho hotīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘vacanabhedo…pe… eko yevā’’ti. Sattassa uppannadhammānanti sattassa santāne uppannadhammānaṃ. Yathā ‘‘vassasataṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vutte anuppabandhavasena pavattatīti vuttaṃ hoti, evaṃ ṭhitiyāti anuppabandhavasena pavattiyāti attho, sā pana avicchedoti āha ‘‘avicchedāyā’’ti. Anuppabandhadhammuppattiyā sattasantāno anuggahito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘anuppannānaṃ uppādāyā’’ti. Etānīti ṭhitianuggahapadāni. Ubhayattha daṭṭhabbāni na yathāsambandhato.
存在于所依食物中的食素,与所依的食物一同应被吞咽,因此称为「应被吞咽的食」。至于身体中已经产生的食素,后文将解释:“段食滋养以食素为第八法的那些色法。”「粗大」,是指食物中含有的食素少,并非指其体积大或质硬。因此,只要所依食物中食素微少,它就是粗大的。蛇之类的食物会带来痛苦,当知为粗大。至于牛角等物,因被遗弃三年而腐烂变软,故说为柔软。然而,真正意义上的柔软,是由于沾了狼的唾液而变得那样——这才是食物的柔软。这是法的自性。兔的食物微细,因为它吃的是幼嫩的草和谷物。鸟的食物微细,因为它吃的是草籽等。边地居民的食物微细,因为他们以豆类和绿豆粥等为食。「他们的」指他化自在天等天人的食物。「是微细的」,并非通过对比而说,而是从绝对意义上讲它就是最微细的,因为没有比它更微细的食物了。显示巴利原文
Vatthugatā ojā vatthu viya tena saddhiṃ ajjhoharitabbataṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhoharitabbako āhāro’’ti, nibbattitaojaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘kabaḷīkāro āhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharatī’’ti vakkhati. Oḷārikatā appojatāya na vatthuno thūlatāya kathinatāya vā, tasmā yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ parittā ojā hoti, taṃ oḷārikaṃ. Sappādayo dukkhuppādakatāya oḷārikā veditabbā. Visāṇādīnaṃ tivassachaḍḍitānaṃ pūtibhūtattā mudukatāti vadanti. Taracchakheḷatemitatāya pana tathābhūtānaṃ tesaṃ mudukatā. Dhammasabhāvo hesa. Sasānaṃ āhāro sukhumo taruṇatiṇasassakhādanato. Sakuṇānaṃ āhāro sukhumo tiṇabījādikhādanato. Paccantavāsīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo māsamuggakurādibhojanattā. Tesanti paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ. Sukhumotvevāti na kiñci upādāya, atha kho sukhumoicceva niṭṭhaṃ patto tato paramasukhumassa abhāvato.
这里是依据食物的所依来说明食物的粗与细,而这种粗细应依其中食素的少还是多来理解。为说明这一点,故说“在此处,又”等。「危难」:指因饥饿所生、折磨身体的燥热。「驱除」:指所依的食物仅能驱除此危难而已。然而,不能守护身体,是指不能滋养身体,因为食素太少。不能驱除危难,则因食物无法填满胃。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvasena panettha āhārassa oḷārikasukhumatā vuttā, sā cassa appojamahojatāhi veditabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādimāha. Parissayanti khudāvasena uppannaṃ vihiṃsaṃ sarīradarathaṃ. Vinodetīti vatthu tassa vinodanamattaṃ karoti. Na pana sakkoti pāletunti sarīraṃ yāpetuṃ nappahoti nirojattā. Na sakkoti parissayaṃ vinodetuṃ āmāsayassa apūraṇato.
「六种」:以此说明没有任何一种触被遗漏。在这里,触等之所以处于第二等位,仅是依照说法次第,而非出于其他原因,故说“这仅是开示的顺序……”等。「意思」:为显示这是“意的思”而非“有情的思”,便如同说“心的住立,心解脱……”那样,说“意思即只是思”。「心」:指任何心。「汇聚一处」:即总括而取,不作区分,意思是以共通的方式来把握。为了显示其中可得的“执受”等差别,才说“段食”等。「不成就食义」:因为不作为那样的食物来执取。「即使那时」:即在食物分裂、消失的时候。有人说那时“被称为执受食”,但诸阿阇梨不赞同此说,因那时并无执受的色法存在。「与结生识俱生」:这是一个标示性的说法,旨在显示:在一切业生色所含摄的食素中,这种食素都存在且能无间断地生起。「七日」:是从出生之日算起,一直到第七天。它通过相续的联结,守护色身的相续。「正是此」:即指业生食素。而依托业生食素生起的食素,由于不是业生,故应知它就是“非执受食”。“非执受的”应知是指触等名法。有人显示巴利原文
Chabbidhopīti iminā kassaci phassassa anavasesitabbatamāha. Desanakkamenevettha phassādīnaṃ dutiyāditā, na aññena kāraṇenāti āha ‘‘desanānayo eva cesā’’tiādi. Manaso sañcetanā na sattassāti dassanatthaṃ manogahaṇaṃ yathā ‘‘cittassa ṭhiti, cetovimutti cā’’ti āha ‘‘manosañcetanāti cetanāvā’’ti. Cittanti yaṃ kiñci cittameva. Ekarāsiṃ katvāti ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vibhāgaṃ akatvā, sāmaññena gahitāti attho. Tattha labbhamānaṃ upādiṇṇakādivibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kabaḷīkāro āhāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āhāratthaṃ na sādhentīti tādisassa āhārassa anāharaṇato. Tadāpīti bhijjitvā vigatakālepi. Upādiṇṇakāhāroti vuccantīti keci. Idaṃ pana ācariyānaṃ na ruccati tadā upādiṇṇakarūpasseva abhāvato. Paṭisandhicitteneva sahajātāti lakkhaṇavacanametaṃ, sabbāyapi kammajarūpapariyāpannāya ojāya atthibhāvassa avicchedappavattisambhavadassanattho. Sattamāti uppannadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva sattamadivasāpi. Rūpasantatiṃ pāleti paveṇighaṭanavasena. Ayamevāti kammajaojā. Kammajaojaṃ pana paṭicca uppannaojā akammajattā anupādiṇṇaāhārotveva veditabbo. Anupādiṇṇakā phassādayo veditabbāti ānetvā sambandho. Lokuttarā phassādayo kathanti āha ‘‘lokuttarā pana ruḷhīvasena kathitā’’ti. Yasmā tesaṃ kusalānaṃ upetapariyāyo natthi, tasmā vipākānaṃ upādiṇṇapariyāyo natthevāti anupādiṇṇapariyāyopi ruḷhīvasena vuttoti veditabbo.
前面已说“食即是缘”,倘若缘的意义就是食的意义,那么为何只说这四种是食?于是回答:为何只说四种。连接起来即是:正因它们是特殊的缘,所以才只说这些是食。“因为是特殊的缘”:以此显示,虽然其他缘法对于它们所缘生的法也只是缘,但这些法在同样是缘的同时,还以某种方式成为更为殊胜的缘,因此被称为“食”。现在为显示那种殊胜的缘性,而说“因为它是特殊的缘……”等。段食对于色身是特殊的缘,因为它有支持的作用。因此,注释书中说:“由于对色法与非色法有支持的作用,此四种食是食缘。”(《清净道论》2.608;《发趣论注》缘广说释)因为,即使非色法的食以及食生色、等起色的食有生起的作用,但如果没有支持的作用,食就没有生起的作用,所以支持的作用是主要的。因为,食在生起的同时,也是以无间断的方式在支持方才生起的,所以支持的作用本身就是食的作用。触对于受是特殊的缘,因说“以触为缘而有受”故。由于说“以行为缘而有识”,所以意思对于识是特殊的缘。因说“思能生起三种有”故。又由于说“以识为缘而有名色”显示巴利原文
Pubbe ‘‘āhārāti paccayā’’ti vuttattā yadi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭhotiādinā codeti, atha kasmā ime eva cattāro vuttāti atha kasmā cattārova vuttā. Ime eva ca vuttāti yojanā. Visesappaccayattāti etena yathā aññe paccayadhammā attano paccayuppannassa paccayāva honti, ime pana tathā ca hoti aññathā cāti samānepi paccayatte atirekapaccayā honti, tasmā ‘‘āhārāti vuttā’’ti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Idāni taṃ atirekapaccayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesapaccayo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Visesappaccayo rūpakāyassa kabaḷīkāro āhāro upathambhakabhāvato. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘rūpārūpānaṃ upathambhakattena upakārakā cattāro āhārā āhārapaccayo’’ti (visuddhi. 2.608; paṭṭhā. aṭṭha. paccayuddesavaṇṇanā). Upathambhakattañhi satīpi janakatte arūpīnaṃ āhārānaṃ āhārajarūpasamuṭṭhānakarūpāhārassa ca hoti, asati pana upathambhakatte āhārānaṃ janakattaṃ natthīti upathambhakattaṃ padhānaṃ. Janayamānopi hi āhāro avicchedavasena upathambhayamāno eva janetīti upathambhakabhāvo eva āhārabhāvo. Vedanāya phasso visesapaccayo. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti vacanato viññāṇassa manosañcetanā. ‘‘Cetanā tividhaṃ bhavaṃ janetī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti pana vacanato nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ visesapaccayo. Na hi okkantaviññāṇābhāve nāmarūpassa atthi sambhavo. Yathāha ‘‘viññāṇañca hi, ānanda, mātukucchismiṃ na okkamissatha, api nu kho nāmarūpaṃ mātukucchismiṃ samuccissathā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.115). Vuttamevatthaṃ suttena sādhetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这样,虽然“食”的意思就是“缘”,但这四种因为是特殊的缘,才被称作“食”。先前已经总说它们的殊胜缘义,现在为了分别解说,而发问:“那么在此,什么是特殊的缘?”食物放到嘴里,即使尚未咀嚼,仅此便对内食成为缘了,所以说“令八种色生起”。“有益于乐受的”,就是能带来乐受的。“一切种类”,即依眼触等种种差别。有多少种触的差别,就有多少种触食,都会相应地生起三种受,没有不起到食的作用的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yadipi paccayattho āhārattho, visesapaccayattā pana imeva āhārāti vuttāti taṃ nesaṃ visesapaccayataṃ avibhāgato dassetvā idāni vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘ko panetthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mukhe ṭhapitamatto eva asaṅkhādito, tattakenāpi abbhantarassa āhārassa paccayo hoti eva. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Sukhavedanāya hito sukhavedanīyo. Sabbathāpīti cakkhusamphassādivasena. Yattakā phassassa pakārabhedā, tesaṃ vasena sabbappakāropi phassāhāro yathārahaṃ tisso vedanā āharati, anāhārako natthi.
「一切种类」:在此也应按照触食中已说明的方法来理解其意义。「依三种相续」:即依身十法聚、性十法聚、心处十法聚这三种相续。「依俱生等缘的方法」:即依俱生缘等缘的方式。因为结生识对自己俱生的名法,以俱生缘、相互缘、异熟根缘、相应缘、有缘、不离缘等作缘,所以在食缘的意义上说‘它滋养它们’。对于俱生的色法,除了心处的相应缘之外,应以不相应缘作关联;对于其余色法,除了相互缘之外,应以其余诸缘作关联。‘那些’(tāni):是用中性词记述的,即使原本不是中性词,也可与中性词一起说。把有漏的善思与不善思提出来,是为了显示它们作为殊胜缘的地位。因此说:‘但就一般而言……’等等。‘结生识正是所说的’这句,在这里也同样适用。正如它们对于特定的果有殊胜缘的作用,从而具有食的意义;同样,它们对一般的果也具有食的意义。为了显示这一点,才说‘就一般而言……’等等。其中的‘与之相应的与彼所等起的诸法’,是指与那些触等相应的法,以及由它们等起的色法。在这里,‘相应’一词应按适当的方式理解。显示巴利原文
Sabbathāpīti idhāpi phassāhāre vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Tisantativasenāti kāyadasakaṃ bhāvadasakaṃ vatthudasakanti tividhasantativasena. Sahajātādipaccayanayenāti sahajātādipaccayavidhinā. Paṭisandhiviññāṇañhi attanā sahajātanāmassa sahajātaaññamaññavipākindriyasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hontoyeva āhārapaccayatāya taṃ āhāreti vuttaṃ, sahajātarūpesu pana vatthuno sampayuttapaccayaṃ ṭhapetvā vippayuttapaccayena, sesarūpānaṃ aññamaññapaccayañca ṭhapetvā itaresaṃ paccayānaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā. Tānīti napuṃsakaniddeso anapuṃsakānampi napuṃsakehi saha vacanato. Sāsavakusalākusalacetanāva vuttā visesapaccayabhāvadassanaṃ hetanti, tenāha ‘‘avisesena panā’’tiādi. Paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vuttanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yathā tassa tassa phalassa visesato paccayatāya etesaṃ āhārattho, evaṃ avisesatopīti dassetuṃ ‘‘avisesenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṃsampayuttataṃsamuṭṭhānadhammānanti tehi phassādīhi sampayuttadhammānañceva taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammānañca. Tattha sampayuttaggahaṇaṃ yathārahato daṭṭhabbaṃ, samuṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ pana avisesato.
“在支撑时,成就食的作用”:意思是,正是在支撑时,它生起色法;通过生起以食素为第八法的诸色,便成就了它的支撑作用。“正是在触及时”:即在履行触的作用时。“正是在努力时”:即在思惟时,在汇集时。“正是在了别时”:即在以构想‘再生’的方式了别时,成就食的作用——这是句子的连贯。在一切情况下,成就食的作用,就是由于它们是受等生起的因,从而维持‘有身’。那么,为什么说‘令身住立’?难道不是由业等所生的色法,由业等来使其持续运转吗?为回应这一诘难,才说:‘即使是业所生……’等等。显示巴利原文
Upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādhetīti upatthambhento eva rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, ojaṭṭhamakasamuṭṭhāpaneneva panassa upathambhanakiccasiddhi. Phusantoyevāti phusanakiccaṃ karonto eva. Āyūhamānāvāti cetayamānā eva abhisandahantī eva. Vijānantamevāti upapattiparikappanavasena vijānantameva āhārakiccaṃ sādhetīti yojanā. Sabbattha āhārakiccasādhanañca tesaṃ vedanādiuppattihetutāya attabhāvassa pavattanameva. Kāyaṭṭhapanenāti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu kammajādirūpaṃ kammādināva pavattatīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kammajanitopī’’tiādi.
通过对‘执取色’相续的支撑,亦成就对时节生色和心生色两种色相续的支撑,故说‘两种色相续’。正是针对这种支撑,而说‘成为护卫者’。因为维持与护卫即是令色身持续安住,故为色身存续之因。说‘作为乐等的所依处’,即成为乐等生起之所依。实际上,‘所缘’即是那些以它为缘的法,以能作所缘的方式安住于此,故称为‘事’。所谓‘正是在触及时’,是基于触具有接触的本质而说。若无本质,法则不能活动;若无‘受’的活动,则无众生流转,因此说‘乐等……成为……’。再者,在此解说有想生存时,不应显示无想生存,因为即使无想生存的存续,也是以受的活动为其因之根据,但此因并未完全被包含。因此,如说‘意思……导致有根生起,成为众生存续之因’。正因如此,说‘识正是在了别时’,那是以‘再生’的构想为依据,而说出‘正是在了别时’之义。显示巴利原文
Upādiṇṇarūpasantatiyā upatthambhaneneva utucittajarūpasantatīnampi upatthambhanasiddhi hotīti ‘‘dvinnaṃ rūpasantatīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Upatthambhanameva sandhāya ‘‘anupālako hutvā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Rūpakāyassa ṭhitihetutā hi yāpanā anupālanā. Sukhādivatthubhūtanti sukhādīnaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Ārammaṇampi hi vasati ettha ārammaṇakaraṇavasena tadārammaṇā dhammāti vatthūti vuccati. Phusantoyevāti idaṃ phassassa phusanasabhāvattā vuttaṃ. Na hi dhammānaṃ sabhāvena vinā pavatti atthi, vedanāpavattiyā vinā sattānaṃ sandhāvanatā natthīti āha ‘‘sukhādi…pe… hotī’’ti. Na cettha saññībhavakathāyaṃ asaññībhavo dassetabbo, tassāpi vā kāraṇabhūtavedanāpavattivaseneva ṭhitiyā hetuno abyāpitattā, tathā hi ‘‘manosañcetanā…pe… bhavamūlanipphādanato sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hotī’’ti vuttā. Tato eva viññāṇaṃ vijānantamevāti upapattiparikappanavasena vijānantamevāti vuttovāyamattho.
四种怖畏,应当通过阐明其过患而观见。‘欲求’:即渴望,指‘味爱’。由于‘味爱’在‘段食’中特别强有力,故在此特别予以确定。‘怖畏’:是指由此而生畏惧者;而‘欲求’本身就是怖畏,因为它会导致大祸害。‘接近’:是指依所依处、根、识以及所缘与识的结合而生起。由于这是受等生起的原因,故称为‘怖畏’。确定作用的理由如前所说,其余两者也是如此。‘造作’:意为积累,亦称为准备。由于这是导致‘生存’与‘再生’之因,故称为‘怖畏’。‘坠落’:是指心识于诸生存处,通过结生识的执取而现起。由于这是一切以生存、再生为因的种种祸害之根本,故称为‘怖畏’。如今,为详细显示‘欲求’等的怖畏性,开始解说‘因何缘故’等。其中,‘作了欲求’的意思是生起执著,亦即生起渴爱。‘以寒等为首’,是说将寒等置于首位,即被寒等所逼迫。显示巴利原文
Cattāri bhayāni daṭṭhabbāni ādīnavavibhāvanato. Nikantīti nikāmanā, rasataṇhaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sā hi kabaḷīkāre āhāre balavatī, tenevettha avadhāraṇaṃ kataṃ. Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, nikantiyevabhayaṃ mahānatthahetuto. Upagamanaṃ visayindriyaviññāṇesu visayaviññāṇesu ca saṅgativasena pavatti, taṃ vedanādiuppattihetutāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Avadhāraṇe payojanaṃ vuttanayameva. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Āyūhanaṃ abhisandahanaṃ, saṃvidhānantipi vadanti. Taṃ bhavūpapattihetutāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhinipāto tattha tattha bhave paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena viññāṇassa nibbatti. So bhavūpapattihetukānaṃ sabbesaṃ anatthānaṃ mūlakāraṇatāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Idāni nikantiādīnaṃ sappaṭibhayataṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃ kāraṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha nikantiṃ katvāti ālayaṃ janetvā, taṇhaṃ uppādetvāti attho. Sītādīnaṃ purakkhatāti sītādīnaṃ purato ṭhitā, sītādīhi bādhiyamānāti attho.
‘接近触’:即正在引发眼触等种种触。‘于触味者’:是指通过‘身触’而对触所缘有味著习性之人。为显示众生通过‘身触’而生起对触的渴爱,在说明‘触食’过患时,引用了以触所缘为主题的经文:‘于他人所守护、保护者等……’。抑或,‘于触味者’的意思就是对‘触食’的味著。因为有‘触食’时,众生才对触所缘产生味著,没有则不会。因此说‘以触味为根本’等等。显示巴利原文
Phassaṃ upagacchantāti cakkhusamphassādibhedaṃ phassaṃ pavattentā. Phassassādinoti kāyasamphassavasena phoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātassa assādanasīlā. Kāyasamphassavasena hi sattānaṃ phoṭṭhabbataṇhā pavattatīti dassetuṃ phassāhārādīnavadassane phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ uddhaṭaṃ ‘‘paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesū’’tiādinā. Phassassādinoti vā phassāhārassādinoti attho. Sati hi phassāhāre sattānaṃ phassārammaṇe assādo, nāsati, tenāha ‘‘phassassādamūlaka’’ntiādi.
“以彼为根”:生起相的怖畏,是以坠落的本质而被执取的,因此说“以彼为根”,意思是“业之造作相”。“一切怖畏”:指二十五种怖畏、三种大怖畏,以及其他一切怖畏。由于怖畏的依止——有身——得以产生,这些怖畏必然到来。显示巴利原文
Jātinimittassa bhayassa abhinipātasabhāvena gahitattā ‘‘tammūlaka’’nti vuttaṃ. Kammāyūhananimittanti attho. Bhayaṃ sabbanti pañcavīsati, tividhamahābhayaṃ, aññañca sabbabhayaṃ āgatameva hoti bhayādhiṭṭhānassa attabhāvassa nipphādanato.
“坠落”:即“再生”。因为众生的最初再生,在处处如同炭坑一般的生存处中,恰似坠落。“以彼为根”是指以名色的生起为根。一切怖畏,其实就是对于坠落的怖畏;因为“由此而生畏惧”,故称为怖畏。显示巴利原文
Abhinipatatīti abhinibbattati. Paṭhamābhinibbatti hi sattānaṃ tattha tattha aṅgārakāsusadise bhave abhinipātasadisī. Tammūlakattāti nāmarūpanibbattimūlakattā. Sabbabhayānaṃ abhinipātoyeva bhayaṃ bhāyati etasmāti katvā.
“如同令进入”:由于原因是果获得自身的条件,所以原因就好似交付了果。“它”指果。“从彼处”:即从原因。“这些”:指诸食。“如所说”:即如前所说的“令果产生”等之义。“于一切句”:在“由受灭”等一切句之中。显示巴利原文
Appeti viyāti phalassa attalābhahetubhāvato kāraṇaṃ, taṃ niyyādeti viya. Tanti phalaṃ. Tatoti kāraṇato. Etesanti āhārānaṃ . Yathāvuttenāti ‘‘phalaṃ nidetī’’tiādinā vuttappakārena atthena. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘vedanānirodhenā’’tiādīsu sabbesu padesu.
“以结生为始”,即以结生心的刹那为起点。文中“称为有身的食”,是就执取食而说的。因为它们从严格意义上说,的确是以渴爱为因。对于诸根完整的有情,是依七种相续门来说明的,也就是眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、性根、心所依处这七种具足自性的诸根相续。对于其余诸根不完整的盲、聋、无性根等有情,则是依有所缺失的相续来说明的,即缺少眼、或缺少耳、或两者俱缺、或缺少性根等有所缺失的相续。在结生时生起的,称为“结生者”。而“初有分心刹那等”这一句中,“等”字应知是包含了彼所缘心。显示巴利原文
Paṭisandhiṃ ādiṃ katvāti paṭisandhikkhaṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā. Upādiṇṇakaāhāre sandhāya ‘‘attabhāvasaṅkhātānaṃ āhārāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Te hi nippariyāyato taṇhānidānā. Paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ sattānaṃ sattasantativasenāti paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ sabhāvakānaṃ cakkhu sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhā kāyo bhāvo vatthūti imesaṃ sattannaṃ santatīnaṃ vasena. Sesānaṃ aparipuṇṇāyatanānaṃ andhabadhiraabhāvakānaṃ. Ūnaūnasantativasenāti cakkhunā, sotena, tadubhayena, bhāvena ca ūnaūnasantativasena. Paṭisandhiyaṃ jātā paṭisandhikā. Paṭhamabhavaṅgacittakkhaṇādīti ādi-saddena tadārammaṇacittassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
应当这样连接:“他也了知爱的因”。也有“爱的因”这一读法。“显示了轮转”,是指从自性与理趣两方面,完整地显示了整个轮转。现在,为了详细阐明这个意思,才说出“而且在这个地方”等话语。“作了朝向过去的开示”,即从现有开始,作趋向过去法并以之为对象的开示,以这样的方式。“通过过去显示轮转”,即通过过去的有,显示了业、烦恼与果的轮转。这里的“有身”是指现有身。如果这样,为什么又说“通过过去显示轮转”呢?这并没有过失,因为并没有限定“只通过过去”;而且如此,以渴爱为端首,由无间的关系,把握了令有身生起的业。因为如果没有业,渴爱作为“有之导引”便不成立。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāyapi nidānaṃ jānātīti yojanā. Taṇhānidānantipi pāṭho. Vaṭṭaṃ dassetvāti sarūpato nayato ca sakalameva vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘imasmiñca pana ṭhāne’’tiādimāha. Atītābhimukhaṃ desanaṃ katvāti paccuppannabhavato paṭṭhāya atītadhammābhimukhaṃ tabbisayaṃ desanaṃ katvā tathākāraṇena. Atītena vaṭṭaṃ dassetīti atītabhavena kammakilesavipākavaṭṭaṃ dasseti. Attabhāvoti paccuppanno attabhāvo. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘atītena vaṭṭaṃ dassetī’’ti vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso ‘‘atītenevā’’ti anavadhāraṇato, evañca katvā atītābhimukhaggahaṇaṃ janakakammaṃ gahitaṃ, taṇhāsīsena nānantariyabhāvato. Na hi kammunā vinā taṇhā bhavanetti yujjati.
“那个业”,是指以渴爱为端首而说的业。“为了显示”,即为了显示那过去的有身。“那个有身的能造业”,就是上文所说的有身的能造业。从那之后,是为了显示造作了另一有身的业而这样说。而无明,如同渴爱,也被视为业,因此只取了业。“在两种情况下”,是指取食与取受等这两种情况。“有身”指的是现在的有身和过去的有身。再说“在两种情况下”,是指取渴爱与取无明、行这两种情况。应如此连接:“其能造者”,即能造作现在与过去有身的业已被说到了。在此,通过取业,作为造业处的过去生实质上便显示了出来。由此,显示了轮回的无始性。所谓“简略”,即通过简略的方式,也把握了因分五支与果分五支。因为作为因与果而被包含的诸法品类不同,能简要地把握,也就是简略而已。显示巴利原文
Taṃ kammanti taṇhāsīsena vuttakammaṃ. Dassetunti taṃ atītaṃ attabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ. Tassattabhāvassa janakaṃ kammanti tassa yathāvuttassa attabhāvassa janakaṃ. Tato parampi attabhāvaṃ āyūhitaṃ kammaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Avijjā ca nāma taṇhā viya kammattāti kammasseva gahaṇaṃ. Dvīsu ṭhānesūti āhāraggahaṇena vedanādiggahaṇenāti dvīsu ṭhānesu. Attabhāvoti paccuppannakāliko atītakāliko ca attabhāvo. Puna dvīsūti taṇhāggahaṇe avijjāsaṅkhāraggahaṇeti dvīsu ṭhānesu. Tassa janakanti paccuppannassa ceva atītassa ca attabhāvassa janakaṃ kammaṃ vuttanti yojanā . Kammaggahaṇena cettha yattha taṃ kammaṃ āyūhitaṃ, sā atītā jāti atthato dassitā hoti. Tena saṃsāravaṭṭassa anamataggataṃ dīpeti. Saṅkhepenāti saṅkhepena hetupañcakaphalapañcakaggahaṇampi hi saṅkhepo eva hetuphalabhāvena saṅgahetabbadhammānaṃ anekavidhattā.
如果只是通过过去那一分显示了流转,那么缘起法门就成了“有剩余”的教示。为了显示并非如此,才说“在这里,于此……”等文。因为虽然此处未直接从体性上显示未来那一分流转,但从理趣上也已将其显示出来,因此缘起的开示恰恰是“无剩余”的。现在,为了用譬喻阐明此义,而说“正如……”等语。所谓“卧于水上”,是指借着水流躺卧。“对面部分”指另一端的部分。“从此方看”指从另一边望过去。“不完整”指肢节有缺。“如此具足”等,是将譬喻与所喻的法义配合起来。显示巴利原文
Yadi atītena vaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ sati sappadesā paṭiccasamuppādadhammadesanā hotīti dassento ‘‘tatrāya’’ntiādimāha. Tena hi yadipi sarūpato anāgatena vaṭṭaṃ idha na dassitaṃ, nayato pana tassapi dassitattā nippadesā eva paṭiccasamuppādadesanāti dasseti. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Udakapiṭṭhe nipannanti udakaṃ pariplavavasena nipannaṃ. Parabhāganti parauttamaṅgabhāgaṃ. Oratoti tato aparabhāgato olokento. Aparipuṇṇoti vikalāvayavo. Evaṃsampadantiādi upamāya saṃsandanaṃ.
正如颈是维系身体诸筋的根本所在,同样,对于维系有身的诸行,渴爱是其根本,因此说“见颈部时”。正如有身是由受等众多支分组成的集合体,同样,背脊是由肋骨、脊椎骨等众多支分组成的集合体,因此说“见其……背部时”。“所谓的渴爱”:即依渴爱而说。在这里,应知无明与行是教法的缘,因此说“如同见尾根时”。确实,在结尾处作了“应观尾根”的譬喻说明。应知这是从理趣把握其圆满性。在经典中,未来缘的流转同样以因或果的方式,其圆满性唯少许可见,因此开头是果因联结,中间是因果联结,末尾也是果因联结。如此,由三重联结,只显示了四要略的流转。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi gīvā sarīrasandhārakakaṇḍarānaṃ mūlaṭṭhānabhūtā, evaṃ attabhāvasandhārakānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ mūlabhūtā taṇhāti vuttaṃ ‘‘gīvāya diṭṭhakālo’’ti. Yathā vedanādianekāvayavasamudāyabhūto attabhāvo, evaṃ phāsukapiṭṭhikaṇḍakādianekāvayavasamudāyabhūtā piṭṭhīti ‘‘piṭṭhiyā…pe… tassa diṭṭhakālo’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṇhāsaṅkhātanti taṇhāya kathitaṃ. Idha desanāya paccayā avijjāsaṅkhārā veditabbāti ‘‘naṅguṭṭhamūlassa diṭṭhakālo viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pariyosāne ‘‘naṅguṭṭhamūlaṃ passeyyā’’ti upamādassanaṃ kataṃ. Nayato paripuṇṇabhāvaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ anāgatassāpi paccayavaṭṭassa hetuvasena phalavasena vā paripuṇṇabhāvassa mukhamattadassanīyattā ādito phalahetusandhi, majjhe hetuphalasandhi, antepi phalahetusandhīti evaṃ tisandhikattā catusaṅkhepameva vaṭṭaṃ dassitanti.
2. 牟利破群那经注显示巴利原文
2. Moḷiyaphaggunasuttavaṇṇanā
12 “就在此处”:即在以“诸比丘,有此……四种食”这样从体性上开示了四种食之后,又以“诸比丘,这些……是为了……”的结语方式作显示的那同一个地方。他于此处结束开示:仅以要略的方式结束了对四种食分别的阐明,之后省思而默然安坐。“见取行者”:即由我见而成为见取行者。“最胜香所熏”:即由自体本具的栴檀等种种最胜香所熏。“以宝箧之最胜”:即以宝石所成的最胜箧。“与教说之连结相应者”:即为令接下来的教说得以增长,而与先前所开示的教说之连结如此相应努力者。“食识食者”:为拔除其对“食”所作质问的恶见,而说:“谁……食或用食?”显示巴利原文
12.Imasmiṃyeva ṭhāneti ‘‘cattārome bhikkhu…pe… āhārā’’ti evaṃ cattāro āhāre sarūpato dassetvā ‘‘ime kho bhikkhave…pe… anuggahāyā’’ti nigamanavasena dassite imasmiṃyeva ṭhāne. Desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi catuāhāravibhāgadīpakaṃ desanaṃ uddesavaseneva niṭṭhāpesi, upari āvajjetvā tuṇhī nisīdi. Diṭṭhigatikoti attadiṭṭhivasena diṭṭhigatiko. Varagandhavāsitanti sabhāvasiddhena candanagandhena ceva tadaññanānāgandhena ca paribhāvitattā varagandhavāsitaṃ . Ratanacaṅkoṭavarenāti ratanamayena uttamacaṅkoṭakena. Desanānusandhiṃ ghaṭentoti yathādesitāya desanāya anusandhiṃ ghaṭento, yathā uparidesanā vaddheyya, evaṃ ussāhaṃ karonto. Viññāṇāhāraṃ āhāretīti tassa āhāraṇakiriyāya vuttapucchāya taṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppāṭento ‘‘yo etaṃ…pe… bhuñjati vā’’ti āha.
所谓识食,既然有所欲求的对象,就必定有它的受用者,所以“那是谁呢?”便是这个问题的用意所在。“时节”指的是出胎的时候。因为那只是时节中的极短时刻,所以才如此说。“怕卵被水冲毁”,所以龟从大海中出来。如同兀鹫幼雏是以食思维持生命,那些龟犊也是依意思食而活,这是那位长老的主张。虽然称为“主张”,但无论是在触食还是意思食上,长老的这番主张是否合理呢?“这个问句”──也就是“尊者,谁受用识食?”这个问句──他并非依据上述的主张来问,而是依于有情的执见而问,这便是其意趣所在。他,就是那位“见行者”。不应当去驳斥他,因为他就像疯子一样,在不明白问句意趣的情形下便发问。因此,世尊说:“我不说‘有受用者’”等语。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇāhāre nāma icchite tassa upabhuñjakenapi bhavitabbaṃ, so ‘‘ko nu kho’’ti ayaṃ pucchāya adhippāyo. Utusamayeti gabbhavuṭṭhānasamaye. So hi utusamayassa mattakasamayattā tathā vutto. ‘‘Udakena aṇḍāni mā nassantū’’ti mahāsamuddato nikkhamitvā. Gijjhapotakā viya āhārasañcetanāya tāni kacchapaṇḍāni manosañcetanāhārena yāpentīti ayaṃ tassa therassa laddhi. Kiñcāpi ayaṃ laddhīti phassamanosañcetanāhāresu kiñcāpi therassa yuttā ayuttā vā ayaṃ laddhi. Imaṃ pañhanti ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāraṃ āhāretī’’ti imaṃ pañhaṃ etāya yathāvuttāya laddhiyā na pana pucchati, atha kho sattupaladdhiyā pucchatīti adhippāyo. Soti diṭṭhigatiko. Na niggahetabbo ummattakasadisattā adhippāyaṃ ajānitvā pucchāya katattā. Tenāha ‘‘āhāretīti nāhaṃ vadāmī’’tiādi.
在那段话中,当我说了“受用者”时,即是当我说出“受用”这样的话时。这个问句──“尊者,谁受用识食?”──这个问句才可能是合理的。当以这种方式的提问时,即不依有情的执见,而是以“以何法为缘”这样纯粹依法之运作的方式提问时。所谓“就以那个识”──是指与结生识一同生起的名色,由于过去有中见行者的执见,而产生了未来的后有,这便是此处所要表达的意思。当有了名色的生起,以此为缘,便有了六处。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ mayā evaṃ vutteti tasmiṃ vacane mayā ‘‘āhāretī’’ti evaṃ vutte sati. Ayaṃ pañhoti ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāraṃ āhāretī’’ti ayaṃ pañho yutto bhaveyya. Evaṃ pucchite pañheti sattupaladdhiṃ anādāya ‘‘katamassa dhammassa paccayo’’ti evaṃ dhammapavattavaseneva pañhe pucchite. Teneva viññāṇenāti teneva paṭisandhiviññāṇena saha uppannaṃ nāmañca rūpañca atītabhave diṭṭhigatikassa vasena āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti idhādhippetaṃ. Nāmarūpe jāte satīti nāmarūpe nibbatte tappaccayabhūtaṃ bhinditvā saḷāyatanaṃ hoti.
在此,缘的分列为:这里所说的“名”,是指受等三蕴;“色”则是指包含在有情相续中的那些色法,具体而言即是四大种、六所依、命根与食。其中,异熟名在结生的刹那,作为心所依的伴侣,对第六意处,以俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、异熟缘、有缘、不离缘这七种方式而成为缘。这其中,有些是以因缘,有些是以食缘而成为缘,并应了知其中有增上、中等等种种差别。对于其余的五处及四大种,异熟名作为伴侣,以俱生缘、依止缘、异熟缘、不相应缘、有缘、不离缘这六种方式而成为缘。同样地,这其中有些是以因缘,有些是以食缘,一切都与前述情况类似。在转起的过程中,异熟名对异熟的第六处,以前述方式以七种缘成为缘;而非异熟的名对非异熟的第六处,则去掉异熟缘这一项而成为缘。对于眼处等,无论是当下现起的依眼净色等为依处的,还是其他的,异熟名都以后生缘、不相应缘、有缘、不离缘这四种方式成为缘;非异熟名也应当这样理解。从色方面来说,依处色在结生时对第六处,以俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、不相应缘、有缘、不离缘这六种方式而成为缘。而四大种对眼处等五处,则以俱生缘、显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ paccayavibhāgo – nāmanti vedanādikhandhattayaṃ idhādhippetaṃ, rūpaṃ pana sattasantatipariyāpannaṃ, niyamato cattāri bhūtāni cha vatthūni jīvitindriyaṃ āhāro ca. Tattha vipākanāmaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe hadayavatthuno sahāyo hutvā chaṭṭhassa manāyatanassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttavipākaatthiavigatapaccayehi sattadhā paccayo hoti. Kiñci panettha hetupaccayena kiñci āhārapaccayenāti evaṃ ukkaṃsāvakaṃso veditabbo. Itaresaṃ pana pañcāyatanānaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ sahāyo hutvā sahajātanissayavipākavippayuttaatthiavigatavasena chadhā paccayo hoti. Kiñci panettha hetupaccayena kiñci āhārapaccayenāti sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ. Pavatte vipākanāmaṃ vipākassa chaṭṭhāyatanassa vuttanayena sattadhā paccayo hoti, avipākaṃ pana avipākassa chaṭṭhassa tato vipākapaccayaṃ apanetvā paccayo hoti. Cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ cakkhupasādādivatthukampi itarampi vipākanāmaṃ pacchājātavippayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi catudhā paccayo hoti, tathā avipākampi veditabbaṃ. Rūpato pana vatthurūpaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ chaṭṭhassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayavippayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi chadhā paccayo hoti. Cattāri pana bhūtāni cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ sahajātanissayaatthiavigatapaccayehi catudhā paccayo hoti. Rūpajīvitaṃ atthiavigatindriyavasena tidhā paccayo hotīti ayañhettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 2.594) gahetabbo.
所谓“为问题提供机会”,即是为了给“尊者,谁触?”这个见行者的问题提供机会,意思是想要从中脱离出来。“在一切语句中”,是指见行者和世尊所说的那些语句。所谓“有情”,就是指自我。即使是持断灭论的人,在还未断灭之前,也主张“有自我”,更不用说持常见论的人了。“存在者”是指实有的。“已完成者”是指已成就的,他执持“现在已无所需成就”的主张。“从此缘而有此”,就是从识食之缘而有此名色。“又从此缘而有此”,就是从名色之缘而有此六处。因为世尊在许多场合都这样说过,所以他只是得到了“这些不过是依缘所生的行而已”的认知。因此,即便是以这种认知,他也会把这些问题捆绑起来,使发问没有空隙可钻,于是顺着教说的脉络来讲:从六处这一句开始,“以六处为缘而有触”等等,这样开示下来,便登上了缘起的序列。他就是抓住那个六处句,避开其他的,这样说道:“只是六……”等等,以这种方式说法,“应调伏的众生便能通达”。识食是未来后有产生之缘,像这样显示巴利原文
Pañhassa okāsaṃ dentoti ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatī’’ti imassa diṭṭhigatikapañhassa okāsaṃ dento. Tato vivecetukāmoti adhippāyo. Sabbapadesūti diṭṭhigatikena bhagavatā ca vuttapadesu. Sattoti attā. So pana ucchedavādinopi yāva na ucchijjati, tāva atthevāti laddhi, pageva sassatavādino. Bhūtoti vijjamāno. Nipphattoti nipphanno. Na tassa dāni nipphādetabbaṃ kiñci atthīti laddhi. Idappaccayā idanti imasmā viññāṇāhārapaccayā idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Puna idappaccayā idanti imasmā nāmarūpapaccayā idaṃ saḷāyatananti evaṃ bahūsu ṭhānesu bhagavatā kathitattā yathā paccayato nibbattaṃ saṅkhāramattamidanti saññattiṃ upagato. Tenāpīti saññattupagatenāpi. Ekābaddhaṃ katvāti yathā pucchāya avasaro na hoti, tathā ekābaddhaṃ katvā. Desanāruḷhanti yato saḷāyatanapadato paṭṭhāya ‘‘saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso’’tiādinā desanā paṭiccasamuppādavīthiṃ āruḷhameva. Tamevāti saḷāyatanapadameva gahetvā. Vivajjentoti vivaṭṭento. Evamāhāti ‘‘channaṃtvevā’’tiādiākārena evaṃ desite, ‘‘vineyyajano paṭivijjhatī’’ti evamāha. Viññāṇāhāro āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyāti evaṃ purimabhavato āyatibhavassa paccayavasena mūlakāraṇavasena ca desitattā ‘‘viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ antare eko sandhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadaminā viññāṇaggahaṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassāpi gahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
3. 《沙门婆罗门经》注疏显示巴利原文
3. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
13 那些在缘的聚合中,能够以那个自体通达诸谛的人,即使他们处在外道的范围里,也正因为他们就在那里具备这种能力,且考虑到他们未来将止息已造的恶法,所以仍被认可为沙门、被认可为婆罗门。为了遮止他们,才说“不能通达诸谛”。这是以苦圣谛的角度来说的——否则,外道怎么会不知老死是苦呢?有些人说,因为没有对圣谛的教导,所以说“与渴爱一起”;那种说法不妥当。因为在诸有中、各处的第一次结生,这里指的就是“生”,而那个生就是渴爱本身,从相续的意义上说,渴爱就是那个生。而这里的“老死”是明显的通常所说的老死,并非刹那的老死,因此,带有渴爱的生与老死之集,应当看作是如实之说。从集圣谛的角度,他们不能了知,应当这样连接理解。同样的道理也适用于其他各句。所谓“在一切句中”,是指那些应当以渴爱作为限定词来说的所有语句。由于具足了什么,一个人才在究竟义上被称为沙门、婆罗门,所具足的东西就是沙门性、婆罗门性,所以说“圣的沙门性、婆罗门性”。因为沙门这个词、婆罗门这个词是基于其作用的特征而在各自本义上固定下来的,凭借这个显示巴利原文
13. Ye paccayasamavāye tenattabhāvena saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ samatthā, te bāhirakaliṅge ṭhitāpi teneva tattha samatthatāyogena bhāvinaṃ samitabāhitapāpataṃ apekkhitvā samaṇasammatāyeva brāhmaṇasammatāyevāti te nivattetuṃ ‘‘saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ asamatthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dukkhasaccavasenāti dukkhaariyasaccavasena. Aññathā kathaṃ bāhirakāpi jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhanti na jānanti. Saccadesanābhāvato ‘‘saha taṇhāyā’’ti vuttanti keci. Taṃ na suṭṭhu. Yasmā tattha tattha bhave paṭhamābhinibbatti, idha jātīti adhippetā, sā ca taṇhā eva santānena, taṇheva sā jāti. Jarāmaraṇañcettha pākaṭameva adhippetaṃ, na khaṇikaṃ, tasmā sataṇhā eva jātijarāmaraṇassa samudayoti bhūtakathanametaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Samudayasaccavasena na jānantīti yojanā. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Sabbapadesūti yattha taṇhā visesanabhāvena vattabbā, tesu sabbapadesu. Yena samannāgatattā puggalo paramatthato samaṇo brāhmaṇoti vuccati, taṃ sāmaññaṃ brahmaññañcāti āha ‘‘ariya…pe… brahmaññañcā’’ti. Yena hi pavattinimittena samaṇa-saddo brāhmaṇa-saddo ca sake atthe niruḷho, tassa vasena abhinnopi veneyyajjhāsayato dvidhā katvā vattuṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhayatthāpī’’ti. Ekādasasu ṭhānesu cattāri saccāni kathesi avijjāsamudayassa anuddhaṭattā.
第二《沙门婆罗门经》注疏显示巴利原文
4. Dutiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
14 在“ime dhamme katame dhammeti”这句话中,“iti”一词是引用的意思,因此它是对“这些法,哪些法”这些词的总结。因为这些词是对老死等共通而说的,构成了这部教导的展开部分,所以说“作了这么多展开而说,教导是依于补特伽罗的意欲”。由此,取了那些老死等,依补特伽罗的意欲,从一开始就用“这些法”等方式,以通用于一切词的方式开始教导。因为经教是随顺教导,而非依法教导。显示巴利原文
14.Imedhamme katame dhammeti ca ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena ‘‘imesaṃ dhammānaṃ katamesaṃ dhammāna’’nti imesaṃ padānaṃ saṅgaho. Etāni hi padāni jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvena vuttāni imissā desanāya papañcabhūtānīti āha ‘‘ettakaṃ papañcaṃ katvā kathitaṃ, desanaṃ…pe… ajjhāsayenā’’ti. Iminā tāneva jarāmaraṇādīni gahetvā puggalajjhāsayavasena ādito ‘‘ime dhamme’’tiādinā sabbapadasādhāraṇato desanā āraddhā. Yathānulomasāsanañhi suttantadesanā, na yathādhammasāsananti.
《迦旃延姓经》注疏显示巴利原文
5. Kaccānagottasuttavaṇṇanā
15 于此,了知者称“正见”,不了知者、外道与教内之人,或依传闻,或依自证,亦作此说。因此取多数人之说,以重复方式言:“正见、正见,尊者,被称为。”此种重复之用,是为标示所论之情形。此处意趣为:“他人亦被称为正见,然当如此称时,依于义与相,尊者,究竟如何方为正见?”然注疏中说,于“正见”一词,唯智者堪为准衡,愚者则否,故说“智者”等。具有两部分,故称“二”,指两类见之执取对象;依见执取方式而依附、依著,故称“依于二者”。因此说“依于两部分”。以彼见执取“此整个世界存在、有、一切时常存”之见行者,彼见即是“存在”;由于彼“世间一切时常存”之执取转起,即是“常见”,亦即“常”。以彼见执取“此整个世界不存在、无、断灭”之见行者,彼见即是“非存在”;由于彼“断灭”之执取生起,即是“断见”,亦即“断”。所言“世间”,指“行世间”,因执取应发生于其上。“以正慧”:以无颠倒慧、以如实慧,故说“与观俱之道慧”。显示巴利原文
15. Yasmā idha jānantāpi ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti vadanti ajānantāpi bāhirakāpi sāsanikāpi anussavādivasenapi attapaccakkhenapi, tasmā taṃ bahūnaṃ vacanaṃ upādāya āmeḍitavasena ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti, bhante, vuccatī’’ti āha. Tathāniddiṭṭhatādassanatthaṃ hissa ayaṃ āmeḍitapayogo. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – ‘‘aparehipi sammādiṭṭhīti vuccati, sā panāyaṃ evaṃ vuccamānā atthañca lakkhaṇañca upādāya kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, sammādiṭṭhi hotī’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti vacane yasmā viññū eva pamāṇaṃ, na aviññū, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ paṇḍitā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dve avayavā assāti dvayaṃ, duvidhaṃ diṭṭhigāhavatthu, dvayaṃ diṭṭhigāhavasena nissito apassitoti dvayanissito. Tenāha ‘‘dve koṭṭhāse nissito’’ti. Yāya diṭṭhiyā ‘‘sabboyaṃ loko atthi vijjati sabbakālaṃ upalabbhatī’’ti diṭṭhigatiko gaṇhāti, sā diṭṭhi atthitā, sā eva sadā sabbakālaṃ loko atthīti pavattagāhatāya sassato, taṃ sassataṃ. Yāya diṭṭhiyā ‘‘sabboyaṃ loko natthi na hoti ucchijjatī’’ti diṭṭhigatiko gaṇhāti, sā diṭṭhi natthitā, sā eva ucchijjatīti uppannagāhatāya ucchedo, taṃ ucchedaṃ. Loko nāma saṅkhāraloko tamhi gahetabbato. Sammappaññāyāti aviparītapaññāya yathābhūtapaññāya. Tenāha ‘‘savipassanā maggapaññā’’ti. Nibbattesu dhammesūti yathā paccayuppannesu rūpārūpadhammesu. Paññāyante svevāti santānanibandhanavasena paññāyamānesu eva. Yā natthīti yā ucchedadiṭṭhi tattha tattheva sattānaṃ ucchijjanato vinassanato koci ṭhito nāma satto dhammo vā natthīti saṅkhāraloke uppajjeyya. ‘‘Natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti pavattamānāpi micchādiṭṭhi tathāpavattasaṅkhārārammaṇāva. Sā na hotīti kammāvijjātaṇhādibhedaṃ paccayaṃ paṭicca saṅkhāralokassa samudayanibbattiṃ sammappaññāya passato, sā ucchedadiṭṭhi, na hoti, nappavattati avicchedena saṅkhārānaṃ nibbattidassanato. Lokanirodhanti saṅkhāralokassa khaṇikanirodhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅga’’nti. Yā atthīti hetuphalasambandhena pavattamānassa santānānupacchedassa ekattaggahaṇena saṅkhāraloke yā sassatadiṭṭhi sabbakālaṃ loko atthīti uppajjeyya. Sā na hotīti uppannuppannānaṃ nirodhassa navanavānañca uppādassa dassanato, sā sassatadiṭṭhi na hoti.
“世间从此生起”,故称“世间集”,即指“随顺缘相”。缘法对于自果具有缘之作用,此即随顺缘相。将“逆缘相”亦带入连接:由一一因之灭,便有一一果之灭,此即逆缘相。实则,无明等缘法所有之因等缘作用,即是无余之世间集。此为缘所生诸行等而说。“见无断”:即见无断之因。此处非仅从刹那角度导出生成与坏灭之理,亦从缘之角度导出生成与坏灭之理。显示巴利原文
Loko samudeti etasmāti lokasamudayoti āha ‘‘anulomapaccayākāra’’nti. Paccayadhammānañhi attano phalassa paccayabhāvo anulomapaccayākāro. Paṭilomaṃ paccayākāranti ānetvā sambandho. Taṃtaṃhetunirodhato taṃtaṃphalanirodho hi paṭilomapaccayākāro. Yo hi avijjādīnaṃ paccayadhammānaṃ hetuādipaccayabhāvo, so nippariyāyato lokasamudayo. Paccayuppannassa saṅkhārādikassa. Anucchedaṃ passatoti anucchedadassanassa hetu. Ayampīti na kevalaṃ khaṇato udayavayanīharaṇanayo, atha kho paccayato udayavayanīharaṇanayopi.
以接近之义,故渴爱称为“近”。同理,见亦称为“近”。依此道理,此处“近”等,更指出取等并无差别。且复于彼,他们被执取为两种。岂非于他处说有四种取?诚然已说,然他们于意义上唯有二种,此处即如此说。虽“我、我的”之说于次第不顺,但了知意义时,应依顺次理解。“等”字亦当包含前后、净、不净等。“那些法”:指三地之法。“定居”:指以变异而住,即倾向之义。“以彼”:即以彼渴爱、见。“被异绑”:指以变异绑缚,或以无从解脱之方式,由限定而被绑缚。显示巴利原文
Upagamanaṭṭhena taṇhāva upayo. Tathā diṭṭhupayo. Eseva nayoti iminā upayehi upādānādīnaṃ anatthantarataṃ atidisati. Tathā ca pana tesu duvidhatā upādīyati. Nanu ca cattāri upādānāni aññattha vuttānīti? Saccaṃ vuttāni, tāni ca kho atthato dve evāti idha evaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāmaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti ayathānukkamena vuttaṃ, yathānukkamaṃyeva pana attho veditabbo. Ādi-saddena paroparassa subhaṃ asubhantiādīnañca saṅgaho veditabbo. Te dhammeti tebhūmakadhamme. Vinivisantīti virūpaṃ nivisanti, abhinivisantīti attho. Tāhīti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi. Vinibaddhoti virūpaṃ vimuccituṃ vā appadānavasena niyametvā baddho.
「倾向」:指「近」与「取」生起方式上的特殊差别,故说「彼即是近与取」。「心的」:即不善心的。「作为依处」:即作为基础。即使以瞋、痴而转起的不善心,也以渴爱、见、倾向为近依,故说渴爱与见是不善心的所依。「在那之中」:指在不善心中。「倾向」:以「这是我的」「这是我的我」等方式倾向,令之转起。「随眠」:变得强有力,以未能断除的状态而随眠。「彼两者」:指渴爱与见两者。「不接近」:不以「这是我的」等,不以渴爱、见的方式接近、黏着。「不取」:不执取强固的执取。「不依止」:不以渴爱、见的执取为依止而转起。「我所执」:基于我执的存在而有,故说「我的我」。此苦的执取依于取蕴,若无他们蕴则无苦,故说「唯苦即唯五取蕴」。诚如所言:「略言之,五取蕴是苦」(长部等)。「不产生疑惑」:即不生起疑惑,因疑已彻底断除。显示巴利原文
‘‘Abhiniveso’’ti upayupādānānaṃ pavattiākāraviseso vuttoti āha ‘‘tañcāyanti tañca upayupādāna’’nti. Cittassāti akusalacittassa. Patiṭṭhānabhūtanti ādhārabhūtaṃ. Dosamohavasenapi akusalacittappavatti taṇhādiṭṭhābhinivesūpanissayā evāti taṇhādiṭṭhiyo akusalassa cittassa adhiṭṭhānanti vuttā. Tasminti akusalacitte. Abhinivisantīti ‘‘etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’tiādinā abhinivesanaṃ pavattenti. Anusentīti thāmagatā hutvā appahānabhāvena anusenti. Tadubhayanti taṇhādiṭṭhidvayaṃ. Na upagacchatīti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā taṇhādiṭṭhigatiyā na upasaṅkamati na allīyati. Na upādiyatīti na daḷhaggāhaṃ gaṇhāti. Na adhiṭṭhātīti na taṇhādiṭṭhigāhena adhiṭṭhāya pavattati. Attaniyagāho nāma sati attagāhe hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘attā me’’ti. Idaṃ dukkhaggahaṇaṃ upādānakkhandhāpassayaṃ tabbinimuttassa dukkhassa abhāvāti vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhamevāti pañcupādānakkhandhamattamevā’’ti. ‘‘Saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.387; ma. ni. 1.120; 3.373; vibha. 190) hi vuttaṃ. Kaṅkhaṃ na karotīti saṃsayaṃ na uppādeti sabbaso vicikicchāya samucchindanato.
「非以他人为缘」:指非因听闻他人之说而相信。他所说的「混合正见」,由于是从名色分别开始所说的正见,故称为世间与出世间相混合的正见。「低劣的」:即下劣的尽头。因「Nikūṭa」一词是下劣的同义词,故说「低劣的」。而「第一」中的「ka」音表示呵责。「一切都无」:指如同有为法,由于生起又坏灭,故说一切都不存在;其意趣在于表达一切断灭、完全毁坏。而「一切都有」:则指像无为法那样存在、存有,于一切时皆可证得之义。此处的「一切」应理解为有关有身的一切,如《一切法根本经》等中所说。因这「一切」是遍知智的所缘。「Iti」一词是举例说明;举例说明什么呢?即由「存在」一词所表达的「有性」,亦即恒常性。在此,常见执著被视作第一边,断见执著为第二边,而脱离此二者的,即是缘起的道理。于此教法中,佛陀宣说诸法生起又灭去,故不落常见;又宣说灭去的诸法若因缘具足,仍会于趋向涅槃之际再次结生,故亦不落断见。佛陀即是以中道,也就是……显示巴利原文
Na parappaccayenāti parassa asaddahanena. Missakasammādiṭṭhiṃ āhāti nāmarūpaparicchedato paṭṭhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā vuttattā lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ sammādiṭṭhiṃ avoca. Nikūṭantoti nihīnanto. Nihīnapariyāyo hi ayaṃ nikūṭa-saddo. Tenāha ‘‘lāmakanto’’ti. Paṭhamakanti ca garahāyaṃ ka-saddo. Sabbaṃ natthīti yathāsaṅkhataṃ bhaṅguppattiyā natthi eva, sabbaṃ natthi ucchijjati vinassatīti adhippāyo. Sabbamatthīti ca yathā asaṅkhataṃ atthi vijjati, sabbakālaṃ upalabbhatīti adhippāyo. Sabbanti cettha sakkāyasabbaṃ veditabbaṃ ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) viya. Tañhi pariññāñāṇānaṃ paccayabhūtaṃ. Iti-saddo nidassane. Kiṃ nidasseti? Atthi-saddena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthita’’nti niccataṃ. Sassataggāho hi idha paṭhamo antoti adhippeto. Ucchedaggāho dutiyoti tadubhayavinimuttā ca idappaccayatā. Ettha ca uppannanirodhakathanato sassatataṃ, nirujjhantānaṃ asati nibbānappattiyaṃ yathāpaccayaṃ punūpagamanakathanato ucchedatañca anupagamma majjhimena bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti idappaccayatānayena. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ete…pe… ante’’tiādi.
6. 说法者经注疏显示巴利原文
6. Dhammakathikasuttavaṇṇanā
16 「为厌离故」:指为了证得厌离随观。因为这种随观,以厌离的行相,转起于以老死为首而被说的有为法上。「为离染故」:指为了证得离染随观。「从戒开始」:即从依止于出离的持戒开始。具足入流支而安住于依出离之戒的在家居士也称为正行道者,更何况是安住于四遍净戒的比丘。因此说:「应知如此修行,直到阿拉汉道为止。」「为涅槃法」:即带来涅槃的圣道。「成为相应之本性」:指成为证得涅槃的相应本性。「厌离」:以此词,他指出以出起为终点的观智。「离染」与「灭」:以此二词指出圣道,以另一词指出果。「在此」:即在此经中。「以一种方式」:即第一种方式。因为在此,世尊被那位比丘问及说法者的特征,便将其推至极点而作回答。因为能把观与道教导至无取解脱者,才是纯粹的说法者。因此说:「说法者的提问已被解答。」「以两种」:即以第二、第三种方式。「彼」:指提问。「特化」:即作出殊胜化。不仅宣说所问的,亦显示未问及之义,将法随法行导向称为无取解脱的殊胜境界。因为世尊犹如被求少许而赐予众多的大丈夫,被问说法者特征时,通过缘起之门,不仅解说了该特征,更进而解说了法随法行与无取解脱。其中,以「为厌离……乃至……说法」一句,显示说法为习行分位;以「为灭而行道」一句,显示为抉择分位;以「成为无取解脱」一句,显示说法为无学分位。因此说:「有学与无学之地已被指出。」显示巴利原文
16.Nibbindanatthāyāti nibbidānupassanāpaṭilābhāya. Sā hi jarāmaraṇasīsena vuttesu saṅkhatadhammesu nibbindanākārena pavattati. Virajjanatthāyāti virāgānupassanāpaṭilābhāya. Sīlato paṭṭhāyāti vivaṭṭasannissitasīlasamādānato paṭṭhāya. Sotāpattiyaṅgehi samannāgato vivaṭṭasannissitasīle patiṭṭhito upāsakopi pageva catupārisuddhisīle patiṭṭhito bhikkhu sammāpaṭipanno nāma. Tenāha ‘‘yāva arahattamaggā paṭipannoti veditabbo’’ti. Nibbānadhammassāti nibbānāvahassa ariyassa maggassa. Anurūpasabhāvabhūtanti nibbānādhigamassa anucchavikasabhāvabhūtaṃ. Nibbidāti iminā vuṭṭhānagāminipariyosānaṃ vipassanaṃ vadati. Virāgā nirodhāti padadvayena ariyamaggaṃ, itarena phalaṃ. Etthāti imasmiṃ sutte. Ekena nayenāti paṭhamena nayena. Tattha hi bhagavā tena bhikkhunā dhammakathikalakkhaṇaṃ pucchito taṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā vissajjesi. Yo hi vipassanaṃ maggaṃ anupādāvimuttiṃ pāpetvā kathetuṃ sakkoti, so ekantadhammakathiko. Tenāha ‘‘dhammakathikassa pucchā kathitā’’ti. Dvīhīti dutiyatatiyanayehi. Tanti pucchaṃ. Visesetvāti visiṭṭhaṃ katvā. Yathāpucchitamattameva akathetvā apucchitampi atthaṃ dassento dhammānudhammapaṭipattiṃ anupādāya vimuttisaṅkhātaṃ visesaṃ pāpetvā. Bhagavā hi appaṃ yācito bahuṃ dento uḷārapuriso viya dhammakathikalakkhaṇaṃ pucchito paṭiccasamuppādamukhena tañceva tato ca uttariṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipattiṃ anupādāvimuttañca vissajjesi. Tattha ‘‘nibbidāya…pe… dhammaṃ desetī’’ti iminā dhammadesanaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ katvā dassesi. ‘‘Nirodhāya paṭipanno hotī’’ti iminā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ, ‘‘anupādāvimutto hotī’’ti iminā desanaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ katvā dassesi. Tenāha ‘‘sekkhāsekkhabhūmiyo niddiṭṭhā’’ti.
7. 裸形迦叶经注疏显示巴利原文
7. Acelakassapasuttavaṇṇanā
17 “以相为裸形者”:即依出家之相而为裸形者。他是以此裸形行仪而为裸形者,并非仅因无衣,以此显示其义。“以名字”:即依氏族名字而称迦叶。“宣说”:即阐明;因它能除遣疑惑,故名为“宣说”,也就是决断之因,所以称为“某个地方”等。因为它能除遣疑惑,所以是原因。“场所”:即允许停留之处,故说“瞬间、时刻”。“村内”:即房舍之内。因为其中有房屋,故称“村内”,也就是村庄的内部。“无论你想”:即随你所愿。如此,世尊以一切智者的自恣而行自恣,开许提问,因此说“随你所愿”。“无论你想”:迦叶,即随你所愿;即使你三次推辞,仍然请问吧,也就是说,你想问什么就只管提问——这是它的意思。显示巴利原文
17.Liṅgenaacelakoti pabbajitaliṅgena acelako. Tena acelakacaraṇena acelo, na niccelatāmattenāti dasseti. Nāmenāti gottanāmena kassapoti. Deseti pavedeti saṃsayavigamanaṃ etenāti deso, nicchayahetūti āha ‘‘kiñcideva desa’’ntiādi. So hi saṃsayavigamanaṃ karotīti kāraṇaṃ. Okāsanti avasaṃsandanapadesaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khaṇaṃ kāla’’nti. Antaragharaṃ antonivesanaṃ. Antare gharāni etassāti antaragharaṃ, antogāmo. Yadākaṅkhasīti yaṃ ākaṅkhasi. Iti bhagavā sabbaññupavāraṇāya pavāreti. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ icchasī’’ti. Yadākaṅkhasīti yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, kassapa, tikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipantopi pucchasi, yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, tameva pucchāti attho.
因为说到“乃至第三次拒绝”,所以应有“第三次确实……”等文句。然而应视此为依理趣而略说。为显示世尊令裸形者三次恳请之后才为他说法的因由,故说“然而为何……”等。他之所以拒绝至第三次,是为了令人生起恭敬,并激起对法的渴望欲闻,因为诸佛世尊重法。为等待众生的智慧成熟,便让他请求三次——将此依词形变化视为通说,配合词语后,再结合迦叶的情形,应解为“以这段时间”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāvatatiyaṃ paṭikkhipī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘tatiyampi kho’’tiādinā pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. So pana nayavasena saṃkhittoti daṭṭhabbo. Yena kāraṇena bhagavā acelakassa tikkhattuṃ yācāpetvā cassa pañhaṃ kathesi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Gāravajananatthaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ paṭikkhipi tañca dhammassa sussūsāya. Dhammagarukā hi buddhā bhagavanto. Sattānaṃ ñāṇaparipākaṃ āgamayamāno yāvatatiyaṃ yācāpetīti vibhattivipariṇāmavasena sādhāraṇato padaṃ yojetvā puna ‘‘ettakena kālenā’’ti kassapassa vasena yojetabbaṃ.
「莫」(Mā):这是一个表示禁止的不变词。「说」(Bhaṇī):这是通过重复述说来代表动词,意思是“不要这样说,不要如此说”。而「世尊如此说」(Iti bhagavā avocā)这句话,则是结集者的话。「苦是自作的」(Sayaṃkataṃ dukkhaṃ):这是指一个人正在生起的苦。说这个苦是由他自己造作的,是因为以前他自己所累积的业成为了现在受苦的原因。这种理解方式是没有过失的。但是,那位「见行者」却设想出一个脱离了五蕴、永恒不变、具有造作者和感受者特征的“我”。他以这个设想为根据,来问“苦是自作的吗”。世尊为了阻止这种错误见解,就说了“切莫这样说”。因此,注疏里才有“不应该说苦是自作的”等等的解释。在这里,假如真的像外道们所设想的那样,存在一个永恒不变的“我”,那么这个“我”由于没有变化,因为它不会舍弃原来的形态,也就无法对任何人施加任何改变或特殊的教化。这样一来,为了让人远离不善、转向善而去教导,对于主张有“我”的人来说,就变得毫无意义了。为什么呢?那样的教导要怎样进行呢?因为它没有变化,教导根本无法运作。如此一来,对于主张有“我”的人来说,布施等善行和伤害等恶行也都不可能存在,就像虚空不会变化一样。同样地,对于主张有“我”的人来说,感受快乐和痛苦的关联性也说不通,因为根本没有业的束缚。而且,既然“我”是永恒的,就不会有生等,那么又从哪里来的解脱呢?假如有人说:“那些只是‘法’在他那里生起又消灭,而所谓的‘行为’,就是依据这些法来说的。”即使这样解释也行不通。因为如果那个“我”是稳固不变的,并没有舍弃原来的形态,却把它称为‘仅仅是法’,这根本是说不通的。退一步说,那些法是他的状态,那么这些状态是和“我”不同的,还是相同的?如果它们和“我”是不同的,那么即使那些法在他那里生起变化,“我”本身也没有任何差别。但是,我们所认识的造作、感受、死、生等现象,正是需要这些变化,所以这样解释就出现了过失,而且安立这些法的概念也毫无实际利益。如果那些状态和“我”是相同的、没有差别,那么‘我’就变成了一个具有生灭变化的状态。状态有生灭,也就意味着‘我’也有生灭,这样一来,‘我’是永恒常住的这种说法,就完全没有立足之地了。或者,如果反过来,那些状态也像‘我’一样变成了恒常不变的东西,那么业的束缚和解脱也就都不可能存在了。所以说,这种主张有‘我’的理论,是完全站不住脚的。因此,经中说:‘这表示,没有任何一个所谓的我是苦的制造者’。「由他」(Parato):在接下来的“苦由他所造”等问句中,针对其他三种问难方式,也要用同样的道理去理解。「无因生」(Adhiccasamuppanna):意思是没有原因、随意地,不需要任何因缘,或者不需要任何先前的原因,就这样无端生起。注疏解释说:“没有因,随意地生起”。那么他为什么会这样问呢?这句话的意思是,接下来他会这样提问。这里的「他的」(Assa),是指那位裸形外道的。「此」(Ayaṃ),是指世尊。「净化问题」(Sodhento):意思是这位裸形外道在自行净化自己的问题,想显示自己所问的问题很纯粹,其真实目的是为了遮止那种认为“苦是自作的”的错误执着。显示巴利原文
Māti paṭisedhe nipāto. Bhaṇīti punavacanavasena kiriyāpadaṃ vadati. Mā evaṃ bhaṇi, kathesīti attho. ‘‘Iti bhagavā avocā’’ti pana saṅgītikāravacanaṃ. Sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti purisassa uppajjamānadukkhaṃ, tena kataṃ nāma tassa kāraṇassa pubbe teneva kammassa upacitattāti ayaṃ nayo anavajjo. Diṭṭhigatiko pana pañcakkhandhavinimuttaṃ niccaṃ kārakavedakalakkhaṇaṃ attānaṃ parikappetvā tassa vasena ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti pucchatīti bhagavā ‘‘mā heva’’nti avoca, tenāha ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti vattuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’tiādi. Ettha ca yadi bāhirakehi parikappito attā nāma koci atthi, so ca nicco, tassa nibbikāratāya, purimarūpāvijahanato kassaci visesādhānassa kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ahitato nivattanatthaṃ, hite ca vattanatthaṃ upadeso ca nippayojano siyā attavādino. Kathaṃ vā so upadeso pavattīyati? Vikārābhāvato. Evañca attano ajaṭākāsassa viya dānādikiriyā hiṃsādikiriyā ca na sambhavati, tathā sukhassa dukkhassa ca anubhavanabandho eva attavādino na yujjati kammabandhābhāvato. Jātiādīnañca asambhavato kuto vimokkho. Atha pana ‘‘dhammamattaṃ tassa uppajjati ceva vinassati ca. Yassa vasenāyaṃ kiriyāvohāro’’ti vadeyya, evampi purimarūpāvijahanena avaṭṭhitassa attano dhammamattanti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ. Te vā panassa dhammā avatthābhūtā, tato aññe vā siyuṃ anaññe vā. Yadi aññe, na tāhi tassa uppannāhipi koci viseso atthi. Yo hi karoti paṭisaṃvedeti cavati upapajjati cāti icchitaṃ, tasmā tadattho eva yathāvuttadoso. Kiñca dhammakappanāpi niratthikā siyā. Atha anaññe, uppādavināsavantīhi avatthāhi anaññassa attano tāsaṃ viya uppādavināsasambhavato kuto niccatāvakāso. Tāsampi vā attano viya niccatāpattīti bandhavimokkhānaṃ asambhavo evāti na yujjatevāyaṃ attavādo. Tenāha ‘‘attā nāma koci dukkhassa kārako natthīti dīpetī’’ti. Paratoti ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’ntiādike parasmiṃ tividhepi naye. Adhiccasamuppannanti adhicca yadicchāya kiñci kāraṇaṃ kassaci vā pubbaṃ vinā samuppannaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘akāraṇena yadicchāya uppanna’’nti. Kasmā evamāhāti evaṃ vakkhamānoti adhippāyo. Assāti acelassa. Ayanti bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sodhentoti sayaṃ visuddhaṃ katvā pucchitamatthaṃ eva attano pucchāya suddhiṃ dassento. Laddhiyā ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti micchāgahaṇassa paṭisedhanatthāya.
「他造作」(So karoti)即他造作了业。「他感受」(So paṭisaṃvedayati):此句意在阐明造作者与感受者为同一,而非表示造业与受果同时发生。其中「iti」是表示例示的助词,「kho」是表示决定的助词,故“即是彼”之义得以明确表示,因为这些助词正用于不定指称。「从一开始」(Ādito):指于初始之时。正是由于内心执取“苦为自作”的邪见,才首先生起“他造作、他感受”这样的想颠倒、心颠倒与见颠倒。由于从想颠倒生起心颠倒,从心颠倒再生起见颠倒,故注疏云:“如此,则随后将生起‘苦为自作’的邪见。”当想颠倒与心颠倒不断增上、坚固时,便形成一种名为“苦是自作”的邪执。为令其舍离此邪执,世尊指出此为邪恶之见。故世尊言:“苦是自作的……则会趋向于彼。”此中所指为轮回之苦,因为提及“有”,故显示了常见。也就是说,此说法向他人展示了常见。显示巴利原文
So karotīti so kammaṃ karoti. So paṭisaṃvedayatīti kārakavedakānaṃ anaññattadassanaparaṃ etaṃ, na pana kammakiriyāphalānaṃ paṭisaṃvedanānaṃ samānakālatādassanaparaṃ. Itīti nidassanatthe nipāto. Khoti avadhāraṇe. ‘‘So evā’’ti dassito. Aniyatādesā hi ete nipātā. Āditoti bhummatthe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘ādimhiyevā’’ti. ‘‘Sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā pageva ‘‘so karoti, so paṭisaṃvedayatī’’ti saññācittavipallāsā bhavanti. Saññāvipallāsato hi cittavipallāso, cittavipallāsato diṭṭhivipallāso, tenāha ‘‘evaṃ sati pacchā sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti ayaṃ laddhi hotī’’ti. Evaṃ sati saññācittavipallāsānaṃ brūhito micchābhiniveso, yadidaṃ ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhi. Tasmā paṭinissajjetuṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigatanti dasseti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ…pe… etaṃ paretī’’ti. Vaṭṭadukkhaṃ adhippetaṃ avisesato atthīti ca vuttattā. Sassataṃ sassatagāhaṃ dīpeti paresaṃ pakāseti, tathābhūto ca sassataṃ daḷhaggāhaṃ gaṇhātīti. Tassāti diṭṭhigatikassa. Taṃ ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ viparītadassanaṃ. Etaṃ sassataggahaṇaṃ. Pareti upeti. Tenāha ‘‘kārakañca…pe… attho’’ti. Ekameva gaṇhantanti satipi vatthubhede ayoniso uppajjanena ekameva katvā gaṇhantaṃ.
在此,“从一开始”这一句,应依照前面解释“苦由他作”等见解时所讲述的道理来理解其含义。这里的连接是这样的:依于“苦由他作”的见解,先会产生“一人造作,另一人感受”这样的想颠倒和心颠倒,这一切都应按照前面所说的道理来连接。当如是微细的断灭颠倒最初生起时,随后便产生了“苦由他作”这种见解,这就是其中的关联。“作者”指业的造作者。“由他所造”指由业的造作者所造。因为以业来称呼果,是依不分别的转喻而说的。“如是”指与邪见相伴的感受,其本质是乐,却伴有烦恼的燃烧等,有怖畏、有忧恼,如是。“先于其他”指被所说的感受所折磨、所刺痛的人。在说完“应依所述之理连接”后,为了显示那种连接,才说了“在此”等语。“断灭”指对存在的有情而言的断灭、毁灭,即无有的意思。因为对不存在的东西不可能有毁灭,所以断灭是建立在“有存在”的观念上的。如同以因果状态持续运行的自性法,虽然它们属于同一个相续,但对于那些因相续中断而分离的因果,由于在胜义上它们并非绝对不离,若以如同相续中断而分离者那样的绝对别异之决定,错误地执取“差别”之理,这便是执著断灭的原因。同样,为了显示:对于作为因果的诸法,虽然自性有别,但由于它们属于同一个相续,若以“同一”之理执取为绝对无别,这也是原因,所以在经文中说了“有情的”。依于相续而存在的诸蕴,由于未作密集的剖析,以执取为一是基础而产生了有情的执著,又以执取有情为实有是基础而产生了断灭的执著,因为执取“只要这个我未被断灭,它就存在”,所以这里所说的“断灭”意指随灭尽而来的毁灭,故说“断灭”。殊胜地毁灭、破坏,即无有。而它只是超越了肉眼和慧眼的所见范围,所以说“不见”。因为在世间,当不见时,“灭”这个词是惯用的。自性的离去、自性的消失,即非有。凡是随灭尽而断灭的,它便不以其自性而住立。显示巴利原文
Idha ‘‘ādimhiyevā’’ti pade. ‘‘Paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā pagevātiādinā hettha vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Ayañhettha yojanā – ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā pageva añño karoti, añño paṭisaṃvedayatīti saññācittavipallāsā bhavantīti sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ satīti evaṃ muduke ucchedavipallāse paṭhamuppanne sati pacchā ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti ayaṃ laddhi hotīti sambandho. Kārakoti kammassa kārako. Tena katanti kammakārakena kataṃ. Kammunā hi phalassa vohāro abhedopacārakattā. Evanti diṭṭhisahagatā vedanā sātasabhāvā kilesapariḷāhādinā saparissayā saupāyāsā, evaṃ. ‘‘Pageva itare’’ti vuttavedanāya abhitunnassa viddhassa. ‘‘Vuttanayena yojetabba’’nti vatvā taṃ yojanaṃ dassento ‘‘tatrāya’’ntiādimāha. Ucchedanti sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ, vibhavanti attho. Asato hi vināsāsambhavato atthibhāvanibandhano ucchedo. Yathā hetuphalabhāvena pavattamānānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ satipi ekasantānapariyāpannānaṃ bhinnasantatipatitehi visese hetuphalānaṃ paramatthato avinābhāvattā bhinnasantānapatitānaṃ viya accantabhedasanniṭṭhānena nānattanayassa micchāgahaṇaṃ ucchedābhinivesassa kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ hetuphalabhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ vijjamānepi sabhāvabhede ekasantatipariyāpannatāya ekattanayena accantābhedagahaṇampi kāraṇamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sattassā’’ti vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ. Santānavasena hi vattamānesu khandhesu ghanavinibbhogābhāvena ekattagahaṇanibandhano sattaggāho, sattassa ca atthibhāvaggāhanibandhano ucchedaggāho, yāvāyaṃ attā na ucchijjati, tāvāyaṃ vijjatiyevāti gahaṇato nirudayavināso idha ucchedoti adhippetoti ‘‘uccheda’’nti vuttaṃ. Visesena nāso vināso, abhāvo. So pana maṃsacakkhupaññācakkhūnaṃ dassanapathātikkamoyeva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘adassana’’nti. Adassane hi nāsasaddo loke niruḷhoti. Sabhāvavigamo sabhāvāpagamo vibhavo. Yo hi nirudayavināsena ucchijjati, na so attano sabhāvena tiṭṭhati.
“此二”指:当你问“苦是自作的吗”时,我以“他造作、他感受”等以及“另一人造作、另一人感受”等所否定的、称为常见与断见的两种极端,这些就是二边,这是连接。或者,“此二”指:在此,许多外道由于未积累智慧资粮,不能了知那最极甚深、微细、精妙的空性,沉没于常见和断见,无法抬起头来,这些就是二边,如来不接近此二边,这是连接。“说法”指:首先,在修行实践上,以智慧的力量安住于中道;在言教法上,以慈悲的力量安住于中道而说法。这里的“hi”字是表示原因。因为从原因……被指出,所以安住于中道而说法,这是连接。从原因显示结果,这是连接,因为语法上的性、数应随所表达之义。“它的”指果的。没有任何造作者或感受者被指出,反而被否定了,因为只显示纯粹的因果关系,只把握苦蕴。到此,以“这些,迦叶……乃至这整个苦蕴的息灭”这一句为止。其余的问题指“苦是自作还是他作”等剩下的四个问题。而在注释书中,“难道没有苦吗,乔达摩尊者?”这个问题在经文中以其本身的形式被否定了,所以未引用。被否定了:第三个问题在第一个和第二个问题被否定时就已经被否定了,因为那个问题可以通过一一否定和一并否定而被否定。因此说“两个……都被否定了”。在此,若有人意许有一个造作或感受的我,那么他就承认了我是变易法。若是如此,由于法的次第转起,如同色法等、乐受等一样,这个我也会因依于缘而具有生起性。若有生起,则必有灭,故常恒性无有立足处。对于他,否定第一个“自作”的问题,是为了随后建立起他自己所熟悉的集起,如同之前一样,或如同之后一样。“其余的问题”指第三个问题等。第三个问题被否定了,应如此理解第三个问题被否定:通过“以无明为缘而有行”等,显示了苦恒常不断地依于缘,从而否定了苦的无因生起,由此也否定了对它的无知。因此世尊说:“这样,这整个苦蕴就有了集起”。显示巴利原文
Ete teti vā ye ime tayā ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti ca puṭṭhena mayā ‘‘so karoti, so paṭisaṃvedayatī’’tiādinā, ‘‘añño karoti, añño paṭisaṃvedayatī’’tiādinā ca paṭikkhittā sassatucchedasaṅkhātā antā, te ubho anteti yojanā. Atha vā ete teti yattha puthū aññatitthiyā anupacitañāṇasambhāratāya paramagambhīraṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ appajānantā sassatucchede nimuggā sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na visahanti, ete te ubho ante anupagammāti yojanā. Desetīti paṭhamaṃ tāva anaññasādhāraṇe paṭipattidhamme ñāṇānubhāvena majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhito, karuṇānubhāvena desanādhamme majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhito dhammaṃ deseti. Ettha hīti hi-saddo hetuattho. Yasmā kāraṇato…pe… niddiṭṭho, tasmā majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhito dhammaṃ desetīti yojanā. Kāraṇato phalaṃ dīpitanti yojanā, abhidheyyānurūpañhi liṅgavacanāni honti. Assāti phalassa. Na koci kārako vā vedako vā niddiṭṭho, aññadatthu paṭikkhitto hetuphalamattatādassanato kevalaṃ dukkhakkhandhagahaṇatoti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘ete te, kassapa…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti ettakena tāva padena. Sesapañhāti ‘‘sayaṃkatañca paraṃkatañca dukkha’’ntiādikā sesā cattāro pañhā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, bho gotama, natthi dukkha’’nti pañho pāḷiyaṃ sarūpeneva paṭikkhittoti na uddhato. Paṭisedhitā hontīti tatiyapañho, tāva paṭhamadutiyapañhapaṭikkhepeneva paṭikkhitto, so hi pañho visuṃ visuṃ paṭikkhepena ekajjhaṃ paṭikkhepena ca. Tenāha ‘‘ubho…pe… paṭikkhitto’’ti. Ettha ca yassa attā kārako vedako vā icchito, tena vipariṇāmadhammo attā anuññāto hoti. Tathā ca sati anupubbadhammappavattiyā rūpādidhammānaṃ viya , sukhādidhammānaṃ viya cassa paccayāyattavuttitāya uppādavantatā āpajjati. Uppāde ca sati avassaṃbhāvī nirodhoti anavakāsā niccatāti. Tassa ‘‘sayaṃkata’’nti paṭhamapañhapaṭikkhepo pacchā ce attano niruḷhassa samudayo hotīti pubbe viya anena bhavitabbaṃ, pubbe viya vā pacchāpi. Sesapañhāti tatiyapañhādayo. Tatiyapañho paṭikkhittoti evañca tatiyapañho paṭikkhitto veditabbo – ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā satataṃ samitaṃ paccayāyattassa dīpanena dukkhassa adhiccasamuppannatā paṭikkhittā, tato eva tassa ajānanañca paṭikkhittaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.39-40; mahāva. 1; udā. 1).
“受持别住之后而住”是句法上的连接。为言辞通顺故:那位乞求“愿我能在世尊座下出家、受具足戒”的人,为使其所说的话流畅,才这样表述。“入村等”:以“等”字摄取了不过午返回、不以妓女等处为行境、于同梵行者的事务中善巧、于诵经等有强烈意欲、听到说外道不好时内心欢喜、听到说佛等不好时内心不喜、听到说外道好时内心不喜、听到说佛等好时内心欢喜(《大品》87)。这些内容都包含在内。“八种行法”:圆满奉行这八种外道行法。其中,不过早入村、在那里以清净的身语行仪乞食后不过午返回,这是一个行法。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ parivāsaṃ samādiyitvā parivasatīti yojanā. Vacanasiliṭṭhatāvasenāti ‘‘bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ labheyyaṃ upasampada’’nti yācantena tena vuttavacanasiliṭṭhatāvasena. Gāmappavesanādīnīti ādi-saddena nātidivāpaṭikkamanaṃ, navesiyādigocaratā, sabrahmacārīnaṃ kiccesu dakkhatādi, uddesādīsu tibbacchandatā, titthiyānaṃ avaṇṇabhaṇane attamanatā, buddhādīnaṃ avaṇṇabhaṇane anattamanatā, titthiyānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇane anattamanatā, buddhādīnaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇane attamanatāti (mahāva. 87) imesaṃ saṅgaho. Aṭṭha vattānīti imāni aṭṭha titthiyavattāni pūrentena. Ettha ca nātikālena gāmappavesanā tattha visuddhakāyavacīsamācārena piṇḍāya caritvā nātidivāpaṭikkamananti idamekaṃ vattaṃ.
“此处有这段经文”:在这部《迦叶经》中有这段经文。“在其他地方”:如在《狮子吼经》等中。“磨后锤打”:如同黄金经过磨擦,再用试金石锤打之后,只取无瑕的部分;同样,通过奉行别住行来磨砺,通过检验清净性来锤打,只接受那些确实清净的曾为外道之人。“强烈意欲”:指进入教法后,对梵行生活生起极为强烈、坚固的好乐。“吩咐某位比丘”:世尊吩咐了一位名姓不显著的比丘,因为他没有以“善来比丘”方式获得具足戒的资具。“坐在僧众中”:比丘们各自拿着座位,在世尊跟前坐成僧众。显示巴利原文
Ayamettha pāṭhoti etasmiṃ kassapasutte ayaṃ pāṭho. Aññatthāti sīhanādasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 1.402-403). Ghaṃsitvā koṭṭetvāti yathā suvaṇṇaṃ nighaṃsitvā adhikaraṇiyā koṭṭetvā niddosameva gayhati, evaṃ parivāsavattacaraṇena ghaṃsitvā suddhabhāvavīmaṃsanena koṭṭetvā suddho eva aññatitthiyapubbo idha gayhati. Tibbacchandatanti sāsanaṃ anupavisitvā brahmacariyavāse tibbacchandataṃ daḷhatarābhirucitaṃ. Aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesīti nāmagottena apākaṭaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ āṇāpesi ehibhikkhuupasampadāya upanissayābhāvato. Gaṇe nisīditvāti bhikkhū attano santike pattāsanavasena gaṇe nisīditvā.
8. 《丁跋路迦经》的注释显示巴利原文
8. Timbarukasuttavaṇṇanā
18 18. 因为丁跋路迦持有“受是自我,自我本身即感受”这样的见解,所以他依据该见解说“苦乐是自作”。为了驳斥这一点,世尊便说了“那受……”等语。因此说:“‘那受……’等是为了破除‘苦乐是自作’的见解而说的。”在此经中也是如此。“于此”:指所说的“那受……乃至苦乐……”那段经文。“在最初处”:此处为处格,表示“从最初”的“to”字并非从格。以“eva”字彰显“kho”字表示限定。而这里应说的道理,在前一经中已说过。不过,在前一经中,被驳斥的是持有“受之外有其他自我,自我是受的造作者”这种见解的邪见者之言论;而在此经中,要驳斥的则是持有“受即是自我”这种见解的言论,这是唯一差别。因此说:“若如此,则受本身就成了受的造作者”等。“对此”:即由那受创作了苦乐,对于此受而言。“在先前”:在执著它为恒常的立场上,在先前也是如此。“前文之义”:指前一经中所说的道理。“在注疏中”:在古代注疏中。“此”:指前经中说过的道理。“对这部经”:因为丁跋路迦执取“受本身即是自我”,所以世尊说:“我不说‘我是那受……’”。显示巴利原文
18. Yasmā timbaruko ‘‘vedanā attā. Attāva vedayatī’’ti evaṃladdhiko, tasmā tāya laddhiyā ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti vadati, taṃ paṭisaṃharituṃ bhagavā ‘‘sā vedanā’’tiādiṃ avoca. Tenāha ‘‘sā vedanātiādi sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkhanti laddhiyā nisedhanatthaṃ vutta’’nti. Etthāpīti imasmimpi sutte. Tatrāti yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sā vedanā…pe… sukhadukkha’’nti, tasmiṃ pāṭhe. Ādimhiyevāti ettha bhummavacanena ‘‘ādito’’ti to-saddo na nissakkavacane. Eva-kārena kho-saddo avadhāraṇeti dasseti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ anantarasutte vuttameva. Tattha pana ‘‘vedanāto añño attā, vedanāya kārako’’ti laddhikassa diṭṭhigatikassa vādo paṭikkhitto, idha ‘‘vedanā attā’’ti evaṃladdhikassāti ayameva viseso. Tenāha ‘‘evañhi sati vedanāya eva vedanā katā hotī’’tiādi. Imissāti yāya vedanāya sukhadukkhaṃ kataṃ, imissā. Pubbepīti sassatākārato pubbepi. Purimañhi atthanti anantarasutte vuttaṃ atthaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyanti porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Tanti purimasutte vuttamatthaṃ. Assāti imassa suttassa. Yasmā timbaruko ‘‘vedanāva attā’’ti gaṇhāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ sā vedanā…pe… na vadāmī’’ti.
在“其他的受”等句中,应解说的义理也完全与前一经所述的方法相同。“作者之受”,指作为造作者的受。“受之苦乐”,说明的是受本身所呈现的苦乐,而非轮回中的苦乐。因为有“自作苦、乐”等说法,所以说“唯有异熟苦乐流转”。显示巴利原文
Aññā vedanātiādīsupi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ anantarasutte vuttanayameva. Kārakavedanāti kattubhūtavedanā. Vedanāsukhadukkhanti vedanābhūtasukhadukkhaṃ kathitaṃ, na vaṭṭasukhadukkhaṃ. ‘‘Vipākasukhadukkhameva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhaṃ dukkha’’ntiādivacanato.
9. 《愚者智者经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Bālapaṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā
19 “无明盖”:无明对有等过患进行遮蔽、覆盖,故称此为无明盖;因被无明覆盖,所以说“被无明遮蔽的人”。“此身”:指对于未断烦恼的愚者,将现前有身执为庇护;由于无明遮蔽过患,以不如实见故,其心被渴爱所取,便造作通向种种有的诸行。又由这些行而有有身的再生,因此说此身也由无明生起。“他的”:指愚者的。“此义”:应阐明“此身即是所谓名色”的含义,这是从这些法为取蕴及六处所摄的角度而言。“如是此二者”:即如此,由于被无明所遮蔽,以及被渴爱所系缚,这样存在于自他相续中的有识之身,便称为“二者”。“别处”:在其他经中。例如“缘于眼及色,眼识生起,三者和合为触”等语句,是将内外处分开之后,说明缘于眼与色等二法而有眼触等生起;然而在此经中,并未将六内外处分开,而是说“缘于二法而有触”,因此这实际被称为“大二法”,因为它无余涵盖了内外处。而所谓“内外处”,其实也已统摄六处在内。“触之因”:即触生起的诸缘。“依彼”:只是显示原因的陈述,故说“由那些”成为触之因。显示巴利原文
19. Avijjā nīvaraṇā bhavādi-ādīnavassa nivāritapaṭicchādikā etassāti avijjānīvaraṇo, avijjāya nivutoti āha ‘‘avijjāya nivāritassā’’ti. Ayaṃ kāyoti bālassa appahīnakilesassa paccuppannaṃ attabhāvaṃ rakkhaṃ katvā avijjāya paṭicchāditādīnave ayāthāvadassanavasena taṇhāya paṭiladdhacittassa taṃtaṃbhavūpagā saṅkhārā saṅkharīyanti. Tehi ca attabhāvassa abhinibbatti, tasmā ayañca avijjāya kāyo nibbattoti. Assāti bālassa. Ayaṃ atthoti ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo nāmarūpanti ca vutto’’ti attho dīpetabbo upādānakkhandhasaḷāyatanasaṅgahato tesaṃ dhammānaṃ. Evametaṃ dvayanti evaṃ avijjāya nivāritattā, taṇhāya ca saṃyuttattā evaṃ saparasantānagatasaviññāṇakakāyasaṅkhātaṃ dvayaṃ hoti. Aññatthāti suttantaresu. ‘‘Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425-426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; 4.60-61; kathā. 465, 467) ajjhattikabāhirāyatanāni bhinditvā cakkhurūpādidvayāni paṭicca cakkhusamphassādayo vuttā, idha pana abhinditvā cha ajjhattikabāhirāyatanāni paṭicca cakkhusamphassādayo vuttā ‘‘dvayaṃ paṭicca phasso’’ti, tasmā mahādvayaṃ nāma kiretaṃ anavasesato ajjhattikabāhirāyatanānaṃ gahitattā. Ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanānīti etthāpi hi saḷāyatanāni saṅgahitāneva. Phassakāraṇānīti phassapavattiyā paccayāni. Yehīti hetudassanamattanti āha ‘‘yehi kāraṇabhūtehī’’ti. Phasso eva phusanakicco, na phassāyatanānīti vuttaṃ ‘‘phassena phuṭṭho’’ti. Paripuṇṇavasenāti avekallavasena. Aparipuṇṇāyatanānaṃ hīnāni phassassa kāraṇāni honti, tesaṃ viyāti ‘‘etesaṃ vā aññatarenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāyanibbattanādimhīti saviññāṇakassa kāyassa nibbattanaṃ kāyanibbattanaṃ, kāyo vā nibbattati etenāti kāyanibbattanaṃ, kilesābhisaṅkhārā. Ādisaddena phassasaḷāyatanādisaṅgaho. Adhikaṃ payasati payuñjati etenāti adhippayāso, visesakāraṇanti āha ‘‘adhikapayogo’’ti.
“以世尊为根本”:因世尊是我们生起的根源,故说“以世尊为根本”。“这些法”:指这些作为因的法。由于这些因法,我们虽同为愚者或智者,也能在身的生成等方面了知差别,所以说:“往昔由迦叶正自觉者所令生起”等。“遍知”:即现前、亲证地了知。“通达”:是它的同义词,意为证得。“引导者”:即引导至我们相续中的人。“调伏者”:即为了成就圣智见之殊胜,以殊胜方式引导的人,或者以彼分调伏等方法进行调伏的人。“随顺引导者”:即随顺地引导的人。由于随顺着不断被施设的如法名言而开示诸法,就能随其自性进行显示,所以说:“如自性……而开示者”。当诸法呈现于智慧观照的范围时,世尊是其皈依处、汇入处,因此诸法“以世尊为皈依”。所以说:“四地之法”等。皈依即是通达,因此以通达的意味,世尊是这些法的皈依处,故说“以世尊为皈依”。又所以说:“复次”等。“触到来”:即以通达的方式,触来到智慧的领域;而当它来到智慧领域时,本质上就好像在询问:“我叫什么名字?”,而世尊则是在为它命名的人,所以说:“我是世尊!”等。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā amhākaṃ uppādakabhāvena mūlabhāvena bhagavaṃmūlakā. Ime dhammāti ime kāraṇadhammā. Yehi mayaṃ bālapaṇḍitānaṃ samānepi kāyanibbattanādimhi visesaṃ jāneyyāma, tenāha ‘‘pubbe kassapasammāsambuddhena uppāditā’’tiādi. Ājānāmāti abhimukhaṃ paccakkhato jānāma. Paṭivijjhāmāti tasseva vevacanaṃ, adhigacchāmāti attho. Netāti amhākaṃ santāne pāpetā. Vinetāti yathā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso hoti, evaṃ visesato netā, tadaṅgavinayādivasena vā vinetā. Anunetāti anurūpaṃ netā. Antarantarā yathādhammapaññattiyā paññāpitānaṃ dhammānaṃ anurūpato dassanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘yathāsabhāvato…pe… dassetā’’ti. Āpāthaṃ upagacchantānaṃ bhagavā paṭisaraṇaṃ samosaraṇaṭṭhānanti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā dhammā. Tenāha ‘‘catubhūmakadhammā’’tiādi. Paṭisarati paṭivijjhatīti paṭisaraṇaṃ, tasmā paṭivijjhanavasena bhagavā paṭisaraṇaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Tenāha ‘‘api cā’’tiādi. Phasso āgacchatīti paṭivijjhanakavasena phasso ñāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchati, āpāthaṃ āgacchantoyeva so atthato ‘‘ahaṃ kinnāmo’’ti nāmaṃ pucchanto viya, bhagavā cassa nāmaṃ karonto viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Upaṭṭhātūti ñāṇassa paccupaṭṭhātu. Bhagavantaṃyeva paṭibhātūti bhagavato eva bhāgo hotu, bhagavāva naṃ attano bhāgaṃ katvā vissajjetūti attho, bhagavato bhāgo yadidaṃ dhammassa akkhānaṃ, amhākaṃ pana savanaṃ bhāgoti ayamettha adhippāyo. Evañhi saddalakkhaṇena sameti. Keci pana paṭibhātūti atthaṃ vadanti ñāṇena dissatu desīyatūti vā attho. Tenāha ‘‘tumheyeva no kathetvā dethāti attho’’ti.
无明与渴爱是愚者与智者之身生起的缘。因此说:“业……已灭尽”。“令速行后”:即令已取的速行变得有力,使其能够牵引结生,如此造作。若已灭尽,为何说未断?为答此问,故说:“然而又如……”等。因为对于相似的事物,也可用同一名称来称呼,如说:“就是那鹧鸪,就是那些药草,由这同一业的异熟残余所致”。“为苦尽”:即为了说明此中特殊的含义,故说:“为灭尽之义”。“结生身”:指以结生为首的身。经文中,“由愚者”是具格,表来源,故说“从愚者”。与未来结生相伴随的,即是“有结生”。然而,若有情能凭那有身证得阿拉汉果,相对于未来的结生而言,他便被称为“无结生”;为作区分,故说“有结生”。虽如此说,但只要他尚未踏入圣者之地,就仍具足愚者的状态,因此说:“一切凡夫皆为愚者”。的确,“无结生的漏尽者是智者”,这即是以“漏尽者”一词来限定无结生者。若是如此,有学圣者又当如何?故说:“入流者”等。因为他们尚未达到智慧圆满的究竟,故不能如漏尽者般被称为智者;但又因强有力的显示巴利原文
Bālassa paṇḍitassa ca kāyassa nibbattiyā paccayabhūtā avijjā ca taṇhā ca. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṃ…pe… niruddhā’’ti. Javāpetvāti gahitajavanaṃ katvā, yathā paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhituṃ samatthaṃ hoti, evaṃ katvā. Yadi niruddhā, kathaṃ appahīnāti vuttanti āha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Bhavati hi taṃsadisepi tabbohāro yathā ‘‘sā eva tittirī, tāneva osadhāni, tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesenā’’ti ca. Dukkhakkhayāyāti tadatthavisesanatthanti āha ‘‘khayatthāyā’’ti. Paṭisandhikāyanti paṭisandhigahaṇapubbakaṃ kāyaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bālenā’’ti karaṇavacanaṃ nissakketi āha ‘‘bālato’’ti. Bhāvinā saha paṭisandhinā sappaṭisandhiko. Yo pana ekantato tenattabhāvena arahattaṃ pattuṃ bhabbo, so bhāvinā paṭisandhinā ‘‘appaṭisandhiko’’ti, tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘sappaṭisandhiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi vuttaṃ, so ca yāva ariyabhūmiṃ na okkamati, tāva bāladhammasamaṅgī evāti katvā ‘‘sabbopi puthujjano bālo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘appaṭisandhiko khīṇāsavo paṇḍito’’ti khīṇāsava-saddena appaṭisandhiko visesito. Yadi evaṃ sekkhā kathanti āha ‘‘sotāpannā’’tiādi. Te hi sikhāpattapaṇḍiccabhāvalakkhaṇābhāvato paṇḍitāti na vattabbā khīṇāsavā viya, balavatarānaṃ pana bāladhammānaṃ pahīnattā bālātipi na vattabbā puthujjanā viya. Bhajiyamānā pana catusaccasampaṭivedhaṃ upādāya paṇḍitapakkhaṃ bhajanti, na bālapakkhaṃ vuttakāraṇenāti.
10. 《缘经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Paccayasuttavaṇṇanā
20 一切有为法,没有不依缘而生起的。因此,缘法亦依于自身的缘法而成为缘所生法;同样地,缘所生法亦依于自身的缘所生法而成为缘法。诸法随其适当的情况,皆有缘与缘所生的性质。对于某些易于教化的众生,单是宣说缘起便极易为他们所理解,世尊即针对此类众生,详尽地分别、宣说缘起。但对于另一些易于教化的众生,则需将此二者分开宣说,他们一听到分别开示,便能证得法现观。忆念及这些众生,世尊便将这二者分别显示,而开始这场开示:“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说缘起及缘所生诸法。”为阐明此义,注释者才说了“导师在这部经中”等语。缘的存在状态即是缘性,即由缘所生的性质。此性质于非真实法上不可得,故说为“真实法”。问:“生、老、死并非真实法,唯有那些被生、老、死所依附的诸蕴才是真实法,那为何在教导中将其包含在内呢?”答:“此无过失。因为生、老、死不过是缘所生之真实法所呈现的变化相,而非他物,所以也被包括在内。”所谓“无论如来出世或不出世”:这并不意味着像所化众生的道果生起那样,是依靠如来出世的缘故;以显示巴利原文
20. Sabbampi saṅkhataṃ appaṭicca uppannaṃ nāma natthīti paccayadhammopi attano paccayadhammaṃ upādāya paccayuppanno, tathā paccayuppannadhammopi attano paccayuppannaṃ upādāya paccayadhammoti yathārahaṃ dhammānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannatā. Yesaṃ vineyyānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādadesanāyeva subodhato upaṭṭhāti, tesaṃ vasena suṭṭhu vibhāgaṃ katvā paṭiccasamuppādo desito. Yesaṃ pana vineyyānaṃ tadubhayasmiṃ vibhajja sute eva dhammābhisamayo hoti, te sandhāya bhagavā tadubhayaṃ vibhajja dassento ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi paṭiccasamuppanne ca dhamme’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhīti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘satthā imasmiṃ sutte’’tiādimāha. Paccayassa bhāvo paccayattaṃ, paccayanibbattatā. Asabhāvadhamme na labbhatīti ‘‘sabhāvadhamme’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu ca jāti jarā maraṇañca sabhāvadhammo na hoti, yesaṃ pana khandhānaṃ jāti jarā maraṇañca, te eva sabhāvadhammā, atha kasmā desanāya te gahitāti? Nāyaṃ doso, jāti jarā maraṇañhi paccayanibbattānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ vikāramattaṃ, naññesaṃ, tasmā te gahitāti. Uppādā vā tathāgatānanti na vineyyapuggalānaṃ maggaphaluppatti viya jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇuppatti tathāgatuppādāyattā, atha kho sā tathāgatānaṃ uppādepi anuppādepi hotiyeva. Tasmā sā kāmaṃ asaṅkhatā viya dhātu na niccā, tathāpi ‘‘sabbakālikā’’ti etena jātipaccayato jarāmaraṇuppattīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘jātiyeva jarāmaraṇassa paccayo’’ti. Jātipaccayāti ca jātisaṅkhātapaccayā. Hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ. Ṭhitāva sā dhātu, yāyaṃ idappaccayatā jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayatā tassa byabhicārābhāvato. Idāni na kadāci jāti jarāmaraṇassa paccayo na hoti hotiyevāti jarāmaraṇassa paccayabhāve niyameti. Ubhayenapi yathāvuttassa paccayabhāvo yattha hoti, tattha avassaṃbhāvitaṃ dasseti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’ti. Dvīhi padehi. Tiṭṭhantīti yassa vasena dhammānaṃ ṭhiti, sā idappaccayatā dhammaṭṭhitatā. Dhammeti paccayuppanne dhamme. Niyameti viseseti. Hetugatavisesasamāyogo hi hetuphalassa evaṃ dhammatāniyāmo evāti.
另一种理路:所谓“彼界确然安住”——即老死的此缘性,所谓“缘于生而有老死”,此界即是此自性。于如来出世之前及之后,它虽未被证知;于如来出世期间,虽被证知,却非由如来所造作;而是只要老死存在,于一切时,它都以生为缘而存在,故说彼界确然安住。然而,仅因如来以自然智现等觉此法,并宣说“此法为如来所现等觉”,如来才被称为“法主”,并非因为造作了前所未有之法。因此说:“彼界确然安住”。正是这“缘于生而有老死”的自性,因其无有颠倒,于如此觉知者而言,此自性本身即如实安住,故为“法住性”。或者,生作为老死的生起、住立、转起、结生、结合、障碍、集起、因缘等而安住,由于它以令老死生起等状态而安住,故为“法住性”。这是从果的角度,以作用来指称因。或者,由诸缘所持者称为“法”;果依于彼而转起,于彼处安住,故为“住”;法的安住即是“法住”。或者,“法”指因,因其以缘的状态持果;因的安住即是自性,而除了法,别无其他自性,故“法住”即是缘。因此说:“于缘的把握中,有法住智”。法住即是法住性。正是此界——“缘于生而显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – ṭhitāva sā dhātūti yāyaṃ jarāmaraṇassa idappaccayatā ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti, esā dhātu esa sabhāvo. Tathāgatānaṃ uppādato pubbe uddhañca appaṭivijjhiyamāno, majjhe ca paṭivijjhiyamāno na tathāgatehi uppādito, atha kho sambhavantassa jarāmaraṇassa sabbakālaṃ jātipaccayato sambhavoti ṭhitāva sā dhātu, kevalaṃ pana sayambhuñāṇena abhisambujjhanato ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo tathāgatena abhisambuddho’’ti pavedanato ca tathāgato ‘‘dhammasāmī’’ti vuccati, na apubbassa uppādanato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’ti. Sā eva ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti ettha vipallāsābhāvato evaṃ avabujjhamānassa etassa sabhāvassa, hetuno vā tatheva bhāvato ṭhitatāti dhammaṭṭhitatā, jāti vā jarāmaraṇassa uppādaṭṭhiti pavattaāyūhana-saṃyoga-palibodha-samudaya-hetupaccayaṭṭhitīti taduppādādibhāvenassā ṭhitatā ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitatā’’ti phalaṃ pati sāmatthiyato hetumeva vadati. Dhārīyati paccayehīti vā dhammo, tiṭṭhati tattha tadāyattavuttitāya phalanti ṭhiti, dhammassa ṭhiti dhammaṭṭhiti. Dhammoti vā kāraṇaṃ paccayabhāvena phalassa dhāraṇato, tassa ṭhiti sabhāvo, dhammato ca añño sabhāvo natthīti dhammaṭṭhiti, paccayo. Tenāha ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 4). Dhammaṭṭhiti eva dhammaṭṭhitatā. Sā eva dhātu ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti imassa sabhāvassa, hetuno vā aññathattābhāvato, ‘‘na jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti viññāyamānassa ca tabbhāvābhāvato niyāmatā vavatthitabhāvoti dhammaniyāmatā. Phalassa vā jarāmaraṇassa jātiyā sati sambhavo dhamme hetumhi ṭhitatāti dhammaṭṭhitatā, asati asambhavo dhammaniyāmatāti evaṃ phalena hetuṃ vibhāveti, taṃ ‘‘ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’tiādinā vuttaṃ. Imesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayatāsaṅkhātaṃ idappaccayataṃ abhisambujjhati paccakkhakaraṇena abhimukhaṃ bujjhati yāthāvato paṭivijjhati, tato eva abhisameti abhimukhaṃ samāgacchati, ādito kathento ācikkhati, uddisatīti attho. Tameva uddesaṃ pariyosāpento deseti. Yathāuddiṭṭhamattaṃ niddisanavasena pakārehi ñāpento paññāpeti. Pakārehi eva patiṭṭhapento paṭṭhapeti. Yathāniddiṭṭhaṃ paṭiniddesavasena vivarati vibhajati. Vivaṭañhi vibhattañca atthaṃ hetūdāharaṇadassanehi pākaṭaṃ karonto uttānīkaroti. Uttānīkaronto tathā paccakkhabhūtaṃ katvā nigamanavasena passathāti cāha.
“缘生而有老死等”一句中:即是指生等作为老死等之缘的那个状态。“以彼彼诸缘”,意思是:某一果生起时,若所需诸缘完全具足、无有欠缺,此果便从它们生起,而非从不足或多余的缘生起。因此说“以无减、无增之缘”。正如眼识依眼、色、光明、作意而生起那样。由此显示:为使彼彼果成就,彼缘的聚合有其如是之性质,故说“如是性”。(“聚合”即齐集、集会之义。)“无有不能发生”:即无有不生起的情况。因为,即使有如是缘的聚合存在,果若仍不生起,则此聚合便非真实。“以他法之缘”:即以能生其他果法之缘。“无他法之生起”:即不会从他们缘中生起其他果法。因为,眼、色、光明、作意等缘,从未有生起耳识的情形。若有,则彼聚合可称为“变异性”;但无此事,故说“无变异”。“以缘故”:即以缘的状态。“以缘聚故”:此处道理相同——所谓“此缘”即是“此缘性”,通过后缀‘tā’增长词义,正如“天”即“天性”。“这些缘的聚合”就是“此缘性”,这里后缀‘tā’有聚合之义,如“众人的聚合”称为“众性”。为说明此义,注释师说:“而此处词相,应依声论来了知”。显示巴利原文
Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇantiādīsūti jātiādīnaṃ jarāmaraṇapaccayabhāvesu. Tehi tehi paccayehīti yāvatakehi paccayehi yaṃ phalaṃ uppajjamānārahaṃ, avikalehi teheva tassa uppatti, na ūnādhikehīti. Tenāha ‘‘anūnādhikehevā’’ti. Yathā taṃ cakkhurūpālokamanasikārehi cakkhuviññāṇassa sambhavoti. Tena taṃtaṃphalanipphādane tassā paccayasāmaggiyā tappakāratā tathatāti vuttāti dasseti. Sāmagginti samodhānaṃ, samavāyanti attho. Asambhavābhāvatoti anuppajjanassa abhāvato. Tathāvidhapaccayasāmaggiyañhi satipi phalassa anuppajjane tassāvitathatā siyā. Aññadhammapaccayehīti aññassa phaladhammassa paccayehi. Aññadhammānuppattitoti tato aññassa phaladhammassa anuppajjanato. Na hi kadāci cakkhurūpālokamanasikārehi sotaviññāṇassa sambhavo atthi. Yadi siyā, tassā sāmaggiyā aññathatā nāma siyā, na cetaṃ atthīti ‘‘anaññathatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paccayatoti paccayabhāvato. Paccayasamūhatoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatāti tā-saddena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ yathā ‘‘devoyeva devatā’’ti, idappaccayānaṃ samūho idappaccayatāti samūhattho tāsaddo yathā ‘‘janānaṃ samūho janatā’’ti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato veditabba’’nti.
“无常”:即非恒常。老死并非常规意义上的无常,因为它是诸行的变坏相,并非完成品;尽管如此,这里将“无常”作为一种随宜的异名而说。对“有为”等也同理。“有为”:即由诸缘聚集而造作,因为只有依和合的缘才能令它生起,如同依其自性那般,一切缘俱会、共同造作,由缘所作,故称有为。“缘所生”:就是适合缘、依靠缘,不能无有缘;唯由和合的、聚集的缘所生起。因此说:“依缘而生”。“以灭为性”:即以坏灭为自性。“以离去为性”:即自性上是以离去为性。“以离染为性”:即崩解为性。“以灭尽为性”:指以刹那灭为自性,是坏灭的实质。以上是“依前所说的方法”:即依前面关于老的说法。“能生缘等”:指业等诸缘。“在作用行相的刹那中”:这里“作用行相”是指,当缘现起时其果即生起,如此现起之时;也就是缘现起的那个刹那。意思是:所谓“缘在作用行相的那个刹那”——即缘正致力于令自果生起的那一刻,若诸色法等能于彼时被获得,而在彼前、彼后皆不可得,便可断定他们由该缘而生。同样,对于生,亦应如此断定其于彼刹那中可得。如果……”
},
{显示巴利原文
Na niccaṃ sassatanti aniccaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ na aniccaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ vikārabhāvato anipphannattā, tathāpi ‘‘anicca’’nti pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Esa nayo saṅkhatādīsupi. Samāgantvā kataṃ sahiteheva paccayehi nibbattetabbato yathāsabhāvaṃ samecca sambhuyya paccayehi katanti saṅkhataṃ. Paccayārahaṃ paccayaṃ paṭicca na vinā tena sahitasametameva uppannanti paṭiccasamuppannaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccaye nissāya uppanna’’nti. Khayasabhāvanti bhijjanasabhāvaṃ. Vigacchanakasabhāvanti sakabhāvato apagacchanakasabhāvaṃ. Virajjanakasabhāvanti palujjanakasabhāvaṃ. Nirujjhanakasabhāvanti khaṇabhaṅgavasena pabhaṅgusabhāvaṃ. Vuttanayenāti jarāya vuttanayena. Janakappaccayānaṃ kammādīnaṃ. Kiccānubhāvakkhaṇeti ettha kiccānubhāvo nāma yathā pavattamāne paccaye tassa phalaṃ uppajjati, tathā pavatti, evaṃ santassa pavattanakkhaṇe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmiṃ khaṇe paccayo attano phaluppādanaṃ pati byāvaṭo nāma hoti, imasmiṃ khaṇe ye dhammā rūpādayo upalabbhanti tato pubbe, pacchā ca anupalabbhamānā, tesaṃ tato uppatti niddhārīyati, evaṃ jātiyāpi sā niddhāretabbā taṃkhaṇūpaladdhatoti. Yadi evaṃ nippariyāyatova jātiyā kutoci uppatti siddhi, atha kasmā ‘‘ekena pariyāyenā’’ti vuttanti? Jāyamānadhammānaṃ vikārabhāvena upaladdhabbattā. Yadi nipphannadhammā viya jāti upalabbheyya, nippariyāyatova tassā kutoci uppatti siyā, na cevaṃ upalabbhati, atha kho anipphannattā vikārabhāvena upalabbhati. Tasmā ‘‘ekena pariyāyenettha aniccātiādīni yujjantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na pana jarāmaraṇe, janakappaccayānaṃ kiccānubhāvakkhaṇe tassa alabbhanato. Teneva ‘‘ettha ca aniccanti…pe… aniccaṃ nāma jāta’’nti vuttaṃ.
「具有观」:这里,「具有」这个词就像在‘有蝇、有蚊’等句子中那样,表示非主要事物的存在。在这里,观慧是次要的,主要的是如实见的道慧在遍知。「前际」:如果只说‘前际’,也可能包含现在存在的情况,所以确切地说:「前际就是过去」。关于「存在与不存在」:依靠常见,他疑‘我在过去时存在吗?’——这是对过去自身的存在有疑。依靠无因生起的见解,他疑‘自从有我以来,这之前我是否不存在呢?’——这是对过去自身的不存在有疑。为什么会产生这些?因为疑心里持有这两种行相。又由于它以过去为所缘,这就已经显示出它依托于常见和无因生起的行相。为了显示这个疑是辗转流转、无处不生起的非理性疑,不必追问‘为什么生起?’,所以注释者说:「不应当说“什么原因”」。或者说,疑的原因是不如理作意,它的基础是愚痴凡夫的状态以及未见圣者等。「种姓、标相、生起」:即依靠刹帝利、婆罗门等种姓;在家、出家等标相;天、人等生起。这里的「依」即依止的意思。在那个时候,如果那一期生命有中等的量,与他相应的就是有量者;如果没有中等的量,或者超过了那个量,那就应当知道是「无量者」。所说的「某些师」:就是持扼要论的论师们。他们说:“怎么这样?”内心思惟:是由自在天造作的?由梵天?由宿业?还是无因生?实际上,无因生起的疑也是在探求因。「前后相续」:指前后转起。「长时」:是时间的别名;此处应当视为以宾格表处格。关于「存在与不存在」:依靠常见,疑‘我在未来时存在吗?’——这是对未来自身的存在有疑。依靠断见,疑‘在某种有身中被断灭之后,我还会存在吗?’——这是对未来自身的不存在有疑。应照前面解释的道理来配合理解。显示巴利原文
Savipassanāyāti ettha saha-saddo appadhānabhāvadīpano ‘‘samakkhikaṃ, samakasa’’ntiādīsu viya. Appadhānabhūtā hi vipassanā, yathābhūtadassanamaggapaññā pajānāti. ‘‘Purimaṃ anta’’nti vuccamāne paccuppannabhāvassapi gahaṇaṃ siyāti ‘‘purimaṃ antaṃ atīta’’nti vuttaṃ. Vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañcāti sassatāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’nti atīte attano vijjamānataṃ, adhiccasamuppattiāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘yato pabhuti ahaṃ, tato pubbe na nu kho ahosi’’nti atīte attano avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Kasmā? Vicikicchāya ākāradvayāvalambanato. Tassā pana atītavatthutāya gahitattā sassatādhiccasamuppattiākāranissitatā dassitā eva. Āsappanaparisappanapavattikaṃ katthacipi appaṭivattihetubhūtaṃ vicikicchaṃ kasmā uppādetīti na vicāretabbametanti dassento āha ‘‘kiṃkāraṇanti na vattabba’’nti . Kāraṇaṃ vā vicikicchāya ayonisomanasikāro, tassa andhabālaputhujjanabhāvo, ariyānaṃ adassāvitā cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jātiliṅgupapattiyoti khattiyabrāhmaṇādijātiṃ, gahaṭṭhapabbajitādiliṅgaṃ, devamanussādiupapattiñca. Nissāyāti upādāya. Tasmiṃ kāle yaṃ santānaṃ majjhimaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tena yutto pamāṇiko, tadabhāvato adhikabhāvato vā ‘‘appamāṇiko’’ti veditabbo. Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā. Te hi ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho’’ti issarena vā brahmunā vā pubbakatena vā ahetuto vā nibbattoti cintetīti vadanti. Ahetuto nibbattikaṅkhāpi hi hetuparāmasanamevāti. Paramparanti pubbāparappavattiṃ. Addhānanti kālādhivacanaṃ, tañca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañcāti sassatāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhāna’’nti anāgate attano vijjamānataṃ, ucchedāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘yasmiñca attabhāve ucchedanakaṅkhā, tato paraṃ nu kho bhavissāmī’’ti anāgate attano avijjamānatañca kaṅkhatīti heṭṭhā vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ.
“现在之世”:由于此处意指世的现在性,故说“以结生为始”等。因持续地现起“这是怎么回事、那是怎么回事”,故为“何如何如”,亦即疑。有此种状态者,即“有疑者”。因此说“有疑者”。于此有何可思量?意思是:之前已经说过,这样的人如疯子般的愚痴凡夫。“剃发者”:因为剃除了头发,在清醒时难以被强行度化;人们依循族姓习俗剃去头发,如同某些在家苦行者那样。也有说是由于畏惧国王所致。“成为清凉”:这是为表明达到清凉状态而作的说法。也有读作“成为白色”的,意指因久处水中而变为白色。显示巴利原文
Paccuppannaṃ addhānanti addhāpaccuppannassa idhādhippetattā ‘‘paṭisandhimādiṃ katvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ kathaṃ, idaṃ katha’’nti pavattanato kathaṃkathā, vicikicchā, sā assa atthīti kathaṃkathī. Tenāha ‘‘vicikicchī’’ti. Kā ettha cintā? Ummattako viya bālaputhujjanoti paṭikacceva vuttanti adhippāyo. Taṃ mahāmātāya puttaṃ. Muṇḍesunti muṇḍena anicchantaṃ jāgaraṇakāle na sakkāti suttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ kuladhammavasena yathā ekacce kulatāpasā. Rājabhayenāti ca vadanti. Sītibhūtanti idaṃ madhurakabhāvappattiyā kāraṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Setabhūta’’ntipi pāṭho, udake ciraṭṭhānena setabhāvaṃ pattanti attho.
他对自己是刹帝利身份有疑,犹如迦尔纳以自己为车夫之子;所谓“以自己为车夫之子”,即以自己为太阳天子之子。当其出身被揭示时,他仍执取“我”,因此针对他对自己(出身)的执取,而说“也可能有这样的疑”。而所谓“人也如同诸王一样”,意指也有某些人如同国王一般。以“由形貌、样态”等语,所说的是如前所述的方法。“在此处”是指“我究竟是如何”这一句。内在的所谓“命我”,这是他人所虚构的内在自我。“十六分等”:以“等”字含摄了身量大小、拇指量、大麦量、极微量等。有情施设以命我为境,这只不过是邪见者的想象;但从胜义上说,它是以有身为境,因此说“有身的来处、去处与住处”——意思是:它从何处来、将往何处去,而(所往之处)便是其住处。此处(所说断疑)是指须陀洹,因为他已由见而断除了疑;而其余三种(一来者等)也并未被排除(于断疑之外)。因为“而此……乃至……善见”这句话,显示了他已无余地现观真理。显示巴利原文
Attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati kaṇṇo viya sūtaputtasaññī, sūtaputtasaññīti sūriyadevaputtassa puttasaññī. Jātiyā vibhāviyamānāya ‘‘aha’’nti tassa attano parāmasanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘evampi siyā kaṅkhā’’ti. Manussāpi ca rājāno viyāti manussāpi ca keci ekacce rājāno viyāti adhippāyo. Vuttanayameva ‘‘saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāyā’’tiādinā. Etthāti ‘‘kathaṃ nu khosmī’’ti pade. Abbhantare jīvoti paraparikappitaṃ antarattānaṃ vadati. Soḷasaṃsādīnanti ādi-saddena sarīraparimāṇaaṅguṭṭha-yavaparamāṇuparimāṇatādike saṅgaṇhāti. Sattapaññatti jīvavisayāti diṭṭhigatikānaṃ matimattaṃ, paramatthato pana sā attabhāvavisayāvāti āha ‘‘attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhāna’’nti. Yatāyaṃ āgato, yattha ca gamissati, taṃ ṭhānanti attho. Sotāpanno adhippeto vicikicchāpahānassa diṭṭhattā. Itarepi tayoti sakadāgāmīādayo avāritā eva. ‘‘Ayañca…pe… sudiṭṭhā’’ti nippadesato saccasaṃpaṭivedhassa jotitattā.
第三 十力品显示巴利原文
3. Dasabalavaggo
1. 十力经注释显示巴利原文
1. Dasabalasuttavaṇṇanā
21 第一经只是第二经的略说,因为第二经是将第一经所略说的义理,以广说的方式开示的。而且,世尊先以简略的方式开示了第一经,随后又在此基础上详细开示了第二经。或者,最初是随顺喜欢简略者的意乐而简略开示,而后则依自己的喜好广作开示。因为诸佛世尊具有狮子般的行仪,当他们依自己的喜好说法时,正是在展示自己的力量而说法。因此,这里将依第二经来作义理注释;当第二经被注释时,第一经也随之被注释了,这就是此处的意趣。显示巴利原文
21.Paṭhamaṃdutiyasseva saṅkhepo paṭhamasutte saṅkhepavuttassa atthassa vitthāravasena dutiyasuttassa desitattā, tañca pana bhagavā paṭhamasuttaṃ saṅkhepato desesi, dutiyaṃ tato vitthārato. Paṭhamaṃ vā saṃkhittarucīnaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena saṅkhepato desesi, dutiyaṃ pana attano ruciyā tato vitthārato. Sīhasamānavuttikā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te attano ruciyā kathentā attano thāmaṃ dassentāva kathenti, tasmā dutiyasuttavasena cettha atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma, tasmiṃ saṃvaṇṇite paṭhamaṃ saṃvaṇṇitameva hotīti adhippāyo.
2. 第二十力经注释显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyadasabalasuttavaṇṇanā
22 其中,“在那里”指在这第二经中。“以十力”指以十种不共的智力;因为它们是如来的力,所以称为“如来力”。虽然这些力有的也会在个别声闻中生起,但像佛陀那样的处非处智等等,是任何时候都不会在其他人身上生起的。“随象种”指随顺接下来要说的象种。“属象种”:是为了配合种姓词而采用的中性表达。其余情况也依此类推。“自然的象种”指那些生活在山地、水域、森林等不同觅食区域、名为属象种的所有大象,若论力量,都只算是普通的象种。“十人之力”指十个中等体力之人的力量。“一位如来之身力”将此合在一起,与一位如来的身力相关联。而说“一位”,也是随顺下文论述的脉络,依教说的流传而说的。“那罗延那聚合之力”:其中“那罗”指光线,由于它能发出众多各样的光线,所以称为“那罗延那”,也就是金刚;因此,“那罗延那聚合之力”意为金刚聚合之力。“如来之身力”指如来平常的身体力量。这不能算入如来十力之中,因为它本身并不具备力之性,正因如此,它被视为外在且低劣的。为了说明这两者的原因,才说“因为依此”等语。“其他”指与身显示巴利原文
22.Tatthāti dutiyasutte. Dasahi balehīti dasahi anaññasādhāraṇehi ñāṇabalehi, tāni tathāgatasseva balānīti tathāgatabalānīti vuccanti. Kāmañca tāni ekaccānaṃ sāvakānampi uppajjanti, yādisāni pana buddhānaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇādīni uppajjanti, na tādisāni tadaññesaṃ kadācipi uppajjantīti. Hatthikulānusārenāti vakkhamānahatthikulānusārena. Kāḷāvakanti kulasaddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso. Esa nayo sesesupi. Pakatihatthikulanti giricaranadicaravanacarādippabhedā gocariyakāḷāvakanāmā sabbāpi balena pākatikā hatthijāti. Dasannaṃ purisānanti thāmamajjhimānaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ. Ekassa tathāgatassa kāyabalanti ānetvā sambandho. Ekassāti ca tathā heṭṭhākathāyaṃ āgatattā desanāsotena vuttaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalanti ettha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā ito uppajjantīti nārāyanaṃ, vajiraṃ, tasmā nārāyanasaṅghātabalanti vajirasaṅghātabalanti attho. Tathāgatassa kāyabalanti tathāgatassa pākatikakāyabalaṃ. Saṅgahaṃ na gacchati attano balābhāvato, tato evassa bāhirakatā lāmakatā ca. Tadubhayaṃ panassa kāraṇena dassetuṃ ‘‘etañhi nissāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aññanti kāyabalato aññaṃ tato visuṃyeva. Dasasu ṭhānesu dasasu ñātabbaṭṭhānesu. Yāthāvapaṭivedhato sayañca akampayaṃ, puggalañca taṃsamaṅgiṃ neyyesu adhibalaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘akampanaṭṭhena upatthambhanaṭṭhena cā’’ti.
“处非处”,即是因与非因。因能令果安立,由果依因起而生、而转,故因名为“处”;反之则为“非处”,即非因。世尊以那一分智慧,如实了知这二种事:哪些法对于哪些法的生起是通过哪些因、哪些缘,此即是“处”;哪些法对于哪些法不是因、不是缘而不能令其生起,此即是“非处”。因此,称为“处……智是一”。“业自摄取”指造作了善与不善业之后所执取的业,或者业本身即称为业自摄取。“处而因”这是从缘和因两方面说的。其中,趣、依、时、功用是果的“处”,而业是“因”。“一切趣行之道智”即是了知通往一切趣,以及不往趣的修行之道。例如,当许多人一起杀害一个生命时,了知“这个人的思将导向地狱,这个人的思将导向畜生道”——像这样,对于在同一件事情中,依善与不善思所概括的各种行道,能毫无谬误地了知其真实状况。“多界种种界世间智”即以眼界等或欲界等种种界,以及这些界的种种差别,来了知蕴、处、界的世间。“他众生”指其他众生。“种种胜解智”即了知因低劣等不同胜解而有的种种胜解状态。“正是他们”指正是对其他众生。“根上下智”即了知信等诸根的上下差别显示巴利原文
Ṭhānañcaṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. Kāraṇañhi yasmā phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttitāya uppajjati ceva pavattati ca, tasmā ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Vipariyāyena aṭṭhānanti akāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ bhagavā yena ñāṇena ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ, ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhānanti pajānāti. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ṭhānañca…pe… jānanaṃ eka’’nti. Kammasamādānānanti kammaṃ samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammaññeva vā kammasamādānaṃ. Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ca hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ hetu. Sabbatthagāminīpaṭipadājānananti sabbagatigāminiyā agatigāminiyā ca paṭipadāya maggassa jānanaṃ, bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ hanantesu ‘‘imassa cetanā nirayagāminī bhavissati, imassa tiracchānayonigāminī’’ti iminā nayena ekavatthusmimpi kusalākusalacetanāsaṅkhātānaṃ paṭipattīnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvajānanaṃ . Anekadhātunānādhātulokajānananti cakkhudhātuādīhi kāmadhātuādīhi vā bahudhātuno, tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ viparītatāya nānappakāradhātuno khandhāyatanadhātulokassa jānanaṃ. Parasattānanti paresaṃ sattānaṃ. Nānādhimuttikatājānananti hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvassa jānanaṃ. Tesaṃyevāti parasattānaṃyeva. Indriyaparopariyattajānananti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvassa aparabhāvassa vuddhiyā ceva hāniyā ca jānanaṃ. Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānajānananti hānabhāgiyassa, visesabhāgiyassa ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttapaguṇajjhānassa ceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattīnañca jānanaṃ. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā vodānampi ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Bhavaṅgena pana sabbajhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Phalasamāpattiyā nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhānameva sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Pubbenivāsajānananti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena nivuṭṭhakkhandhānaṃ jānanaṃ. Cutūpapātajānananti sattānaṃ cutiyā upapattiyā ca yāthāvato jānanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Āsavakkhayajānanaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇanti attho. Yattha panetāni vitthārato āgatāni saṃvaṇṇitāni, tāni dassento ‘‘abhidhamme panā’’tiādimāha.
“无畏”:因愚痴与怖畏而寻求救护者,即怀有愚痴与怖畏之人,称为“有畏者”。远离了这种畏,便是“离畏”,此状态即是“无畏”(自信)。此无畏乃依于智成就、断成就、教说殊胜成就,以及依安稳而转起的四种观察智。因此说“于四处”等。“于四处”:即于他人所臆测的诸处,或者说于他人所臆测的、仅作为指责依据的那些事。“对于自称‘我是正自觉者’的你而言”:即你向人宣称“我是正自觉者”。“这些法”:指如“这是第五圣谛”、“这是第六取蕴”、“这是第十四处”之类,这些法是未被正觉、未通达的。显示巴利原文
Byāmohabhayavasena saraṇapariyesanaṃ sārajjanaṃ sārado, byāmohabhayaṃ. Vigato sārado etassāti visārado, tassa bhāvo vesārajjaṃ. Taṃ pana ñāṇasampadaṃ pahānasampadaṃ desanāvisesasampadaṃ khemaṃ nissāya pavattaṃ catubbidhaṃ paccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catūsu ṭhānesū’’tiādi. Catūsūti paraparikappitesu vatthūsu. Paraparikappitesu vā vatthumattesu codanākāraṇesu. Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānatoti ‘‘ahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti evaṃ paṭijānantena tayā. Ime dhammāti ‘‘idaṃ pañcamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ chaṭṭho upādānakkhandho, idaṃ terasamaṃ āyatana’’nti veditabbā ime dhammā. Anabhisambuddhā appaṭividdhattāti.
“于此”:即在那被称为“未被正觉之法”的指责依据之中。“任何”:指沙门等之外的任何其他人。“如法地”:即具有理由。此处的“法”,如同“法无碍解”等中的用法,是“因”的同义词。而“因”应理解为能令事物生起的成办因,并非造作者或令到达者。“相”:即因,在此处即是指指责依据本身。从正自觉者的身份来看,我完全不见有任何(可如法指责的依据)。“达到安稳者”:即对于那似乎未达安稳的指责,已无灾患,达到不动之状态。“达到无畏者”:即已获得无畏之状态。其余也应同样理解。但此处有所差别:“这些漏”:即欲漏等之中,所称的漏并未完全灭尽——以“漏尽”的说法,此处是指一切烦恼的断除。因为若所有漏彻底灭尽,则无任何烦恼不断。“障碍”:即能造成障碍者,指对证得天界与解脱造成障碍的事物。“法”:若从杂染中出离,则称为“出离的”。当法出离时,具此法之人亦随之被称为“出离者”,为了否定那人,故佛陀说“他不出离”。然而,为何教法被说为“出离”呢?因为能令人达到出离,依不离的比喻而说。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti tasmiṃ anabhisambuddhadhammasaṅkhāte codanāvatthusmiṃ. Kocīti samaṇādīhi añño vā yo koci. Saha dhammenāti saha hetunā. ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu viya hetupariyāyo idha dhamma-saddo. Hetūti ca uppattisādhanahetu veditabbo, na kārako sampāpako vā. Nimittanti kāraṇaṃ, taṃ panettha codanāvatthumeva. Na samanupassāmi sammāsambuddhabhāvato. Khemappattoti akhemappattarūpāya codanāya anupaddavaṃ patto niccalabhāvappatto. Vesārajjappattoti visāradabhāvappatto. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – ime āsavāti kāmāsavādīsu ime nāma āsavā na parikkhīṇāti āsavakkhayavacanenettha sabbakilesappahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Na hi so kileso atthi, yo sabbaso āsavesu khīṇesu nappahīyeyya. Antarāyikāti antarāyakarā, saggavimokkhādhigamassa antarāyakarāti attho. Dhammo hi yo saṃkilesato niyyāti, so ‘‘niyyāniko’’ti vutto. Dhamme niyyante taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo niyyānikoti voharito hotīti tassa paṭikkhipanto ‘‘so na niyyātī’’ti āha. Kathaṃ pana desanādhammo niyyātīti vuccati? Niyyānatthasamādhānato, so abhedopacārena ‘‘niyyātī’’ti vutto. Atha vā ‘‘dhammo desito’’ti ariyadhammassa adhippetattā na koci virodho.
“属于牛王”即“牛王的”。以无所畏惧之义,犹如牛王,故称“牛王”,即最胜处——一切知性。过去诸佛因安住于牛王处,故称“牛王”。因宣说一切知性而面对大众,或四众前来亲近,故为“牛王”。因四众确实面向佛陀而住,不会背向而住。“此”即“牛”这个词也是如此。“他的”指牛王的。那些以力量生起与安住为特征的,依此而有牛王处;更为殊胜者,则依此而成为牛王处,应如此理解。世间中,任何为显示佛德而说的譬喻,全部都是低劣的。即使不站立,他也自称站立,这就是承认。显示巴利原文
Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ, asantasanaṭṭhena āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ, seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ sabbaññutaṃ. Āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyitāya āsabhā nāma pubbabuddhā. Sabbaññutapaṭijānanavasena abhimukhaṃ gacchanti, catasso vā parisā upasaṅkamantīti āsabhā. Catassopi hi parisā buddhābhimukhā evaṃ tiṭṭhanti, na tiṭṭhanti parammukhā. Idampīti ‘‘usabho’’ti idampi padaṃ. Tassāti nisabhassa. Yesaṃ baluppādāvaṭṭhānānaṃ vasena usabhassa āsabhaṇṭhānaṃ icchitaṃ, tato sātisayānaṃ eva tesaṃ vasena āsabhaṇṭhānaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci loke upamaṃ nāma buddhaguṇānaṃ nidassanabhāvena vuccati, sabbaṃ taṃ nihīnameva. Tiṭṭhamāno cāti atiṭṭhantopi tiṭṭhamāno eva paṭijānāti nāma. Upagacchatīti anujānāti.
“此八”:这是为了显示无畏智的威力。如同善巧的说法者融入聪慧之众,能以相应言教令智者心生欢喜,同样,面对此八种众,导师无畏智的威力便显露无遗,故说“于众中”。“刹帝利众”:即刹帝利聚集的集会。其余各众亦同此理。“魔众”:即魔天聚集的集会。与魔同类、属于魔之众,名为“魔众”。凡此诸众,皆是就其威严峻厉之相而说。常人但闻“国王在此”,便言语失常,腋下流汗,刹帝利众即具如此威严;婆罗门精通三吠陀,居士善巧种种工巧与文字之学,沙门通达自他宗义——于此诸众中说法,实为极难。诸天之威严更不待言;一说“非人”,大众便全身战栗,见其形、闻其声,众生乃至昏厥,非人众便是如此严峻。因此,这些众皆是依威严峻厉之相而说。此处为何不取焰摩天等类之众?以其极度耽湎欲乐、缺乏如理作意故。焰摩天等享受极胜妙之欲乐,深生耽著,其心不会自然生起听法之欲;唯因大菩萨与诸佛威神力所摄受,有时方于大集会中行亲近等事。因此,天宫说法也大多不以这些因缘而起。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakho imāti idaṃ vesārajjañāṇassa baladassanaṃ. Yathā hi byattaṃ parisaṃ ajjhogāhetvā viññūnaṃ cittaṃ ārādhanasamatthāya kathāya dhammakathikassa chekabhāvo paññāyati, evaṃ imā aṭṭha parisā patvā satthu vesārajjañāṇassa balaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘parisāsū’’ti. Khattiyaparisāti khattiyānaṃ sannipatitānaṃ samūho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Māraparisāti mārakāyikānaṃ sannipatitānaṃ samūho. Mārasadisānaṃ mārānaṃ parisāti māraparisā. Sabbā cetā parisā uggaṭṭhānadassanavasena gahitā. Manussā hi ‘‘ettha rājā nisinno’’ti vutte pakativacanampi vattuṃ na sakkonti, kacchehi sedā muccanti, evaṃ uggā khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇā tīsu vedesu kusalā honti, gahapatayo nānāvohāresu ca akkharacintāya ca kusalā, samaṇā sakavādaparavādesu kusalā, tesaṃ majjhe dhammakathākathanaṃ nāma ativiya bhāriyaṃ. Devānaṃ uggabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Amanussoti hi vuttamatte manussānaṃ sakalasarīraṃ kampati, tesaṃ rūpaṃ disvāpi saddaṃ sutvāpi sattā visaññitāpi honti. Evaṃ amanussaparisā uggā. Iti cetā parisā uggaṭṭhānadassanavasena vuttā. Kasmā panettha yāmādiparisā na gahitāti? Bhusaṃ kāmābhigiddhatāya yonisomanasikāravirahato. Yāmādayo hi uḷāruḷāre kāme paṭisevantā tatthābhigiddhatāya dhammassavanāya sabhāvena cittampi na uppādenti, mahābodhisattānaṃ pana buddhānañca ānubhāvena ākaḍḍhiyamānā kadāci nesaṃ payirupāsanādīni karonti tādise mahāsamaye. Teneva hi vimānavatthudesanāpi taṃnimittā bahulā nāhosi. Seṭṭhanādanti kenaci appaṭihatabhāvena uttamanādaṃ. Abhītanādanti vesārajjayogato kutoci nibbhayanādaṃ. Sīhanādasuttenāti khandhiyavagge āgatena sīhanādasuttena. Sahanatoti khamanato. Hananatoti vidhamanato viddhaṃsanato. Yathā vātiādi ‘‘sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadatī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttassa atthassa viññāpanaṃ.
“此”:即指“梵轮”一词。“般若所成”:由长时修习的波罗蜜慧与观慧所引生。“悲所成”:由“此世间实陷苦难”等方式运转的大悲所引生。正如从出家之时起,大菩萨便无有违碍证得圣道的加行;从住兜率天、从得授记以来亦复如是——这第二、第三种理趣也应作如是解。“于果刹那”:指于最上果刹那。因为通达已达究竟,阿拉汉道智如金刚喻一般,是最殊胜的通达,故说“于果刹那生起”。而依此所得的教学智,其作用唯在令他人觉悟而成办,故说“于憍陈如证得须陀洹时……于果刹那转起”。从此直至般涅槃,教学智相续转起;正如已转起的转轮圣王轮宝安住一般,应知这便是已转法轮之安住。“两者”:以“亦”字,总摄世间教学智与其他不共功德,说明其相同。“从胸生”:即从如来胸中所生,故称“亲生智”。显示巴利原文
Etanti ‘‘brahmacakka’’nti etaṃ padaṃ. Paññāpabhāvitanti cirakālaparibhāvitāya pāramitāpaññāya vipassanāpaññāya ca uppāditaṃ. Karuṇāpabhāvitanti ‘‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinayappavattāya mahākaruṇāya uppāditaṃ. Yathā abhinikkhamanato pabhuti mahābodhisattānaṃ ariyamaggādhigamanavirodhinī paṭipatti natthi, evaṃ tusitabhavanato niyatabhāvāpattito ca paṭṭhāyāti dutiyatatiyanayā ca gahitā. Phalakkhaṇeti aggaphalakkhaṇe. Paṭivedhaniṭṭhattā arahattamaggañāṇaṃ vajirūpamatāyeva sātisayo paṭivedhoti ‘‘phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena paṭiladdhassapi desanāñāṇassa kiccanipphatti parassa bujjhanamattena hotīti ‘‘aññāsikoṇḍaññassa sotāpatti…pe… phalakkhaṇe pavattanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ pana yāva parinibbānā desanāñāṇappavatti, tasseva pavattitassa dhammacakkassa ṭhānanti veditabbaṃ pavattitacakkassa cakkavattino cakkaratanassa ṭhānaṃ viya. Ubhayampīti pi-saddena lokiyadesanāñāṇassa itarena anaññasādhāraṇatāvasena samānataṃ sampiṇḍeti. Urasi jātatāya uraso sambhūtanti orasaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
“如是色”:此处“如是”一词,为毫无遗余地显明色之自相,故结合“这是色”一句,从共相与自相两方面作显明。“有此量色”:以此为毫无遗余地显明“此外更无色”之相,即无有其他色存在。今为详细解说此义,故说“以恼坏为自性……”等。其中,“恼坏”指于冷等相违缘和合时,生起变异的状况。“等”字则含摄内、外等分类。以相……乃至……而观:即以硬等之相、以持等之味、以领受等之现起、以四大种等之足处而观察。如是所把握者:即如是以共相及从相等而把握者。“以无明集”:指由无明而生起,即依无明之存在而有。存在与灭相违,故灭无有时,存在即有;因此,当过去世已成的无明存在时,于现世中色的集起、色的生起便发生,这便是其义。“以渴爱集”、“以业集”,亦应依此理趣而解。而无明等三者属过去时所摄,故与之俱有的取亦已被含摄在内,应当了知。于转起缘中,因段食之力最强,故唯举此;然以“以食集”所显的转起缘之理,已含摄时节与心,因此,从缘的角度显明十二种色的生起方式,也是必然之理,理应了知。显示巴利原文
Iti rūpanti ettha iti-saddo anavasesato rūpassa sarūpanidassanatthoti tassa ‘‘idaṃ rūpa’’nti etena sādhāraṇato ca sarūpanidassanamāha. Ettakaṃ rūpanti etena anavasesato ‘‘ito uddhaṃ rūpaṃ natthī’’ti nimittassa aññassa abhāvaṃ. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘ruppanasabhāvañcevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ruppanaṃ sītādivirodhipaccayasamavāye visadisuppatti. Ādi-saddena ajjhattikabāhirādibhedaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Lakkhaṇa…pe… vasenāti kakkhaḷattādilakkhaṇavasena sandhāraṇādirasavasena sampaṭicchanādipaccupaṭṭhānavasena bhūtattayādipadaṭṭhānavasena ca. Evaṃ pariggahitassāti evaṃ sādhāraṇato ca lakkhaṇādito ca pariggahitassa. Avijjāsamudayāti avijjāya uppādā, atthibhāvāti attho. Nirodhavirodhī hi atthibhāvo hoti, tasmā nirodhe asati atthibhāvo hoti, tasmā purimabhave siddhāya avijjāya sati imasmiṃ bhave rūpassa samudayo rūpassa uppādo hotīti attho. Taṇhāsamudayā kammasamudayāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Avijjādīhi ca tīhi atītakālikattā tesaṃ sahakārīkāraṇabhūtaṃ upādānampi gahitamevāti veditabbaṃ. Pavattipaccayesu kabaḷīkāraāhārassa balavatāya, so eva gahito, ‘‘āhārasamudayā’’ti pana gahitena pavattipaccayatāmattena utucittānipi gahitāneva hontīti dvādasasamuṭṭhānikaṃ rūpassa paccayato dassanampi bhavitabbamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nibbattilakkhaṇantiādinā kālavasena udayadassanamāha. Tattha bhūtavasena magge udayaṃ passitvā ṭhito idha santativasena anukkamena khaṇavasena passati. Avijjānirodhā rūpanirodhoti aggamaggañāṇena avijjāya anuppādanirodhato anāgatassa anuppādanirodho hoti paccayābhāve abhāvato. Paccayanirodhenāti avijjāsaṅkhātassa paccayassa nirodhabhāvena. Taṇhānirodhāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Āhāranirodhāti pavattipaccayassa kabaḷīkārāhārassa abhāvā. Rūpanirodhāti taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpassa abhāvo hoti. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇanti bhavakālavasena hetudvayadassanaṃ. Tasmā taṃ padaṭṭhānavasena pageva passitvā ṭhito idha santativasena disvā anukkamena khaṇavasena passati.
“如是受”等,其义亦应依前文所说理趣了知。“乐等差别”:即乐、苦、不苦不乐等的区分。“色想等差别”:即色想、声想、香想、味想、触想、法想等的区分。“触等差别”:即触、思、作意等的区分。依相、味、现起、足处而观:即依领纳可爱等相、受用可爱行相等味、身乐等现起、可爱所缘等足处而观。因《相应部》中说“触已而受,触已而想,触已而思”,对于受等三蕴,应说“以触集”。又因说“识缘名色”,对于识蕴,应说“以名色集”。依他们而配合:即如“以无明灭而受灭”等,依无明等而配合了知。显示巴利原文
Iti vedanātiādīsupi vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Sukhādibhedanti sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhādivibhāgaṃ. Rūpasaññādibhedanti rūpasaññā, sadda… gandha… rasa… phoṭṭhabba … dhammasaññādivibhāgaṃ. Phassādibhedanti phassacetanāmanasikārādivibhāgaṃ. Lakkhaṇa…pe… vasenāti iṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇādilakkhaṇavasena iṭṭhākārasambhogarasādirasavasena kāyikaassādādipaccupaṭṭhānavasena iṭṭhārammaṇādipadaṭṭhānavasena. ‘‘Phuṭṭho vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) vacanato tīsu vedanādīsu khandhesu phassasamudayāti vattabbaṃ. Viññāṇappaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti vacanato viññāṇakkhandhe nāmarūpasamudayāti vattabbaṃ. Tesaṃyeva vasenāti ‘‘avijjānirodho vedanānirodho’’tiādinā tesaṃyeva avijjādīnaṃ vasena yojetabbaṃ.
依取蕴之集与灭,已显示外道所不能及的有限狮子吼。今将依顺逆次第,从略至广,显示不与他共通的缘相范围——无限狮子吼,故说:“这也是另一狮子吼。”“此”即指“此有故”等略说的缘起句。于此,“此有故彼有,此灭故彼灭”——亦即无明等有则行等有,无明等灭则行等灭——由此在前缘相中显示了决定:“此有故彼有,非无此而有;此生故彼生,非不从此生;此灭故彼灭,非不从此灭。”因此,应知此处所说缘起之相含摄了决定性。“灭”是指无明等离贪、离去而未来不生、不转起。正如所说:“然,无明无余离贪灭故……”等。与灭相反的是生起,由此以生起与灭的区分而说“此灭故彼灭”。他借此显示:“若无灭则无生起,而此处的生起即是‘有’。”“此有故彼有”即是此相。以另一种表达说“此生故彼生”,是以后者简别前者。因此,说“此有故”并非仅指正在发生的,而应知其自性不为道所灭。又因世尊在解释“此无故彼无,此灭故彼灭”此双重所举之相时,以“然,无明无余离贪灭故,行灭”等只说了灭,故“无”也即是显示巴利原文
Upādānakkhandhānaṃ samudayatthaṅgamavasena titthiyānaṃ avisayopi sappadeso sīhanādo dassito. Idāni nippadeso anulomapaṭilomavasena saṅkhepato vitthārato paccayākāravisayo anaññasādhāraṇo dassīyatīti āha, ‘‘ayampi aparo sīhanādo’’ti. Tassāti ‘‘imasmiṃ satī’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttapaṭiccasamuppādapāḷiyā. Ettha ca ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujhtī’’ti avijjādīnaṃ bhāve saṅkhārādīnaṃ bhāvassa, avijjādīnaṃ nirodhe saṅkhārādīnaṃ nirodhassa kathanena purimasmiṃ paccayalakkhaṇe niyamo dassito ‘‘imasmiṃ sati eva, nāsati, imassa uppādā eva, nānuppādā, nirodhā eva, nānirodhā’’ti. Tenedaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ antogadhaniyamaṃ idha paṭiccasamuppādassa vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nirodhoti ca avijjādīnaṃ virāgā vigamena āyatiṃ anuppādo appavatti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā’’tiādi. Nirodhavirodhī ca uppādo, yena so uppādanirodhavibhāgena vutto ‘‘imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti. Tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘asati nirodhe uppādo nāma, so cettha atthibhāvoti vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti idameva hi lakkhaṇaṃ. Pariyāyantarena ‘‘imassa uppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vadantena parena purimaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Tasmā na vattamānaṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘imasmiṃ satī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kho maggena anirujjhanasabhāvañcāti viññāyati. Yasmā ca ‘‘imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti dvidhāpi uddiṭṭhassa lakkhaṇassa niddesaṃ vadantena bhagavatā ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādinā nirodhova vutto, tasmā natthibhāvopi nirodho evāti natthibhāvaviruddho atthibhāvo anirodhoti dassitaṃ hoti. Tena anirodhasaṅkhātena atthibhāvena uppādaṃ viseseti. Tato idha na kevalaṃ atthibhāvamattaṃ uppādoti attho adhippeto, atha kho anirodhasaṅkhāto atthibhāvo cāti ayamattho vibhāvito hoti. Evametaṃ lakkhaṇadvayavacanaṃ aññamaññaṃ visesanavisesitabbabhāvena sātthakanti veditabbaṃ. Ko panāyaṃ anirodho nāma, yo ‘‘atthibhāvo, uppādo’’ti ca vuttoti? Appahīnabhāvo ca anibbattitaphalabhāvena phaluppādanārahatā cāti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana paramatthadīpaniyaṃ udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 1). Vuttanayena veditabbo.
“以分别五蕴等”:即分别五取蕴及十二支缘相的方式。因为在这《十力经》中,所教导的法相仅为五蕴缘相,故说“五蕴缘相法”。不攥师拳而显明,于义与声皆不隐覆、不低垂,故说“不覆”。开显即明了,故说“开显而立”。照了即以智光照耀、点燃,故说“照亮、照明”。“处处破裂之处”即处处有裂隙。缝合打结:即穿线缝合,于不能缝合处则以线打结。法无破片:即无破片而离破片,显示其不顺处即无破绽,故说“于此无”等。穿衣披覆即是摄持。自作辩才。增长自宗。沙门垢:指现沙门装束、伪装沙门,成为沙门之垢。于自身相续中造作恶行与诈骗者,即是“造笼者”,即恶戒者。彼造笼者被驱出,即赶走。“糠”即沙门中的渣滓。“拖出”即拉出之义。“驱散”即如驱散秕糠。正如无米粒实质、仅有谷物外壳者称为秕;同样,无戒等实质而仅有沙门外相者,如秕,故称秕,即恶戒者。驱散彼秕,带走即移除。具念:即以强念而成为具念者。显示巴利原文
Pañcakkhandhavibhajanādivasenāti pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ dvādasapadikassa paccayākārassa vibhajanavasena. Imasmiñhi dasabalasutte dhammassa desitākāro pañcakkhandhapaccayākāramatto. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakkhandhapaccayākāradhammo’’ti. Ācariyamuṭṭhiyā akaraṇena vibhūto, so pana atthato ca saddato ca pihito heṭṭhāmukhajāto vā na hotīti āha ‘‘anikujjito’’ti. Vivaṭoti vibhāvito. Tenāha ‘‘vivaritvā ṭhapito’’ti . Pakāsitoti ñāṇobhāsena obhāsito ādīpitoti āha ‘‘dīpito jotito’’ti. Tattha tattha chinnabhinnaṭṭhāne. Sibbitagaṇṭhitanti vākaṃ gahetvā sibbitaṃ, sibbituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭhāne vākena gaṇṭhitañca. Chinnapilotikābhāvena vigatapilotiko dhammo, tassa chinnapilotikassa paṭilomatā chinnabhinnatābhāvenāti dassento ‘‘na hetthā’’tiādimāha. Nivāsanapārupanaṃ pariggahaṇaṃ. Sayaṃ paṭibhānaṃ kappetvā. Vaḍḍhentā attano samayaṃ. Samaṇakacavaranti samaṇavesadhāraṇavasena samaṇapaṭirūpatāya samaṇānaṃ kacavarabhūtaṃ. Attano rūpapavattiyā karaṇḍaṃ kucchitaṃ dhuttaṃ vāti pavattetīti kāraṇḍavo, dussīlo. Taṃ kāraṇḍavaṃ. Niddhamathāti nīharatha. Kasambunti samaṇakasaṭaṃ. Apakassathāti apakaḍḍhatha nanti attho. Palāpeti palāpasadise. Tathā hi taṇḍulasārarahito dhaññapaṭirūpako thusamattako palāpoti vuccati, evaṃ sīlādisārarahito samaṇapaṭirūpako palāpo viyāti palāpo, dussīlo. Te palāpe. Vāhethāti apanetha. Patissatāti bāḷhasatitāya patissatā hothāti.
「凭信出家者」:指未被王难等所逼迫,怀着「我将如此战胜已陷入生等轮回之怖畏」之心,为出离轮回而依信心出家之人。「行良家子」:因端正的行为而称为良家子,故说「无论从何处」等语。「生良家子」:因殊胜的出身而称为良家子。「善士所称叹的诸支」:指作为正勤支分的诸行,以及不顾恋身命而发起精进者——依如此转起的精进力,故说一支为「皮」;其余各支的原理也是如此。精进应安立于九处:即「于五处依时,于四处依威仪」,应当如此于九处安立并转起精进。显示巴利原文
Saddhāya pabbajitenāti rājūpaddavādīhi anupaddutena ‘‘evañhi taṃ otiṇṇaṃ jātiādisaṃsārabhayaṃ vijinissāmī’’ti vaṭṭanissaraṇatthaṃ āgatāya saddhāya vasena pabbajitena. Ācārakulaputtoti ācārena abhijāto. Tenāha ‘‘yato kutocī’’tiādi. Jātikulaputtoti jātisampattiyā abhijāto. Viññuppasatthāni aṅgāni sammāpadhāniyaṅgabhāvena, kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkhabhāvena vīriyaṃ ārabhantassa tathāpavattavīriyavasena ‘‘taco ekaṃ aṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Navasu ṭhānesu samādhātabbanti ‘‘kālavasena pañcasu, iriyāpathavasena catūsū’’ti evaṃ navasu ṭhānesu vīriyaṃ samādhātabbaṃ pavattetabbaṃ.
「他住于苦」:懈怠之人,在能导向出离的教法中,由于不修精勤,未证得沙门的真舍利益,故住于苦。或者将「自利」(sakaṃ atthaṃ)中的 ka 改为 da,作「己利」(sadatthaṃ)解读。为从根本上显示懈怠者的利益衰损,故说「六门」等语。因坐着就压坏座椅,故称「压座者」,这是对他的贬称;其意趣是:他毫不执持任何利益,只成为座椅的负担。在别处则称为「压地者」,那里的意思是:因悭吝而见他人布施之地便心生嫉妒、眼红。「满粪者」:指饱食充腹后,便充塞厕所之人。显示巴利原文
So dukkhaṃ viharatīti kusītapuggalo niyyānikasāsane vīriyārambhassa akaraṇena sāmaññatthassa anuppattiyā dukkhaṃ viharati. Sakaṃ vā atthaṃ sadatthaṃ ka-kārassa da-kāraṃ katvā . Kusītassa atthaparihāyanaṃ mūlato paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ ‘‘cha dvārānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nisajjāvasena pīṭhamaddanato pīṭhamaddano, nirassanavacanaṃ tassa, kassacipatthassa adhāraṇato kevalaṃ pīṭhabhārabhūtoti adhippāyo. Aññattha pana ‘‘makhamaddano’’ti vuccati, tattha dānamicchāya paresaṃ makhaṃ passantoti attho. Laṇḍapūrakoti kucchipūraṃ bhuñjitvā vaccakuṭipūrako.
「勤精进者」等句,应当以与「懈怠之人」处所述相反的道理来理解,且此处是以希求赞叹的方式而称扬的。「勤精进者」:指已策励精进之人。「致力于其心者」:指已将其心送往涅槃之人。由此显示了弟子们的正行道与礼敬师长的功德。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āraddhavīriyo’’tiādīsu ‘‘kusīto puggalo’’ti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo, āsīsāya vasena thomito. Āraddhavīriyeti paggahitavīriye. Pahitatteti nibbānaṃ patipesitacitte. Etena sāvakānaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ satthuvandanānisaṃsañca dassesi.
“以低劣法”:指依止于轮回的法。由此说“以低劣之信”等。“以最胜法”:指依止于出离的殊胜法;即使仅有少许,也因具有远离杂染的浑浊义及精要义,故净信者不应饮用(低劣之法)。“教法”:指具备教、行、证三相的教法。“清澄”:因为远离了过失污垢,且能令人生起净信。“应饮”:如同以钵器般能安乐享用;并因远离恶行、一切烦恼、杂秽、泥沼等过失。显示巴利原文
Hīnenāti vaṭṭanissitena dhammena. Tenāha ‘‘hīnāya saddhāyā’’tiādi. Aggenāti seṭṭhena vivaṭṭanissitena dhammena, īsakampi katakālusiyavigataṭṭhena maṇḍaṭṭhena ca pasannampi surādi na pātabbaṃ. Sāsananti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhalakkhaṇaṃ sāsanaṃ. Pasannaṃ vigatadosamalattā pasādaniyattā ca. Pātabbañca pattena viya sukhena paribhuñjitabbato duccaritasabbakilesakasāvamalapaṅkadosarahitattā ca.
已成为醍醐的菩提分法教说,也名为“教说醍醐”。对这唯一教说醍醐的领受者——那些善行、无过失的四众弟子,称为“领受醍醐”。道之梵行,因导向于此,故整个菩提分法聚亦名为“梵行醍醐”。因此说“什么是教说醍醐”等。其中,“了知者”指善证悟诸谛的人,正如最初所说“开示四圣谛”等。在预备阶段,依于“有此世”等,远离对此世和他世的迷惑而生起的胜解,即是“胜解醍醐”。弃舍后:即通过断尽而舍弃之后。属于四地的信根胜解,因其为胜解醍醐,故成为醍醐的胜解。以“等”字含摄“策励醍醐:精进根舍弃懈怠之糠”等其余经文。此处:即在此教法中,或在“醍醐”一词中。此为具格,由此表示“大师现前”;若与现前相应,则能带来无疑的果报。故说“非现前”等。“量”:指适宜的药量。“涌吐”:即药的吐出和泻下,或依此令病素得以吐出和泻下。同样地:犹如在良医面前,心中无疑而饮药醍醐,当“大师现前”时,心中无疑而勤精进,饮此应饮的教法醍醐——应当这样联系。以证得神通等而获得成就,故有功德;以证悟道果而增长,故有增长;他利:通过使他人随顺自己……显示巴利原文
Maṇḍabhūtā bodhipakkhiyadhammadesanāpi desanāmaṇḍo. Tassa ekasseva pana desanāmaṇḍassa paṭiggāhakā suppaṭipannā dosarahitā catasso parisā paṭiggahamaṇḍo. Maggabrahmacariyaṃ taggatikattā sakalopi bodhipakkhiyadhammarāsi brahmacariyamaṇḍo. Tenāha ‘‘katamo desanāmaṇḍo’’tiādi. Tattha viññātāroti saccānaṃ abhisametāvino. Tathā hi ādito ‘‘catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ācikkhaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pubbabhāge ‘‘atthi ayaṃ loko’’tiādinā idhalokaparalokagatasammosavigamena pavatto adhimokkhova adhimokkhamaṇḍo. Chaḍḍetvā samucchedavasena vijahitvā. Catubhūmakassa saddhindriyassa adhimokkhamaṇḍena maṇḍabhūtaṃ adhimokkhaṃ. Ādi-saddena ‘‘paggahamaṇḍo vīriyindriyaṃ kosajjakasaṭa’’ntiādiṃ pāḷisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Etthāti etasmiṃ sāsane, ‘‘maṇḍasmi’’nti vā vacane. Kāraṇavacanaṃ, tena ‘‘satthā sammukhībhūto’’ti sammukhabhāvanāyogo nirāsaṅkaphalāvahoti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘asammukhā’’tiādi. Pamāṇanti anurūpaṃ bhesajjassa pamāṇaṃ. Uggamananti bhesajjassa vamanaṃ virecanaṃ, tassa vā vasena dosadhātūnaṃ vamanaṃ virecanaṃ. Evamevāti yathā bhesajjamaṇḍaṃ vejjasammukhā nirāsaṅkā pivanti, evameva ‘‘satthā sammukhībhūto’’ti nirāsaṅkā vīriyaṃ katvā, maṇḍapeyya sāsanaṃ pivathāti yojanā. Abhiññāsamāpattipaṭilābhena sānisaṃsā. Maggaphalādhigamanena savaḍḍhi. Paratthanti attano diṭṭhānugatiāpattiyā, tathā sammāpaṭipajjantānaṃ paresaṃ atthanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
3. 《近依经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Upanisasuttavaṇṇanā
23 「知者、见者」:这里的“见”仅指以慧眼来见,而不是以肉眼来见,所以经中说“这两个词意思相同”。虽然是同一个意思,但这是指:就智慧的特征(知相)、智慧的力量(知力)所行及的领域(境)而言,这样去“见”的状态与“知”并不矛盾。这就是它的意趣。因此,注疏才说“因为‘知’的特征就是智”等等。所谓「知力」,是指凭借智慧的力量,智慧的作用能照亮对象领域的意思。因此才说“以智慧照见离系之法”。而“知者、见者”这种表述,是以“知”与“见”作为切入点,把人作为叙述主导而展开的教示。所以注疏说“基于知的特征”等等。或者可以这样理解:“知者”,是指以预备阶段的前行智而了知的人;“见者”,是指以后续阶段的智慧而亲见的人。或者,说“知者”,并不是指这里所教导的“知”是依靠传闻、推论或遍寻的程度;而是为了阐明:就像眼识直接看见色法那样,是亲自现观了色法等以及它们的集起等之后,直接地“见”,所以才说“见者”。在这里也可以作这样的解读。显示巴利原文
23.Jānato passatoti ettha dassanaṃ paññācakkhunāva dassanaṃ adhippetaṃ, na maṃsacakkhunāti āha ‘‘dvepi padāni ekatthānī’’ti. Evaṃ santepīti padadvayassa ekatthattepi ñāṇalakkhaṇañāṇappabhāvavisayasssa tathādassanabhāvāvirodhanāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘jānanalakkhaṇañhi ñāṇa’’ntiādi. Ñāṇappabhāvanti ñāṇānubhāvena ñāṇakiccavisayobhāsanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ñāṇena vivaṭṭe dhamme passatī’’ti. Jānato passatoti ca jānanadassanamukhena puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā pavattāti āha – ‘‘ñāṇalakkhaṇaṃ upādāyā’’tiādi. Jānatoti vā pubbabhāgañāṇena jānato, aparabhāgena ñāṇena passato. Jānatoti vā vatvā na jānanaṃ anussavākāraparivitakkamattavasena idhādhippetaṃ, atha kho rūpāni viya cakkhuviññāṇena rūpādīni tesañca samudayādike paccakkhe katvā dassananti vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘passato’’ti vuttanti evaṃ vā ettha attho.
“诸漏灭尽”:指诸漏的彻底断除。而这正是诸漏的不再生起之灭,是全然、绝对的不存在。故说“不生”、“已尽的特征”、“无有状态”。为说明“漏尽”一词在“已尽的特征”等语境中的出处,才说“由漏尽……”。“随顺于正直之道的人”:指已断除烦恼的弯曲与身行的弯曲等,变得正直,并随念那含摄观的下层道法的人,因为他的那些烦恼确实已灭尽。“于灭尽上,智先生起”;“随后,另一智无间生起”:这是说,在称为“灭尽”的最上道那一刹那,包含在该道中的智先生起;紧接着,另一智——即阿拉汉果智——无间地生起。虽然偈颂中只说了“于灭尽上”,但依彻底断除之义,“诸漏已尽之道,称为尽”,故说“道被说为漏尽”。“沙门”:此处意指已息灭诸恶之人,他即是漏尽者。“由漏尽”:此处指果;但从另一角度说,漏尽之道亦被称为漏尽,因为果正是由它来证得的。由此也应理解,涅槃亦被称为漏尽的体性。显示巴利原文
Āsavānaṃ khayanti āsavānaṃ accantappahānaṃ. So pana tesaṃ anuppādanirodho sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvo evāti āha ‘‘asamuppādo khīṇākāro natthibhāvo’’ti. Āsavakkhayasaddassa khīṇākārādīsu āgataṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ujumaggānusārinoti kilesavaṅkakāyavaṅkādīnaṃ pahānena ujubhūte savipassanāheṭṭhimamaggadhamme anussarantassa. Yadeva hissa parikkhīṇaṃ. Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘‘tato aññā anantarā’’ti khayasaṅkhāte aggamagge tappariyāpannameva ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ uppajjati, tadanantaraṃ pana aññā arahattanti. Yadipi gāthāya ‘‘khayasmiṃ’’icceva vuttaṃ, samucchedavasena pana ‘‘āsave khīṇe maggo khayo’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘maggo āsavakkhayoti vutto’’ti. Samaṇoti samitapāpo adhippeto, so pana khīṇāsavo hotīti. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā’’ti idha phalaṃ, pariyāyena pana āsavakkhayo maggo, tena pattabbato phalaṃ. Eteneva nibbānassapi āsavakkhayabhāvo vuttoti veditabbo.
“只有了知者,才是真正看见的人”:此处意在确立一个决定性的原则,而非其他情况。因为若无此简别,便无殊胜可言,亦非我们所主张。为显示此决定性的结果,故说“并非针对不了知者,也非针对未见者”。因此他说:“若有人不了知、不见,我不为他说法,即是此意”。以此显示对诸蕴的通达,是漏尽不可或缺的因。“以此”:指“并非针对不了知者,也非针对未见者”此语。那些被驳斥者是谁?即是持以下说法的人:“愚者与智者流转轮回后,皆将终止苦”(《长部》1.168;《中部》2.228)、“众生无因无缘而得清净”(《长部》1.168;《中部》2.101, 227)等。在他们之中,有些人声称仅凭殊胜的出身、转移便可清净生死轮回;另一些人则声称依自在天、生主等因而得清净。应知,这一切都包含在“由轮回等缘故”一句中。“用前面的两个词”:即“知者、见者”二词。已说“方法”,因论题为“漏尽”。“以此”:即“并非针对不了知者,也非针对未见者”之语。显示巴利原文
Jānato eva passato evāti evamettha niyamo icchito, na aññathā visesābhāvato aniṭṭhāpannovāti tassa niyamassa phalaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no ajānato no apassato’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘yo pana na jānāti, na passati, tassa no vadāmīti attho’’ti. Iminā khandhānaṃ pariññā āsavakkhayassa ekantikakāraṇanti dasseti. Etenāti ‘‘no ajānato, no apassato’’ti etena vacanena. Te paṭikkhittāti ke pana teti? ‘‘Bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karissanti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.228) ahetū appaccayā sattā visujjhantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.101, 227) evamādivādā. Tesu keci abhijātisaṅkantimattena saṃsārasuddhiṃ paṭijānanti, aññe issarapajāpatikāraṇādivasena. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ saṃsārādīhīti ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimena padadvayenāti ‘‘jānato passato’’ti iminā padadvayena. Upāyo vutto ‘‘āsavakkhayā’’ti adhikārato. Imināti ‘‘no ajānato, no apassato’’ti iminā padadvayena. Anupāyo hoti esa āsavānaṃ khayassa, yadidaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ apariññāti ‘‘jānato passato’’ti imināva aniyamavacanena anupāyapaṭisedhopi atthato bodhito hotīti. Tameva hi atthato bodhitabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ evaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“达跋种姓者”:意指具有“达跋”(质直)特质的人。正如在“实有(drabyo)”“实有可灭,非实有不灭”等语境中所称的“实有(drabya)”。或指本质坚实之人,意为具足相应戒行。如经中所说:“达跋啊,质直之人并非如此开脱”(《律藏·波罗夷》384)。“立于行事之首而做”:即是将遵行(戒律义务)作为最上、最核心的职责来做。若有比丘为了不知如何营办“活命清净”的同梵行者,或为作遮风挡雨等物而制作伞盖等,他便被称为“立于行事之首而做”。所谓“不成为立足处”,并非指这些事不作为依怙法而成为证悟道果的亲依止缘,故不能如是说。因为经中曾言:“于同梵行者高低不等的事务,他皆能干”等等(《长部》3.345)。“如此,对于了知的人”:如此,因了知医疗等手艺,以此为因、以邪命为缘,欲漏等诸漏只会增长,而不会断除。而“如此……诸漏得以灭尽”这段经文,宜取“阿拉汉果”的表述才恰当,因为以果为名,其因已不言自明地成就了。显示巴利原文
Dabbajātikoti dabbarūpo. So hi ‘‘drabyo’’ti vuccati ‘‘drabyaṃ vinassati nādrabya’’ntiādīsu. Dabbajātiko vā sārasabhāvo, sāruppasīlācāroti attho. Yathāha ‘‘na kho dabba dabbā evaṃ nibbeṭhentī’’ti (pārā. 384). Vattasīse ṭhatvāti vattaṃ uttamaṃ dhuraṃ katvā. Yo hi parisuddhājīvo kātuṃ ajānantānaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ attano vā vassavātādipaṭibāhanatthaṃ chattādīni karoti, so vattasīse ṭhatvā karoti nāma. Padaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti na vattabbaṃ nāthakaraṇadhammabhāvena maggaphalādhigamassa upanissayabhāvato. Vuttañhi ‘‘yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṃ uccāvacāni kiccakaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hotī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 3.345). Evaṃ jānatoti evaṃ vejjakammādīnaṃ jānanahetu micchājīvapaccayā kāmāsavādayo āsavā vaḍḍhantiyeva, na pahīyanti. ‘‘Evaṃ kho…pe… āsavānaṃ khayo hotī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā arahattasseva gahaṇaṃ yuttaṃ phalaggahaṇena hetuno avuttasiddhattā. Tenāha ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayante jātattā’’ti.
「来」指来源;带来它的,称为「能引生来源者」,即前行的预备道。「在灭尽上」是以「以体显体之相」的用法而用的处格;而「于灭尽」则是对境而言。因此说:「在称作诸漏灭尽的」。果依止于此,故因称为「亲依止」。这是就最高意义而言,即阿拉汉果的解脱。「那」指解脱;「它的」指省察智的。不过,对于倾向于厌离的心,也可能存在无间亲依止缘等多种缘,所以说:「应视具体情况而理解其缘性」。显示巴利原文
Āgamanaṃ āgamo, taṃ āvahatīti āgamanīyā, pubbabhāgapaṭipadā. Khayasminti bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe bhummaṃ, khayeti pana visaye. Tenāha ‘‘āsavakkhayasaṅkhāte’’ti. Upanisīdati phalaṃ etthāti kāraṇaṃ upanisā. Arahattaphalavimutti ukkaṭṭhaniddesato. Sāti vimutti. Assāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa. Manasmiṃ vivaṭṭanissite pana anantarūpanissayāpi paccayā sambhavantīti ‘‘labbhamānavasena paccayabhāvo veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ.
「离贪」:依此而从一切行中离贪,故为离贪,即道。「厌离」:依此而厌离,故为厌离,即强力观。因此说“依此”等。以“简择随观也属于欲解脱分”的意图,而说“这是四种智的别称”。因为依据“只要未到道非道智见清净,那时都还是弱观”的说法,所以从脱离随烦恼的坏灭随观智之后,才是强力观。对于色、无色法的各别性与共通性,即种种自性、如其自性,了知它即是如实性智。那也就是见。以现前亲证之义,包含了知遍知与度遍知。因此说“是弱观”等。「行抉择智」是说名色分别智。「度疑」也被称为「缘摄受」、「法住智」。以理观等为始的随观智,即是思惟智。「道非道智」是指确立了道与非道之后,安住其上的智。因为那种作为基础的禅那定,是弱观的缘。经中确实说过:“心入定者,如实了知、如实照见”(《相应部》3.5;4.99;5.1071)。显示巴利原文
Virajjati asesasaṅkhārato etenāti virāgo, maggo. Nibbindati etāyāti nibbidā, balavavipassanā. Tenāha ‘‘etenā’’tiādi. Paṭisaṅkhānupassanāpi muccitukamyatāpakkhikā evāti adhippāyena ‘‘catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yāva maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi, tāva taruṇavipassanā’’ti hi vacanato upakkilesavimuttaudayabbayañāṇato paraṃ balavavipassanā. Rūpārūpadhammānaṃ visesabhūto sāmaññabhūto ca yo yo sabhāvo yathāsabhāvo, tassa jānanaṃ yathāsabhāvajānanaṃ. Tadeva dassanaṃ. Paccakkhakaraṇatthena ñātapariññā tīraṇapariññā ca gahitā hoti. Tenāha ‘‘taruṇavipassana’’ntiādi. Saṅkhāraparicchedeñāṇanti nāmarūpapariggahañāṇaṃ vadati. Kaṅkhāvitaraṇaṃ paccayapariggaho dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇantipi vuccati. Nayavipassanādikaṃ anupassanāñāṇaṃ sammasanaṃ. Maggāmaggeñāṇanti maggāmaggaṃ vavatthapetvā ṭhitaṃ ñāṇaṃ. So hi pādakajjhānasamādhi taruṇavipassanāya paccayo hoti. ‘‘Samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.5.; 4.99; 5.1071) hi vuttaṃ.
「前分乐」:指伴随近行定的乐。「焦热的止息」:指平息欲贪等烦恼焦热。为了显示“比丘们,我说乐有其近依”这句经文里所指的乐,而说“这是安止前分的乐”。至于“身轻安者感受乐”(《长部》1.466;3.359;《增支部》1.3.96)这句所描述的安止乐,它是轻安的缘,这自然不必多说。“乐”这个词在这里也是同样的道理。「强力喜」:指达到了遍满特征的喜。因为这样的喜,由于得到了寻、伺、乐、定等作为缘,镇伏了五盖,平息了以彼为因的焦热与热恼。因此说:“它即是焦热止息的缘”。「弱喜」:指稚弱之喜。因此说:“它即是强力喜的缘”。「信」:指通过对三宝功德及业果的信受而转起的胜解。但信由于会在自己的所缘上反复生起,而非仅一次,所以注疏说:“是‘辗转生起的信’”。因为信者对所信之事生起欢喜,所以说:“它即是弱喜的缘”。由于一切苦,无论是苦苦等各类差别,都包含在「轮回苦」里,而这里所指的正是轮回苦,所以注疏说:“「苦」,指轮回苦”。有些人说是「老死苦」,另一些人说忧愁等也包含在内。由于要涵括这两者,所以第一种解释才恰当。因为遭遇苦的人会相信业的果报,并对三宝生起净信,所以注疏说:“它(苦)就是辗转生起的信的缘”。因为,如理思惟“从老师们那里听闻法后,得知这些全是有为的苦”的人,心中会生起“这个法必定能超越这种苦”的信心。因此说:“听闻法后,于如来生起信”等等(《长部》1.191)。「有变异的」:指因为有“生起”的变异而带有变异的那些蕴,以“出生”之义而言。因为如果没有生,那么在这样那样的有中,就不会有苦的生起了,所以注疏说:“它(生)就是轮回苦的缘”。「业有」:指业有等三种业有。因为它是生有(结生)的缘。凡这些等,都是围绕这个意思,所以说:“用这个方法”。其余的词:即取等词。「随顺智」因为属于行舍智分,所以通过摄受涅槃而被包含了;「种姓智」是第一道的转向。因为依靠种姓智,观才得以成就某些殊胜的阶段,所以不特别提它,而只说“以厌离为近依的离贪”,就只说“离贪”这个词。显示巴利原文
Pubbabhāgasukhanti upacārajjhānasahitasukhaṃ. Daratha paṭippassaddhīti kāmacchandādikilesadarathassa paṭipassambhanaṃ. ‘‘Sukhaṃpāhaṃ, bhikkhave, saupanisaṃ vadāmī’’ti ettha adhippetasukhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appanāpubbabhāgassa sukhassā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedetī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.466;3.359; a.ni. 1.3.96) vuttaappanāsukhassa passaddhiyā paccayatte vattabbameva natthi. Sukhanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Balavapītīti pharaṇalakkhaṇappattā pīti. Tādisā hi vitakkavicārasukhasamādhīhi laddhappaccayā nīvaraṇaṃ vikkhambhantī taṃnimittaṃ darathaṃ pariḷāhaṃ paṭipassambheti. Tenāha ‘‘sā hi darathappassaddhiyā paccayo hotī’’ti. Dubbalapītīti taruṇapīti. Tenāha ‘‘sā hi balavapītiyā paccayo hotī’’ti. Saddhāti ratanattayaguṇānaṃ kammaphalassa ca saddahanavasena pavatto adhimokkho, sā pana yasmā attano visaye punappunaṃ uppajjati, na ekavārameva, tasmā āha ‘‘aparāparaṃ uppajjanasaddhā’’ti. Yasmā saddahanto saddheyyavatthusmiṃ pamudito hoti, tasmā āha ‘‘sā hi dubbalapītiyā paccayo hotī’’ti. Dukkhadukkhādibhedassa sabbassapi dukkhassa vaṭṭadukkhantogadhattā tassa ca idhādhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhanti vaṭṭadukkha’’nti. Jarāmaraṇadukkhanti keci, sokādayo cāti apare. Tadubhayassapi saṅgaṇhanato paṭhamo evattho yutto. Yasmā dukkhappatto kammassa phalāni saddahati, ratanattaye ca pasādaṃ uppādeti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tañhi aparāparasaddhāya paccayo hotī’’ti. Yasmā ‘‘ācariyānaṃ santike dhammaṃ sutvā pavattidukkha’’nti cintayato ‘‘ekantato ayaṃ dhammo imassa dukkhassa samatikkamāya hotī’’ti saddhā uppajjati. Tenāha ‘‘dhammaṃ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.191). Savikārāti uppādavikārena savikārā khandhajāti jāyanaṭṭhena. Jātiyā pana asati tattha tattha bhave natthi dukkhassa sambhavoti āha ‘‘sā hi vaṭṭadukkhassa paccayo’’ti. Kammabhavoti kammabhavādiko tividhopi kammabhavo. So hi upapattibhavassa paccayo. Evamādiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘etenupāyenā’’ti. Sesapadānīti upādānādipadāni. Anulomañāṇaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāpakkhikattā nibbānaggahaṇena gahitaṃ, gotrabhuñāṇaṃ paṭhamamaggassa āvajjanaṃ. So hi tena vipassanāya kiñci kiñci visesaṭṭhānaṃ kayiratīti taṃ anāmasitvā nibbidūpaniso virāgoti ‘‘virāgo’’icceva vuttaṃ.
「峡谷」:以“被水冲裂而行经之处”为义,故称峡谷。也称「山腹」,乃就水而言。如同水往低处流,以其回转之性,也称「河曲」。因冬、夏二季持续八个月而出现的地裂缝,故称「地裂」。小型导水渠如同树枝,故称「枝」;小水坑,将 o 音改为 u 音,称「小水坑」。<br>“正是如此”等,是将“诸比丘,譬如……”等所引的譬喻与所喻结合,为显示其连结,而说“应视无明为山”等。其中,无明由于在相续中长久流转,且难为多数人所断除,故喻为「山」。诸行因遍满三界、流注,故如同雨云。应视诸行为雨云,这是关联之义。其余两项也是如此。识等的流转,因随顺轮转且以辗转之缘为缘,故如同峡谷等。解脱因唯有一味而无增减,故如同大海。这是譬喻的连结。显示巴利原文
Kena udakena vidārayitvā gatapadesoti katvā kandaro. Nitambotipi udakassa. Yathā ninnaṃ udakaṃ pavattati, tathā nivattanabhāvena nadīkuñchotipi vuccati. Hemantagimhautuvasena aṭṭha māse pavatto pathavīvivaroti katvā padaro. Khuddikā udakavāhiniyo sākhā viyāti sākhā, khuddakā sobbhā kusubbhā o-kārassa u-kāraṃ katvā. Evameva khotiādi ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’tiādinā upanītāya upamāya upameyyena saṃsandananti, taṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjā pabbatoti daṭṭhabbā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha avijjā ca santānavasena ciraṃtanakālappavattanato pacurajanehi duppajahanato ‘‘pabbato’’ti vuttā. Lokattayābhibyāpanato abhisandanato ca abhisaṅkhārā meghasadisā. Abhisaṅkhārā meghoti daṭṭhabbāti ānetvā sambandho. Tathā sesapadadvayepi. Viññāṇādivaṭṭaṃ anupavattito paramparapaccayato ca kandarādisadisā. Vimutti ekarasattā, hānivuddhiabhāvato ca sāgarasadisāti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ.
其中,由于先前已成立:有无明时才有行,无无明时则无行,因此诸行犹如发生于高山之上,故说“应知无明……乃至降雨”。<br>“愚痴无闻”等,是为成立前述义理。<br>“以渴爱为希求”:以此说明一切从行生起的过患,因为渴爱称为「爱染」。<br>对于最后有者,产生最后有的行未到达涅槃,恰如触及大海便停住之时,故以此譬喻加以说明。<br>虽圆满了识等流转,这里也是显示最后有者的识的转起。因为此后识等流转便不再有,故应说为“已圆满”。<br>对于已生之人,因以生为缘而有流转之苦受,故应希求闻法。此经虽未明说,但余经中确有,为显示应引彼处之义,故说:“然而,佛语……”。<br>认为此教说是依声闻及菩萨而说,故作此解说。若依其他人说,则无须引证他经,故说:“因为,若……”。<br>“依巴利文所取”:即是将简略所述之义详细开显。<br>“生起”:指正在生起的诸蕴被执取,故说“有所作”。<br>“由显示无常相等”:是由相所引。<br>“业与非业”:是抉择。<br>“无结缚”:即无缠结,是清净之义。<br>巴利文中说“于地遍等处着手修业”等。显示巴利原文
Tattha yasmā purimasiddhāya avijjāya sati abhisaṅkhārā, nāsati, tasmā te uparipabbate pavattā viya hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjā…pe… vassanaṃ veditabba’’nti. Assutavā hītiādi vuttasseva atthassa samatthanaṃ. Taṇhāya abhilāsaṃ katvāti etena sabbassapi abhisaṅkhāravuṭṭhitemanatthaṃ dīpeti. Taṇhā hi ‘‘sneho’’ti vuttā. Antimabhavikassa antabhavanibbattako abhisaṅkhāro nibbānaṃ na patto, tadantassa bhāgassa nibbānaṃ āhacca ṭhito viya hotīti ‘‘mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitakālo viyā’’ti upamānidassanaṃ kataṃ. Viññāṇādivaṭṭaṃ pūretvāpi imināpi hi antimabhavikasseva viññāṇappavatti dassitā. Sā hi pūritāti vattabbā tato paraṃ viññāṇādivaṭṭasseva abhāvato. Jātassa puggalassa jātipaccayavaṭṭadukkhavedanāya dhammassavanaṃ icchitabbaṃ, taṃ pana yadipi imasmiṃ sutte na āgataṃ, suttantaresu pana āgatamevāti tato āharitvā taṃ vattabbanti dassento ‘‘buddhavacanaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Tayidaṃ sāvakabodhisattānaṃ vasenāyaṃ desanāti katvā vuttaṃ. Itaresaṃ pana vasena vuccamānaṃ suttantaraggahaṇatthaṃ payojanaṃ natthīti ‘‘yā hī’’tiādimāha. Pāḷiyā vasena gahitamevāti saṅkhepato vuttaatthassa vitthārato dassanaṃ. Nibbattīti nibbattamānā khandhā gahitāti āha ‘‘savikārā’’ti. Aniccatālakkhaṇādidīpanato lakkhaṇāhaṭaṃ. Kammākammanti vinicchayaṃ. Nijjaṭanti niggumbaṃ, suddhanti attho. Pathavīkasiṇādīsu kammaṃ ārabhatītiādi pāḷiyaṃ samathapubbaṅgamā vipassanā dassitāti katvā vuttaṃ . Evañhi pāmojjādidassanaṃ sambhavatīti. Devassāti meghassa. Kasmā panettha ‘‘khīṇāsavassa…pe… ṭhitakālo veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, nanu pubbe devaṭṭhāniyo abhisaṅkhāro vutto, na abhisaṅkhāro khīṇāsavoti? Nāyaṃ doso, kāraṇūpacārena phalassa vuttattā. Abhisaṅkhāramūlako hi khandhasantāno khandhasantāne ca ucchinnasaṃyoge khīṇāsavasamaññāti.
第四、《外道经》的注释显示巴利原文
4. Aññatitthiyasuttavaṇṇanā
24 「Soti」指舍利弗长老。若他尚未进入,为何说“他进入了”?因此说“我将进入”等。以此表明,对于必然会发生的事,犹如对已发生的实法一般,有此假说施设。<br>今为以譬喻阐明此义,故说“譬如什么”等。<br>「时日尚早便已外出之日」:指较平时托钵时分极早便从精舍外出的那日时分。<br>「他心生此念」:即他生起了“时间还早”等想法。<br>「在南门处」:指他位于王舍城南门与竹林之间,因此心想“我将去他那里”,这是其意趣。<br>「持何论」:在四种论中,你持何种论?「何所教」是其同义词。「说什么」则统括四种论,以中性语词表达,如同问“你的性别是什么?”。其中的“什么”是中性名词。依此而说,故为「论」,即见解。意指此而说:“在此……见什么而问”。<br>「法无碍解」等中的「法」字有因之义,故说:“所说的因,即其随因”。论说的语言生起,即是论的转起。显示巴利原文
24.Soti sāriputtatthero. Yadi na tāva paviṭṭho, kasmā ‘‘pāvisī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘pavisissāmī’’tiādi. Tena avassambhāvini bhūte viya upacāro hotīti dasseti. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvento ‘‘yathā ki’’ntiādimāha. Atippagoyeva nikkhantadivasoti pakatiyā bhikkhācaraṇavelāya ativiya pāto eva vihārato nikkhantadivasabhāgo. Etadahosīti etaṃ ‘‘atippago kho’’tiādikaṃ cintanaṃ ahosi. Dakkhiṇadvārassāti rājagahanagare dakkhiṇadvārassa veḷuvanassa ca antarā ahosi, tasmā ‘‘tenupasaṅkamissa’’nti cintanā ahosīti adhippāyo. Kiṃ vādīti catūsu vādesu kataraṃ vādaṃ vadasi. Kimakkhāyīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Kiṃ vadatīti pana cattāro vāde sāmaññato gahetvā napuṃsakaliṅgena vadati yathā kiṃ te jātaliṅgaṃ. Sabbanāmañhetaṃ, yadidaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ. Vadati etenāti vādo, dassanaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kiṃ ettha…pe… dassananti pucchantī’’ti. ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu viya dhamma-saddo hetuatthoti āha ‘‘yaṃ vuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ, tassa anukāraṇa’’nti. Vādassa vacanassa anuppatti vādappavatti.
「此语」是指「我说有一」等语。「Sā」:指「有些沙门婆罗门是业论者」这样展开的言论。「稀有」:值得弹指赞叹。「未曾有」:应按词源学方式来理解其词形的成立。「一切论」:指所有四种论。其中,第一是常见论,第二是断灭论,第三是一分常论,第四是无因生论。为了破斥这一切,故说破斥的理由。或者说,宣说缘起,由于是一般人智难以立足之处,故称甚深;又由于它能照显、于心现起,故说甚深与照显。那即是这个词语:仅以「触」一词作为开端。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vacananti ‘‘ekamidāha’’ntiādivacanaṃ. Sāti ‘‘eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā kammavādā’’ti evaṃ pavattakathā. Accharaṃ aṅguliphoṭanaṃ arahatīti acchariyaṃ. Abbhutanti niruttinayena padasiddhi daṭṭhabbā. Sabbavādānanti sabbesaṃ catubbidhavādānaṃ. Paṭhamo hettha sassatavādo, dutiyo ucchedavādo, tatiyo ekaccasassatavādo, catuttho adhiccasamuppannavādo, tesaṃ sabbesaṃ paṭikkhepato paṭikkhepakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Paṭiccasamuppādakittanaṃ vā pacurajanañāṇassa alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhatāya gambhīrañceva, tathā avabhāsanato cetasi upaṭṭhānato gambhīrāvabhāsañca karonto. Tadeva padanti phassapadaṃyeva ādibhūtaṃ gahetvā.
第五、《浮弥佐经》的注释显示巴利原文
5. Bhūmijasuttavaṇṇanā
25 「在之前的经中」指紧挨着的前一部经。对于词义,应按照已经解释过的道理来理解;在没有指出特别之处时,为了阐明其余的意义,而说「然而这是差别」等语。「并非仅仅由触缘而生起」,而是以触作为助缘,还有其他缘共同作用才会生起。「以身」指能推动的身体,也就是身表。确实,在《发趣论》所提到的二十四种缘中,身表并非思的某种缘。但是,当有身体存在时,才有所谓的身业;若没有身体,则不会有。因此,身表作为产生身业的一个俱集分,是必不可少的,所以说「即使以身造作,也被称为造作」。因此世尊说:“阿难,或者有身时,以身思为因,内生起乐苦。”对于「语」的情况,道理也是一样。「以意」指已经显现出来的意,而非单纯的意。「自己」指并非由他人劝发。「由他」指由他人劝发。「正知」指以与智相应之心了知。「不正知」指不是这样了知。「彼」指乐苦。「以身思为因」是以身业为相,意思是由于已经造作、已经累积的身业。对于其余的思,道理也是一样。与掉举相应的思在生起时也会产生果报,所以说「得到二十种思」。同样地,对于语门,这里也用了‘同样’这一措辞。显示巴利原文
25.Purimasutteti anantare purime sutte. Vuttanayeneva veditabbanti padatthe tato visiṭṭhaṃ aniddisitvā itaraṃ atthato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ pana viseso’’tiādimāha. Na kevalaṃ phassapaccayā uppajjati, atha kho phassassa sahakārīkāraṇabhūtaaññapaccayā ca uppajjatīti. Kāyenāti copanakāyena, kāyaviññattiyāti attho. Sā hi kāmaṃ paṭṭhāne āgatesu catuvīsatiyā paccayesu kenaci paccayena cetanāya paccayo na hoti. Yasmā pana kāye sati eva kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti, nāsati, tasmā sā tassā sāmaggiyabhāvena icchitabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyenapi kariyamānaṃ karīyatī’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘kāye vā, hānanda, sati kāyasañcetanāhetu uppajjati ajjhattaṃ sukhaṃ dukkha’’nti. Vācāyapīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Manasāti pātubhūtena manasā, na manamattenāti. Attanā parehi anussāhitena. Parenāti parena anussāhena. Sampajānenāti ñāṇasampayuttacittavasena pajānantena. Asampajānenāti tathā na sampajānantena. Tassāti sukhadukkhassa. Kāyasañcetanāhetūti kāyakammanimittaṃ, kāyikassa kammassa katattā upacitattāti attho. Esa nayo sesasañcetanāsupi. Uddhaccasahagatacetanā pavattiyaṃ vipākaṃ detiyevāti ‘‘vīsati cetanā labbhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā vacīdvāreti ettha ‘‘kāmāvacarakusalākusalavasena vīsati cetanā labbhantī’’ti idaṃ tathā-saddena upasaṃharati. Rūpārūpacetanāhīti rūpāvacarārūpāvacarakusalacetanāhi. Tappaccayaṃ yathārahanti adhippāyo. Tāpi cetanāti yathāvuttā ekūnavīsati cetanā avijjāpaccayā honti kusalānampi pageva itarādhiṭṭhahitāvijjasseva uppajjanato, aññathā anuppajjanato. Yathāvuttacetanābhedanti yathāvuttaṃ kāyacetanādivibhāgaṃ. Parehi anussāhito saraseneva pavattamāno. Parehi kāriyamānoti parehi ussāhito hutvā kayiramāno. Jānantopīti anussavādivasena jānantopi. Kammameva jānantoti tadā attanā kariyamānakammameva jānanto.
「于四种处」指的是‘自己作或由他人作,正知或不正知’这四种情形。将前面所说的十九种思法,按照无行与有行、正知与不正知的状态,各作四倍,从而说「有七十六种思法,或二百种思法」。对于那些得到了俱生分的法,它们也必定得到亲依止分,因此只说「被亲依止分追随」。「它们」指前面所说的一切法。关于「那个身不存在」,它包括净色身在内。因此说「当有那个身时」等等。「那个身不存在」指由于缘灭了,身就不存在。「语」指音声语言。「意」指任何识。现在纯粹从‘业’的角度来建立关联,所以说「再者」等等。同样的道理,语也可以成为门,意也可以成为门。对于诸漏尽者,为什么身不存在呢?意思是,他没有身业等的执受。因为漏尽者所造之业不会再有果报,所以是‘无果报法’。因此说「身不存在」,是由于他没有能造作之业。显示巴利原文
Catūsūti ‘‘sāmaṃ vā pare vā sampajāno vā asampajāno vā’’ti evaṃ vuttesu catūsu ṭhānesu. Yathāvutte ekūnavīsaticetanādhamme asaṅkhārikasasaṅkhārikabhāvena sampajānakatāsampajānakatabhāvena catuguṇe katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘chasattati dvesatā cetanādhammā’’ti. Yesaṃ sahajātakoṭi labbhati, tesampi upanissayakoṭi labbhatevāti ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā anupatitā’’tiicceva vuttā. Teti yathāvuttā sabbepi dhammā. So kāyo na hotīti ettha pasādakāyopi gahetabbo. Tenāha ‘‘yasmiṃ kāye satī’’tiādi. So kāyo na hotīti so kāyo paccayanirodhena na hoti. Vācāti saddavācā. Manoti yaṃ kiñci viññāṇaṃ. Idāni kammavaseneva yojetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Eseva nayo ‘‘vācāpi dvārabhūtā manopi dvārabhūto’’ti. Khīṇāsavassa kathaṃ kāyo na hoti, na tassa kāyakammādhiṭṭhānanti adhippāyo. Avipākattāti avipākadhammattāti attho. Kāyo na hotīti vuttaṃ akammakaraṇabhāvato.
“它”是指业。“田不存在”,意思是由于那是苦不能生长的处所。所谓“生长处所”等,是从遮遣的角度而说,因此才说“不存在”。“以因的意义”,即依止之因的状态。“以思为根本”,即以思为相。这是针对“以生长的意义”等所阐明的义理。通过这些生长等特性,受被称为“乐受与苦受”,然而这里并不是以明显的苦乐特征来称述,因为此处指的是无直接作用的乐与苦。这里的舍受,实为具有柔和乐性质的果报受。显示巴利原文
Tanti kammaṃ. Khettaṃ na hotīti tassa dukkhassa aviruhanaṭṭhānattā. Viruhanaṭṭhānādayo byatirekavasena vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘na hotī’’ti. Kāraṇaṭṭhenāti ādhārabhūtakāraṇabhāvena. Sañcetanāmūlakanti sañcetanānimittaṃ. Viruhanādīnaṃ atthānanti ‘‘viruhanaṭṭhenā’’tiādinā vuttānaṃ atthānaṃ. Iminā viruhanādibhāvena vedanā ‘‘sukhadukkhavedanā’’ti kathitā, nayidha jeṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ nippayojakassa sukhassa dukkhassa ca adhippetattā. Upekkhāvedanāpettha sukhasaṇhasabhāvavipākabhūtā vedanāva.
6. 《优波婆那经》的注释显示巴利原文
6. Upavāṇasuttavaṇṇanā
26 此处所说正是轮回之苦,因为其他苦也作为果报而被包含在内。显示巴利原文
26.Vaṭṭadukkhamevakathitaṃ itaradukkhassapi vipākassa saṅgaṇhanato.
7. 《缘经》的注释显示巴利原文
7. Paccayasuttavaṇṇanā
27 “以次第”,即按顺序来安立。为了显示与四谛的连结,开示是从末尾向开头而说。从苦谛的角度,也就是从应当遍知的特性来说。因为经文借由对老死的讲说而述及了五取蕴,而这些五取蕴并非他自己所生果报的缘。正是针对这一点,才说“知道缘”。在此,开示是随应受教者的心意而进行的。“具足”,就是成就、具备。“已来”,即已到达,意思是已经证得。“见”,是指以省察智当面看见,也就是以道慧这样不迷乱地通达而见。这仅是道智的见,并非果智的见。“入法流”,就是正确地进入、到达了圣法之流。由于此人不会趣向灾患,行走在正道上,并且连同天神在内的世间都认为他“不再需要依止皈依处”,所以他恭敬圣者之方,已经超越了凡夫的境地。“以决择慧”,就是能以通达四圣谛的智慧。在道刹那,智慧触及目标而住;在果刹那,则称为已触及目标而住。显示巴利原文
27.Paṭipāṭiyāti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapanena. Catusaccayojanaṃ dassetuṃ pariyosāna…pe… ādi vuttaṃ. Dukkhasaccavasenāti pariññeyyabhāvavasena. Jarāmaraṇāpadesena hi pañcupādānakkhandhā vuttā, te cassa attano phalassa paccayā na honti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paccayaṃ jānātī’’ti. Vineyyajjhāsayavasena hettha desanā pavattā. Sampannoti samannāgato. Āgatoti upagato, adhigatoti attho. Passatīti paccavekkhaṇañāṇena paccakkhato passati, maggapaññāya evaṃ asammohapaṭivedhavasena passati. Maggañāṇeneva, na phalañāṇena. Dhammasotaṃ samāpannoti ariyadhammasotaṃ sammadeva āpanno patto. Anaye nairiyanato, aye ca iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena ‘‘saraṇa’’nti akaraṇīyato ariyapakkhaṃ bhajanto puthujjanabhūmiṃ atikkanto. Nibbedhikapaññāyāti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ nibbijjhanakapaññāya. Āhacca tiṭṭhati maggakkhaṇe, phalakkhaṇe pana āhacca ṭhito nāma.
8. 《比丘经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Bhikkhusuttavaṇṇanā
28 “易懂的”(uttānaṃ)指完全浅显,因为此理在第七经中已经出现。实际上,这部经是世尊为了随顺受教者的心意,在另一座位上证示的。当会众散去时,有人说:“世尊的这次开示是具足利益的。”如是,这个开示便归属于接受者,他们正是出于对法的恭敬,才将它收入结集。显示巴利原文
28.Uttānameva sabbasova sattame āgatanayattā, vineyyajjhāsayavasena hi idaṃ suttaṃ satthārā aññasmiṃ āsane desitaṃ, parisāya vivaṭṭena sātthikāti satthu desanā āgatāti ayaṃ paṭiggāhakādhīnā hotīti dhammagāravena saṅgahaṃ āropentiyeva.
9. 《沙门婆罗门经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
29 “说字者”(akkharabhāṇakānaṃ)指喜好文字(音声)的人。他们喜欢通过前缀来扩展词句。因此才说“因为他们……”等。显示巴利原文
29.Akkharabhāṇakānanti akkhararucīnaṃ. Upasaggena padavaḍḍhanampi ruccanti. Tenāha ‘‘te hī’’tiādi.
10. 第二沙门婆罗门经注疏显示巴利原文
10. Dutiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
30 “在二经中”(dvīsu suttesu)指第九经和第十经。显示巴利原文
30.Dvīsu suttesūti navamadasamasuttesu.
第四品 迦罗罗刹帝利品显示巴利原文
4. Kaḷārakhattiyavaggo
第一经 有经注疏显示巴利原文
1. Bhūtasuttavaṇṇanā
31 “阿逸多学童”:在婆和利婆罗门的十六位侍者中,那位名为“阿逸多”的学童。“数”(saṅkhā)即指智慧。那些以智慧数知、遍知的法,具足这些法的比丘便称为“已知法者”,也就是已通达真谛、断尽诸漏的阿拉汉。然而,有学由于尚未遍知果报,故不名为“已知法者”。他们因具足有学诸法,方为有学。虽从补特伽罗的类别来看,他们可多达数千,但若单就四道中下三果的具足者这一共性而言,则不超过七种人,世尊因此特以“七人”来加以限定。“防护者”:既防护自身远离染污,又如同防护自身那样,防护应调御的世间,如此善加守护,故名“防护者”;这种防护的状态即是“防护性”,也就是智慧。所以说:“‘防护性’即是慧,具足此性者,便是‘防护者’。”显示巴利原文
31.Ajitamāṇavenāti soḷasasu bāvariyabrāhmaṇaparicārakesu ‘‘ajito’’ti laddhanāmena māṇavena. Saṅkhā vuccati paññā, saṅkhātā pariññātā dhammā yesaṃ te saṅkhātadhammā, paṭividdhasaccā khīṇāsavā. Sekkhā pana vipākassa apariññātattā ‘‘saṅkhātadhammā’’ti na vuccanti. Sekkhadhammasamannāgamena te sekkhā. Te pana kāmaṃ puggalapaṭilābhavasena anekasahassāva honti, catumaggaheṭṭhimaphalattayassa pana vasena taṃsamaṅgitāsāmaññena na sattajanato uddhanti āha ‘‘satta jane’’ti niyametvā viseseti. Saṃkilesavajjaṃ, tato vā attānaṃ viya vineyyalokaṃ nipāti rakkhatīti nipako, tassa bhāvo nepakkaṃ, ñāṇanti āha ‘‘nepakkaṃ vuccati paññā, tāya samannāgatattā nipako’’ti.
如果思考“这个问题的意义究竟为何?”便称作对问题的“疑”。如果思考“怎样回答才不违逆老师的意趣?”便称作对意趣的“疑”。此处,对易解之义作出抉择后的思考,才名为“疑”(kaṅkhā),而非疑结(vicikicchā)。大长老在阿说示大长老座前早已断除疑结,此处的“疑”只是一种探寻性的、类如悔恨的审察而已,应如此看待。“持钵而行”是显示其出家身份的特征。或可理解为:作为法将,我秉承所证得之法,为开示的机缘而游化——此处当取此义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ko nu kho imassa pañhassa attho’’ti cintento pañhāya kaṅkhati nāma. ‘‘Kathaṃ byākaramāno nu kho satthu ajjhāsayaṃ na virodhemī’’ti cintento ajjhāsayaṃ kaṅkhati nāma. Sujānanīyatthaparicchedaṃ katvā cintanā hettha ‘‘kaṅkhā’’ti adhippetā, na vicikicchāti. Pahīnavicikiccho hi mahāthero āyasmato assajimahātherassa santikeyeva, vicinanabhūtaṃ kukkuccasadisaṃ panetaṃ vīmaṃsanamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pattaṃ ādāya carantoti pabbajitabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Dhammasenāpatibhāvena vā mama pattadhammadesanāvāraṃ ādāya carantoti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“生”(jātaṃ):指依适当的缘而生起,也就是“有为”(saṅkhata)的意思。“问题的解答现前”(pañhabyākaraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāsi):即问题的解答自然在心中显现。经文作“以正慧观察”(sammappaññāya passati);但注疏却将“以正慧观察者”(sammappaññāya passato)一词提取出来,解释为“正在观察者”(passantassa)。这样的解释与“真实……行道者”(bhūtaṃ … pe … paṭipanno hoti)那段经文无法对应,因此还是依照经文所呈现的读法才恰当。直到证得阿拉汉道为止,都是为了厌离等目的——这是依止息期望法而宣说的语句。“食所生”(āhārasambhavaṃ):指由缘所生起的。“有学行道”之所以被说为“为了厌离、为了离欲、为了灭而行道”,是依据这段经文所说。提到“灭”的环节时,同样也适用这个道理。“厌离”(nibbidā)是就工具格的自在语而说,“离欲”(virāgā)、“灭”(nirodhā)则是显示巴利原文
Jātanti yathārahaṃ paccayato uppannaṃ, saṅkhatanti attho. Pañhabyākaraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāsīti pañhassa byākaraṇatā paṭibhāsi. ‘‘Sammappaññāya passatī’’ti pāṭho, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sammappaññāya passato’’ti padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘passantassā’’ti attho vutto. Taṃ ‘‘bhūtanti…pe… paṭipanno hotī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā na sameti, tasmā yathādassitapāṭho eva yutto. Yāva arahattamaggā nibbidādīnaṃ atthāyāti samitāpekkhadhammavasā padaṃ vadanti. Āhārasambhavanti paccayahetukaṃ. Sekkhapaṭipadā kathitā ‘‘nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya paṭipanno hotī’’ti vacanato. Esa nayo nirodhavārepi. Nibbidāti karaṇe paccattavacanaṃ, virāgā nirodhāti karaṇe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘sabbāni kāraṇavacanānī’’ti. Anupādāti anupādāya. Bhūtamidantiādimāha sabbasuttaṃ āhaccabhāsitaṃ jinavacanameva karonto.
2. 《迦罗罗经》注疏显示巴利原文
2. Kaḷārasuttavaṇṇanā
32 那位长老的名字是由出生而来的。“退转”(Nivatto):指先前已出发逆着轮回之流而上,因尚无力做到,故顺流而行,由此退转回来;现已经从烦恼的扰动中脱离,不相混杂而解脱。这里的“思”可能指安息。所谓“卑下退转”,是因为对欲乐仍有所期望;为了显示由于证得第三道而对欲乐已无所期望,故说“三道”等语。声闻波罗蜜智因长老证得阿拉汉果而得以成就,因此说这是他最顶端的安息。“已打开”(Ugghāṭitāti):即已敞开,也就是寂止的意思。此处指证得阿拉汉果之时。“无疑的状态”(Vicikicchābhāvanti):即没有犹豫的状态。显示巴利原文
32.Tassa therassa nāmaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ. Nivattoti pubbe vaṭṭasotassa paṭisotaṃ gantuṃ āraddho, taṃ avisahanto anusotameva gacchanto, tato nivatto pariklesavidhame asaṃsaṭṭho viyutto hoti. Ettha cetanāti vā assāso. Hīnāyāvattanaṃ nāma kāmesu sāpekkhatāya, tattha ca nirapekkhatā tatiyamaggādhigamenāti dassento ‘‘tayo magge’’tiādimāha. Sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ therassa arahattādhigamena nipphannaṃ, tasmā tassa taṃ uparimakoṭiyā assāso vutto. Ugghāṭitāti vivaṭā, vūpasamitāti attho. Tatthāti arahattappattiyaṃ. Vicikicchābhāvanti nibbematikataṃ.
“不被这样记说”(na evaṃ byākatā):即不像“生已尽”(khīṇā jātī)那样以直白的方式记说,而是以间接的方式记说。“以任何”(kenaci):即无论以何种理由。将会如此直白地记说。显示巴利原文
Naevaṃ byākatāti ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādikā evaṃ uttānakaṃ na byākatā, pariyāyena pana byākatā. Kenacīti kenacipi kāraṇena. Evaṃ uttānakaṃ byākarissati.
「那个缘的灭尽」:指那个称为业有的缘——含摄于无明的协助作用中——的灭尽、不再生起,即到达灭。「在已灭尽之中」:指在已灭尽的状态里;即如前所述,在藉由不再生起的灭而灭尽的生的缘中。名为生的果已灭尽,达到了不再生起的性质。「已了知」:即已知晓。「遍知」:通过下分道已经了知的四圣谛,不超越它们而通达了知,因此「了知」指的是无上道。依其邻近义,无上果在此便称为「了知」。「缘」:是导致有转起的缘,也就是缘起。显示巴利原文
Tassa paccayassa khayāti tassa kammabhavasaṅkhātassa paccayassa avijjāya sahakāritāyaṃ saṅgahitassa khayā anuppādā nirodhā. Khīṇasminti khīṇe. Anuppādanirodhena niruddhe jātiyā yathāvutte paccaye. Jātisaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ khīṇaṃ anuppattidhammataṃ āpāditanti. Viditaṃ ñātaṃ. Ājānāti catusaccaṃ heṭṭhimamaggehi ñātaṃ anatikkamitvāva paṭivijjhatīti aññā aggamaggo. Tadupacārena aggaphalaṃ idha ‘‘aññā’’ nāma. Paccayoti bhavūpapattiyā paccayo paṭiccasamuppādo.
「我」:即被我。「他遍知」:透过取相而了知心的行境。「以彼」:指由世尊。那个记说受到随喜,因为对问题的记说已成为(开示的)所缘范围。显示巴利原文
Meti mayā. Aññāsi ākāraggahaṇena cittācāraṃ jānāti. Tenāti bhagavatā. Byākaraṇaṃ anumoditaṃ pañhabyākaraṇassa visayakatabhāvato.
「这是他的所缘范围」:此处的受是尊者舍利弗的所缘范围,因为他在其中是以所缘的方式转起的。「虽然」:虽然乐受以住立为乐,苦受以变易为乐,不苦不乐受以智为乐。「以变易的终极」:由于无常性,一切受都叫作苦。因为即使从排斥乐的角度来看,乐受之所以称为乐,是由于喜乐的遍满,因此稍作锐利地说,它实为变易苦——因为它由变易而归于无有,仅停留在乐灭尽的那一刹那。正如《破斥迷执》所说:「乐受的存在是乐。」乐于求乐者会忍受痛苦。对于尚未遍知事处的人,乐受的止息会呈现为苦,因此应通过辨析来阐明此义。而「苦受以变易为乐」一句,也是同样的道理。又《破斥迷执》中说:「苦受的不存在是乐。」因为如前所述,苦受的止息对这些人而言呈现为乐。当那种结合止息时,心中便会生起「啊,多么快乐!」而对中性受的觉知状态——如实醒悟——那才是乐。不苦不乐受,对于正在细心了知的人而言也是乐,因为它微细而可被认知。就像对于色、显示巴利原文
Ayamassa visayoti ayaṃ vedanā assa sāriputtattherassa savisayo tattha visayabhāvena pavattattā. Kiñcāpīti kiñcāpi sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā dukkhā vedanā vipariṇāmasukhā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā. Vipariṇāmakoṭiyāti aniccabhāvena sabbāva vedanā dukkhā nāma. Sukhapaṭikkhepatopi hi sukhapītiyā pharaṇatāya sukhāti tikkhamattena vipariṇāmadukkhāti vipariṇāmato abhāvādhigamena sukhanirodhakkhaṇamattena. Tathā hi vuttaṃ papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘sukhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo sukha’’nti. Sukhakāmo dukkhaṃ titikkhati. Apariññātavatthukānañhi sukhavedanuparamo dukkhato upaṭṭhāti, tasmāyamattho viyogena dīpetabbo. ‘‘Dukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tathācāha papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘dukkhāya vedanāya natthibhāvo sukha’’nti. Dukkhavedanuparamo hi vuttānaṃ sukhato upaṭṭhāti evāti vadanti. Tassa yogassa vūpasamena ‘‘aho sukhaṃ jāta’’nti majjhattavedanāya jānanabhāvo yāthāvato avabujjhanaṃ sukhaṃ. Adukkhamasukhāpi vedanā vijānantassa sukhaṃ hoti tassa sukhumatāya viññeyyabhāvato. Yathā rūpārūpadhammānaṃ salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca sammadeva avabodho paramaṃ sukhaṃ. Tenāha –
“无论从何处如理作意”:即从任何角度对诸蕴的生灭作如理作意;
他便获得喜与悦,对于了知者,那即是不死。(《法句》374)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 374);
“无智之苦”:即不知的状态,亦即对不苦不乐受的无知所带来的苦。正确分别而知的体性,即是智的生起。因为与智相应、以智为近缘的不苦不乐受,是殊胜的形态,因此它既为可意,亦能带来可意的果报。这里所说的“不知的状态”,应通过前述说法的反面来理解其义。原经文是“了知为苦”,而注释中仅引出“已了知”一词,这只是为了表明其含义。显示巴利原文
Aññāṇadukkhāti ajānanabhāvo adukkhamasukhāvedanāya dukkhaṃ. Sammā vibhāgajānanasabhāvo ñāṇassa sambhavo. Ñāṇasampayuttā hi ñāṇūpanissayā adukkhamasukhā vedanā pasatthākārā, yato sā iṭṭhā ceva iṭṭhaphalā cāti. Ajānanabhāvoti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. ‘‘Dukkhanti vidito’’ti pāḷi, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana viditanti paduddhāro kato, taṃ atthadassanamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「受之区别的了知」:即以“有此三种受”的方式,从差别上去加以了知。「了知」:是何时了知?有说是在佛陀开示之时,但更确切地说,应是在证悟之时。因为长老在此所开示的,正是他已如实通达的受。「以此因」:凭借“凡是无常者,即是苦”这一原则——也就是由于了知受的无常性即是苦的智慧。以此因故,他对受便不再生起渴爱。「极戏论」:指过于广泛的阐述。「含摄于苦中」:因为它归属于苦所涵摄的范畴。「一切感受是苦」:是说一切受都是苦,因为都具有行苦的性质。「仅已知」:仅仅如实地了悟。此时,「渴爱便不住著」,即渴爱不再牢固地安住,不再生起。显示巴利原文
Vedanāparicchedajānaneti ‘‘tisso imā vedanā’’ti evaṃ paricchedato jānane. Aññāsīti kadā aññāsi? Imasmiṃ desanākāleti vadanti, paṭivedhakāleti pana yuttaṃ. Yathāpaṭividdhā hi vedanā idha therena desitāti. Iminā kāraṇenāti ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkha’’nti vedanānaṃ aniccatāya dukkhabhāvajānanasaṅkhātena kāraṇena. Taṃnimittaṃ hissa vedanāsu taṇhā na uppajjati. Atippapañcoti ativitthāro. Dukkhasmiṃ antogadhaṃ dukkhapariyāpannattā. Dukkhanti sabbaṃ vedayitaṃ dukkhaṃ saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato. Ñātamatteti yāthāvato avabujjhanamatte. Taṇhā na tiṭṭhatīti na santiṭṭhati nappavattati.
「如何解脱」:即在内与外的分别中获得解脱。此中的从格是表示原因的,因此以表因的工具格之义来解释,说“以何种解脱”。或者,此处的从格也可以理解为工具格的意义,故如此说。「倾向」:指观的起始。外部的法也必须被观照,因为一切所应遍知的法都应当被遍知。令智生起之后。「他们」:指内行。「安立之后」:即通过其特相加以区别之后。「引入外」:就是将智转而投向于外行。「引入内」:就是如理作意于内行。在那里,是指在那四句的范畴之内。在确定它们的阶段:即对那些内行修习观的阶段。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ vimokkhāti ajjhattabahiddhābhedesu vimuttā. Hetumhi cetaṃ nissakkavacananti hetuatthena karaṇavacanena atthamāha ‘‘katarena vimokkhenā’’ti. Karaṇatthepi vā etaṃ nissakkavacananti tathā vuttaṃ. Abhinivesoti vipassanārambho. Bahiddhādhammāpi daṭṭhabbāyeva sabbassapi pariññeyyassa parijānitabbato. Ñāṇaṃ pavattetvā. Teti ajjhattasaṅkhāre. Vavatthapetvāti salakkhaṇato paricchinditvā. Bahiddhā otāretīti bahiddhāsaṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāreti. Ajjhattaṃ otāretīti ajjhattasaṅkhāre sammasati. Tatra tasmiṃ catukke. Tesaṃ vavatthānakāleti tesaṃ ajjhattasaṅkhārānaṃ vipassanākāle.
「一切取灭尽」:即一切取著的彻底灭尽。虽然见取、戒禁取、我语取在初道便已灭尽,但欲取是依最上道才灭尽的,因此长老主要依此而说“一切取灭尽”,以此记别自己证得了阿拉汉果。接着他说:“诸漏不再流出了。”「具念」:以此词显示他已达到念的圆满。“从眼对色漏出”的意思是:在眼识的心路过程以及随之生起的意门心路过程中,以色为所缘的诸漏持续生起。在此过程中虽也有善心等生起,但唯是欲漏等,犹如从疮口流出的脓液一般,持续不断地流淌着不净,其余诸门的情况也是如此。因此说“这样”等,于是那些便被称为漏。因为“漏”这一词汇,在此固定用来指代那些流淌而出的不净之物。由于他说“我不轻视自己”,注疏的长老便说:“此即宣说了摒弃下劣慢。”应知这是通过总括标示的方式,来宣说诸漏的。因为如果不摒弃殊胜慢等,仅仅摒弃下劣慢一事本身也是不会发生的。「了知」:即具备了“不再有未来如此状态的出生”这句话中所说的了知。显示巴利原文
Sabbupādānakkhayāti sabbaso upādānānaṃ khayā. Kāmaṃ diṭṭhisīlabbataattavādupādānāni paṭhamamaggeneva khīyanti, kāmupādānaṃ pana aggamaggenāti tassa vasena ‘‘sabbupādānakkhayā’’ti vadanto thero attano arahattapattiṃ byākaroti. Tenāha ‘‘āsavā nānussavantī’’ti. Satoti iminā sativepullappattiṃ dasseti. Cakkhuto rūpe savantīti cakkhuviññāṇavīthiyaṃ tadanugatamanoviññāṇavīthiyañca rūpārammaṇā āsavā pavattantīti. Kiñcāpi tattha kusalādīnampi pavatti atthi, kāmāsavādayo eva vaṇato yūsaṃ viya paggharaṇakaasucibhāvena sandanti, tathā sesavāresu. Tenāha ‘‘eva’’ntiādi, tasmā te eva ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Tattha hi paggharaṇakaasucimhi niruḷho āsavasaddo. ‘‘Attānaṃ nāvajānāmī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘omānapahānaṃ kathita’’nti āha. Tena āsavesu samudāyupalakkhaṇaṃ kathitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi seyyamānādippahānena vinā hīnamānaṃyeva pajahati. Pajānanāti ‘‘nāparaṃ itthattāyā’’ti vuttapajānanasampanno hotīti.
「从自性差别而言」,即是以“四”种方式来限定数目。世尊为阐明此义而作开示,应联系上下文如此理解。而「此」字,则是指“此亦确是……”等开示语。显示巴利原文
Sarūpabhedatopīti ‘‘cattāro’’ti evaṃ parimāṇaparicchedatopi. Idaṃ bhagavā dassento āhāti sambandho. Idanti ca ‘‘ayampi kho’’tiādivacanaṃ sandhāyāha.
「未分裂」,是指如坐未起、尚未离散的状态。「为赞颂补特伽罗的目的」:为了称赞、褒扬善巧说法的阿难长老等补特伽罗。「为赞颂法的目的」:为了赞叹行道之法。「那些」,指阿难长老等领受法的比丘们。「于义」,指戒等之义;「于法」,指巴利法藏。显示巴利原文
Asambhinnāya evāti yathānisinnāya eva, avuṭṭhitāya evāti attho. Puggalathomanatthanti desanākusalānaṃ ānandattherādīnaṃ puggalānaṃ pasaṃsanatthaṃ ukkaṃsanatthaṃ. Dhammathomanatthanti paṭipattidhammassa pasaṃsanatthaṃ. Tepīti ānandattherādayo bhikkhūpi. Dhammapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū. Attheti sīlādiatthe. Dhammeti pāḷidhamme.
「他的」,指世尊的。将通过“纵使世尊只有一天……”等方式显示其威德。「他」,指舍利弗长老。“我也将同样地赞叹”,即以“确实那些比丘……”等方式来表达。「他这样思惟」,是指以即将开示的“法嗣”教说的思惟方式而思惟。因此说“如同……”等。「以同一意乐」,指具有相同的意向。「以慧」,指以智慧。「此教法为最上」,则是鉴于世尊正是如此从功德方面推崇法将(舍利弗)而说。显示巴利原文
Assāti bhagavato. Ānubhāvaṃ karissati ‘‘divasañcepi bhagavā’’tiādinā. Nanti sāriputtattheraṃ. Ahampi tatheva thomessāmi ‘‘sā hi bhikkhū’’tiādinā. Evaṃ cintesīti evaṃ vakkhamānena dhammadāyādadesanāya cintitākārena cintesi. Tenāha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Ekajjhāsayāyāti samānādhippāyāya. Matiyāti paññāya. Ayaṃ desanā aggāti bhagavā dhammasenāpatiṃ guṇato evaṃ paggaṇhātīti katvā vuttaṃ.
「开显」指从功德上令其显了、令其了知之后,欲将其安立于一切声闻中最胜之位。「以心行」是指依于心之力而转变身体,通过决意“愿此身如此心”,即决意令身与心同其行速。那么,身体运转迟缓,何以能与迅疾转变的心同其行速呢?并非于一切方面皆同其行速。譬如,依于身体而转变心时,心于一切方面皆与身体同速而行。其时,心并不能弃舍依自性成就的自身刹那,转而依于运转迟缓的色法刹那而行;然而,通过决意“愿此心如此身”,心即随顺迟缓之身而转,直至抵达所欲之处,如是,依于心相续而以随顺身行之方式运转之心,即称为随身行而转变之心。同样地,通过决意“愿此身如此心”,由于已成就轻快想,不若未修习神足者那般迟缓,仅以若干轻快之心刹那即达所欲之处,如此运转的色相续即可被了知。显示巴利原文
Pakāsetvāti guṇato pākaṭaṃ paññātaṃ katvā sabbasāvakehi seṭṭhabhāve ṭhapetukāmo. Cittagatiyā cittavasena kāyassa pariṇāmanena ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo idaṃ cittaṃ viya hotū’’ti kāyasamānagatikattādhiṭṭhānena. Kathaṃ pana kāyo dandhappavattiko lahuparivattena cittena samānagatiko hotīti? Na sabbathā samānagatiko. Yatheva hi kāyavasena cittavipariṇāmane cittaṃ sabbathā kāyena samānagatikaṃ hoti. Na hi tadā cittaṃ sabhāvasiddhena attano khaṇena avattitvā dandhavuttikassa rūpadhammassa khaṇena vattituṃ sakkoti, ‘‘idaṃ cittaṃ ayaṃ kāyo viya hotū’’ti panādhiṭṭhānena dandhagatikassa kāyassa anuvattanato yāva icchitaṭṭhānappatti hoti, tāva kāyagatianulomeneva hutvā santānavasena pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ kāyagatiyā pariṇāmitaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo idaṃ cittaṃ viya hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhānena pageva sukhalahusaññāya sampāditattā abhāvitiddhipādānaṃ viya dandhaṃ avattitvā yathā lahukatipayacittavāreheva icchitaṭṭhānappati hoti, evaṃ pavattarūpatā viññāyatīti.
因为那对世尊的赞叹,正是随顺其意趣而作。「世尊将会问如此性质的义理」——这是我过去所不知、所未见的。「为了了知意趣的目的」是指:“如此作答,便把握了导师的意趣”,即以此为了知导师意趣的目的。世尊在问第二个问题时,对第一个问题表示了随喜;因为就在问出第二个问题时,第一个问题的解答已被纳受。显示巴利原文
Adhippāyānurūpameva tassa bhagavato thomanāya katattā. Idaṃ nāma atthajātaṃ bhagavā pucchissatīti pubbe mayā aviditaṃ apassaṃ. Āsayajānanatthanti ‘‘evaṃ byākarontena satthu ajjhāsayo gahito hotī’’ti evaṃ satthu ajjhāsayajānanatthaṃ. Dutiyaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanto bhagavā paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ anumodi dutiyaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanteneva paṭhamapañhavissajjanassa sampaṭicchitabhāvato.
「这曾生起」指这样的寻思曾生起。「他的」指迦罗刹帝利比丘的。「安住于法」即是法界,指声闻波罗蜜智,意思是:在声闻的境域中,如实安住于法而不动摇,令其确立。因此他说“法界”等。它唯运行于一切知智的境域中。「于所缘法」指作为所缘的所知法。显示巴利原文
Etaṃ ahosīti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Assāti kaḷārakhattiyassa bhikkhuno. Dhamme dahatīti dhammadhātu, sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ, sāvakavisaye dhamme dahati yāthāvato ajite katvā ṭhapetīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘dhammadhātū’’tiādi. Sabbaññutaññāṇagatikameva visaye. Gocaradhammeti gocarabhūte ñeyyadhamme.
三.《智事经》的注释显示巴利原文
3. Ñāṇavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
33 「智事」即是智本身,因为它是诸成就的因。「于四种中」是指为了觉悟四圣谛而说的四种智。「第一种」是指如“于老死有智”所说的智,该智涵盖由受持、熟习、作意而生起的一切。应知,此积聚之智唯是闻所成。而它从自性与缘把握诸法之智,当知即是思惟智。于此,以老死为首,即仅摄受具有老死之法。「通达智」是指以无迷乱而通达之智。「以此法」是表示原因的具格。即由于证得此法为因,这位圣者即使依于过去未来的理趣,也能现观四圣谛法。然而,为了显示道智亦如观察过去未来的理趣一般,才说了第二种选项:“或以道智法”。因为这样,“无时性”才得以成立。显示巴利原文
33.Ñāṇameva ñāṇavatthu sampattīnaṃ kāraṇabhāvato. Catūsūti catusaccassa bodhanavasena vuttesu catūsu ñāṇesu. Paṭhamanti ‘‘jarāmaraṇe ñāṇa’’nti evaṃ vuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ, yena dhāraṇaparicayamanasikāravasena pavattaṃ sabbaṃ gaṇhi. Sannicayañāṇamayaṃ savanamayaṃ nāmatveva veditabbaṃ. Sabhāvato paccayato cassa pariggaṇhanañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃtveva veditabbaṃ. Jarāmaraṇasīsena cettha jarāmaraṇavantova dhammā gahitā. Paṭivedhañāṇanti asammohato paṭivijjhanañāṇaṃ. Iminā dhammenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ. Imassa hi dhammassa adhigamahetu ayaṃ ariyo atītānāgate nayenapi catusaccadhamme abhisambujjhati. Maggañāṇameva pana atītānāgate nayanasadisaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘maggañāṇadhammena vā’’ti dutiyavikappo vutto. Evañhi ‘‘akālika’’nti samatthitaṃ hoti.
「以智眼见」:即以成为法眼的智眼,通过无迷乱通达而现量照见。「以慧了知」:即以道慧如是了知。由于如此见、如此了知、完全证得乃是极大的方便,故说「已深入」。或者,「所见」即见,指见法而安住之义。「所了知」即了知四圣谛并令其明瞭后安住。「无时的」:即非隔时而给予果报。「所证」:因已证得四圣谛而住,故是证得法。「已深入」:即深入四圣谛法而住。「于过去未来行推论」:即于过去与未来诸行而推论、引导、投射。然而,这是省察智的作用,但导师因以道智为根本,故将道智说为如同于过去未来行推论。因为对过去道的省察称为省察,故说道智被说为如同推论,实际则以省察智行推论。因此说「在此……」等。为了显示如何行推论,而说「凡任何……」等。于此,推论的发生正是推论智的运作特点,故说「是省察智的作用」。虽然也说了「以此,即道智法」,但道智与果智二者是思惟智与省察的根本因,而非推论本身,故说「以二种智法」并无不合理。同样,由于了知了四圣谛法,或由于被称为道果的法与谛通达相应,故「成为推论」,即以此智为所缘、与此智相应,且即是此智。显示巴利原文
Ñāṇacakkhunā diṭṭhenāti dhammacakkhubhūtena ñāṇacakkhunā asammohapaṭivedhavasena paccakkhato diṭṭhena. Paññāya viditenāti maggapaññāya tatheva viditena. Yasmā tathā diṭṭhaṃ viditaṃ sabbaso pattaṃ mahāupāyo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhenā’’ti. Diṭṭhenāti vā dassanena, dhammaṃ passitvā ṭhitenāti attho. Viditenāti cattāri saccāni viditvā pākaṭāni katvā ṭhitena. Akālikenāti na kālantaravipākadāyinā. Pattenāti cattāri saccāni patvā ṭhitattā dhammaṃ pattena. Pariyogāḷhenāti catusaccadhamme pariyogāhitvā ṭhitena. Atītānāgate nayaṃ netīti atīte ca anāgate ca nayaṃ neti harati peseti. Idaṃ pana paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa kiccaṃ, satthārā pana maggañāṇaṃ atītānāgate nayanasadisaṃ kataṃ taṃmūlakattā. Atītamaggassa hi paccavekkhaṇaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā maggañāṇaṃ nayanasadisaṃ kataṃ nāma hoti, paccavekkhaṇañāṇena pana nayaṃ neti. Tenāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Yathā pana tena nayaṃ neti. Taṃ ākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca nayanuppādanaṃ nayañāṇasseva pavattiviseso. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa kicca’’nti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘imināti maggañāṇadhammena vā’’ti vuttaṃ, duvidhaṃ pana maggaphalañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇapaccavekkhaṇāya mūlakāraṇaṃ, na nayanassāti duvidhena ñāṇadhammenāti na na yujjati. Tathā catusaccadhammassa ñātattā maggaphalasaṅkhātassa vā dhammassa saccapaṭivedhasampayogaṃ gatattā ‘‘nayanaṃ hotū’’ti tena ‘‘iminā dhammenā’’ti ñāṇassa visayabhāvena ñāṇasampayogena tadañātenāti ca attho na na yujjati. Anuayeti dhammañāṇassa anurūpavasena aye bujjhanañāṇe diṭṭhānaṃ adiṭṭhānayanato adiṭṭhassa diṭṭhatāya ñāpanato ca. Tenāha ‘‘dhammañāṇassa anugamane ñāṇa’’nti. Khīṇāsavassa sekkhabhūmi nāma aggamaggakkhaṇo . Kasmā panetaṃ evaṃ vuttanti ce? ‘‘Evaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā vattamānavasena desanāya pavattattā.
四. 《第二智事经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Dutiyañāṇavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
34 「sattari」:即说将ta音替换为ra音。或sattari一词与sattati(七十)同义。随喜好音节而诵出音节者,称为音节诵者。因此说「作多音节」等。「住」:果安住于彼,因依彼而转起,故为住。具有现在相的法之住,即法住。或者,「法」即原因,缘之义。法之住的自性,即是法,此外无他,故为法住,即缘。于此之智为法住智。因此具寿法将说:「于把握缘时,慧为法住智」(《无碍解道·论母》4)。也正因如此,他说:「于缘相之智」等。其中,「诸法」即缘所生诸法。「因是转起之住的原因」:因是称为转起的住的原因。依「以生为缘而有老死」等,于三时中,以顺逆方式,关于转起的六种智。「尽」即坏灭,彼即破坏。「离染」、「坏散」、「灭」、「消失」。于一一中:即于老死等一一中。前文说「如实智」是指初步的观。因此,这里也把法住智理解为观,故说「观与随观已被开示」。显示巴利原文
34.Sattarīti ta-kārassa ra-kārādesaṃ vuttaṃ. Sattatisaddena vā samānattho sattarisaddo. Byañjanarucivasena byañjanaṃ bhaṇantīti byañjanabhāṇakā. Tenāha ‘‘bahubyañjanaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Tiṭṭhati tattha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhiti, paccuppannalakkhaṇassa dhammassa ṭhiti dhammaṭṭhiti. Atha vā dhammoti kāraṇaṃ, paccayoti attho. Dhammassa yo ṭhitisabhāvo, sova dhammato añño natthīti dhammaṭṭhiti, paccayo. Tattha ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ. Tenāha āyasmā dhammasenāpati – ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 4). Tathā cāha ‘‘paccayākāre ñāṇa’’ntiādi. Tattha dhammānanti paccayuppannadhammānaṃ. Pavattiṭṭhitikāraṇattāti pavattisaṅkhātāya ṭhitiyā kāraṇattā. ‘‘Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādinā addhattaye anvayabyatirekavasena pavattiyā chabbidhassa ñāṇassa. Khayo nāma vināso, sova bhedoti. Virajjanaṃ palujjanaṃ. Nirujjhanaṃ antaradhānaṃ. Ekekasminti jarāmaraṇādīsu ekekasmiṃ. Pubbe ‘‘yathābhūtañāṇa’’nti taruṇavipassanaṃ āha. Tasmā idhāpi dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ vipassanāti gahetvā ‘‘vipassanāpaṭivipassanā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ.
五. 《无明缘经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Avijjāpaccayasuttavaṇṇanā
35 「令教说停止」:即中断已经开始的讲述。当时,对于在座的见行者,佛陀欲以破斥其执见的方式继续说法。因为诸佛的教说一旦开始,没有任何人能中途打断而提问,故说「为给予见行者机会」。此是难问题,因为是依于「众生可得」之见而问。「众生可得见之说处」:即依「众生、命者可得」等如是生起的见之词句。依此而说,故为「说」。然而,「见」一词包含二义,但梵行住于究竟义上是圣道修习,故说「圣道住」。「此见」:即认为身与命非异的见。而所谓「命者」,即指生命。「转起」:即二种轮转。「令灭」:令入于不生起之状态。「断除」:通过令不转起而切断。此应被道所灭的轮转灭尽,如此连接。若「此众生达至断灭、无有而彻底断灭」这种断见所执取之相为真实存在,则「无有」即无意义。显示巴利原文
35.Desanaṃ osāpesīti yathāraddhakathaṃ ṭhapesi. Tattha nisinnassa diṭṭhigatikassa laddhiyā bhindanavasena upari kathetukāmo. Buddhānañhi desanāvāraṃ pacchindāpetvā pucchituṃ samattho nāma koci natthi. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhigatikassa okāsadānattha’’nti. Duppañho eso sattūpaladdhiyā pucchitattā . Sattūpaladdhivādapadenāti ‘‘satto jīvo upalabbhatī’’ti evaṃ pavattadiṭṭhidīpakapadavasena. Vadanti etenāti vādo. Diṭṭhi-saddo pana dvayasaṅgahito, brahmacariyavāso pana paramatthato ariyamaggabhāvanāti āha ‘‘ariyamaggavāso’’ti. Ayaṃ diṭṭhīti anaññe sarīrajīvāti diṭṭhi. ‘‘Jīvo’’ti ca jīvitameva vadanti. Vaṭṭanti duvidhaṃ vaṭṭaṃ. Nirodhentoti anuppattidhammataṃ āpādento. Samucchindantoti appavattiyaṃ pāpanena upacchindanto. Tadetaṃ maggena nirodhetabbaṃ vaṭṭaṃ nirujjhatīti yojanā. ‘‘Ayaṃ satto vināsaṃ abhāvaṃ patvā sabbaso ucchijjatī’’ti evaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhiyā gahitākārassa sambhave saccabhāve sati. Na hotīti sātthako na hoti.
「离去」:指从身体中出来而离去。「令不再转起」:意思是使之不再生起。「不能令不再转起」:对于恒常的事物,无法让它不再转起,因为不可能让恒常的事物达到不生起。邪见损害正见,如同荆棘一般:由于亲近未得定的补特伽罗而如此转起,又因不给予机会,以及该断除的却没有断除,所以损害正见。邪见不只是不随顺,更因为以「恒常」等说法来显现法性,从而直接与正见相违,由此说明。「visūka」还有怪异、令人厌恶的颤动、挣扎的意思。多罗树是叶、花、果、嫩芽的依托之处,如同「无实质」这一名称。有些人读作「tālavatthukatāni」,意思是把它做成像没有实质的多罗树一样,即「如同被截顶的多罗树」。因此说「犹如被削去树顶的多罗树」。「消亡」:即毁灭。显示巴利原文
Gacchatīti sarīrato nikkhamitvā gacchati. Vivaṭṭentoti appavattiṃ karontoti attho. Vivaṭṭetuṃ na sakkoti niccassa appavattiṃ pāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā. Micchādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhiṃ vijjhati asamāhitapuggalasevanavasena tathā pavattituṃ appadānavasena ca pajahitabbāpajahanavasena sammādiṭṭhiṃ vijjhati. Visūkamivāti kaṇḍako viya. Na kevalaṃ ananuvattakova, atha kho virodhopi ‘‘nicca’’ntiādinā pavattanadhammatāya viññāpanato. Virūpaṃ bībhacchaṃ phanditaṃ vipphanditaṃ. Paṇṇapupphaphalapallavānaṃ avatthubhūto tālo eva tālāvatthu ‘‘asive sivā’’ti vohāro viya. Keci pana ‘‘tālavatthukatānī’’ti paṭhanti, avatthubhūtatāya tālo viya katānīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘matthakacchinnatālo viyā’’ti. Anuabhāvanti vināsaṃ.
第二部《无明缘经》的注释显示巴利原文
6. Dutiyaavijjāpaccayasuttavaṇṇanā
36 「Iti vāti」意为「如此或说」。指有人可能从刹那的角度来说「老死」和「老死的拥有者」。由于他缺乏自信的特质,不能善巧提问,陷于沉默,所以说「不能问」。显示巴利原文
36.Iti vāti evaṃ vā. Jarāmaraṇassa ceva jarāmaraṇasāmikassa ca khaṇavasena yo vadeyya. Avisāradadhātuko pucchituṃ acchekatāya maṅkubhāvena jāto. Tenāha ‘‘pucchituṃ na sakkotī’’ti.
7. 《非你们经》的注释显示巴利原文
7. Natumhasuttavaṇṇanā
37 「非你们」(Natumhākaṃ):此词仅在显示身体并非我所有。为说明身体的非我所性,故有「在自己当中……」等语。若身体非我所有,则可能属于他人;为说明此亦不实,故说「也不属于他人」。‖「此非旧业」:说明经中所谓「此身体」并非旧业,因为身体并非感受之本性。‖所谓「以缘的名义」,即是通过「因」的譬喻而说。‖「Abhisaṅkhata」(被造作)等为中性词,这是为了与前面「此是旧业」的中性表达保持词性一致。‖所谓「abhisankhata」(被造作),即由相互朝向的诸缘共同和合而造作,故说「应理解为由诸缘所造」。‖「Abhisañcetayita」(被故意造作):即依彼被造作的状态,由于朝向性而思惟、计划,意为已经生起。‖「以思为事」:即以思为因。‖「Vedaniya」(应被感受者):是对感受有助益的,因其作为依处或所缘而成为感受的缘,故说为「感受之事」。显示巴利原文
37.Natumhākanti kāyassa anattaniyabhāvadassanameva panetanti yā tassa anattaniyatā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘attani hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yadi na attaniyaṃ, parakiyaṃ nāma siyāti, tampi natthīti dassento ‘‘nāpi aññesa’’nti āha. Nayidaṃ purāṇakammamevāti ‘‘idaṃ kāyo’’ti vuttasarīraṃ purāṇakammameva na hoti. Na hi kāyo vedanāsabhāvo. Paccayavohārenāti kāraṇopacārena. Abhisaṅkhatantiādi napuṃsakaliṅgavacanaṃ. Purimaliṅgasabhāgatāyāti ‘‘purāṇamidaṃ kamma’’nti evaṃ vuttapurimanapuṃsakaliṅgasabhāgatāya. Aññamaññābhimukhehi samecca paccayehi kato abhisaṅkhatoti āha ‘‘paccayehi katoti daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Abhisañcetayitanti tathā abhisaṅkhatattasaṅkhātena abhimukhabhāvena cetayitaṃ pakappitaṃ, pavattitanti attho. Cetanāvatthukoti cetanāhetuko. Vedaniyanti vedanāya hitaṃ vatthārammaṇabhāvena vedanāya paccayabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘vedaniyavatthū’’ti.
第八 《思经》的注释显示巴利原文
8. Cetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
38 「Yaṃ ca」等词中的「ca」字,用在此处不合宜。它所要说明的是:如同思一样,计划与随眠对于识的住立,也会成为不异所缘的状态,此义被点明了。‖虽在三处中,「转起」之义看似相同,但思、计划、随眠各自的「转起」义,应依次理解为思惟、计划、随眠等不同特征的意义。‖选取三地中善与不善的思,是为了确定业识的缘。‖渴爱与邪见的计划,皆随其所应而被取用,旨在于此:因为于八个与贪俱行的心中,有渴爱的计划;而其中仅有四个心有邪见的计划。‖随眠虽也潜藏于世间善心之中,但在不善心中,其现行更为显著,故提及「十二种思」。‖所谓「俱生分」:这是指现前存在的欲贪等也被称为随眠,因其相似。因为特相不因时间差异而有所不同。‖严格来说,唯有未来的欲贪等才适合称为「随眠」。‖「缘已生起」是合理的说法,故说「所缘是缘」。‖「对于业识的住立」:即指业识的转起。‖「当那个缘存在时」:即当称为思、计划、随眠的缘存在时,识便得以住立。显示巴利原文
38.Yañcāti ettha ca-saddo aṭṭhāne. Tena cetanāya viya pakappānānusayānampi viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā vakkhamānaṃyeva avisiṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇabhāvaṃ joteti. Kāmaṃ tīsupi padesu ‘‘pavatteti’’icceva attho vutto, vattanattho pana cetanādīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ cetayanapakappanānusayanarūpo visiṭṭhaṭṭho daṭṭhabbo. Tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā gahitā kammaviññāṇassa paccayaniddhāraṇametanti. Taṇhādiṭṭhikappā gahitā yathārahanti adhippāyo. Aṭṭhasupi hi lobhasahagatacittesu taṇhākappo, tattha catūsveva diṭṭhikappoti. Kāmaṃ anusayā lokiyakusalacetanāsupi anusentiyeva, akusalesu pana pavatti pākaṭāti ‘‘dvādasannaṃ cetanāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sahajātakoṭiyāti idaṃ paccuppannāpi kāmarāgādayo anusayāva vuccanti taṃsadisatāyāti vuttaṃ. Na hi kālabhedena lakkhaṇappabhedo atthīti. Anāgatā eva hi kāmarāgādayo nippariyāyato ‘‘anusayā’’ti vattabbataṃ arahanti. Paccayuppanno vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘ārammaṇaṃ paccayo’’ti. Kammaviññāṇassa ṭhitatthanti kammaviññāṇasseva pavattiyā. Tasmiṃ paccaye satīti tasmiṃ cetanāpakappanānusayasaññite paccaye sati patiṭṭhā viññāṇassa hoti. Santāne phaladānasamatthatāyeva hotīti ‘‘patiṭṭhā hoti, tasmiṃ patiṭṭhite’’ti vuttaṃ. Sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāvasena viruḷheti. Patiṭṭhiteti hi iminā kammassa katabhāvo vutto, ‘‘viruḷhe’’ti iminā upacitabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṃ javāpetvā’’tiādi. Tattha puretaraṃ uppannāhi kammacetanāhi laddhapaccayattā balappattāya sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya kammaviññāṇaṃ laddhapatiṭṭhaṃ viruḷhamūlañca hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbattamūle jāte’’ti. Tathā hi sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā vipākaṃ dentaṃ anantare jātivasena deti upapajjavedanīyakammanti.
「三地思」:指三地(欲界、色界、无色界)中的善与不善思。「无转起刹那」:这里「转起刹那」是指生起的刹那。并非说生起的刹那就是无转起刹那,也不仅仅是坏灭刹那,因为这是针对随眠尚未被破坏的情况而言。「未被破坏的分位」:即尚未被断除的状态。意思是:当三地的善与不善思不转起时,随眠其实并不以俱生分等形式转起;但在异熟果等各种情况中,依于未被破坏的分位,随眠便会转起,而其中并无任何造作者,所以才这样说。「未被遮止」:指未被对治法所遮止。如是,它便成为识安住的缘。显示巴利原文
Tebhūmakacetanāyāti tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanāya. Appavattanakkhaṇoti idha pavattanakkhaṇo jāyamānakkhaṇo. Na jāyamānakkhaṇo appavattanakkhaṇo na kevalaṃ bhaṅgakkhaṇo appahīnānusayassa adhippetattā. Appahīnakoṭiyāti asamucchinnabhāvena. Tadidaṃ tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanāsu appavattamānāsu anusayānaṃ sahajātakoṭiādinā pavatti nāma natthi, vipākādīsu appahīnakoṭiyā pavattati karontassa abhāvatoti imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Avāritattāti paṭipakkheti avāritabbattā. Paccayova hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā.
第一与第二种解说方式显示了流转,第三种解说则以“若不这样……”等显示了还灭,因而论中说:“在第一句阐述中,三地的善与不善思被‘舍离’”等。这里的“舍离”,是指由于不再造作,它们便不转起、已然离去。同样地,渴爱与邪见也被舍离,应如此关联理解。至于“在所说的各种方式中”,即指前文所说“三地异熟果等”的情形。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamadutiyavārehi vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā tatiyavāre ‘‘no ce’’tiādinā vivaṭṭaṃ dassitanti ‘‘paṭhamapade tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā nivattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nivattāti akaraṇato appavattiyā apagatā. Taṇhādiṭṭhiyo nivattāti yojanā. Vuttappakāresūti ‘‘tebhūmakavipākesū’’tiādinā vuttappakāresu.
“在此”:即此经中。此处依“思”与“计画”的转起而显示法的分类,故说:“‘思’是取三地的善与不善思”等,这正是此处所要显示的。“四种”:即由两种嗔及痴根相应而合为四种的不善思。“在四种不善思中”:即以上述方式所说的四种不善思,其余的不善思则藉由否定——“不计画”而被舍离。“排除经中所说”:即排除经中以否定方式所说的“也不计画”。因为藉由“不计画”,便止息了在八种贪俱心中以俱生分方式转起的随眠;由于这些心不转起,因此除去他们情况。如前,应依先前解说的方式来把握,因为这都是对法的划分。显示巴利原文
Etthāti imasmiṃ sutte. Ettha cetanāpakappanānaṃ pavattanavasena dhammaparicchedo dassitoti ‘‘cetetīti tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā gahitā’’tiādinayo idheva hotīti dassito. Catassoti paṭighadvayamohamūlasamāgatā catasso akusalacetanā. Catūsu akusalacetanāsūti yathāvuttāsu eva catūsu akusalacetanāsu, itarā pana ‘‘na pakappetī’’ti iminā paṭikkhepena nivattāti. Sutte āgataṃ vāretvāti ‘‘no ca pakappetī’’ti evaṃ paṭikkhepavasena sutte āgataṃ vajjetvā. ‘‘Na pakappetī’’ti hi iminā aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatacittesu sahajātakoṭiyā pavattaanusayo nivattito tesaṃ cittānaṃ appavattanato, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ ṭhapetvāti attho. Purimasadisova purimanayesu vuttanayena gahetabbo dhammaparicchedattā.
“Tadappatiṭṭhite”:此为复合词,省略了格尾,并因连音规则而插入da字母。意指“那个(识)的无住立”,即“在此无住立”之义,其复合词的构成应作如是解。“在此”:于这第三种解说中,说明了阿拉汉道的功用,因为从一切方面彻底破坏了随眠的生起。又可以说,这是诸漏尽者所作之事,因为完全遮止了感受等。或者可说,此处显示了九种出世间法,因为依道的次第断除随眠,道后有果,而这两者均以涅槃为所缘。“识的”:指业识。它以“后有”为首,包含了无间有的名色,或直接指结生识,因此说“在中有与后有的中间有一连结”。“有与生”:此处应依辗转相续的方式来把握,亦即“第二种有中的第三种有之生”等。不过,籍着把捉“未来后有的再生”及其非无间的性质,可说业有已被含摄;此处其实正是在阐明出生的因与果的成立。再者,世尊在第二种解说中说:“诸比丘,如果不思、不计画,只是随眠”,这是为了显示:即使先前未造作能引发生有的善与不善业,也没有计画,对于已在诸有中见过患的修行者……显示巴利原文
Tadappatiṭṭhiteti samāsabhāvato vibhattilopo, sandhivasena da-kārāgamo, tassa appatiṭṭhitaṃ tadappatiṭṭhitaṃ, tasmiṃ tadappatiṭṭhiteti evamettha samāsapadasiddhi daṭṭhabbā. Etthāti etasmiṃ tatiyavāre arahattamaggassa kiccaṃ kathitaṃ sabbaso anusayanibbattibhedanato. Khīṇāsavassa kiccakaraṇantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati sabbaso vedanādīnaṃ paṭikkhepabhāvato. Nava lokuttaradhammātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati maggapaṭipāṭiyā anusayasamugghāṭanato maggānantarāni phalāni, tadubhayārammaṇañca nibbānanti. Viññāṇassāti kammaviññāṇassa. Punabbhavasīsena anantarabhavasaṅgahitaṃ nāmarūpaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vā gahitanti āha ‘‘punabbhavassa ca antare eko sandhī’’ti. Bhavajātīnanti ettha ‘‘dutiyabhavassa tatiyabhave jātiyā’’ti evaṃ paramparavasena gahetabbaṃ. Āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattigahaṇena pana nānantariyato kammabhavo gahito, jātihetuphalasiddhipettha vuttā evāti veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘no ce, bhikkhave, ceteti no ca pakappeti, atha kho anusetī’’ti evaṃ bhagavatā dutiyanaye pubbabhāge bhavanibbattakakusalākusalāyūhanaṃ, pakappanañca vināpi bhavesu diṭṭhādīnavassa yogino anusayapaccayā vipassanācetanāpi paṭisandhijanakā hotīti dassanatthaṃ kusalākusalassa appavatti cepi, tadā vijjamānatebhūmakavipākādidhammesu appahīnakoṭiyā anusayitakilesappaccayā bhavavajjassa kammaviññāṇassa patiṭṭhitatā hotīti dassanatthañca vutto. ‘‘Na ceteti pakappeti anusetī’’ti ayaṃ nayo na gahito cetanaṃ vinā pakappanassa abhāvato.
9. 第二思经的注释显示巴利原文
9. Dutiyacetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
39 「在识与名色之间有一个连结」:这是指因果的连结,因为“识”这一词已涵盖了业识。而这里的名色,唯指果报名色,这是显而易见的。其余部分容易理解。显示巴利原文
39.Viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃantare eko sandhīti hetuphalasandhi viññāṇaggahaṇena kammaviññāṇassa gahitattā. Nāmarūpaṃ pana vipākanāmarūpamevāti pākaṭameva. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
10. 第三思经注疏显示巴利原文
10. Tatiyacetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
40 「于色等六种所缘之中」:因此,这里涵盖了三有,因为这一切都包含在六所缘之内。对于此三有的渴望,以发愿等方式而称为「倾向」。「来」:在「所来处」的说法中,「趣」是现起的状态,其中,朝向趣的流转便称为「来」,也就是业等相。在其中,结生识的趣、流转、出生便发生。因此说「在所来处」等。「死与再生」:「死」即命终;「再生」即出生,也就是重新生起。从死之后再生,即是再次出现。因此说「如是,对于识」等。「由此」是指从导致再生的有;「在那里」是指在名为后有的未来有中。一个连结:即这里所说的唯一的因果连结。显示巴利原文
40.Rūpādīsu chasu ārammaṇesu. Tena cettha bhavattayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti chaḷārammaṇapariyāpannattā. Tasseva bhavattayassa patthanā paṇidhānādivasena nati nāma. Āgatimhi gatīti paccupaṭṭhānavasena abhimukhaṃ gati pavatti etasmāti āgati, kammādinimittaṃ. Tasmiṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa gati pavatti nibbatti hoti. Tenāha ‘‘āgate’’tiādi. Cutūpapātoti cavanaṃ cuti, maraṇaṃ. Upapajjanaṃ nibbatti, upapāto. Cutito upapāto punaruppādo. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ viññāṇassā’’tiādi. Itoti nibbattabhavato. Tatthāti punabbhavasaṅkhāte āyatibhave. Ekova sandhīti eko hetuphalasandhi eva kathito.
居士品显示巴利原文
5. Gahapativaggo
1. 五怨恐怖经注疏显示巴利原文
1. Pañcaverabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
41 「Yato」(从何时起):指在某个时候。这里的「to」字如同「dā」字一样,在此处表示时间范围,因此他说「yadā」(当……时)。「bhayaveracetanāyo」(恐惧与怨敌之思):因具可怖畏义而称「bhaya」(恐惧),因具产生怨敌义而称「vera」(怨敌)——即以此为名的那些思。因为,那些生起杀生等恶业的人,以及那些为了这些恶业而造作的人,两者皆具足恐惧与怨敌,所以这些思正是可怖畏的恐惧与怨敌之因。「入流」:从圣道最初逐步修行而证得,即名为入流;为达此目的,以及安住其中者所具备的支,称为「入流支」。合此二义,说「入流支有两种」,意为「入流目的之支」。所谓「yaṃ pubbabhāge」(在前分阶段),是指在亲自证得入流道果之前,为了那个目标而起到作用的前行阶段。那么什么才是呢?他说「亲近善士」等等。亲近佛陀等具足圣智之名的善士;听闻正法,即听闻四谛之法;如理作意,即从无常等角度以正确方法作意;法随法行,即激励而行。显示巴利原文
41.Yatoti yasmiṃ kāle. Ayañhi to-saddo dā-saddo viya idha kālavisayo. Tenāha ‘‘yadā’’ti. Bhayaveracetanāyoti bhāyitabbaṭṭhena bhayaṃ, verapasavanaṭṭhena veranti ca laddhanāmā cetanāyo. Pāṇātipātādayo hi yassa pavattanti, yañca uddissa pavattiyanti, ubhaye sabhayabheravāti te eva bhāyitabbabhayaverajanakāvāti. Sotassa ariyamaggassa ādito paṭṭhāya paṭipattiadhigamo sotāpatti , tadatthāya tattha patiṭṭhitassa ca aṅgāni sotāpattiyaṅgāni, tadubhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘duvidhaṃ sotāpattiyā aṅga’’nti, sotāpattiatthaṃ aṅganti attho. Yaṃ pubbabhāgeti yaṃ sayaṃ sotāpattimaggaphalapaṭilābhato pubbabhāge tadatthāya saṃvattati. Kiṃ pana tanti āha ‘‘sappurisasaṃsevo’’tiādi. Sappurisānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyañāṇasaññāṇajātā payirupāsanā, saddhammassavanaṃ catusaccadhammassavanaṃ, yoniso upāyena aniccādito manasi karaṇaṃ yoniso manasikāro, ussukkāpentena dhammassa nibbānassa anudhammapaṭipajjanaṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipattīti etāni sotāpattiyā aṅgāni. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana sotāpattiaṅganti padaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘evaṃ āgata’’nti vuttaṃ. Ṭhitassa puggalassa aṅgaṃ. Sotāpanno aṅgīyati ñāyati etenāti sotāpannassa aṅgantipi vuccati. Idaṃ pacchā vuttaṃ aṅgaṃ. Dosehi ārakāti ariyoti āha ‘‘niddoso’’ti. Kathaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayotiādinā kenacipi anupārambhiyattā nirupārambho. Ñāṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘niddoso’’ti vuttaṃ, paṭiccasamuppādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘nirupārambho’’ti vadanti. Ubhayampi pana sandhāya ubhayaṃ vuttanti apare. Paṭiccasamuppādo ettha adhippeto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘aparāparaṃ uppannāya vipassanāpaññāyā’’ti. Na hi maggañāṇaṃ vipassanāpaññāti. Sammā upāyattā tassa paṭiccasamuppanne yāthāvato ñāyatīti ñāyo, paṭiccasamuppādo. Ñāṇaṃ pana ñāyati so etenāti ñāyo.
「Tattha」(在那里):指在地狱中。「Maggasotaṃ」(道流):即道之流。「Āpanno」(进入):即证得。他具有在恶趣中结生这种堕落的性质,所以是「vinipātadhammo」(有堕落性质者);不再有堕落性质,即「avinipātadhammo」(不退堕法)。「Paraṃ ayan」意为:必须极度超越感官所及的范围,去了知、觉悟。因为某些词根既具有「去」的含义,「智」也是其含义之一。因此他说「决定完全觉悟者」。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti niraye. Maggasotanti maggassa sotaṃ. Āpannoti adhigato. Apāyesu uppajjanasaṅkhāto vinipātadhammo etassāti vinipātadhammo, na vinipātadhammo avinipātadhammo. Paraṃ ayananti ativiya savisaye ayitabbaṃ bujjhitabbaṃ. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho. Tenāha ‘‘avassaṃ abhisambujjhanako’’ti.
「Pāṇātipātakammakāraṇā」意思是:造作被称为杀生之恶业的原因。「Vera」称为怨敌,即敌对,因其本身是可怖畏的,故又名「bhaya」(恐惧)。因此说「恐惧与怨敌在意义上是一体的」。之所以称为「外部怨敌」,是因为对于那作为怨敌根本的造怨者而言,它是外在的。正是因此,针对那造怨者心中生起的怨敌,才说「这称为内部怨敌」。意思是:依附于那怨敌、作为怨敌根本的造怨者的思心所生起,即便没有能力动手反击,也是如此。因为地狱众生无力对地狱卒进行还击,而地狱卒的思心所会生起,这正表明地狱中有地狱卒。然而,所谓「外部怨敌」,是指现世与来世的外部怨敌。「补特伽罗怨敌」是指,不能成就自己应做之事,仅因在其他补特伽罗身上生起的怨敌而得名。从意义上说,两者其实是一体的,因为特别说明是「心所法」。「在其余的语句中」,即在「由不与取为缘」等所说的其余部分中。若如此理解,意义便被破坏,即义被摧毁。由已证得的道所证得。也有读作「abhigatena」的,意思是已遍知。因此他说「以不动」显示巴利原文
Pāṇātipātakammakāraṇāti pāṇātipātasaṅkhātassa pāpakammassa karaṇahetu. Veraṃ vuccati virodho, tadeva bhāyitabbato bhayanti āha ‘‘bhayaṃ veranti atthato eka’’nti. Idaṃ bāhiraṃ veraṃ nāma tassa verassa mūlabhūtato verakārapuggalato bahibhāvattā. Teneva hi tassa verakārapuggalassa uppannaṃ veraṃ sandhāya ‘‘idaṃ ajjhattikaveraṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, tannissitassa verassa mūlabhūtā verakārapuggalacetanā uppajjati paharituṃ asamatthassapīti adhippāyo. Na hi nerayikā nirayapālesu paṭipaharituṃ sakkonti. Nirayapālassa cetanā uppajjatīti etena ‘‘atthi niraye nirayapālā’’ti dasseti. Yaṃ panetaṃ bāhiraveranti yamidaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ samparāyikañca bāhiraṃ veraṃ. Puggalaveranti vuttaṃ attakiccaṃ sādhetuṃ asakkonto kevalaṃ parapuggale uppannamattaṃ veranti katvā. Atthato ekameva ‘‘cetasika’’nti visesetvā vuttattā. Sesapadesūti ‘‘adinnādānapaccayā’’tiādinā āgatesu sesakoṭṭhāsesu. Attho bhaggoti attho dhaṃsito . Adhigatenāti maggena adhigatena. ‘‘Abhigatenā’’tipi pāṭho, adhivuttenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘acalappasādenā’’ti.
2. 第二种《五种恐惧与怨敌经》的义注显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyapañcaverabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
42 他以“仅为比丘们所说这一点即是差别”这句话表明:有些教导是导师对某些人宣说的,后来在另一个时候,那位善于调伏应调伏者的导师又宣说了同样的教导,结集法的长老们为了“勿使导师的教法因未被完整领受而消失”,便将它们分别纳入不同的结集。显示巴利原文
42.Bhikkhūnaṃ kathitabhāvamattameva visesoti etena yā satthārā ekaccānaṃ desitadesanā, puna tadaññesaṃ veneyyadamakusalena kālantare teneva desitā, sā dhammasaṃgāhakehi ‘‘mā no satthudesanā sampaṭiggahaṃ vinā nassatū’’ti visuṃ saṅgahaṃ āropitāti dasseti.
3. 《苦经》的义注显示巴利原文
3. Dukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
43 “Samudayanaṃ samudayo”(集起即是集),以及“samudeti etamhāti samudayo”(从此集起,故为集),应知两种集在意义上也有这样的差别。缘本身即是缘集。已着手修观的比丘,观察“依此、此缘的和合,这些法于刹那刹那中生起”,被称为“正在观缘集者也正在观刹那集”,因为通过观缘而见到了生起之刹那。然而,当他开始观察诸行于刹那刹那中的生起时,则观察“由这些名为缘的事物所生起”。他们说:“正在观刹那集者,即是在观缘。”然而,由于从缘观察诸行的生起时,也就从刹那观察了它们的生起;而若从刹那观察这些法的生起,因为缘已被善加把握,从缘观察则更容易成就,因此才说“正在观缘集者”等等。在观察灭去时,也是同样的道理。“究竟灭尽”是指不再转起的灭,即涅槃。“坏灭尽”是指刹那灭。于前分阶段,通过把握、遍问等方式观察此二者时,只要见到其中一者,另一者的了见也自然成就;而于前分阶段,以所缘的方式,在从坏灭或以毗婆舍那等观察时,观察坏灭尽,同时也通过随闻等方式更多地观察究竟灭尽。但在道刹那显示巴利原文
43. Samudayanaṃ samudayo, samudeti etamhāti samudayo, evaṃ ubhinnaṃ samudayānamatthatopi bhedo veditabbo. Paccayāva paccayasamudayo. Āraddhavipassako ‘‘imañca imañca paccayasāmaggiṃ paṭicca ime dhammā khaṇe khaṇe uppajjantī’’ti passanto ‘‘paccayasamudayaṃ passantopi bhikkhu khaṇikasamudayaṃ passatī’’ti vutto paccayadassanamukhena nibbattikkhaṇassa dassanato. So pana khaṇe khaṇe saṅkhārānaṃ nibbattiṃ passituṃ āraddho ‘‘imehi nāma paccayehi nibbattatī’’ti passati. ‘‘So khaṇikasamudayaṃ passanto paccayaṃ passatī’’ti vadanti. Yasmā pana paccayato saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ passanto khaṇato tesaṃ udayadassanaṃ hoti, khaṇato etesaṃ udayaṃ passato pageva paccayānaṃ suggahitattā paccayato dassanaṃ sukhena ijjhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paccayasamudayaṃ passantopī’’tiādi. Atthaṅgamadassanepi eseva nayo. Accantatthaṅgamoti appavatti nirodho nibbānanti. Bhedatthaṅgamoti khaṇikanirodho. Tadubhayaṃ pubbabhāge uggahaparipucchādivasena passanto aññatarassa dassane itaradassanampi siddhameva hoti, pubbabhāge ca ārammaṇavasena khayato vayasammasanādikāle bhedatthaṅgamaṃ passanto atirekavasena anussavādito accantaṃ atthaṅgamaṃ passati. Maggakkhaṇe panārammaṇato accantaatthaṅgamaṃ passati, asammohato itarampi passati. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘accantatthaṅgamaṃ passantopī’’tiādi. Samudayatthaṅgamaṃ nibbattibhedanti samudayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbattiṃ atthaṅgamasaṅkhātaṃ bhedañca. Nissayavasenāti cakkhussa sannissayavasena paccayaṃ katvā. Ārammaṇavasenāti rūpe ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ madhupiṇḍikasuttaṭīkāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phassoti ‘‘cakkhu rūpāni viññāṇa’’nti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati samāgame nibbatti phassoti vuttoti āha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā phasso’’ti. Tiṇṇanti ca pākaṭapaccayavasena vuttaṃ, tadaññepi pana manasikārādayo phassapaccayā hontiyeva. Evanti taṇhādīnaṃ asesavirāganirodhakkamena. Bhinnaṃ hotīti anuppādanirodhena niruddhaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘appaṭisandhiya’’nti.
4. 世经注释显示巴利原文
4. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā
44 这里的差别在于:“这是世间的”等,是对集与灭的差别的显示。此处,第四经与第三经的差别即在于此。显示巴利原文
44.Ayamettha visesoti ‘‘ayaṃ lokassā’’ti samudayatthaṅgamānaṃ visesadassanaṃ. Ettha catutthasutte tatiyasuttato viseso.
5. 亲戚经注释显示巴利原文
5. Ñātikasuttavaṇṇanā
45 由于两个亲族彼此之间的村庄称为“亲戚村”,所以说“在两个亲族的村庄里”。“砖”指烧制的砖块,完全用砖块建造的住所便称为“砖堂”。据说,这所住所的建造根本不需靠灰泥涂饰,只用砖块叠砌、覆盖而成。因为世尊曾开许这种砖造屋顶,所以说:“在砖造的大殿中”。不过,那里如门闩、门板等部分仍是木制的。“法门”:它执取了自身的果报后而转起,故为“门”,即原因;因此说“法门就是法的因”,意思是,作为教法的法,是证得殊胜成就的因。“近听”是指靠近而听,所以说:“近听就是靠近的听闻处”。所谓“自己的事务”,是指为了处理那件事才去那里,也就是指打扫精舍周围的工作。“放弃”即指未做此事。这实在有大利益,因为若能立足于解脱处的顶端来听法,便能成就大利益。“成为一片广场”是指一切都无遮无碍、完全敞开。因为当世尊以缘起的方式作意三界中属于“行”的一切法时,这所有法无有遗漏地全部显现在他的智境面前,所以说:“直至有顶,成为一片广场”。显示巴利原文
45. Aññamaññaṃ dvinnaṃ ñātīnaṃ gāmo ñātikoti vuttoti āha ‘‘dvinnaṃ ñātakānaṃ gāme’’ti. Giñjakā vuccanti iṭṭhakā, giñjakāhi eva kato āvasatho giñjakāvasatho. So kira āvāso yathā sudhāparikammena payojanaṃ natthi, evaṃ iṭṭhakāhi eva cinitvā chādetvā kato. Tādisañhi chadanaṃ sandhāya bhagavatā iṭṭhakāchadanaṃ anuññātaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘iṭṭhakāhi kate mahāpāsāde’’ti. Tattha dvārabandhakavāṭaphalakādīni pana dārumayāniyeva. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā vattatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇanti āha ‘‘dhammapariyāyanti dhammakāraṇa’’nti, pariyattidhammabhūtaṃ visesādhigamassa hetunti attho. Upecca suyyati etthāti upassutīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upassutīti upassutiṭṭhāna’’nti. Attano kammanti yadatthaṃ tattha gato, taṃ pariveṇasamajjanakiriyaṃ. Pahāyāti akatvā. Evaṃ mahatthañhi vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā suṇantassa mahato atthāya saṃvattati. Ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosīti sabbaṃ vivaṭaṃ ahosi. Tīsu hi bhavesu saṅkhāragataṃ paccayuppannavasena manasikaroto bhagavato kiñci asesetvā sabbampi taṃ ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ upagacchi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvabhavaggā ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosī’’ti. Tantivasena tamatthaṃ vācāya nicchārento ‘‘vacasā sajjhāyaṃ karonto’’ti vutto. Paccayapaccayuppannavasena ca atthaṃ āharitvā tesaṃ nirodhena vivaṭṭassa āhatattā ‘‘yathānusandhinā’’ti vuttaṃ. Addasa ñāṇacakkhunā.
在心中默诵的人,即称为“保持静默而熟稔于心者”。“句随句”:句与随句,前一句称为“句”,紧随其后的称为“随句”。将它们结合、建立关联,不曾间断。“遍取”即学习受持。“成为所依”指法已成为心相续中的所依,达到不忘失的状态,因此称为“成为所依”。“依止于因”即依止于证得出世法的因。“初梵行”即最初始的梵行,指的就是那个初梵行本身。为与“法门”一词的语法性相呼应,这里用了阳性名词。“在这三经中”,指的是第三、第四和第五这三部经。显示巴利原文
Manasā sajjhāyaṃ karonto ‘‘tuṇhībhūtova paguṇaṃ karonto’’ti vutto. Padānupadanti padañca anupadañca. Purimañhi padaṃ nāma, tadanantaraṃ anupadaṃ. Ghaṭetvā sambandhaṃ katvā avicchinditvā. Pariyāpuṇātīti ajjhayati. Ādhārappattanti ādhāraṃ cittasantānappattaṃ appamuṭṭhaṃ gatattā ādhārappattaṃ nāma. Kāraṇanissitoti lokuttaradhammassa kāraṇasannissito. Ādibrahmacariyakoti ādibrahmacariyaṃ, tadeva ādibrahmacariyakaṃ. Dhammapariyāyāpekkhāya pulliṅganiddeso. Tīsupi imesūti tatiyacatutthapañcamesu tīsu suttesu.
6. 某婆罗门经注释显示巴利原文
6. Aññatarabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
46 由于族姓、名字及声誉而不显著闻名,因此说“凭种姓称为婆罗门”。显示巴利原文
46.Nāmavasenāti gottanāmavasena ca kittivasena ca apākaṭo, tasmā ‘‘jātivasena brāhmaṇo’’ti vuttaṃ.
7. 生闻经注释显示巴利原文
7. Jāṇussoṇisuttavaṇṇanā
47 「如是得名」:即名为「生闻」,此名得自国王。显示巴利原文
47.Evaṃladdhanāmoti ‘‘jāṇussoṇī’’ti evaṃladdhanāmo rañño santikā adhigatanāmo.
8. 顺世论者经注释显示巴利原文
8. Lokāyatikasuttavaṇṇanā
48 于来世的利益,依此学说,世间既不策励,亦不精勤,故称「顺世论」。因为众生依着这种见解,连行善之心都不生起,更不必说付诸行动。持有此种见解或致力于此的人,便称为「顺世论者」。「第一」一词既表示起始,也可作最上的同义词,因此这里说「第一顺世论」。虽然「世间」一词通常是通称,但此处特指愚昧凡夫的世间。为了说明这种世间在愚人心中呈现为无常、微小、矮小乃至广大等相,故有「广大的」「大的」等说。「小」即微小。「单一自性」就是同一种自性。因为法性不变易,故问:「是常恒的自性吗?」「与先前的自性不同,成为种种自性」,意思是自性异于先前。「后时不存在」:后时便一切皆无,因为完全断灭,故说「此问断灭」。「单一性」:于一切时皆与自我一同生起。依此理解,这两种观点便都成了常见。「没有」等,即指不存在。「多性」:即多种自性,或理解为非单一之形态;依此理解,这两种观点则都成了断见。显示巴利原文
48. Āyatiṃ hitaṃ tena loko na yatati na īhatīti lokāyataṃ. Na hi taṃ laddhiṃ nissāya sattā puññakiriyāya cittampi uppādenti, kuto payogo, taṃ etassa atthi, tattha vā niyuttoti lokāyatiko. Paṭhamasaddo ādiatthavācakattā jeṭṭhavevacanoti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ lokāyata’’nti. Sādhāraṇavacanopi lokasaddo visiṭṭhavisayo idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘bālaputhujjanalokassā’’ti. Ittarabhāvena lakuṇḍakabhāvena tassa vipulādibhāvena bālānaṃ upaṭṭhānamattanti dassento ‘‘āyataṃ mahanta’’ntiādimāha. Parittanti khuddakaṃ. Ekasabhāvanti ekaṃ sabhāvaṃ. Avipariṇāmadhammatāyāti āha ‘‘niccasabhāvamevāti pucchatī’’ti. Purimasabhāvena nānāsabhāvanti purimasabhāvato bhinnasabhāvaṃ. Pacchā na hotīti pacchā kiñci na hoti sabbaso samucchijjanato. Tenāha ‘‘ucchedaṃ sandhāya pucchatī’’ti. Ekattanti sabbakālaṃ attasambhavaṃ. Tathā ceva gahaṇena dvepi vādā sassatadiṭṭhiyo honti. Natthi na hoti. Puthuttaṃ nānāsabhāvaṃ, ekarūpaṃ na hotīti vā gahaṇena dvepi vādā ucchedadiṭṭhiyoti.
9. 「圣弟子」经的注释显示巴利原文
9. Ariyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
49 「显示疑惑生起之相」:即不依「何物存在时,何物便生起」这样反复推求因与果,而唯依此缘性的道理,显示疑惑如何生起的方式。「集起」是合集而后生起的意思,因此注释说「生起」。显示巴利原文
49.Saṃsayuppattiākāradassananti ‘‘kasmiṃ sati kiṃ hotī’’ti kāraṇassa phalassa ca paccāmasanena vinā kevalaṃ idappaccayatāya saṃsayassa uppajjanākāradassanaṃ. Samudayati samudetīti atthoti āha ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti.
10. 「第二圣弟子」经的注释显示巴利原文
10. Dutiyaariyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
50 “二法合说”的意思是:第九经中所说的“识存时有名色”等方法,已包含在第十经所说的“无明存时有诸行”等方法之中。“不同”是指第十经与之前的第九经之间的差异。显示巴利原文
50.Dvepi nayā ekato vuttāti idaṃ ‘‘viññāṇe sati nāmarūpaṃ hotī’’tiādinā navame vuttassa nayassa ‘‘avijjāya sati saṅkhārā hontī’’tiādinā dasame vuttanaye antogadhattā. Nānattanti purimato navamato dasamassa nānattaṃ.
6. 「苦」品显示巴利原文
6. Dukkhavaggo
「遍审经」的注释。显示巴利原文
1. Parivīmaṃsanasuttavaṇṇanā
51 “审察”是指衡量流转之因与还灭之因。“然而,此语从何而来?”因为经中说:“为苦的完全灭尽而正确地遍审。”若不全面审察一切苦,便不可能正确地灭尽苦。问“为何只把握老死?”等,是在问仅把握老死的原因。其意图是:生等诸支的流转也是苦性。因为把握老死时,生即被把握;若无生,老死本身亦不存在。此理同样适用于有等诸支。如此,乃至具“生法”者,在把握老死时即已被把握;以“老死”之名,一切具有变坏性的三地诸行悉被把握。因此,仅凭把握老死,便已把握一切流转苦。故注释说:“因为把握老死时,一切苦已被把握。”“种种”指多种类型、多个部分;或读作“aneka”,“aneka”即众多的意思。“vidha”则指以破碎、苍老等形态呈现的差别部分。“种种样态”即由此而具有的种种样态。“犹如沐浴后站立之人”是针对愚者将“有身”执取为清净相而说的。显示巴利原文
51.Upaparikkhamānoti pavattipavattihetuṃ, nivattinivattihetuñca paritulento. Kuto panetanti? ‘‘Sammā dukkhakkhayā’’ti vacanato. Na hi sabbadukkhaparivīmaṃsaṃ vinā sammā dukkhakkhayo sambhavati. Kasmātiādinā jarāmaraṇasseva gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Jātiādīnampi pavatti dukkhabhāvinīti adhippāyo. Yasmā jarāmaraṇe gahite sati jātipi gahitā hoti, tassā abhāve jarāmaraṇasseva abhāvato. Esa nayo bhavādīsupi. Evaṃ yāva jātidhammo jarāmaraṇe gahite gahitova hoti, jarāmaraṇapadesena tabbikāravanto sabbe tebhūmakā saṅkhārā gahitāti evampi jarāmaraṇaggahaṇena sabbampi vaṭṭadukkhaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiṃ gahite sabbadukkhassa gahitattā’’ti. Anekavidhanti bahuvidhaṃ bahukoṭṭhāsaṃ. ‘‘Aneka’’nti vā pāṭho . Anekanti bahulavacanaṃ. Vidhanti khaṇḍiccapāliccādivasena viparītakoṭṭhāsaṃ. Nānappakārakanti tato eva nānappakāraṃ. Nhatvā ṭhitaṃ purisaṃ viyāti bālānaṃ attabhāvassa subhākārena upaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha.
已说「以适当之德」;有人问:「是在一切情况下都以适当之德吗?」答:「是由于无杂染性、由于清净性的缘故。」因为涅槃并非以无为等状态而与之相似。「已行道者」:指面向于道、以加行为首,而行道、证得。「已随顺者」:指以契合的方式而趣入;正如证得涅槃那样,是依随顺其性的方式而趣入。这里,经中的「了知」,是依前分而说;「而成为如是行道者」,是依决定分而说。「依后分」是其他人的说法。然而也有人说:「如同行道者的老死后归于还灭一样,而成为那样的行道者。」「对于词的审察」,应知是依前分而说,并非依道刹那而说。「为了行的还灭」:在此处,所执取的并不是无明缘的行,而是一切有为行,因此注释说:「为了行苦的还灭」。由此注释说:「至此,乃至阿拉汉果的教说已被阐明。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Sāruppabhāvenā’’ti vuttaṃ, kiṃ sabbathā sāruppabhāvenāti āha ‘‘nikkilesatāya parisuddhatāyā’’ti. Na hi tassesā asaṅkhatatādibhāvena sadisā. Paṭipannoti paṭimukho abhisaṅkhāramukho hutvā panno adhigato. Anugatanti anucchavikabhāvena gataṃ, yathā ca nibbānassa adhigamo hoti, evaṃ tadanurūpabhāvena gataṃ. Ettha ca pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pajānātī’’ti pubbabhāgavasena pajānanā vuttā, ‘‘tathā paṭipanno ca hotī’’ti niyatavasena. ‘‘Aparabhāgavasenā’’ti apare. Keci pana ‘‘yathā paṭipannassa jarāmaraṇaṃ nirujjhati, tathā paṭipanno’’ti vadanti. Padavīmaṃsanā pubbabhāgavasena veditabbā, na maggakkhaṇavasena. Saṅkhāranirodhāyāti ettha nayidaṃ avijjāpaccayasaṅkhāraggahaṇaṃ, atha kho saṅkhatasaṅkhāraggahaṇanti āha ‘‘saṅkhāradukkhassa nirodhatthāyā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘ettāvatā yāva arahattā desanā kathitā’’ti.
通过「各自自证般涅槃」等句,展示了阿拉汉果的省察;通过「他感受乐受」等句,展示了常住之住。如此开示之后,理应在一切情况下从流转的教说中转入还灭。「无明所近取者」这句中的 iti 字,是「等」的意思,因此它再次包含了这些流转与还灭的谈论。「补特伽罗一词能诠显其余两种本性」,为了将其与其余二者区别开,并在执取时只显示第一种本性,而说出「人补特伽罗」,所以注释说:「人即是补特伽罗。」「由两者」指由「人补特伽罗」这一执取。「当某事物世俗不存在时,对它的谈论、教说就是世俗论;胜义的谈论、教说就是胜义论。」「在那里」是指在世俗论与胜义论中,而不是在世俗与胜义本身之中。因此注释说:「如此进行的,称为世俗论」等。这里,世俗与胜义的相状如下:当某事物被破坏,或以智慧作部分分解后,便不再保有它原来的名称,例如瓶、布等各类别,这就是世俗;与此相反的,即是胜义。因为在具有坚硬、能触等自性的法中,是找不到这种划分理路的。在那里,对于色等诸法,依据它们的聚合、相续而转起,从而假立「众生」等名称,所以注释说:「众生、人……乃至」显示巴利原文
‘‘Paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatī’’tiādinā arahattaphalapaccavekkhaṇaṃ, ‘‘so sukhañca vedanaṃ vedayatī’’tiādinā satatavihārañca dassetvā desanā sabbathāva vaṭṭadesanāto nivattetabbā siyā. Avijjāgatoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, tena evamādikaṃ idaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭakathanaṃ puna gaṇhāti. Puggalasaddo itarāsaṃ dvinnaṃ pakatīnaṃ vācakoti tato visesetvā gahaṇe paṭhamapakatimeva dassento ‘‘purisapuggalo’’ti avocāti āha ‘‘purisoyeva puggalo’’ti. Ubhayenāti purisapuggalaggahaṇena. Sammutiyā avijjamānāya kathā desanā sammutikathā. Paramatthassa kathā desanā paramatthakathā. Tatthāti sammutiparamatthakathāsu, na sammutiparamatthesu. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ pavattā sammutikathā nāmā’’tiādi. Tatridaṃ sammutiparamatthānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ – yasmiṃ bhinne buddhiyā vā avayavavinibbhoge kate na taṃsamaññā, sā ghaṭapaṭādippabhedā sammuti, tabbipariyāyato paramattho. Na hi kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāve ayaṃ nayo labbhati. Tattha rūpādidhammaṃ samūhasantānavasena pavattamānaṃ upādāya ‘‘satto’’tiādi vohāroti āha ‘‘satto naro…pe… sammutikathā nāmā’’ti . Yasmā rūpādayo paramatthadhammā ‘‘khandhā dhātuyo’’tiādinā vuccanti, na vohāramattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘khandhā…pe… paramatthakathā nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu khandhakathāpi sammutikathāva, sammuti hi saṅketo khandhaṭṭho rāsaṭṭho vā koṭṭhāsaṭṭho vāti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ pana khandhasamaññā phassādīsu tajjāpaññatti viya paramatthasannissayā tassa āsannatarā puggalasamaññādayo viya na dūreti paramatthasaṅgahatā vuttā. Khandhasīsena vā tadupādānā sabhāvadhammā eva gahitā. Nanu ca sabbepi sabhāvadhammā sammutimukheneva desanaṃ ārohanti, na sammukhenāti sabbāpi desanā sammutidesanāva siyāti? Nayidamevaṃ desetabbadhammavibhāgena desanāvibhāgassa adhippetattā, na ca saddo kenaci pavattinimittena vinā atthaṃ pakāsetīti. Tenāha ‘‘paramatthaṃ kathentāpi sammutiṃ amuñcitvāva kathentī’’ti. Saccameva aviparītameva kathenti.
「世俗」即是共称。「最高、最上的义」即是胜义,指诸法的如实自性。彼自性是胜义,而世俗则仅仅是世间约定的假立。既然如此,为何世俗论是真实的呢?答:「世间世俗之因」,即依于世间的共称而转起。因为,若不执取世间的共称,其施设犹如被听闻的名称一样,并非虚妄,不应被逾越。因此,世尊说:「不应执取地方方言,不应逾越共称。」「诸法」即诸自性法。「真实相」即能照亮真实存在之相,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Sammutīti samaññā. Paramo uttamo atthoti paramattho, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvo. Taṃ paramatthaṃ, sammuti pana lokassa saṅketamattasiddhā. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sammutikathāya saccatāti āha ‘‘lokasammutikāraṇa’’nti lokasamaññaṃ nissāya pavattanato. Lokasamaññāya hi abhinivesanaṃ vinā paññāpanā ekaccassa sutassa sāvanā viya, na musā anatikkamitabbato tassā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyā’’ti. Dhammānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ. Bhūtalakkhaṇaṃ bhāvassa lakkhaṇaṃ dīpentīti katvā.
「十三种思的分类」:指八种欲界善思与五种色界善思的分类。「福行」:因它能令自相续再生,并能造作应受供养的果报。「以业为福」:即以业为体的福。「以异熟为福」:即以异熟为体的福。福的果报,因省略后词,也如“如此这福德增长”等句中一样,被称为“福”。“识行于非福”一句,因与“识行于福”所说之理相同,故不再引述。非福的果报通过省略后词而被称为“非福”。把握了“行”之后,便以“此无明所近取者”一句把握了行的缘;以“识行于福”等句,把握了缘所生的识。把握识时,名色等一切支便皆被把握。因此注释说:“十二支的缘起关联已悉皆把握。”显示巴利原文
Terasacetanābhedanti aṭṭhakāmāvacarakusalacetanāpañcarūpāvacarakusalacetanābhedaṃ. Attano santānassa punanato pujjabhavaphalassa abhisaṅkharaṇato puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ. Kammapuññenāti kammabhūtena. Vipākapuññenāti vipākasaṅkhātena. Puññaphalampi hi uttarapadalopena ‘‘puñña’’nti vuccati ‘‘evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu viya. ‘‘Apuññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇa’’nti idaṃ ‘‘puññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇa’’nti ettha vuttanayamevāti na uddhataṃ. Apuññaphalaṃ uttarapadalopena ‘‘apuñña’’nti vuccati. Saṅkhāranti saṅkhārassa gahitattā ‘‘avijjāgatoya’’nti iminā saṅkhārassa paccayo gahito, ‘‘puññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇa’’ntiādinā paccayuppannaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Tasmiñca gahite nāmarūpādi sabbaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘dvādasapadiko paccayākāro gahitova hotī’’ti.
「明」:以最胜义指阿拉汉道智。因为此智生起时,无明即完全断除。「首先」一语,显示无明的断除与明的生起是同时的。由此而说“然而正如”等。「以灯光」:指与灯光生起之因同时。「明的生起」即明的生起之因,即便如此,意在说明二者同时。「不执取」:即不以“这是我的”等方式执取。他不渴爱、不恐惧,因为已无渴爱之语,亦无恐惧之缘。显示巴利原文
Vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaniddesena. Tassā hi uppādā sabbaso avijjā pahīnā hoti. Paṭhamamevāti idaṃ avijjāpahānavijjuppādānaṃ samānakālatādassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Padīpujjalenāti padīpujjalanahetunā saheva. Vijjuppādāti vijjuppādahetu, evaṃ satīpi samakālatteti adhippāyo. Na gaṇhātīti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā na gaṇhāti. Na taṇhāyati na bhāyati taṇhāvuttino abhāvā, tato eva bhayavatthuno ca abhāvā.
「吞下后消化」:犹如吞入后使其成为非所缘境一般,而予以消化。由于有染之乐伴随诸多苦,且喜乐者以乐为苦因,故喜乐者即名为喜苦;譬如欲求火之最上乐者,必受烟之苦。在此,“遭遇苦后希求乐”中,应以体弱取食者等为例来理解。因为他们直至傍晚尚未进食,在准备晚餐等时,先令饥饿生起,然后才进食等。由于乐的变坏即是苦,故喜乐者即名为喜苦,这是此处的理趣。然而有说:“因苦不存在,及变异之乐故,喜乐彼乐者即是喜苦。”此说不正确,因从未见有谁因喜乐如是乐相而被称为喜苦;但确实见有人喜乐作为苦因的有染之乐,故说他是喜苦。喜乐作为苦因的有染之乐,于义即名为喜苦,此义已说。「身」指五门身,是此(受)的边际、终点,故说“以身为边际”。因此说:“只要五门身转起,它便转起。”“以寿为边际”亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvāti gilitvā viya aññassa avisayaṃ viya karaṇena pariniṭṭhāpetvā. Sāmisasukhassa anekadukkhānubandhabhāvato, sukhābhinandassa dukkhahetubhāvato ca sukhaṃ abhinandantoyeva dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāma aggisantāpasukhaṃ icchanto dhūmadukkhānuññāto viya. Dukkhaṃ patvā sukhaṃ patthanatoti ettha dubbalagahaṇikādayo nidassanabhāvena veditabbā. Te hi yāva sāyanhasamayāpi abhutvā sāyamāsādīni karonto jighacchādiṃ uppādetvā bhuñjanādīni karonti. Sukhassa vipariṇāmadukkhato sukhaṃ abhinandanto dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāmāti yojanā. Keci pana dukkhassa abhāvato vipariṇāmasukhato taṃ sukhaṃ abhinandanto dukkhaṃ abhinandatīti vadanti. Taṃ na, na hi tādisaṃ sukhanimittaṃ koci dukkhaṃ abhinandanto diṭṭho, dukkhahetuṃ pana sāmisaṃ sukhaṃ abhinandanto diṭṭho. Dukkhahetuṃ sāmisaṃ sukhaṃ abhinandanto atthato dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāmāti vuttovāyamattho. Kāyoti pañcadvārakāyo, so pariyanto avasānaṃ etassāti kāyapariyantikaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yāva pañcadvārakāyo pavattati, tāva pavatta’’nti. Jīvitapariyantikanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
「后生起而先灭去」:在同一有身中,它比意门受更晚生起,却又先于它灭去。为以其自性显示此已成就的义理,而说「意门受先生起而后灭去」。现在,为简要开显前文所说,故说「它……」等。直至三十三岁,皆为初龄(青年期)。「五十岁时」:从初龄一直到五十岁期间,它皆安住,即未经历增减,以自性而安住。「迟缓」指柔软、不极锐利。「那时」指八十岁、九十岁时。同样,在长时间不断寻思时也是如此。已破碎、失去光泽、粉碎离散、衰弱无力。「只到心基为止」:不再于眼等依处转起,因为那些依处已耗尽,故仅止于成为终点的有心基依处。只要这种受还在转起。显示巴利原文
Pacchā uppajjitvā paṭhamaṃ nirujjhatīti ekasmiṃ attabhāve manodvārikavedanāto pacchā uppajjitvā tato paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati, tato eva siddhamatthaṃ sarūpeneva dassetuṃ ‘‘manodvārikavedanā paṭhamaṃ uppajjitvā pacchā nirujjhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni tameva saṅkhepena vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘sā hī’’tiādimāha. Yāva tettiṃsavassāpi paṭhamavayo. Paṇṇāsavassakāleti paṭhamavayato yāva paññāsavassakālā, tāva ṭhitā hotīti vuḍḍhihāniyo anupagantvā sarūpeneva ṭhitā hoti. Mandāti mudukā atikhiṇā. Tadāti asītinavutivassakāle. Tathā ciraparivitakkepi. Bhaggā nittejā bhaggavibhaggā dubbalā. Hadayakoṭiṃyevāti cakkhādivatthūsu avattetvā tesaṃ khīṇattā koṭibhūtaṃ hadayavatthuṃyeva. Yāva esā vedanā vattati.
「水池」指大池。「具足五水道」即具备五种水的流入与流出通道。水从各处流溢,因为完全充满。显示巴利原文
Vāpiyāti mahātaḷākena. Pañcaudakamaggasampannanti pañcahi udakassa pavisananikkhamanamaggehi yuttaṃ. Tato tato vissandamānaṃ sabbaso puṇṇattā.
「最初天即降雨」等,是将譬喻与法义进行对应连结。「关于此受」:即指前面所说那种已达终点之意门受。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃdeve vassantetiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Imaṃ vedanaṃ sandhāyāti imaṃ yathāvuttaṃ pariyosānappattaṃ manodvārikavedanaṃ sandhāya.
“身坏”指有身的灭坏。巴利经文作“乃至寿命灭尽”,而在注疏中,则将“寿命灭尽之后”摄取出来作了说明。依他世而言。诸受的清凉,即是对诸行热恼状态的平息,而这乃是就可能不再转起而言,所以说“转起……将成……”等。“界身”指称为骸骨的界身,因为在身体的各个部分,也有“身”的名称。显示巴利原文
Kāyassa bhedāti attabhāvassa vināsato. ‘‘Uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā’’ti pāḷi, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana jīvitapariyādānā uddhanti paduddhāro kato. Paralokavasena agantvā. Vedanānaṃ sītibhāvo nāma saṅkhāradarathapariḷāhabhāvo, so panāyaṃ appavattivasenāti āha ‘‘pavatti…pe… bhavissantī’’ti. Dhātusarīrānīti aṭṭhikaṅkalasaṅkhātadhātusarīrāni. Sarīrekadese hi sarīrasamaññā.
“陶匠的窑”:即从陶匠的窑处。此处,“窑”指烧制之处,即烧制的地方。他们居住于此,即以此烧制之用而住,故为住处,因此指从陶匠的住处而来。取出尚未退去炽热、仍带造作状态的罐子放置时,若有灰,便依覆盖的方式放置。说这样的放置,是为了说明“会存放”。“罐的碎片”:由于是罐的部分,结合的部件名为“罐的碎片”,而非断裂破碎的残片。因为是依部件来说明集合体,在那里,瓦片的集合即是罐。因此说“以口缘结合为一体”。“会存放”指失去了特殊色泽与热性状态的罐子本身留在那里。“燃烧……”应当把三有看作被十一种火燃烧的状态。犹如陶匠观察燃烧的陶匠住处,同样地,这位已发起修观的瑜伽行者观察三有被贪等燃烧,所以说“如陶匠的瑜伽行者”。“取出之杖”指阿罗汉道智,因为它从三有之窑中取出。“如平坦地”喻指涅槃之地,因为退除了一切险难。显示巴利原文
Kumbhakārapākāti kumbhakārapākato. Ettha paccatīti pāko, pacanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadeva pācanavasena āvasanti etthāti āvāso, tasmā kumbhakārāvāsato. Avigatavūpasamaṃ saṅkharitaṃ kumbhaṃ uddharitvā ṭhapento chārikāya sati pidhānavasena ṭhapeti. Tathā ṭhapanaṃ pana sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭisisseyyā’’ti. Kumbhassa padesabhūtatāya ābaddhā avayavā ‘‘kumbhakapālānī’’ti adhippetāni, na chinnabhinnāni. Avayavamukhena hi samudāyo vutto. Tattha kapālasamudāyo hi ghaṭo. Tenāha ‘‘mukhavaṭṭiyā ekabaddhānī’’ti. Avasisseyyunti vaṇṇavisesauṇhabhāvāpagatā ghaṭakārāneva tiṭṭheyyunti. Āditta…pe… tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvato. Yathā kumbhakāro kumbhakārāvāsaṃ ādittaṃ paccavekkhati, evaṃ āraddhavipassakopesa bhavattayaṃ rāgādīhi ādittanti āha ‘‘kumbhakāro viya yogāvacaro’’ti. Nīharaṇadaṇḍakoviya arahattamaggañāṇaṃ bhavattayapākato nīharaṇato. Samo bhūmibhāgo viya nibbānatalaṃ sabbavisamā nivattanato.
以“由执取与放下,由年岁的增长与灭去,由食所生,由时节所生,由心等起,由业所生,由法性色”这七种行相反复审察者,名为观色七法。以“由聚,由双,由刹那,由次第,由见的除去,由慢的断除,由欲的完全灭尽”这七种行相反复审察者,名为观无色七法。因此,这是对导出上述色七法和无色七法而修观者所说。虽然阿罗汉的有身已从一切有中被拔除,但只要还未到达无余涅槃界,他在善趣有中依然可说还住立着,因此这里只说“把有身从四恶趣中拔除”。于是,才说了“然而诸漏尽者……”等。而且正如后面会说的:“对于已在无余涅槃界般涅槃者,应当知道这就是轮回的止息。”这里的意思是,并非在讲无余涅槃界而般涅槃;而在有余涅槃界,所谓的般涅槃,就是证得阿罗汉果。在此,由于炽热止息的意义是从造作之因那里止息来说的,所以即使是热罐冷却的比喻,在这里也不相违。“无执取的身体”:他们说这是指时节等起的色聚。“诸比丘”:这里的“诸”字含有“开始”的意思,而这句话本身是经文。“为提出质问”:意思是为了作这样的提问。正感受着以身命为边际之……显示巴利原文
‘‘Ādānanikkhepanato, vayovuddhatthaṅgamato, āhāramayato, utumayato, cittasamuṭṭhānato, kammajato, dhammatārūpato’’ti (visuddhi. 2.706) imehi sattahi ākārehi sammasanto rūpasattakaṃ vipassati nāma. ‘‘Kalāpato, yamakato, khaṇikato, paṭipāṭito, diṭṭhiugghāṭanato, mānasamugghāṭato, nikantipariyādānato’’ti (visuddhi. 2.717) imehi sattahi ākārehi sammasanto arūpasattakaṃ vipassati nāma, tasmā yathāvuttaṃ imaṃ rūpasattakaṃ arūpasattakañca nīharitvā vipassantassa. Yadipi arahato attabhāvo sabbabhavehipi uddhaṭo, yāva pana anupādisesaparinibbānaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva tasmimpi sugatibhave ṭhitoyevāti vattabbataṃ labbhatīti ‘‘catūhi apāyehi attabhāvaṃ uddharitvā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khīṇāsavo panā’’tiādi. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutassa vaṭṭavūpasamo veditabbo’’ti. Na parinibbāti anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti adhippāyo, saupādisesāya pana nibbānadhātuyā parinibbānaṃ arahattappattiyeva. Abhisaṅkhārahetuto hettha pariḷāhavūpasamassa upasamabhāvena adhippetattā uṇhakumbhanibbānanidassanampi na virujjhati. Anupādinnakasarīrānīti utusamuṭṭhānikarūpakalāpe vadanti. Bhikkhaveti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Idaṃ pana vacanaṃ. Anuyogāropanatthanti kāyapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno khīṇāsavo api nu puññābhisaṅkhārādikammaṃ kareyyāti pañhaṃ kātuṃ. Atha vā anuyogāropanatthanti ‘‘api nu kho khīṇāsavo bhikkhu puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ vā abhisaṅkhareyyā’’tiādinā anuyogaṃ āropetuṃ vuttaṃ, na tāva yathāraddhadesanaṃ niṭṭhāpetunti attho.
当结生识确立时,在那个有中可能生起的诸识便有生起之可能,而非没有,因此经中说‘识应被了知’,即是结生识应被了知。倘若一切行全然无存,结生识还能被了知吗?若此结生识不被了知,那么一切识便都不被了知了。‘诸长老’指的是世尊以‘诸比丘’称之的那些长老。他对问题的解答表示随喜,因为此解答与他的遍知智相应。‘不了知’即不被了知。以‘等’字还包括了‘如果没有识,名色便不被了知’等意义。‘称为确信’:这是指依随信受的方式而生起的确信。‘胜解’是指以决断为相的解脱,以及信解脱。因此巴利经典中说:‘诸比丘,你们应当信受此事。’正因它是与信相连的决断相解脱,所以这里说它是‘称为确信的胜解’。‘终’即是边际。‘分界’:因为在此处四周皆被切割划分,故称分界。显示巴利原文
Paṭisandhiviññāṇe siddhe tasmiṃ bhave uppajjanārahānaṃ viññāṇānaṃ siyā sambhavo, nāsatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘viññāṇaṃ paññāyethāti paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ paññāyethā’’ti. Sabbaso saṅkhāresu asantesu paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ api nu kho paññāyeyya. Tasmiñhi apaññāyamāne sabbaṃ viññāṇaṃ na paññāyeyya. Therānanti ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti ālapitattherānaṃ . Pañhabyākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsati tassa sabbaññutaññāṇena saṃsandanato. Appaññāṇanti appaññāyanaṃ. Ādi-saddena viññāṇe asati nāmarūpassa appaññāṇanti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sanniṭṭhānasaṅkhātanti saddahanākārena pavattasanniṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ. Adhimokkhanti nicchayākāravimokkhaṃ saddhāvimokkhañca. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘saddahatha metaṃ, bhikkhave’’ti. Saddhāsahitañhi nicchayākāravimokkhaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sanniṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ adhimokkha’’nti. Antoti pariyanto. Parito chijjati etthāti paricchedo.
《取经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Upādānasuttavaṇṇanā
52 由于以所缘等方式而转起,故对诸取起资助作用的,便称为‘取所取’;在这些取所取中。因此说‘四种取的缘中’。‘随观味的人’是指用邪智去随观那些可味著之物。‘以此为食’:即十六种、二十种、三十种、四十种或五十种食为其缘,故称‘以此为食’。犹如大火堆,三有被十一种火所燃烧,这三有本身即是如此。……凡夫即为这如火堆般的三有所系缚。显示巴利原文
52. Ārammaṇādibhāvena saṃvattanato upādānānaṃ hitāni upādāniyāni, tesu upādāniyesu. Tenāha ‘‘catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ paccayesū’’ti. Assādaṃ anupassantassāti asādetabbaṃ micchāñāṇena anupassato. Tadāhāroti soḷasa vā vīsaṃ tiṃsaṃ cattālīsaṃ paññāsaṃ vā āhāro paccayo etassāti tadāhāro. Aggikkhandho viya tayo bhavā ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvato etadeva bhavattayaṃ. Aggi…pe… puthujjano aggikkhandhasadisassa bhavattayassa paribandhanato.
‘业处’指观业处。因此说‘于三地法上’。‘法殿’指出世间法殿。因其极为崇高,故称为‘殿’。在念处大路中,于果刹那生起。显示巴利原文
Kammaṭṭhānassāti vipassanākammaṭṭhānassa. Tenāha ‘‘tebhūmakadhammesū’’ti. Dhammapāsādanti lokuttaradhammapāsādaṃ. So hi accuggataṭṭhena ‘‘pāsādo’’ti vuccati. Satipaṭṭhānamahāvīthiyaṃ phalakkhaṇe pavattāyāti.
《结经二则》注释显示巴利原文
3-4. Saṃyojanasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
53-54 因为以巨大的轮回系缚作为譬喻,而取来油灯的缘故,所以说“拿着大圆木球”。如前所述的方法,即与前面《可取经》中所说的方式相同。这些经乃是随顺所调伏的有情的意乐,才有这样的言辞与这样的开示。这一道理同样适用于此后的其余诸经。显示巴利原文
53-54. Mahantavaṭṭappabandhaopammabhāvena telapadīpassa āhatattā ‘‘mahantañca vaṭṭikapālaṃ gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Purimanayenevāti purimasmiṃ upādāniyasutte vuttanayeneva. Tathā vinetabbānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena hi imesaṃ suttānaṃ evaṃ vacanaṃ evaṃ desanā. Esa nayo ito paresupi.
《大树经二则》注释显示巴利原文
5-6. Mahārukkhasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
55-56 “输送养分”:犹如输送滋味的管道,将树根从大地与水界汲取的精华向上输送到人的身体中。它们如此输送,是通过“以养分……”等方式来阐明。“手度百肘高”:亦即高达一百肘。“在这里”:指在这段轮回论中。“业生起”:即以业为缘。显示巴利原文
55-56.Ojaṃ abhiharantīti rasaharaṇiyo viya purisassa sarīre rukkhamūlāni rukkhassa pathavīāporase upari āropenti. Tesaṃ tathā āropanaṃ ‘‘ojāyā’’tiādinā vibhāveti. Hatthasatubbedhamassāti hatthasatubbedho, hatthasataṃ ubbiddhassapi. Etthāti etissaṃ vaṭṭakathāyaṃ. Kammārohananti kammapaccayo.
再者,“在这里”(puna etthā):指在这段出离论中。对于希望灭尽轮回之苦、已坚固生起悚惧智的人,便为之宣说“如同锄头”等。由此引生的智,是依止于安住在定之篮(samādhipacchiyā)中的智,也是应当持续修习的观起始智。所谓“如同砍树的斧头”:具足如此性质的观,必定能截断轮回,因此经文说“……树……作意者的慧”。其中,“业处”(kammaṭṭhānanti):即观业处。它透过四种界差别的确定方式,在四十二部分中确立,也就是:二十个地界部分、十二个水界部分、四个火界部分、六个风界部分。“以及识的”(viññāṇassa cā):iti一词有“等”义与“种种”义。由此,它包含了所造色以及与识相应的诸法。在七种适当(sappāya)当中,若有人未能获得,他的业处便不会明晰现前,正是针对这样的人而说“某种适当”。其余的内容容易理解。显示巴利原文
Puna etthāti etissaṃ vivaṭṭakathāyaṃ. Vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nāsetukāmassa daḷhaṃ uppannasaṃvegañāṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kuddālo viyā’’ti āha. Tato nibbattitañāṇaṃ samādhipacchiyā ṭhitaṃ nissāya pavattetabbavipassanārambhañāṇaṃ. Rukkhacchedanapharasu viyāti evaṃbhūtassa vipassanā ekantato vaṭṭacchedāya hotiyevāti āha ‘‘rukkhassa…pe… manasikarontassa paññā’’ti. Tattha kammaṭṭhānanti vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃ catubbidhavavatthānavasena vīsati pathavīkoṭṭhāsā, dvādasa āpokoṭṭhāsā, cattāro tejokoṭṭhāsā, cha vāyokoṭṭhāsāti dvecattālīsāya koṭṭhāsesu. Viññāṇassa cāti iti-saddo ādiattho pakārattho ca. Tena bhūtarūpāni viññāṇasampayuttadhamme ca saṅgaṇhāti. Sattasu sappāyesu yassa alabhantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ vibhūtaṃ hutvā na upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aññataraṃ sappāya’’nti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第七 幼树经注疏显示巴利原文
7. Taruṇarukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
57-59 “应围篱”:以湿润的方式在四周筑起篱笆。这样做时,由于拔除了那里草、灌木等的根茎,那个地方便得以清理,所以也说“应净化”。“尘土”是指能使其增长之物,即外来尘土。“应给予”是投入。因此说到“坚硬的”等。依已说的方法,即如第五经中“譬如欲毁坏树木的男子……”所说。第八和第九经文义浅显,因为同样可依已说的方法了知。显示巴利原文
57-59.Palimajjeyyāti allakaraṇavasena parito pāḷiṃ bandheyya. Tathā karonto yasmā ca tattha tiṇagacchādīnaṃ mūlasantānaggahaṇena taṃ ṭhānaṃ sodheti nāma, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sodheyyā’’ti. Paṃsunti assa pavaḍḍhakārakaṃ, āgantukaṃ paṃsunti attho. Dadeyyāti pakkhipeyya. Tenāha ‘‘thaddha’’ntiādi. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘rukkhaṃ nāsetukāmo puriso viyā’’tiādinā pañcamasutte vuttanayena. Aṭṭhamanavamāni uttānatthāneva vuttanayattā.
第十 缘起经注疏显示巴利原文
10. Nidānasuttavaṇṇanā
60 这是以复数表达:名为“俱卢”的乡间王子们,他们所居住的国土虽只有一个,但依习惯用法,以复数称为“俱卢”。在世尊没有固定住处的地方,通常的因缘叙述只提及他游化的村落,例如:“住在释迦族中,有个名为天臂的释迦族城镇。”称呼“具寿”或“天爱”等,是亲切的表达,因此说“具寿是亲切之语”;这种亲切之语出于敬意,故又说“这是恭敬之语”。太远、太近、太正前、太正后、坐于上风处、坐在高处,这六种是坐处的过失。颜色有六种:青、黄、赤、白、深红和光辉色。显示巴利原文
60.Bahuvacanavasenāti kurū nāma jānapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīvasena ‘‘kurū’’ti evaṃ bahuvacanavasena. Yattha bhagavato vasanokāsabhūto koci vihāro na hoti, tattha kevalaṃ gocaragāmakittanaṃ nidānakathāya pakati yathā ‘‘sakkesu viharati devadahaṃ nāma sakyānaṃ nigamo’’ti. ‘‘Āyasmā’’ti vā ‘‘devānaṃ piyo’’ti vā bhavanti vā piyasamudāhāro esoti āha ‘‘āyasmāti piyavacanameta’’nti. Tayidaṃ piyavacanaṃ gāravavasena vuccatīti āha ‘‘garuvacanameta’’nti. Atidūraṃ accāsannaṃ atisammukhā atipacchato uparivāto unnatappadesoti ime cha nisajjadosā. Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassaravasena chabbaṇṇānaṃ.
“为了摄受家族”:出于对家族的同情,为利益家族;如同放下一个价值千金的包裹,通过接受他们的乞食,并接受他们的礼敬等,令福德之流在他们心中生起。“再清扫”:对弟子们已清扫之处,由于行事恭敬,而再次清扫。“从两端开始向中间”:从开端开始,将受导入观察;再从老死开始,将受导入观察,然后进行遍察。“三次”:即按“从开端直至末端”等所说的四种方式,结合三个回合,故说为十二次遍察。因为我们的世尊是以甚深方式宣说的,其他佛陀也同样完全如此宣说,这是依于法的传承而言:“被一切佛陀……宣说”。显示巴利原文
Kulasaṅgahatthāyāti kulānuddayatāvasena kulānuggaṇhanatthāya. Sahassabhaṇḍikaṃ nikkhipanto viya bhikkhāpaṭiggaṇhanena tesaṃ abhivādanādisampaṭicchanena ca puññābhisandassa jananena. Paṭisammajjitvāti antevāsikehi sammaṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ sakkaccakāritāya puna sammajjitvā. Ubhayantato paṭṭhāya majjhanti ādito paṭṭhāya vedanaṃ, jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya ca vedanaṃ pāpetvā sammasanamāha. Tikkhattunti ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāya anta’’ntiādinā vuttacaturākārupasaṃhite tayo vāre. Tena dvādasakkhattuṃ sammasanamāha. Amhākaṃ bhagavatā gambhīrabhāveneva kathitattā sesabuddhehipi evameva kathitoti dhammanvaye ṭhatvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbabuddhehi…pe… kathito’’ti.
在“乃至世尊以此……”等经文中(参见《长部》1.3),yāva一词表示无量义,即超越限量。因为yāva这个词正是用来显示超胜、超越的状态,所以说“这是甚深之义”。“显现”:指呈现、显现,为智所知。正是为了表示这种呈现,才说“被看见”。难道这个缘起不是一向甚深的吗?为何还要说“甚深而显现”呢?诚然,它一向甚深。但说它“甚深显现”,只是为了彰显它一向甚深的特性。因此,为了指出在别处可能寻得的四种边见,而此处恰恰相反,要凸显它独一的一向甚深性,故宣说“一种……”等。“这不存在”:是说既没有“不深”,也没有“不深之显现”。由此表明,在所举的四种情形中,唯有最后一种成立。所以说:“这个……”。显示巴利原文
Pamāṇātikkameti aparimāṇatthe ‘‘yāvañcidaṃ tena bhagavatā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.3) viya. Atirekabhāvajotano hi yaṃ yāva-saddo. Tenāha ‘‘atigambhīroti attho’’ti. Avabhāsati khāyati upaṭṭhāti ñāṇassa. Tathā upaṭṭhānañhi sandhāya ‘‘dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu esa paṭiccasamuppādo ekantagambhīrova, atha kasmā gambhīrāvabhāsatā jotitāti? Saccametaṃ, ekantagambhīratādassanatthameva panassa gambhīrāvabhāsaggahaṇaṃ, tasmā aññattha labbhamānaṃ cātukoṭikaṃ byatirekamukhena nidassetvā tamevassa ekantagambhīrataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Etaṃ natthīti agambhīro agambhīrāvabhāso cāti etaṃ dvayaṃ natthi. Tena yathādassite cātukoṭike pacchimā ekakoṭi labbhatīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi.
缘起究竟在哪些甚深意义上被称为“甚深”呢?为以四种譬喻阐明这些甚深处,经中说道:“为了抓住有顶……”等。如同为了抓取有顶而伸出手,却因距离太远而无法抓取;同样,诸行等从无明等缘所生、所集起之义,以凡夫的自然智是无法抓取、了知的。如同一个普通人无法劈开须弥山,取出其中的精髓与山味;同样,对于缘起所含摄的诸法义理等,以自然智是无法劈开、析解而通达了知的。如同一个普通人无法仅凭双臂就横渡大洋抵达彼岸;同样,缘起的广大之义如同大海,以自然智是无法通过教说的途径去通晓、掌握的。如同一个普通人无法翻转大地取出地味;同样,“无明等是诸行的缘”——这样的缘起自性,以自然智是无法取出、掌握的。如此,应当以这四种甚深来配合这四种譬喻。此处的义理配合是依于“自然智”而说的,因为已见谛的圣者们对此是有所通达的。然而,即便如此,由于声闻与独觉佛对此仅具少分智,唯有诸佛的智慧圆满无余,所以才会说“这是属于佛陀境界的问题”。显示巴利原文
Yehi gambhīrabhāvehi paṭiccasamuppādo ‘‘gambhīro’’ti vuccati, te catūhi upamāhi ulliṅgento ‘‘bhavaggaggahaṇāyā’’tiādimāha. Yathā bhavaggaggahaṇatthaṃ hatthaṃ pasāretvā gahetuṃ na sakkā dūrabhāvato, evaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ avijjādipaccayasambhūtasamudāgatattho pakatiñāṇena gahetuṃ na sakkā. Yathā sineruṃ bhinditvā miñjaṃ pabbatarasaṃ pākatikapurisena nīharituṃ na sakkā, evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādagate dhammatthādike pakatiñāṇena bhinditvā vibhajja paṭivijjhanavasena jānituṃ na sakkā. Yathā mahāsamuddaṃ pakatipurisassa bāhudvayavasena pāraṃ tarituṃ na sakkā. Evaṃ vepullaṭṭhena mahāsamuddasadisaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ pakatiñāṇena desanāvasena pariharituṃ na sakkā. Yathā pathaviṃ parivattetvā pākatikapurisassa pathavojaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkā, evaṃ itthaṃ avijjādayo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayā hontīti tesaṃ paṭiccasamuppādasabhāvo pākatikañāṇena nīharitvā gahetuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ catubbidhagambhīratāvasena catasso upamā yojetabbā. Pākatikañāṇavasena cāyamatthayojanā katā diṭṭhasaccānaṃ tattha paṭivedhasabbhāvato, tathāpi yasmā sāvakānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca tattha sappadesameva ñāṇaṃ, buddhānaṃyeva nippadesaṃ. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhavisayaṃ pañha’’nti.
“莫”是表遮止的助词。它是针对“看起来似乎浅显”这句话而说的,故其义为“不要说”。“抬高”:即以智慧称赞之义。“贬低”:即呵斥、指责之义。“因此”:因为具有大智慧的状态。显示巴利原文
Māti paṭisedhe nipāto. Svāyaṃ ‘‘uttānakuttānako viya khāyatī’’ti vacanaṃ sandhāya vuttoti āha ‘‘mā bhaṇīti attho’’ti. Ussādentoti paññāvasena ukkaṃsantoti attho. Apasādentoti nibbhacchanto, niggaṇhantoti attho. Tenāti mahāpaññabhāvena.
“在那里”:对长老自身而言,缘起即便看似浅显,对其他人来说却是甚深的。“以珍馐美味滋养的”:指以美好饮食之味养育的人。“已加功用行的”:对于勤修止观、已熟习功行的人。“大力士的石块”:即如大力士、强壮之人所能掷出的石头。“此石的重处在哪里呢”:意指“这块石头较沉重的方位在哪一边?”——他这样发问,正是为了显示自己举起那石头轻而易举。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti therassa satipi uttānabhāve paṭiccasamuppādassa aññesaṃ gambhīrabhāve. Subhojanarasapuṭṭhassāti sundarena bhojanarasena positassa. Katayogassāti nibbuddhapayoge kataparicayassa. Mallapāsāṇanti mallehi mahābaleheva khipitabbapāsāṇaṃ. Kuhiṃ imassa bhāriyaṭṭhānanti kasmiṃ passe imassa pāsāṇassa garutarapadesoti tassa sallahukabhāvaṃ dīpento vadati.
以“吞舟大鱼”等来说明,是因为它的身躯极为庞大。因此说“据说他的……”等。“沸腾般地翻滚”:意指像沸腾一样地翻滚、旋转、回旋。这是一个表示特征的词。“背上的小骨片”:即背部的骨片,也就是背骨。“具身者”:指成就了巨大身体的,即大身的意思。“一堆羽毛”:指一团羽毛束。“金翅鸟之风”:指金翅鸟在捕捉龙等时,拍打翅膀所生起的大风。显示巴利原文
Timirapiṅgalenevadīpenti tassa mahāvipphārabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘tassa kirā’’tiādi. Pakkuthatīti pakkuthantaṃ viya parivattati parito vattati. Lakkhaṇavacanañhetaṃ. Piṭṭhiyaṃ sakalikaaṭṭhikā piṭṭhipattaṃ. Kāyūpapannassāti mahatā kāyena upetassa, mahākāyassāti attho. Piñcha vaṭṭīti piñcha kalāpo. Supaṇṇavātanti nāgaggahaṇādīsu pakkhapapphoṭanavasena uppajjanakavātaṃ.
为了详细解说“宿世依止的成就”等所列举的原因,便说“据说从此……”等。其中,“从此”是指从此贤劫开始。“十万”指十万大劫。“汉舍卫城”曾是他的出生之城。“外层叶片”:指外部的叶子,即那些又长又宽的叶片。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pubbūpanissayasampattiyā’’tiādinā uddiṭṭhakāraṇāni vitthārato vivarituṃ ‘‘ito kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha itoti ito bhaddakappato. Satasahassimeti satasahassame. Haṃsavatī nāma nagaraṃ ahosi jātanagaraṃ. Dhurapattānīti bāhirapattāni, yāni dīghatamāni.
“幼弟”:指异母所生、年龄最小的弟弟,就如我们世尊的难陀长老那样。因为诸佛并没有同父同母的亲兄弟。在那里,兄长尚且不会出生,年幼的弟弟就更不可能存在了。“财富”:指资产与财富。“已安宁”:指地方因盗贼引发的骚乱已经平息,而恢复安宁和平。显示巴利原文
Kaniṭṭhabhātāti vemātikabhātā kaniṭṭho yathā amhākaṃ bhagavato nandatthero. Buddhānañhi sahodarā bhātaro nāma na honti. Tattha jeṭṭhā tāva nuppajjanti, kaniṭṭhānaṃ pana asambhavo eva. Bhoganti vibhavaṃ. Upasantoti corajanitasaṅkhobhavūpasamena upasanto janapado.
“穿着两件衣”:即仅以两件衣作为自身的随身衣物,其余一切生活资具都任由自己放下、舍弃了。显示巴利原文
Dvesāṭake nivāsetvāti sāṭakadvayameva attano kāyaparihāriyaṃ katvā, itaraṃ sabbasambhāraṃ attanā mocetvā.
“为方便取钵”:因为钵中盛放了热食,当人将钵在左右手之间来回传递时,为方便舒适地拿住钵。“上衣”:指他自身披在上身的外衣。“这些乃是众所周知的事”:这些如前所说的内容,在世尊的教法中广为人知,是长老以佛与佛弟子为所缘所修积福德的处所;至于长老以独觉佛与菩萨为所缘所修积福德的处所,那还有很多很多。显示巴利原文
Pattaggahaṇatthanti antopakkhittauṇhabhojanattā pattassa aparāparaṃ hatthe parivattentassa sukhena pattaggahaṇatthaṃ. Uttarisāṭakanti attano uttariyaṃ sāṭakaṃ. Etāni pākaṭaṭṭhānānīti etāni yathāvuttāni bhagavato desanāya pākaṭāni buddhe buddhasāvake ca uddissa therassa puññakaraṇaṭṭhānāni, paccekabuddhaṃ pana bodhisattañca uddissa therassa puññakaraṇaṭṭhānāni bahūniyeva.
“取得了结生”:就在我们的菩萨入胎结生的那一天,他们也同样取得了结生。显示巴利原文
Paṭisandhiṃ gahetvāti amhākaṃ bodhisattassa paṭisandhiggahaṇadivaseyeva paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā.
“学习”:即学习圣典的文句;“听闻”:即听闻义理;“遍问”:即在疑难处遍问义理;“持守”:即将圣典的文句及其义理安住于心中。这一切,于此应依缘起来理解,亦可依一切佛语来理解。对入流者而言……的现前,是由于去除迷惑,以亲证的方式,使“凡集起之法,彼一切皆为灭尽之法”这句话在心中现前。“名色分别”:即连同缘一起,对名色的分别决定智。“以四种”:即用法甚深等四种甚深,总括了一切甚深。显示巴利原文
Uggahanaṃ pāḷiyā uggaṇhanaṃ, savanaṃ atthasavanaṃ, paripucchanaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānesu atthaparipucchanaṃ, dhāraṇaṃ pāḷiyā pāḷiatthassa ca citte ṭhapanaṃ. Sabbañcetaṃ idha paṭiccasamuppādavasena veditabbaṃ, sabbassapi buddhavacanassa vasenātipi vaṭṭati. Sotāpannānañca…pe… upaṭṭhāti tattha sammohavigamena ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti attapaccakkhavasena upaṭṭhānato . Nāmarūpaparicchedoti saha paccayena nāmarūpassa paricchijja avabodho. Catūhīti dhammagambhīrādīhi catūhi gambhīratāhi sabbāpi gambhīratā.
然而,即使是弟子们所宣说的教导,也仍是导师的教导,因此说“立于我所给出的理则之上”。所谓“有学圣者并未以一切行相彻底通达涅槃”,这并非是说已经清楚地见到了涅槃的甚深性,犹如清楚地见到甚深执取的甚深性那样。因此才说:“此涅槃本身甚深,而缘的理则却显得浅显了。”因为涅槃,一切无学圣者皆能彻底通达,因其无有部分;而缘的理则,唯有正自觉者能毫无遗漏地通达,他人则不能。所以,排斥长老的人便依缘的理则说“他于此有误”。正是为了阐明他那种不能无余通达的情况,才说了“那么,又为何……”等语。虽然在法性真实层面并无区分,但依结与随眠的意义,就其可被划分的特性而说“此四种烦恼”。因为它们起束缚作用的意义是一回事,它们强力现行的意义是另一回事。此理亦适用于其余诸法。如此,意为:由于这些烦恼未被断除,他未能成就那种依止,故绝不应说那无上的法是“浅显”的。四阿僧祇劫、八阿僧祇劫、十六阿僧祇劫或无数劫:此是显示诸大菩萨相续中,令菩提成熟的诸法,因利根、中根、钝根的差别而有所不同。显示巴利原文
Sāvakehi desitā desanāpi pana satthu eva desanāti āha ‘‘mayā dinnanaye ṭhatvā’’ti. ‘‘Sekkhena nāma nibbānaṃ sabbākārena paṭividdhaṃ na hotī’’ti na tassa gambhīratāti tassa gambhīrassa upādānassa gambhīratā viya suṭṭhu diṭṭhā nāma hoti. Tasmā āha ‘‘idaṃ nibbānameva gambhīraṃ, paccayākāro pana uttānako jāto’’ti. Nibbānañhi sabbepi asekkhā sabbaso paṭivijjhanti nippadesattā, paccayākāraṃ pana sammāsambuddhāyeva anavasesato paṭivijjhanti, na itare. Tasmā paccayavasena ‘‘idaṃ aparaddha’’nti vuttaṃ theraṃ apasādentena. Tameva hissa anavasesato paṭivedhābhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘atha kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asatipi dhammato bhede saṃyojanatthaanusayatthavasena pana tesaṃ labbhamānabhedaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ime cattāro kilese’’ti vuttaṃ. Añño hi tesaṃ bandhanattho, añño thāmagamanaṭṭhoti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Iti imesaṃ kilesānaṃ appahīnattā tathārūpaṃ upanissayasampadaṃ abhāvayatova anuttānameva dhammaṃ uttānanti na vattabbamevāti adhippāyo. Cattāri aṭṭha soḷasa vā asaṅkhyeyyānīti idaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ santāne bodhiparipācakadhammānaṃ tikkhamajjhimamudubhāvasiddhakālavisesadassanaṃ, tañca kho mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāyāti vadanti. Etehīti yathāvuttabuddhasāvakaaggasāvakapaccekabuddhasammāsambuddhānaṃ visesādhigamehi. Paccanīkanti paṭikkūlaṃ viruddhaṃ. Sabbathā paccayākārapaṭivedho nāma sammāsambodhiyādhigamo evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paccayākāraṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantassevā’’ti. Navahi ākārehīti uppādādīhi navahi paccayākārehi. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.45) –
“无明对于行,有作为生起而安住的状态、作为转起而安住的状态、作为相状而安住的状态、作为积聚而安住的状态、作为结合而安住的状态、作为障碍而安住的状态、作为集起而安住的状态、作为因而安住的状态、作为缘而安住的状态——以此九种行相,无明为缘,行为依缘而集起。”等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhiti ca pavattaṭṭhiti ca nimittaṭṭhiti ca āyūhanaṭṭhiti ca saṃyogaṭṭhiti ca palibodhaṭṭhiti ca samudayaṭṭhiti ca hetuṭṭhiti ca paccayaṭṭhiti ca, imehi navahākārehi avijjā paccayo, saṅkhārā paccayasamuppannā’’tiādi.
此处,“以九种行相”是指以九种成就缘相的行相。“生起”的意思是:果从此中生起,即果生起的因。因为有明,行便生起;无明时则不生,因此无明即是行的“生起”。同样地,有明时,行会转起,也会被取相。正如无明将它们投向有等诸处,无明便成为它们的缘;同样地,它们积聚、为果的生起而作用、与各自的果结合。在它们自己生起的那个相续中,它们系缚;在其他诸缘和合时,它们出现、生起。而无明也达至成为行之因的状态。依于无明,行便如此转起。应当这样去了解无明成为行之因的种种差别,即“生起”等。“为生起之状态”:“状态”的意思是“凭藉它而安立”,也就是原因。生起本身就是状态,所以称为“为生起之状态”。对其余的也是如此了知。而且,这种对缘的理则的照见,如同过去诸佛在菩提树下所运用的那样,我们的世尊也同样运用了。为了显示“才一见……”等,说明因被那惊人的震撼所击中,一万个世界都为之震动、大震动。显示巴利原文
Tattha navahākārehīti navahi paccayabhāvūpagamanehi ākārehi. Uppajjati etasmā phalanti uppādo, phaluppattiyā kāraṇabhāvo. Sati ca avijjāya saṅkhārā uppajjanti, nāsati, tasmā avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādo hoti. Tathā avijjāya sati saṅkhārā pavattanti ca nimiyanti ca. Yathā ca bhavādīsu khipanti, evaṃ tesaṃ avijjā paccayo hoti, tathā āyūhanti phaluppattiyā ghaṭenti saṃyujjanti attano phalena. Yasmiṃ santāne sayaṃ uppannā, taṃ palibundhanti paccayantarasamavāye udayanti uppajjanti, hinoti ca saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvaṃ upagacchati. Paṭicca avijjaṃ saṅkhārā ayanti pavattantīti evaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvūpagamanavisesā uppādādayo veditabbāti. Uppādaṭṭhitīti ca tiṭṭhati etenāti ṭhiti, kāraṇaṃ. Uppādo eva ṭhiti uppādaṭhiti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Idañca paccayākāradassanaṃ yathā purimehi mahābodhimūle pavattitaṃ, tathā amhākaṃ bhagavatāpi pavattitanti acchariyavegābhihatā dasasahassilokadhātu saṅkampi sampakampīti dassento ‘‘diṭṭhamatte’’tiādimāha.
「此法」:即这个名为缘起的法。不过,从义理上说,它就是那些因及由因所生之物的那个“因”。因此他说“这个缘法”,意思是生等乃是老死的缘。对名色的分别以及对它之缘的把握,并非仅凭最初的信解便能完成,而是需要在彼处反复随觉,也就是让智慧一再生起。为了显示那两者的状态,他说:“以知遍知的方式而不随觉”。以努力舍弃常想等方式而转起的观法,确实能通达,它由于镇伏了对立的法而变得锋利、明净;而作为其基础的审察遍知和圣道,因为是以遍知、断、现证的方式转起,所以被摄入审察遍知与断遍知之中。因此,为了显示缺少这两种通达,他说:“以审察遍知和断遍知的方式而不通达”。“经线”之所以被称为“织经”,是因为为了织布,把线拉紧绷直并缠绕起来;然而,因为经线可能变得杂乱,此处便取其杂乱作比喻,所以说“像经线一样变得杂乱”。为了详细说明这略说的意思,而说“正如”等等。「使其一致」:是指将前后对齐,让它变直,也就是让它不歪斜、保持笔直的意思。又或者说,那杂乱的经线就是“经乱”。显示巴利原文
Etassa dhammassāti etassa paṭiccasamuppādasaññitassa dhammassa. So pana yasmā atthato hetuppabhavānaṃ hetu. Tenāha ‘‘etassa paccayadhammassā’’ti . Jātiādīnaṃ jarāmaraṇapaccayatāyāti attho. Nāmarūpaparicchedo tassa ca paccayapariggaho na paṭhamābhinivesamattena hoti, atha kho tattha aparāparaṃ ñāṇuppattisaññitena anu anu bujjhanena. Tadubhayabhāvaṃ pana dassento ‘‘ñātapariññāvasena ananubujjhanā’’ti āha. Niccasaññādīnaṃ pajahanavasena pavattamānā vipassanādhamme paṭivijjhati eva nāma hoti paṭipakkhavikkhambhanena tikkhavisadabhāvāpattito, tadadhiṭṭhānabhūtā ca tīraṇapariññā ariyamaggo ca pariññāpahānābhisamayavasena pavattiyā tīraṇappahānapariññāsaṅgaho cāti tadubhayapaṭivedhābhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘tīraṇappahānapariññāvasena appaṭivijjhanā’’ti āha. Tantaṃ vuccati paṭavīnanatthaṃ tantavāyeti tantaṃ āvañchitvā pasāritasuttavaṭṭitaṃ nīyatīti katvā, taṃ pana tantākulatāya nidassanabhāvena ākulameva gahitanti āha ‘‘tantaṃ viya ākulajātā’’ti. Saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samānetunti pubbenāparaṃ samaṃ katvā ānetuṃ, avisamaṃ ujuṃ kātunti attho. Tantameva vā ākulaṃ tantākulaṃ, tantākulaṃ viya jātā bhūtā tantākulakajātā. Majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ anupagantvā antadvayapakkhandena paccayākāre khalitvā ākulabyākulā honti, teneva antadvayapakkhandena taṃtaṃdiṭṭhiggāhavasena paribbhamantā ujukaṃ dhammaṭṭhititantaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na jānanti. Tenāha ‘‘na sakkonti paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātu’’nti. Dve bodhisatteti paccekabodhisattamahābodhisatte. Attano dhammatāyāti attano sabhāvena, paropadesena vināti attho. Tattha tattha guḷakajātanti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne jātaguḷakaṃ piṇḍisuttaṃ. Tato eva gaṇṭhibaddhanti vuttaṃ. Paccayesu pakkhalitvāti aniccadukkhānattādisabhāvesu paccayadhammesu niccādibhāvavasena pakkhalitvā. Paccaye ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkontoti tasseva niccādigāhassa avissajjanato paccayadhammanimittaṃ attano dassanaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkonto idaṃsaccābhinivesakāyaganthavasena gaṇṭhikajātā hontīti āha ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhi…pe… gaṇṭhibaddhā’’ti.
凡是那些依止、执著于常见等见的沙门或婆罗门,“家”指纺织,即依阴性词而得名的织工所打的结,因此称为“家结节”。这是指那种由于杂乱,无论从顶端还是从根部都难以辨识其部分、出错绑缚的线。他说:“‘家结节’是指织工的碱性线。”“雌鸟”指的是鹌鹑。这种鸟在树枝上悬巢。它确实从各处衔来草等材料,如此编织鸟巢,正如那些织工的碱性线一样,无论从顶端找顶端,还是从根部找根部,都没办法对齐或分辨清楚。所以他说“正如”等。“这两者”是指称为家结节的碱性线和鸟巢。“依前说方式”是指如同前面所说“正如这些众生”等的方式。显示巴利原文
Ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sassatadiṭṭhiādi diṭṭhiyo nissitā allīnā, vinanato kulāti itthiliṅgavasena laddhanāmassa tantavāyassa gaṇṭhikaṃ nāma ākulabhāvena aggato vā mūlato vā duviññeyyāvayavaṃ khalitabandhasuttanti āha ‘‘kulāgaṇṭhikaṃ vuccati pesakārakañjiyasutta’’nti. Sakuṇikāti vaṭṭacāṭakasakuṇikā. Sā hi rukkhasākhāsu olambanakulāvakā hoti. Tañhi sā kulāvakaṃ tato tato tiṇahīrādike ānetvā tathā tathā vinandhati, yathā tesaṃ pesakārakañjiyasuttaṃ viya aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ vivecetuṃ vā na sakkā. Tenāha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Tadubhayampīti kulāgaṇṭhikanti vuttaṃ kañjiyasuttaṃ kulāvakañca. Purimanayenevāti ‘‘evameva sattā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayeneva.
文阇草和芦苇草即使本来就很长,倒伏在阿兰若处,相互缠绕,杂乱地存在着,然而为了显示它们如此极难解开,如同绳子一般,所以他说“正如”等。此处其余的含义,与前面所说的方法相同。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ muñjapabbajatiṇāni yathājātānipi dīghabhāvena patitvā araññaṭṭhāne aññamaññaṃ vinandhitvā ākulāni hutvā tiṭṭhanti, tāni pana tathā dubbiveciyāni yathā rajjubhūtānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
“恶道”是指没有快乐、没有乐因,即远离快乐的意思。因为它是苦的趣向状态,也就是恶道之苦的活动场所。“从福乐坠落”是指“从福祉中掉落”,即颠倒地掉落,以那样的有身而无法成为福乐的积聚,如此地掉落。“另一个”是指轮回——难道“恶道”等所说的不也是轮回吗?确实如此,然而为了显示地狱等处极其重大的苦,所以才举出恶道等说法。这个意义应当依“牛和公牛”的比喻来理解。“诸蕴的次第”是指五蕴以因果的方式一再地生起。“无间断地转起”是指没有中断地转起。显示巴利原文
Apāyoti ayena sukhena, sukhahetunā vā virahito. Dukkhassa gatibhāvatoti apāyikassa dukkhassa pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Sukhasamussayatoti ‘‘abbhudayato vinipatitattā’’ti virūpaṃ nipatitattā yathā tenattabhāvena sukhasamussayo na hoti, evaṃ nipatitattā. Itaroti saṃsāro nanu ‘‘apāya’’ntiādinā vuttopi saṃsāro evāti? Saccametaṃ, nirayādīnaṃ pana adhimattadukkhabhāvadassanatthaṃ apāyādiggahaṇaṃ gobalibaddañāyena ayamattho veditabbo. Khandhānañca paṭipāṭīti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ hetuphalabhāvena aparāparuppatti. Abbhocchinnaṃ vattamānāti avicchedena pavattamānā.
“这一切”即指“恶道”等所说的全部,也就是恶道之苦与轮回之苦。“如大海中被风吹动的船”这一譬喻,应知是为了显示轮回场所极为广大,以及显示轮回不会退转的特性。余下的与前面所说的方法相同。显示巴利原文
Taṃ sabbampīti taṃ ‘‘apāya’’ntiādinā vuttaṃ sabbaṃ apāyadukkhañceva vaṭṭadukkhañca. Mahāsamudde vātakkhittā nāvā viyāti idaṃ paribbhamanaṭṭhānassa mahantabhāvadassanatthañceva paribbhamanassa anavattitadassanatthañca veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
《无闻者经》注释。显示巴利原文
1. Assutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
61 「无闻者(assutavā)」:通过耳门而领受的,或者拥有这种领受,称为「有闻者(sutavā)」,否定它,即不是有闻者,故为无闻者。此处的“vā”字是表示赞叹,或表示殊胜,因此,若有人拥有值得赞叹的、或特别殊胜的闻,他能够摧毁杂染、熟习教法义理,并且通过「听闻了那法之后,为了达到如实的状态而修行,所以也叫有闻者」这句话而得到开显。或者,与应当听闻的法相应,听闻之后完成应作的成就,称为有闻者。否定它,即不是有闻者,故为无闻者。因此古人说:「因为没有教法通达和证得通达,应当知道他是无闻者。」同样也说:「他与蕴、界……乃至……抉择无关。」其中,令文句在心中生起是「领受(uggaha)」,对此反复遍问是「遍问(paripucchā)」,与善知识一起通过诘问与答辩而作出判断是「抉择(vinicchaya)」。「众多(puthūnaṃ)」:即很多。对于烦恼以及烦恼所造作的种种,应依照《无碍解道》中所说的方法详细阐述。由于提到「没有能力厌离」等,这里指的是凡夫(andhaputhujjana)。「此(idaṃ)」字有靠近、现前可见的意思,因此说:「『于此(imasmiṃ)』,是要指出当下现前、可见的身体。」与四大相关的,称为「由四大所成的(cātumahābhūtiko)」。不过,就像用泥做出来的东西称为「泥造品」一样,这个由四大所产生的身体,就叫做「四大所造(catumahābhūtamayo)」。「厌离(nibbindeyya)」:即达到厌离。所谓的厌离,是一种感到嫌弃、不喜爱的状态,因此说为「会感到嫌弃(ukkaṇṭheyyā)」。「离染(virajjeyyā)」:即成为离贪者。因此说「不会染着(na rajjeyyā)」。「解脱(vimucceyyā)」:但在这里,指的是彻底的、究竟的解脱,因此解释说「会想要解脱(muccitukāmo bhaveyyā)」。由四种能产生色的缘所累积而成,叫做「积集(ācaya)」,也就是增长。从积集的状态中离散,叫做「损减(apacaya)」,也就是衰退。「执取(ādāna)」:即抓取,指在结生时产生。「坏灭(bheda)」:即诸蕴的破散。据说,这就是把躯体丢弃,所以说:「『舍置(nikkhepana)』,就是坏灭。」显示巴利原文
61.‘‘Assutavā’’ti sotadvārānusārena upadhāritaṃ, upadhāraṇaṃ vā sutaṃ assa atthīti sutavā, tappaṭikkhepena na sutavāti assutavā. Vā-saddo cāyaṃ pasaṃsāyaṃ, atisayassa vā bodhanako, tasmā yassa pasaṃsitaṃ, atisayena vā sutaṃ atthi, so ‘‘sutavā’’ti saṃkilesaviddhaṃsanasamattho pariyattidhammaparicayo ‘‘taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipatti ca sutavā’’ti iminā padena pakāsito. Atha vā sotabbayuttaṃ sutvā kattabbanipphattiṃ suṇīti sutavā. Tappaṭikkhepena na sutavāti assutavā. Tenāhu porāṇā ‘‘āgamādhigamābhāvā, ñeyyo assutavā itī’’ti. Tathā cāha ‘‘khandhadhātu…pe… vinicchayarahito’’ti. Tattha vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho, tattha paripucchanaṃ paripucchā, kusalehi saha codanāpariharaṇavasena vinicchayassa kāraṇaṃ vinicchayo. Puthūnanti bahūnaṃ. Kilesādīnaṃ kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ paṭisambhidāmagganiddesesu (mahāni. 51, 94) āgatanayena. Andhaputhujjano gahito ‘‘nālaṃ nibbinditu’’ntiādivacanato. Āsannapaccakkhavācī idaṃ-saddoti āha ‘‘imasminti paccuppannapaccakkhakāyaṃ dassetī’’ti. Catūsu mahābhūtesu niyuttoti cātumahābhūtiko. Yathā pana mahāmattikāya nibbattaṃ mattikāmayaṃ, evamayaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehi nibbatto ‘‘catumahābhūtamayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Nibbindeyyāti nibbindanampi āpajjeyya. Nibbindanā nāma ukkaṇṭhanā anabhiratibhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ukkaṇṭheyyā’’ti. Virajjeyyāti vītarāgo bhaveyya. Tenāha ‘‘na rajjeyyā’’ti. Vimucceyyāti idha pana accantāya vimuccanaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘muccitukāmo bhaveyyā’’ti. Catūhi ca rūpajanakapaccayehi āgato cayoti, ācayo, vuddhi. Cayato apakkamoti apacayo, parihāni. Ādānanti gahaṇaṃ, paṭisandhiyā nibbatti. Bhedoti khandhānaṃ bhedo. So hi kaḷevarassa nikkhepoti vuttoti āha ‘‘nikkhepananti bhedo’’ti.
“得以了知(paññāyantī)”:即通过种种方式被认知。“遍取色(rūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ)”,就是为了遍取而执持色,将色作为所缘。他们以不适当的事物为对象后,又用渴爱等去执取无色,而这些比丘由于无色对他们相宜,便将无色变成了适合执取的对象。因此有“为什么”等提问。“正在拔出的人(nikkaḍḍhanto)”:即从那种执取中将心带离的人。显示巴利原文
Paññāyantīti pakārato ñāyanti. Rūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ pariggaṇhanavasenapi rūpaṃ ālambituṃ. Ayuttarūpaṃ katvā taṇhādīhi pariggahetuṃ arūpaṃ pariggaṇhituṃ yuttarūpaṃ karoti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sappāyabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Nikkaḍḍhantoti tato gāhato nīharanto.
这个“意处所(manāyatanassevanāma)”,并非像“定”、“慧”那种施设的名称,也不是如同“修习心与慧”(《相应部》1.23, 192;《无碍解道》22;《弥兰陀王问经》1.9.9)、“质多居士”等语境中的用法。应当被尊重、被用心对待的事物,就叫作“意所依处(cittavatthu)”;这种状态就是意所依处性,由此而称为心的状态。由于“心所行境的多样性(cittagocaratāya)”,也就是心会朝向种种或净妙或不净妙的对象。由于“相应法的心性(sampayuttadhammacittatāya)”,也就是与贪、信等相应法俱起的心之本性。因此,由这种心的本性,而说为“心所造(cittattaṃ)”。这是就“了别的意义(vijānanaṭṭhena)”,即认知的意义来说的。“被执著了(ajjhositanti)”:就是被已生起执著的渴爱抓住了。因此说“被渴爱”等。“以颠倒相触受之后(parāmasitvāti)”:就是超越了法的真实状态,例如无常等,而后以颠倒显示巴利原文
Manāyatanassevanāmaṃ, na samādhipaññattīnaṃ ‘‘cittaṃ paññañca bhāvayaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 1.9.9), citto gahapatī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 74) viya. Cittīkātabbabhūtaṃ vatthu etassāti cittavatthu, tassa bhāvo cittavatthutā, tena kāraṇena cittabhāvamāha. Cittagocaratāyāti cittavicittavisayatāya. Sampayuttadhammacittatāyāti rāgādisaddhādisampayuttadhammavasena cittasabhāvattā. Tena cittatāya cittattamāha. Vijānanaṭṭhenāti bujjhanaṭṭhena. Ajjhositanti ajjhosābhūtāya taṇhāya gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhāyā’’tiādi. Parāmasitvāti dhammasabhāvaṃ aniccatādiṃ atikkamitvā parato niccādito āmasitvā. Aṭṭhasatanti aṭṭhādhikaṃ sataṃ. Nava mānāti seyyassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā āgatā navavidhamānā. Brahmajāle āgatā sassatavādādayo dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo. Evanti vuttākārena. Yasmā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhavasena puthujjanena daḷhaggāhaṃ gahitaṃ, tasmā so tattha nibbindituṃ nibbidāñāṇaṃ uppādetuṃ na samattho.
“诸比丘(bhikkhave)”:此处 iti 字有“等”的意思,由此也包含了“善哉(varaṃ)”等词。这是衔接之语,为说明“为何这样说”而追问其理由。因此说“首先,确实”等。指的是被无闻凡夫(assutavatā puthujjanena)。“由此(tenāti)”:即由世尊。“作了不适当的事(ayuttarūpaṃ kataṃ)”:因为通过“应当厌离”等语句,其过患已被开显。然而对于无色,由于并未如此显示过患,所以说“适合去执取无色(arūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ yuttarūpa)”,意思是好像把它说成了适当的事一般。“执取(gāho)”:即渴爱、慢、见的执取。“从色中出离后,进入了无色(nikkhamitvā arūpaṃ gato)”:世尊在显示过患后,遮止了对色的执取,却未遮止对无色的执取,因此对于那些错误地认为“是否在那里也应那样做”的人而言,他就像从色中出离后进入了无色一样,故有此说。“正在安住(tiṭṭhamānaṃ)”:即正在安住。“如同陷入之后(ā显示巴利原文
Bhikkhaveti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, tena ‘‘vara’’nti evamādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Idaṃ anusandhivacanaṃ ‘‘kasmā āhā’’ti kathetukāmatāya kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Tenāha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ hī’’tiādi. Assutavatā puthujjanena. Tenāti bhagavatā. Ayuttarūpaṃ kataṃ ‘‘nibbindeyyā’’tiādinā ādīnavassa vibhāvitattā. Arūpe pana tathā ādīnavassa avibhāvitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘arūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ yuttarūpa’’nti, yuttarūpaṃ viya katanti adhippāyo. Gāhoti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāho. ‘‘Nikkhamitvā arūpaṃ gato’’ti idaṃ bhagavatā ādīnavaṃ dassetvā rūpe gāho paṭikkhitto, na arūpe, tasmā ‘‘kātabbo nu kho so tatthā’’ti micchāgaṇhantānaṃ so tato rūpato nikkhamitvā arūpaṃ gato viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tiṭṭhamānanti tiṭṭhantaṃ. ‘‘Āpajjitvā viya hotī’’ti sabhāvena pavattamānaṃ ‘‘paṭhamavaye’’tiādinā rūpassa bhedaṃ vayādīhi vibhajitvā dasseti.
“举足”:即抬起已放下的脚。“移前”:即将已抬起的脚移过原先站立之处。“过前”:即抬起的脚不碰触站立之脚,稍向外侧转后移动。“放下”:即如此越过另一脚后,为放于地面而准备下落。“齐置”:即准备下落之后,平稳地落于地面、安立。“止息”:即已放置之脚完全静止、压下。“即于彼处彼处”:即于每一阶段本身(如举足等阶段)。以此简别,表明它们并不转到其他阶段。“分节”:即状态;“节”:即关节。这里所说的第一阶段等,便是这些“分节”与“节”。“如发啪啪声响”:即如同发出“啪嗒啪嗒”声响,以此显示它们转起的刹那极为短暂。“此”:即这些色法如前所述,在每一阶段中即于彼处坏灭,正是如此所说的情形。显示巴利原文
Pādassa uddharaṇeti yathā ṭhapitassa pādassa ukkhipane. Atiharaṇanti yathāuddhataṃ yathāṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā haraṇaṃ. Vītiharaṇanti uddhato pādo yathāṭṭhitaṃ pādaṃ yathā na ghaṭṭeti, evaṃ thokaṃ passato pariṇāmetvā haraṇaṃ. Vossajjananti tathā parapādaṃ vītisāretvā bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipanatthaṃ avossajjanaṃ. Sannikkhepananti vossajjetvā bhūmiyaṃ samaṃ nikkhipanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ. Sannirujjhananti nikkhittassa sabbaso nirujjhanaṃ uppīḷanaṃ. Tattha tatthevāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ paṭhamavayādike eva. Avadhāraṇena tesaṃ koṭṭhāsantarasaṅkamanābhāvamāha. Odhīti bhāvo, pabbanti sandhi. Paṭhamavayādayo eva hettha odhi pabbanti ca adhippetā. Paṭapaṭāyantāti ‘‘paṭapaṭā’’iti karontā viya, tena nesaṃ pavattikkhaṇassa ittarataṃ dasseti. Etanti etaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ yathāvuttaṃ tattha tattheva bhijjanaṃ evaṃ vuttappakārameva. Vaṭṭippadesanti vaṭṭiyā pulakaṃ barahaṃ. Tañhi vaṭṭiyā pulakaṃ anatikkamitvāva sā dīpajālā bhijjati. Paveṇisambandhavasenāti santativasena.
“夜间”:即于夜间。这里以业格表达依格之意。但不可如此理解其义,因为未生起者并无灭。“从先前的相续”:即从在色法中已说过的相续。“生起无数百千亿心”:为以长老的主张阐明所说之义,而说“此也已被说”等。“半顶”:即略少于一半,从那半中增加,可理解为“车乘的百数”。有人说是“十四半”,另有人说是“第四半”。那些坚称“一又半百有余车乘”者,应当加以审察。“四升容量的容器”。因大森林的特性而增长的树林称为大林,所以说“大林”即在大森林中。“那”:即最初抓住的树枝。“此义”:即这不落地面而抓住仍站立的树枝,名为抓取之义。正是为了此义,世尊虽已说过“在阿兰若中”,仍再说“在大林中”。显示巴利原文
Rattinti rattiyaṃ. Bhummatthe hetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Evaṃ pana attho na gahetabbo anuppannassa nirodhābhāvato. Purimapaveṇitoti rūpe vuttapaveṇito. Anekāni cittakoṭisatasahassāni uppajjantīti vuttamatthaṃ theravādena dīpetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Aḍḍhacūḷanti thokena ūnaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ, tassa pana upaḍḍhaṃ adhikārato vāhasatassāti viññāyati. ‘‘Aḍḍhacuddasa’’nti keci, ‘‘aḍḍhacatuttha’’nti apare. ‘‘Sādhikaṃ diyaḍḍhasataṃ vāhā’’ti daḷhaṃ katvā vadantīti vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Catunāḷiko tumbo. Mahāraññatāya pavaddhaṃ vanaṃ pavananti āha ‘‘pavaneti mahāvane’’ti. Tanti paṭhamaṃ gahitasākhaṃ. Ayamatthoti ayaṃ bhūmiṃ anotaritvā ṭhitasākhāya eva gahaṇasaṅkhāto attho. Etadatthameva hi bhagavā ‘‘araññe’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘pavane’’ti āha.
“如同阿兰若中的大树林”:即如于阿兰若处的大森林中。“所缘的执持”:即对所缘的执持。不应说没有所缘缘也能生起,因为缺少所缘缘即不生起。“属于同一类”:即色等、青等具有相同的自性。当说“诸比丘,可见此四大所造之身有积聚亦有减损”时,便是将执取从色法中引出而安立在无色上;当说“诸比丘,无闻凡夫更善”等时,便是将执取从无色中引出而安立在色上。显示巴利原文
Araññamahāvanaṃ viyāti araññaṭṭhāne brahāraññe viya. Ārammaṇolambananti ārammaṇassa avalambanaṃ. Na vattabbaṃ ārammaṇapaccayena vinā anuppajjanato. Ekajātiyanti rūpādinīlādiekasabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Dissati, bhikkhave, imassa cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa ācayopi apacayopī’’ti vadantena rūpato nīharitvā arūpe gāho patiṭṭhāpito nāma, ‘‘varaṃ, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano’’tiādiṃ vadantena arūpato nīharitvā rūpe gāho patiṭṭhāpito nāma.
“那个”(nanti):指执取。“从两方面”(ubhayato):指从色与无色两方面。“我将引出”(harissāmīti):即我将引出。“念诵咒语后”(parivattetvāti):指念诵咒语后。“向耳朵吹气后”(kaṇṇe dhumetvāti):指向耳朵吹气后。“它的”(assāti):指毒的。“彻底揉搓后”(nimmathetvāti):指彻底揉搓后,意为引出。显示巴利原文
Nanti gāhaṃ. Ubhayatoti rūpato ca arūpato ca. Harissāmīti nīharissāmi. Parivattetvāti mantaṃ jappitvā. Kaṇṇe dhumetvāti kaṇṇe dhametvā. Assāti visassa. Nimmathetvāti nimmadditvā, nīharitvāti adhippāyo.
“道”(maggoti)指出世间道。“厌离”(nibbindaṃ)一词,指的是强有力的观(balavavipassanā)。显示巴利原文
Maggoti lokuttaramaggo. ‘‘Nibbinda’’nti iminā balavavipassanā kathitā.
第二《无闻者经》的注释显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyaassutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
62 62. 以缘的方式利乐受,故名“乐受的缘”(sukhavedaniyaṃ)。因此他说“乐受的缘”。此处的缘属亲依止缘类,而非俱生缘类。因此他说“难道不是……吗?”等。“速行受”指与速行心俱生的受。“关于那个”是指考虑到亲依止缘的状态。“此”指所说的这句话——“乐受的缘”。“同样的道理”指以此方式,类推至“难道耳触不是乐受的缘吗?”等说法。“同类生”指以彼触为生、为生起、为住处,此即是受。由于该受确实适合彼触,故“随顺彼”的意思被解释为“适合彼触、随顺彼触”。“按照前述的方法”即按照“乐受的缘”等所说的方法。“合会”犹如以上下钻木相摩而生起敲击,由触而生起和合执取,由于此敲击持续生起而紧密结合的状态,这里称为合会;并非指某两个或三个事物同处一处,故说“以敲击与紧密结合”,意思即是合会。“火屑”指火花。“处”指眼等处,由境的合会敲击而来。能得的法如同被合会般执取,故说“如同合会的触”。暖界如同感受,因为显示巴利原文
62. Paccayabhāvena sukhavedanāya hitanti sukhavedaniyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sukhavedanāya paccaya’’nti. Paccayabhāvo ca upanissayakoṭiyā, na sahajātakoṭiyā. Tenāha ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādi. Javanavedanāyāti javanacittasahagatāya vedanāya. Taṃ sandhāyāti taṃ upanissayapaccayataṃ sandhāya. Etanti etaṃ ‘‘sukhavedanāya paccaya’’nti vacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Eseva nayoti iminā ‘‘nanu ca sotasamphasso sukhavedanāya paccayo na hotī’’ti evamādiṃ atidisati. So samphasso jāti uppattiṭṭhānaṃ etassāti tajjātikaṃ, vedayitaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā tassa phassassa anucchavikameva hoti, tasmā tassāruppaṃ tassa phassassa anurūpanti ca attho vutto. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘sukhavedanāya paccayo’’tiādinā vuttavidhianusārena. Adharāraṇiyaṃ uttarāraṇiyā mantanavasena ghaṭṭanaṃ iva saṅghaṭṭanaṃ phassena yugaggāho, tassa pana ghaṭṭanassa nirantarappavattiyā piṇḍitabhāvo idha samodhānaṃ, na kesañci dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā sahāvaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanasampiṇḍanenāti attho’’ti. Aggicuṇṇoti vipphuliṅgaṃ. Vatthūti cakkhādivatthu visayasaṅghaṭṭanato. Labbhamānova dhammo saṅghaṭṭanaṃ viya gayhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaṃ viya phasso’’ti. Usmādhātu viya vedanā dukkhasabhāvattā.
3. 《子肉喻经》的注释显示巴利原文
3. Puttamaṃsūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
63 “所说的方法”即指此前在《食相应》第一经中已阐明的方法。有说:“以利养恭敬”,是以名为“利养恭敬”之事为缘;另有说:即于利养恭敬中之事缘。的确,有些比丘为利养恭敬的因,于资具上生起贪著,未加省察便受用,世尊便以此事为缘,开示了此教法。“双重大云”:下层下垂、上层上涌,成对而起的百层、千层巨大云聚。显示巴利原文
63.Vuttanayamevāti heṭṭhā āhāravaggassa paṭhamasutte vuttanayameva. Lābhasakkārenāti lābhasakkārasaṅkhātāya aṭṭhuppattiyāti keci. Lābhasakkāre vā aṭṭhuppattiyāti apare. Yo hi lābhasakkāranimittaṃ paccayesu gedhena bhikkhūnaṃ apaccavekkhitaparibhogo jāto, taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā bhagavā imaṃ desanaṃ nikkhipi. Yamakamahāmeghoti heṭṭhā olambanaupariuggamanavasena satapaṭalasahassapaṭalo yugaḷamahāmegho.
世尊定居某处时,他们便住下;世尊游行时,他们亦随行。由于比丘们大多已在百千劫乃至更久远的时间里,圆满积聚了布施巴拉密的资粮,故于此世,比丘僧团也生起了极大的利养恭敬,因此说“比丘僧团也是如此”。“受到恭敬”指获得了恭敬对待。“受到尊重”指获得了尊重对待。“受到敬重”指为众人心所喜爱、看重。“受到供养”指以花鬘等供养及四资具的殊胜供养而被奉养。“受到礼敬”指获得了礼敬。更细致的区分是:若他人恭敬地备办精美殊胜的四资具奉上,他便“受到恭敬”;若他人因生起尊重心而布施,他便“受到尊重”;若被他人内心喜爱、多方看重,他便“受到敬重”;若以一切供养的方式而行,他便“受到供养”;若以问讯、起迎、合掌等至高的顺从举动表达敬意,他便“受到礼敬”。在世尊与比丘僧团上,世间人正是以此方式行动的。故而说“那时……资具”(《优陀那》14;《相应部》2.70)。“达到利养和名声的最上、顶峰”意即达到了利养和名声的最高处、最胜处。显示巴利原文
Tiṭṭhanti ceva bhagavati katthaci nibaddhavāsaṃ vasante, cārikampi gacchante anubandhanti ca. Bhikkhūnampi yebhuyyena kappasatasahassaṃ tato bhiyyopi pūritadānapāramisañcayattā tadā mahālābhasakkāro uppajjatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassapī’’ti. Sakkatoti sakkārappatto. Garukatoti garukārappatto. Mānitoti bahumato manasā piyāyito ca. Pūjitoti mālādipūjāya ceva catupaccayābhipūjāya ca pūjito. Apacitoti apacāyanappatto. Yassa hi cattāro paccaye sakkatvā suabhisaṅkhate paṇītapaṇīte upanenti, so sakkato. Yasmiṃ garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā denti, so garukato. Yaṃ manasā piyāyanti bahumaññanti, so bahumato. Yassa sabbametaṃ pūjāvasena karonti, so pūjito. Yassa abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānañjalikammādivasena paramanipaccakāraṃ karonti, so apacito. Bhagavati bhikkhusaṅghe ca loko evaṃ paṭipanno. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayena…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti (udā. 14; saṃ. ni. 2.70). Lābhaggayasaggappattanti lābhassa ca yasassa ca aggaṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pattaṃ.
「第一食的注释」显示巴利原文
Paṭhamāhāravaṇṇanā
“他的”:指世尊的。“法悚惧”:由法自性的思惟所引生、与惭愧俱行的智慧。对于有情来说,受用食物是恒常的耽著之处,因此世尊的意趣是:不能仅仅因为不省察,就制定波罗夷。所谓“食”:是参照先前于“食”相关处所说的“缘”等内容而说。至此,当知应作释的义理,即如前已解释的义理。显示巴利原文
Assāti bhagavato. Dhammasabhāvacintāvasena pavattaṃ sahottappañāṇaṃ dhammasaṃvego. Dhuvapaṭisevanaṭṭhānañhetaṃ sattānaṃ, yadidaṃ āhāraparibhogo, tasmā na tattha apaccavekkhaṇamattena pārājikaṃ paññapetuṃ sakkāti adhippāyo. Āhārāti ‘‘paccayā’’tiādinā pubbe āhāresu vuttavidhiṃ sandhāya āha ‘‘āhārā’’tiādi. Idāni tattha kattabbaṃ atthavaṇṇanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘heṭṭhā vuttatthamevā’’ti vuttaṃ.
「过患」指过失。「妻子」指妻。「夫」指丈夫。“夫妻”一词如同“父子”等词,但在巴利语中,将“ā”音缩短并加入随鼻音,故说为“夫妻”。“资粮”意为正确承载果实,即带来安乐。因此,它被称为“道路上的利益”,也就是「旅费」。道路属于荒野,故说“成为荒野的道路”。那里难以得水,却能渡越行人,故称「荒野」,即无水的广阔森林。依通俗用法,其他广阔森林也如此称说,如“贼难荒野”等。此外,因敌国国王、仇敌等而危险的森林也包含其中,故说有五种危险。显示巴利原文
Ādīnavanti dosaṃ. Jāyāti bhariyā. Patīti bhattā. Apekkhāsaddā cete pitāputtasaddā viya, pāḷiyaṃ pana ā-kārassa rassattaṃ sānunāsikañca katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘jāyampatikā’’ti. Sammā phalaṃ vahatīti sambalaṃ, sukhāvahanti attho. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘pathe hitanti pātheyya’’nti vuccati. Maggassa kantārapariyāpannattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kantārabhūtaṃ magga’’nti. Dullabhatāya taṃ udakaṃ tattha tāretīti kantāraṃ, nirudakaṃ mahāvanaṃ. Ruḷhīvasena itarampi mahāvanaṃ tathā vuccatīti āha ‘‘corakantāra’’ntiādi. Pararājūnaṃ veriādīnañca vasena sappaṭibhayampi araññaṃ ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcavidha’’nti.
「厚实处」指肉堆积厚实之处,即肉成块成团、粗大厚实之处。「肉干」是指那样的肉取来晒干而成。「串肉」是串在签上烤的肉。「坐在稀疏树荫下」是说因无力行走,坐在稀疏树荫下。「以牛行者、狗行者、天神祈愿等方式」即通过修习牛行、狗行等戒行以及祈愿天神等誓愿业行,领受巨大之苦。显示巴利原文
Ghanaghanaṭṭhānatoti maṃsassa bahalabahalaṃ thūlathūlaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato. ‘‘Tādisañhi maṃsaṃ gahetvā sukkhāpitaṃ vallūraṃ. Sūle āvunitvā pakkamaṃsaṃ sūlamaṃsaṃ. Viraḷacchāyāyaṃ nisīdiṃsu gantuṃ asamattho hutvā. Govatakukkuravatadevatāyācanādīhīti govatakukkuravatādivatacaraṇehi ceva devatāyācanādīhi paṇidhikammehi ca mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhūtaṃ.
然而,世尊在此将教法中如法修行的比丘受用食物作比喻,借那对夫妇受用子肉的事例引入,为从种种角度阐明其比喻义,故开始宣说“他们以那儿子肉为食”等文。其中,「因为是同种之肉」:指同一种类的肉,即人肉。良家出身者因人肉不习惯且可鄙而厌恶,故接着说“乃至是亲属等肉”。而「因为是幼嫩之肉」等,则是就其自性及未加调味令人厌恶而说。「因为未经熏制」:即未熏制的状态。他们唯安住于中舍状态。正因如此,才说他们「安住于无欲贪的受用」,这是因为有走出旷野的深切愿求。再说,那些在比喻中可得的种种差别相——食物未被丢弃、非足量受用、已离悭吝垢染、无有痴迷、于未来无希求、不蓄藏、不炫耀施物而起慢、不轻贱、无诤论受用等——将它们提取出来,配合所喻加以说明,故说「不是依附于骨、筋、皮之处」等文。「那个原因」:指那对夫妇纯粹为走出旷野而受用子肉的原因。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana sāsane sammāpaṭipajjantassa bhikkhuno āhāraparibhogassa opammabhāvena tesaṃ jāyampatikānaṃ puttamaṃsaparibhogo idha bhagavatā ānīto, tasmāssa nānākārehi opammattaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tesaṃ so puttamaṃsāhāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha sajātimaṃsatāyāti samānajātikamaṃsabhāvena, manussamaṃsabhāvenāti attho. Masussamaṃsañhi kulappasutamanussānaṃ amanuññaṃ hoti aparicitabhāvato gārayhabhāvato ca, tato eva ñātiādimaṃsatāyātiādi vuttaṃ. Taruṇamaṃsatāyātiādi pana sabhāvato anabhisaṅkhārato ca amanuññāti katvā vuttaṃ. Adhūpitatāyāti adhūpitabhāvato. Majjhattabhāveyeva ṭhitā. Tato eva nicchandarāgaparibhoge ṭhitāti vuttaṃ kantārato nittharaṇajjhāsayatāya. Idāni ye ca te anapanītāhāro, na yāvadatthaparibhogo vigatamaccheramalatā sammohābhāvo āyatiṃ tattha patthanābhāvo sannidhikārābhāvo apariccajanamadatthābhāvo ahīḷanā avivādaparibhogo cāti upamāyaṃ labbhamānā pakāravisesā, te tathā nīharitvā upameyye yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘naaṭṭhinhārucammanissitaṭṭhānānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ kāraṇanti taṃ tesaṃ jāyampatīnaṃ yāvadeva kantāranittharaṇatthāya puttamaṃsaparibhogasaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇaṃ.
即使是以观察排泄物的厌逆性而省察,他也是在思择抟食。如“正如那对夫妇”等,便是将比喻配合起来。应引入“应受用食”一句来连接;此后诸句的道理也是如此。“没有丢弃”,即没有除去。“就像鹌鹑与鸡的例子”,这是不相似的比喻。“不设定限量”,即不采取多取的方式来设定限量。“像狮子的例子”,这是相似的比喻。据说,狮子是依次逐一取食的。显示巴利原文
Nissandapāṭikulyataṃ paccavekkhantopi kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ parivīmaṃsati. Yathā te jāyampatikātiādipi opammasaṃsandanaṃ. ‘‘Paribhuñjitabbo āhāro’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Apaṭikkhipitvāti anapanetvā. Vaṭṭakena viya kukkuṭena viya cāti visadisūdāharaṇaṃ. Odhiṃ adassetvāti mahantaggahaṇavasena odhiṃ akatvā. Sīhena viyāti sadisūdāharaṇaṃ. So kira sapadānameva khādati.
说“不悭吝”等,是因为应当以不贪着、不迷恋等方式受用。“我执”,即认为内在有“我”存在的邪见。与之相应的痴迷,便计度“我在受用食”。这也包括依于正念与正知,即如“在吃、喝、咀嚼、品尝时,为具正知者”一句中所说的念与正知而受用。显示巴利原文
Agadhitaamucchitādibhāvena paribhuñjitabbato ‘‘amaccharāyitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Abbhantare attā nāma atthīti diṭṭhi attūpaladdhi, taṃsahagatena sammohena attā āhāraṃ paribhuñjatīti. Satisampajaññavasenapīti ‘‘asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hotī’’ti ettha vuttasatisampajaññavasenapi.
应如此连接:既不作“啊,但愿我们……得……”的希求,也不作“如同昨日……未能得到”的懊悔。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aho vata mayaṃ…pe… labheyya’’nti patthanaṃ vā, ‘‘hiyyo viya…pe… na laddha’’nti anusocanaṃ vā akatvāti yojanā.
应引入否定词「不」,连接理解为「不蓄藏、不埋于地、不以火烧」。一切处皆依此例。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sannidhiṃ na akaṃsu, bhūmiyaṃ vā nikhaṇiṃsu, agginā vā jhāpayiṃsū’’ti na-kāraṃ ānetvā yojanā. Evaṃ sabbattha.
应如此连接理解:受用时,既不轻贱团食,亦不轻贱施主。「他持钵者」,即指他手持钵盂。「不应轻贱」,指不应蔑视。「他轻视」,是指超越实际去想,意思即是蔑视。显示巴利原文
Piṇḍapātaṃ vā ahīḷentena dāyakaṃ vā ahīḷentena paribhuñjitabboti yojanā. Sa pattapāṇīti so pattahattho. Nāvajāniyāti na avajāniyā. Atimaññatīti atikkamitvā maññati, avajānātīti attho.
在说了「由三种遍知而遍知」之后,为说明抟食的遍知方式,即开示「如何」等句。其中,「依有依处的方面」,即是依持有组合物的方面;然就自性而言,色食其实仅为食素。这即是抟食的相。虽然味所缘撞击于舌净色上,然二者不相离,且舌净色是依达到所涉境的方式而取境的,因此才问:「以食素为第八法的色法,撞击于何处?」「它」,指舌净色。「这些法」,指如前述的诸所造色及大种色。「他把握那个色蕴」:对于那个色蕴,生起了触等第五法的诸法,也就是所有依此确定的、以及与它们同时生起的这一切法。「通过自相和味相」:指从它们各自的作用和相状方面。「对于这些已依名色确立的五蕴,缘即是识」,如此向上攀缘而观:「那些行,以无明为其缘」。向下时,则探寻六处等,观察顺逆的缘起。因六处等亦应视情况确立为色与非色诸法的缘。「由如实见到」:指如此如实地见到:「这是色,这是如此数量的色,不会更多;这是名,这是如此数量的名,不会更多。」通过无常随观、苦随观、无我随观、厌离随观、离欲随观、灭随观、弃舍随观这七种随观。它显示巴利原文
‘‘Tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte’’ti vatvā tāhi kabaḷīkārāhārassa parijānanavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘katha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha savatthukavasenāti sasambhāravasena, sabhāvato pana rūpāharaṇaṃ ojamattaṃ hoti. Idañhi kabaḷīkārāhārassa lakkhaṇaṃ. Kāmaṃ rasārammaṇaṃ jivhāpasāde paṭihaññati, tena pana avinābhāvato sampattavisayagāhitāya ca jivhāpasādassa ‘‘ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ kattha paṭihaññatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassāti jivhāpasādassa . Ime dhammāti ime yathāvuttabhūtupādāyadhammā. Tanti rūpakhandhaṃ. Pariggaṇhatoti pariggaṇhantassa. Uppannā phassapañcamakā dhammāti sabbepi ye yathāniddhāritā, tehi sahappavattāva sabbepi ime. Sarasalakkhaṇatoti attano kiccato lakkhaṇato ca. Tesaṃ nāmarūpabhāvena vavatthapitānaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ paccayo viññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Tassa saṅkhārā tesaṃ avijjā’’ti evaṃ uddhaṃ ārohanavasena paccayaṃ. Adhoorohanavasena pana saḷāyatanādike pariyesanto anulomapaṭilomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ passati. Saḷāyatanādayopi hi rūpārūpadhammānaṃ yathārahaṃ paccayabhāvena vavatthapetabbāti. Yāthāvato diṭṭhattāti ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito bhiyyo, idaṃ nāmaṃ, ettakaṃ nāmaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti ca yathābhūtaṃ diṭṭhattā. Aniccānupassanā, dukkhānupassanā, anattānupassanā, nibbidānupassanā, virāgānupassanā, nirodhānupassanā, paṭinissaggānupassanāti imāsaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena. Soti kabaḷīkārāhāro. Tilakkhaṇa…pe… saṅkhātāyāti aniccatādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ paṭivijjhanavasena lakkhaṇavantasammasanavasena ca pavattañāṇasaṅkhātāya. Pariññāto hoti anavasesato nāmarūpassa ñātattā tappariyāpannattā ca āhārassa. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiṃ yevā’’tiādi. Chandarāgāvakaḍḍhanenāti chandarāgassa pajahanena.
具有以五种欲为因的贪,称为「五欲贪者」。因此说「五欲贪所生」。对一种爱的遍知,是「单一遍知」。对一切五欲贪的遍知,是「一切遍知」。对这二者的根本——食的遍知,是「根本遍知」。现在为了分别说明这三遍知,而展开了“那位比丘”等文句。「于舌门遍知一味爱」:指在舌尝味之后,应作如是观察:“凡此处的味,就欲境而言,是以食素为第八法的色法,亦即舌处净色。它依止于何者?依止于四大种。与之俱生的色、香、味、食素、命根,这些法名为色蕴。对于那味生起的味着,即是味爱。与它一起生起的触等诸法,则是四个非色蕴。”如这些等,一切应依注释书所说的方法来了知。因此说:「由此,五欲贪也就被遍知了」。此处的「由此」,是指那位在舌门遍知味爱的比丘,即由彼而遍知。为何在遍知一门中的爱时,五门中的贪即被遍知了呢?于是说出了“为何”等文句。「正是对它」是指对爱本身,以同一性之理说,由于爱性相同。「在那里」指在五门中。「由于生起」:指由于以色贪等形式而生起。因为贪爱具有爱著之义,故称为「爱」;具有染著之义显示巴利原文
Pañca kāmaguṇā kāraṇabhūtā etassa atthīti pañcakāmaguṇiko. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇasambhavo’’ti. Ekissā taṇhāya pariññā ekapariññā. Sabbassa pañcakāmaguṇikassa rāgassa pariññā, sabbapariññā. Tadubhayassapi mūlabhūtassa āhārassa pariññā mūlapariññā. Idāni imā tissopi pariññāyo vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘yo bhikkhū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Jivhādvāre ekarasataṇhaṃ parijānātīti jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘yo yamettha raso, so vatthukāmavasena ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ hoti jivhāyatanaṃ pasādo. So kiṃ nissito? Catumahābhūtanissito. Taṃsahajāto vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā jīvitindriyanti ime dhammā rūpakkhandho nāma. Yo tasmiṃ rase assādo, ayaṃ rasataṇhā. Taṃsahagatā phassādayo dhammā cattāro arūpakkhandhā’’tiādivasena. Sabbaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatavasena veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tena pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññātova hotī’’ti. Tattha tenāti yo bhikkhu jivhādvāre rasataṇhaṃ parijānāti, tena. Kathaṃ pana ekasmiṃ dvāre taṇhaṃ parijānato pañcasu dvāresu rāgo pariññāto hotīti āha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Tassāyevāti taṇhāya eva taṇhāsāmaññato ekattanayavasena vuttaṃ. Tatthāti pañcasu dvāresu. Uppajjanatoti rūparāgādibhāvena uppajjanato. Lobho eva hi taṇhāyanaṭṭhena ‘‘taṇhā’’tipi, rajjanaṭṭhena ‘‘rāgo’’tipi vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘sāyeva hī’’tiādi. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādinā upamāya sampiṇḍeti. Pañcamagge hanatoti pañcasu maggesu sañcarittaṃ karontena maggagāmino hananto ‘‘magge hanato’’ti vutto.
为显示在称为「团食」的食物聚集之中,于可意的色处可得色、声等,故有五欲贪的生起,而说了“如何”等文句。「以正念正知摄持」:指以能守护一切分业处的正念正知而摄持。「以无欲贪的受用而受用」:指由证得圣道所成就的无欲贪之受用来受用时。此处的「它」是指五欲贪。显示巴利原文
Sabyañjane piṇḍapātasaññite bhattasamūhe manuññe rūpe rūpasaddādayo labbhanti, tattha pañcakāmaguṇarāgassa sambhavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Satisampajaññena pariggahetvāti sabbabhāgiyena kammaṭṭhānaparipālakena pariggahetvā. Nicchandarāgaparibhogenāti maggādhigamasiddhena nicchandarāgaparibhogena paribhutte. Soti kāmaguṇiko rāgo.
「当抟食存在时」:即当抟食存在的时候。「对它」:指对五欲贪。「由于生起的缘故」:指由于它会生起的缘故。因为得不到食物时,被饥渴与虚弱所折磨的人,不可能生起受用欲乐的欲求。「沉浸对视的心」:指由于贪欲而相互对视的心。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ satīti kabaḷīkārāhāre sati. Tassāti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa. Uppattitoti uppajjanato. Na hi āhārālābhena jighacchādubbalyaparetassa kāmaparibhogicchā sambhavati. Upanijjhānacittanti rāgavasena aññamaññaṃ olokanacittaṃ.
“没有那个结”这一句,是就五种上分结而说的。因此说:“以那个贪……没有”。这里的“那个”指欲贪。“依此所说”:即依据如上所说的开示。“可以讲述”:即由讲说这第一食论的法师来宣说。显示巴利原文
Natthi taṃ saṃyojananti pañcavidhampi uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tena rāgena…pe… natthī’’ti. Tenāti kāmarāgena. Ettakenāti yathāvuttāya desanāya. Kathetuṃ vaṭṭatīti imaṃ paṭhamāhārakathaṃ kathentena dhammakathikena.
第二食的解释显示巴利原文
Dutiyāhāravaṇṇanā
“第二”:指第二个食。“被撕裂的皮”:即被剥掉的皮,意思是皮已完全去除。“不能”:是由于太虚弱,正如女子被称为“无力者”。“石臼等”:以“等”字包含了砖臼、泥臼等。“蜘蛛”:即蜘蛛。“壁虎”:即壁虎。所谓“高举生殖器的生物”:指多毛的生物。“依止虚空”:即活动于空中。“拔除后”:即拔出之后。显示巴利原文
Dutiyeti dutiye āhāre. Uddālitacammāti uppāṭitacammā, sabbaso apanītacammāti attho. Na sakkoti dubbalabhāvato, tathā hi itthī ‘‘abalā’’ti vuccati. Silākuṭṭādīnanti ādi-saddena iṭṭhakakuṭṭamattikākuṭṭādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Uṇṇanābhīti makkaṭakaṃ. Sarabūti gharagoḷikā . Uccāliṅgapāṇakā nāma lomasā pāṇakā. Ākāsanissitāti ākāsacārino. Luñcitvāti uppāṭetvā.
“三种遍知”:即前面所说的知遍知等三遍知。“以此为根”:即以触为根本。此开示一直讲到阿拉汉果,因为当遍知一切受时,连丝毫烦恼也不可能存在。显示巴利原文
Tisso pariññāti heṭṭhā vuttā ñātapariññādayo tisso pariññā. Tammūlakattāti phassamūlakattā. Desanā yāva arahattā kathitā sabbaso vedanāsu pariññātāsu kilesānaṃ lesassapi abhāvato.
第三食的解释显示巴利原文
Tatiyāhāravaṇṇanā
「炭坑」即炽燃的炭堆。「扬散」意为自行将炭火扬撒于自身之上。故说「男子们号泣,肢体遍受烧灼」。此处的「男子」意指男士,并非泛指一切人。而「我感到恐惧」这句的意思是,当他因恐惧而造作时,即是承受恐惧本身。「急切地」即极为匆忙、疾速而行。「人量」指常人之身高尺度,故「超过人量」即超出此标准身高。因此解释为「高度为五肘尺」。「那个坑的」即指那个炭坑。「当它们不存在时」,即当火焰与浓烟皆已消散、止息之时。「远离它就确实」,意为确实遥遥地离开了它。显示巴利原文
Aṅgārakāsunti aṅgārarāsiṃ. Phuṇantīti attano upari sayameva ākirantīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘narā rudantā paridaḍḍhagattā’’ti. Narāti purisāti attho, na manussā. Bhayañhi maṃ vindatīti bhayassa vasena karonto bhayaṃ labhati nāma. Santaramānovāti suṭṭhu taramāno eva hutvā. Porisaṃ vuccati purisappamāṇaṃ, tasmā atirekaporisā purisappamāṇato adhikā. Tenāha ‘‘pañcaratanappamāṇā’’ti. Assāti kāsuyā. Tadabhāveti tesaṃ jālādhūmānaṃ abhāve. Ārakāvassāti ārakā eva assa.
如同炭坑一般,三界轮回因具十一种火,故为大热恼之处。凡夫即应被那些火所烧灼。两种力量……即使是对不希求造业之人,亦将其推入轮回之苦中。造作与牵引的时间差别无需考量,因其必然引生相应的果报,故论中说「业确实……」等等。显示巴利原文
Aṅgārakāsu viya tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ ekādasannaṃ aggīnaṃ vasena mahāpariḷāhato. Jivi…pe… puthujjano tehi aggīhi dahitabbato. Dve bala…pe… kammaṃ anicchantasseva tassa vaṭṭadukkhe pātanato. Āyūhanūpakaḍḍhanānaṃ kālabhedo na cintetabbo ekantabhāvino phalassa nipphāditattāti āha ‘‘kammaṃ hī’’tiādi.
如于「触」中所说的方式,在那里说「触是行蕴」,而在这里则应说「意思是行蕴」。其余部分即如前所说。由于「以渴爱为缘而有取,以取为缘而有有」的经句,故知渴爱是意思的根本原因,因此说「因为意思是渴爱之根」。由此而说「确实不……」等。然而有些人认为,因为依于作为意思之果的受,渴爱才生起,故而才有此说。显示巴利原文
Phasse vuttanayenevāti tattha ‘‘phasso saṅkhārakkhandho’’ti vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘manosañcetanā saṅkhārakkhandho’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. ‘‘Taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṃ, upādānapaccayā bhavo’’ti vacanato manosañcetanāya taṇhā mūlakāraṇanti āha ‘‘taṇhāmūlakattā manosañcetanāyā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Keci pana yasmā manosañcetanāya phalabhūtaṃ vedanaṃ paṭicca taṇhā uppajjati, tasmā evaṃ vuttanti vadanti.
第四食的注释。显示巴利原文
Catutthāhāravaṇṇanā
“āgu(恶)”:因此恶会带来不可意的果报,降临于具足此恶之人,故称为恶。“āgucārī(恶行者)”:他以身语意行此恶,故称为恶行者。因此经中说“pāpacārī(恶行者)”。显示巴利原文
Aniṭṭhapāpanavasena taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ āgacchatīti āgu, pāpaṃ, taṃ carati sīlenāti āgucārī. Tenāha ‘‘pāpacāri’’nti.
业如国王,因为它具有最高的主宰力。恶行者犹如罪犯……凡夫,则是苦的依处。凡夫的结生识,犹如被刺入的三百支矛,是其极度病痛、大苦的立足之处。因此经中说“矛……苦”。显示巴利原文
Rājā viya kammaṃ paramissarabhāvato. Āgucārī puriso viya…pe… puthujjano dukkhavatthubhāvato. Ādinnappahāravaṇāni tīṇi sattisatāni viya puthujjanassa āturamānamahādukkhapatiṭṭhaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tenāha satti…pe… dukkhanti.
“以彼为根”:指此后生起的名色,以结生识为其根本。显示巴利原文
Tammūlakattāti paṭisandhiviññāṇamūlakattā ito paraṃ pavattanāmarūpassa.
4. 有贪着经的注释。显示巴利原文
4. Atthirāgasuttavaṇṇanā
64 在第四经中,“流”是指贪。“以染著的方式”:如同染料一般,以令彼心随之而染著的方式。“以欢喜的方式”:因具足喜,而以随喜所缘的方式。“以渴爱的方式”:以对境生起欲求的方式。其实只是同一个贪,依其转起时的行相而如此说。“已立足”指已获得自性。“在其中”指在轮回中。“食”,有些人解释为行作识。“增长”指由果的出生而达到增长。因此说:“令业加速后……”等等。其中,“令加速后”指令果被执取后。因为行作识对于与自己俱生的诸法,以俱生等缘及食缘为缘,并凭借能令自身生果的能力而达到增长。所以说:“对于相续,业获得了存在且达到了增长。”这属于轮回之说,因此说:“‘其中’是指三地轮回中的。”所谓“一切处”,意为在一切处。前面出现的位格词,也就是“在其中、在那里”所表达的位格,是作用于前前的所缘境。因为正是针对那个,才说了“在其中、在那里”的位格。在此异熟轮回中,指现在的异熟轮回。针对作为未来轮回之因的诸行,说:“那里有未来再生有的转起”等语。所谓“再生有的转起”即指结生,因此说:“那里有未来再生有的转起。显示巴利原文
64. Catutthe soti lobho. Rañjanavasenāti raṅgajātaṃ viya tassa cittassa anurañjanavasena. Nandanavasenāti sappītikatāya ārammaṇassa abhinandanavasena. Taṇhāyanavasenāti visayakattukāmatāya vasena. Eko eva hi lobho pavattiākāravasena tathā vutto. Patiṭṭhitanti laddhasabhāvaṃ. Tatthāti vaṭṭe. Āhāreti keci. Viññāṇanti abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ. Viruḷhanti phalanibbattiyā viruḷhippattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṃ javāpetvā’’tiādi. Tattha javāpetvāti phalaṃ gāhāpetvā. Abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇañhi attanā sahajātānaṃ sahajātādipaccayehi ceva āhārapaccayena ca paccayo hutvā tassa attano phaluppādane sāmatthiyattā viruḷhippattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṃ santāne laddhabhāvaṃ viruḷhippattañcassa hotī’’ti. Vaṭṭakathā esāti katvā ‘‘yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe bhumma’’nti vuttaṃ. Sabbatthāti sabbesu. Purimapade etaṃ bhummanti ‘‘yattha tatthā’’ti āgataṃ etaṃ bhummavacanaṃ purimasmiṃ purimasmiṃ pade visayabhūte. Tañhi ārabbha etaṃ ‘‘yattha tatthā’’ti bhummavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ vipākavaṭṭeti paccuppanne vipākavaṭṭe. Āyatiṃ vaṭṭahetuke saṅkhāre sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattī’’ti vacanato . Punabbhavābhinibbattīti ca paṭisandhi adhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti, atthi tattha āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇa’’nti. Jātīti cettha mātukucchito nikkhamanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Yasmiṃ ṭhāneti yasmiṃ kāraṇe sati.
在这里,应知因就是指诸行。因为它们正是未来再生有转起的因,也就是渴爱、无明,以及时间、趣向等令业圆满的资粮。然而有些人,以烦恼轮回、业、趣向、时间为意趣,说:“时间、趣向等是令业圆满的资粮。”依于对种种有的希求,而如是如是前往的三有,即是三地轮回。故说:“‘其中’是指三地轮回。”因此又说:“连同资粮的业,在诸有中使色生起。”这里的“色”,即是有身。显示巴利原文
Kāraṇañcettha saṅkhārā veditabbā. Te hi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyā hetū, taṇhāavijjāyo, kālagatiādayo ca kammassa sambhārā. Keci pana kilesavaṭṭakammagatikālā cāti adhippāyena ‘‘kālagatiādayo ca kammassa sambhārā’’ti vadanti. Taṃtaṃbhavapatthanāya tathā tathā gato tividho bhavova tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe’’ti. Tathā cāha ‘‘sasambhārakakammaṃ bhavesu rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Rūpanti attabhāvaṃ.
“简略地”:即不分为三种,而以识作一总括,这便是其义。“一个连接”,即一个因果连接。“异熟过程”,指从六处开始,至受为止的异熟过程。连接“与名色一起”一语来建立关联。或者,“以名色”是表示伴随义的具格。在这里,一个连接即是一个因果连接。“未来有”,指未来的再生有。因此,这里的这一个连接,应理解为因果连接。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhipitvāti tīsu akatvā viññāṇena ekasaṅkhepaṃ katvāti attho. Eko sandhīti eko hetuphalasandhi. Vipākavidhinti saḷāyatanādikaṃ vedanāvasānaṃ vipākavidhiṃ. ‘‘Nāmarūpena saddhi’’nti padaṃ ānetvā sambandho. Nāmarūpenāti vā sahayoge karaṇavacanaṃ. Idha eko sandhīti eko hetuphalasandhi. Āyatibhavassāti āyatiṃ upapattibhavassa. Tena cettha eko sandhi hetuphalasandhi veditabbo.
对于漏尽者,由于证得最上道,由道而生起的转起业已无同伴,故业不存在。“似太阳光线”:即由此,依前述方法,说为如同无有立足处的太阳光线。其中,“它”指光线。“身等”指身门等。“已作业”:是依藉由诸缘所造作的状态而说,并非依业相而言。因此说“善与不善的名称不存在”。“唯作”:因无有异熟法性,仅是身等的运作。它们无有异熟,因为是无异熟法性。显示巴利原文
Khīṇāsavassa aggamaggādhigamanatova pavattakammassa maggena sahāyavekallassa katattā avijjamānaṃ. Sūriyarasmisamanti tato eva vuttanayeneva appatiṭṭhitasūriyarasmisamaṃ. Sāti rasmi. Kāyādayoti kāyadvārādayo. Katakammanti paccayehi katabhāvaṃ upādāya vuttaṃ, na kammalakkhaṇapattato. Tenāha ‘‘kusalākusalaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti. Kiriyamatteti avipākadhammattā kāyikādipayogamatte ṭhatvā. Avipākaṃ hoti tesaṃ avipākadhammattā.
第五 《城经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Nagarasuttavaṇṇanā
65 第五经中,“比丘们,在我未成正觉之前”等句,前文已作解释。为注释尚未说明的部分,于是开始解释“名色存在时”等文。于此,在这部经的十二支缘起中,有两支未被选取,为询问其未被选取的理由并给予解答,先说明它们应当被选取的理由,故说“在此”等。先取现见的现在有作为第一,次取未来有作为第二,过去有便成为第三,因此说“无明与行是第三有”。然而此处难道不是不可能取未来有吗?因为依于现在有而作的执取已很明显?确实如此,但当因被取时,果也已被取,应如此理解此说的用意。而且在此,未来时于意义上已被包含,因为“以名色为缘而有六处”等教导是包含了未来时的;而在以四蕴有说“识缘名”时,则有差别。因此说“以五蕴有而说”。以它们——即作为所缘的无明与行。这是观:依现在时分,观见生灭而转起的观。“不成立”意为不成功。大……执著:他说了不成立的理由,因为先前已取,故不再一一别观,这是其意旨。显示巴利原文
65. Pañcamasutte ‘‘pubbeva me, bhikkhave, sambodhā’’tiādi heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitamevāti avuttameva saṃvaṇṇetuṃ ‘‘nāmarūpe kho satī’’ti āraddho . Tattha dvādasapadike paṭiccasamuppāde imasmiṃ sutte yāni dve padāni aggahitāni, nesaṃ aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ pucchitvā vissajjetukāmo tesaṃ gahetabbakāraṇaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘etthā’’tiādimāha. Paccakkhabhūtaṃ paccuppannaṃ bhavaṃ paṭhamaṃ gahetvā tadanantaraṃ anāgatassa ‘‘dutiya’’nti gahaṇe atīto tatiyo hotīti āha ‘‘avijjāsaṅkhārā hi tatiyo bhavo’’ti. Nanu cettha anāgatassa bhavassa gahaṇaṃ na sambhavati paccuppannabhavavasena abhinivesassa jotitattāti? Saccametaṃ, kāraṇe pana gahite phalaṃ gahitameva hotīti tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Apicettha anāgato addhā atthato saṅgahito eva yato ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādinā anāgataddhasaṃgāhitā desanā pavattā, catuvokāravasena viññāṇapaccayā nāmanti viseso atthi. Tasmā ‘‘pañcavokāravasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tehīti avijjāsaṅkhārehi ārammaṇabhūtehi. Ayaṃ vipassanāti addhāpaccuppannavasena udayabbayaṃ passantassa pavattavipassanā. Na ghaṭīyatīti na samijjhati. Mahā…pe… abhiniviṭṭhoti na ghaṭane kāraṇamāha, heṭṭhā gahitattā pāṭiyekkaṃ sammasanīyaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo.
“未见的”,指未觉悟的。由于不能通过对四谛的觉悟而成佛,故说“不能成为佛陀”。“以此”,指以此大士。“那些”,指无明与行。依有、取、爱的方式,即以观察有、取、爱的角度。那些(爱等)已经见到,因为与它们俱行的,只是同等程度的瑜伽堪忍。不会挖到另外的部分,因为自己所想要的已被取,而另外的部分中并不存在。因此说“对于任何都不存在”。“回转”,即收回。为显示回转的理由,而说“那个此”等。“未破之处”,指未破损之处。显示巴利原文
Adiṭṭhesūti anavabuddhesu. Catusaccassa anubodhena na bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘na sakkā buddhena bhavitu’’nti. Imināti mahāsattena. Teti avijjāsaṅkhārā. Bhavaupādānataṇhāvasenāti bhavaupādānataṇhādassanavasena. Diṭṭhāva ‘‘taṃsahagatā’’ti samānayogakkhamattā. Na parabhāgaṃ khaneyya attanā icchitassa gahitattā parabhāge aññassa abhāvato ca. Tenāha ‘‘kassaci natthitāyā’’ti. Paṭinivattesīti paṭisaṃhari. Paṭinivattane pana kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Abhinnaṭṭhānanti akhaṇitaṭṭhānaṃ.
“缘”即从因而言,“行”是其义。当以“有……则有老死”等通过因的相续来揭示果的相续时,以及探究“有……则有识”时,在“行有故识有”中,行被特取为识的因,因此识唯从行转起,而非从一切缘转起。故说“名色有故识有”。此中,何为所执之缘?唯依俱生等缘为缘,非依业依止缘,因为依现前执受已得显了。“从所缘”:即从无明与行所成的所缘,从过去有所成的所缘。因无明与行属过去时。当识从此转起时,过去有亦得称为转起。“二者亦”:指结生识与观识。“不超离名色”:即不超离作为缘与作为所缘的名色,因若无此即无转起。故说“不超离名色而行”。“识成为名色的缘”:即结生识成为名色的缘。“名色成为识的缘”:即名色成为结生识的缘。应依四蕴有与五蕴有而如理配合理解。而“当二者互为缘时”则依五蕴有而说。“唯此际”:即识与名色如此相互扶持而转起。“或生、或有”:所谓“有情生、有”的施设,正是在识与名色之外,作为“有情”显示巴利原文
Paccayatoti hetuto, saṅkhāratoti attho. ‘‘Kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hotī’’tiādinā hetuparamparavasena phalaparamparāya kittamānāya, kimhi nu kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotīti ca vicāraṇāya saṅkhāre kho sati viññāṇassa visesato kāraṇabhūto saṅkhāro aggahito, tato viññāṇaṃ paṭinivattati nāma, na sabbapaccayato. Tenevāha ‘‘nāmarūpe kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti. Kiṃ nāma hettha sahajātādivaseneva paccayabhūtaṃ adhippetaṃ, na kammūpanissayavasena paccuppannavasena abhinivesassa jotitattā. Ārammaṇatoti avijjāsaṅkhārasaṅkhātaārammaṇato, atītabhavasaṅkhātaārammaṇato. Atītaddhapariyāpannā hi avijjāsaṅkhārā. Tato paṭinivattamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ atītabhavopi paṭinivattati nāma. Ubhayampīti paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ vipassanāviññāṇampi. Nāmarūpaṃ na atikkamatīti paccayabhūtaṃ ārammaṇabhūtañca nāmarūpaṃ na atikkamati tena vinā avattanato. Tenāha ‘‘nāmarūpato paraṃ na gacchatī’’ti. Viññāṇe nāmarūpassa paccaye honteti paṭisandhiviññāṇe nāmarūpassa paccaye honte. Nāmarūpe viññāṇassa paccaye honteti nāmarūpe paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccaye honte. Catuvokārapañcavokārabhavavasena yathārahaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Dvīsupi aññamaññaṃ paccayesu hontesūti pana pañcavokārabhavavasena. Ettakenāti evaṃ viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ aññamaññaṃ upatthambhavasena pavattiyā. Jāyetha vā upapajjetha vāti ‘‘satto jāyati upapajjatī’’ti samaññā hoti viññāṇanāmarūpavinimuttassa sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtassa dhammassa abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘ito hī’’tiādi. Etadevāti ‘‘viññāṇaṃ nāmarūpa’’nti etaṃ dvayameva.
“以相续的死与结生”:即指以显示相续死与结生的“死、结生”二词。五词:指“或生”等五词。难道那里第一、第三与第四、第五在意义上不是无差别吗?确实如此,然而是为了显示识与名色一期又一期地转生,才如此说。因此他说“以相续的死与结生”。“至此”:即上述之义。将“至此”一词之前所说的义理,通过“此即是”等方式引出,再作说明。“以顺缘起之理”:即通过先见缘法,后见缘生法之理。缘法对其缘生法的缘性,即此缘性,也就是缘起之理;而于“无明缘行”等中所说,因是随顺行等的生起而阐明,故为顺缘起之理,依此而说。显示巴利原文
Aparāparacutipaṭisandhīhīti aparāparacutipaṭisandhidīpakehi ‘‘cavati, upapajjatī’’ti dvīhi padehi. Pañca padānīti ‘‘jāyetha vā’’tiādīni pañca padāni. Nanu tattha paṭhamatatiyehi catutthapañcamāni atthato abhinnānīti? Saccaṃ, viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ aparāparuppattidassanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aparāparacutipaṭisandhīhī’’ti. Ettāvatāti vuttamevatthanti yo ‘‘ettāvatā’’ti padena pubbe vutto, tameva yathāvuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yadida’’ntiādinā niyyātento puna vatvā. Anulomapaccayākāravasenāti paccayadhammadassanapubbakapaccayuppannadhammadassanavasena. Paccayadhammānañhi attano paccayuppannassa paccayabhāvo idappaccayatā paccayākāro, so ca ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā vutto saṅkhāruppattiyā anulomanato anulomapaccayākāro, tassa vasena.
“水至”指从护城河流来的水。由于城门完备,居于其中之人出入便易,受用资具圆满,身心安乐,故说此城可意,因此说“四周……可爱”。往昔空旷无人,犹如山林,后经建造人众居处,城方具足城相,故说“彼于后时,成为繁荣、富足”。显示巴利原文
Āpatoti parikhāgataudakato. Dvārasampattiyā tattha vasantānaṃ pavesananiggamanaphāsutāya upabhogaparibhogavatthusampattiyā sarīracittasukhatāya nagarassa manuññatāti vuttaṃ ‘‘samantā …pe… ramaṇīya’’nti. Pubbe suññabhāvena araññasadisaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ janavāsaṃ karonte nagarassa lakkhaṇappattaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ aparena samayena iddhañceva assa phītañcā’’ti.
“此前他的身业、语业与活命已极为清净”——由此语可知,连同三种离,前分道亦可获得八支道的名称,故说“对于八支的观道”。
“于观中已行践”:因观已串习,故于各处依此观而被审察、被寻求。
“见到出世间道”:指以类比等方式见到出世间道。同样,这也应理解为见到涅槃城。
“见时”:指通过证得而见之时。由道与果所生的五十余种无过失法,省察智则确定这些法。
“令度过”:即令其持续运转。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pubbeva kho panassa kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ ājīvo ca suparisuddho’’ti vacanato tīhi viratīhi saddhiṃ pubbabhāgamaggopi aṭṭhaṅgikavohāraṃ laddhuṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgikassa vipassanāmaggassā’’ti. Vipassanāya ciṇṇanteti vipassanāya sañcaritatāya tattha tattha tāya vipassanāya tīrite pariyesite. Lokuttaramaggadassananti anumānādivasena lokuttaramaggassa dassanaṃ. Tathā hi nibbānanagarassa dassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Diṭṭhakāloti adhigamavasena diṭṭhakālo. Maggaphalavasena uppannā paropaṇṇāsa anavajjadhammā, paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ pana tesaṃ vavatthāpakaṃ. Yāpetvāti carāpetvā.
“名为‘不转起之义’”:在无佛出世的世间,于任何众生相续中皆不曾转起,故不是以生起等方式正在转起。正因如此,世尊被赞颂为“使未生之道生起者,使未成之道成就者”等。
往昔诸大仙所遵行的圣道,其间曾为某些人所遮蔽,故说“以遮蔽之义,称为古道”。
“依于禅那之乐”:即依于禅定之乐与禅定之喜。“丰饶”,因殊胜法如甘露,能予满足。“繁花盛开”,即庄严美妙。
说“乃至一万轮围世界”,即指“一个世界界”,因佛土有其限定。由于有此限定,故有范围。“于此间隔内”:即在此空间范围之中。显示巴利原文
Avattamānakaṭṭhenāti buddhasuññe loke kassaci santāne appavattanatova uppādādivasena vattamānavasena. Tathā hi bhagavā ‘‘anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa sañjanetā’’tiādikehi thomito. Pubbakehi mahesīhi paṭipanno hi ariyamaggo itarehi antarā kehici avaḷañjitoti vuttaṃ ‘‘avaḷañjanaṭṭhena purāṇamaggo’’ti. Jhānassādenāti jhānasukhena jhānapītiyā. Subhikkhaṃ paṇītadhammāmatatāya tittiāvahaṃ. Pupphitaṃ upasobhitaṃ. Yāva dasasahassacakkavāḷeti vuttaṃ ‘‘ekissā lokadhātuyā’’ti paricchinnabuddhakhettattā. Tassa atthitāya hi paricchedo atthi. Etasmiṃ antareti etasmiṃ okāse.
6. 《正思惟经》注疏显示巴利原文
6. Sammasasuttavaṇṇanā
66 第六[经]中,“于世尊”:指世尊。
“微细”:因开示微细之法,故为微细。
“被三相所标注”:因被三种相所标记,意指宣说无常等相。
“有因”:因是证得圣法的近依止因,故为有因。
为显示那些具足三因结生慧与教诫神变慧的智者,不仅成就内在的支分,亦成就外在的支分,故说“柔软”等。
“内在”:即于自身之中。
“遍察缘”:即观察缘与缘生法。显示巴利原文
66. Chaṭṭhe assāti bhagavato. Saṇhasukhumadhammaparidīpanato sukhumā. Tīhi lakkhaṇehi aṅkiyattā tilakkhaṇāhatā, aniccādilakkhaṇaparidīpinīti attho. Ariyadhammādhigamassa upanissayabhūtena hetunā sahetukā. Tihetukapaṭisandhipaññāya pāṭihāriyapaññāya ca atthitāya paññavanto na kevalaṃ ajjhattikaaṅgasampattiyeva, bāhiraṅgasampattipi nesamatthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘siniddhānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Abbhantaranti ajjhattaṃ. Paccayasammasananti paccayuppannānaṃ paccayavīmaṃsaṃ.
「随顺起始的连结」指与起始相应的连结。「未到达」即未具足、未获得。「词句未混淆」即不相混杂的词句,意指这种语句在他处未曾出现。因此说:「他处确实无如此说法。」「如此」是指将「那么,阿难陀啊」这样的单数称呼,与「听啊,作意啊」这样的复数称呼合在一起说,此种说法其实并不存在。然而有些人也将此处的「那么,阿难陀啊」读作复数形式,如同「善哉,阿那律啊」等处一样。「依止」指所执取的对象,苦即依止于此。「生起」即获得生起的刹那,也就是显现、住立、得到自体、生起。「安住」即获得住所、空间。仅生起一次的法,由于微弱,并没有如在处所中那样的安立;只有当它在所缘上一再转起时,才可说已安住、已确立。因此说:「安住」即通过一再转起而确立。显示巴利原文
Ārambhānurūpā anusandhi yathānusandhi. Na gatāti na sampattā. Asambhinnapadanti avomissakapadaṃ, aññattha evaṃ anāgataṃ vākyanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘aññattha hi evaṃ vuttaṃ nāma natthī’’ti. Evanti ‘‘tenahānandā’’ti ekavacanaṃ, ‘‘suṇātha manasi karothā’’ti bahuvacanaṃ katvā vuttaṃ nāma natthīti attho. Keci pana ‘‘tenahānandā’’ti idhāpi bahuvacanameva katvā paṭhanti ‘‘sādhu anuruddhā’’tiādīsu viya. Upadhīti adhippetaṃ upadhīyati ettha dukkhanti. Uppajjati uppādakkhaṇaṃ udayaṃ paṭilabhati ‘‘pākaṭabhāvo ṭhitiko, attalābho udayo’’ti. Nivisati nivesaṃ okāsaṃ paṭilabhati. Ekavārameva hi uppannamattassa dhammassa dubbalattena okāse viya patiṭṭhahanaṃ natthi, punappunaṃ ārammaṇe pavattamānaṃ niviṭṭhaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘nivisatīti punappunaṃ pavattivasena patiṭṭhahatī’’ti.
「可爱之自性」:具有应被喜爱的性质。「甘甜之自性」:具有可意的性质。「深著」:被渴爱的执著所浸染。「于成就中」:于有的成就中。「依于取相之随行」:随着执取影像而生起。犹如插入耳孔的银管,又如系在耳上的腰带绳。「高耸」:指高长的鼻子,称为高鼻。如此得名的自己的鼻。或可读作「得名者」,若如此,则那些因鼻子高耸而得名的众生,与自己的鼻相关联。其颜色形状如同红色的毛毯片;触感柔软细滑;作用上具有细滑甘甜的味道。「娑罗树干」:即娑罗树的树干。显示巴利原文
Piyasabhāvanti piyāyitabbajātikaṃ. Madhurasabhāvanti iṭṭhajātikaṃ. Abhiniviṭṭhāti taṇhābhinivesena otiṇṇā. Sampattiyanti bhavasampattiyaṃ. Nimittaggahaṇānusārenāti paṭibimbaggahaṇānusārena. Kaṇṇassa chiddapadesaṃ rajatanāḷikaṃ viya, kaṇṇabaddhaṃ pana pāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya. Tuṅgā uccā dīghā nāsikā tuṅganāsā. Evaṃ laddhavohāraṃ attano ghānaṃ. ‘‘Laddhavohārā’’ti vā pāṭho. Tasmiṃ sati tuṅgā nāsā yesaṃ te tuṅganāsā. Evaṃ laddhavohārā sattā attano ghānanti yojanā vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato rattakambalapaṭalaṃ viya. Samphassato mudusiniddhaṃ kiccato siniddhamadhurarasadaṃ. Sālalaṭṭhinti sālakkhandhaṃ.
「他们看见了」:他们见到了。「如此所说」:依于「杯中」这一安立称呼而说。显示巴利原文
Addasaṃsūti passiṃsu. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘kaṃse’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ adhiṭṭhānavohārena.
「成就」指色泽等方面的功德。「过患」指以死亡为终极的过患。显示巴利原文
Sampattinti vaṇṇādiguṇaṃ. Ādīnavanti maraṇaggatato.
「以敌军投入之水」指将敌人投入后搅动的水。正如四种饮料,四道也能止息渴爱的焦渴。显示巴利原文
Sattupānīyenāti sattuṃ pakkhipitvā ālolitapānīyena. Cattāri pānāni viya cattāro maggā taṇhāpipāsāvūpasamanato.
7. 《芦束经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Naḷakalāpīsuttavaṇṇanā
67 67. 在第七经中,“为何问?”是指:摩诃俱絺罗长老自己对此并无疑惑,为什么还要问?这是他的用意。“为了了知意向”:如果用这位大弟子的他心通了知,这并不算奇特,因此他不满足于此,进而说了“而且……”等。其中,“二上首弟子”是指依戒等功德而成为最上弟子;因为摩诃俱絺罗长老并未达到上首弟子的相,而是达到了大弟子的相。“刚才我们……”等语,是为了显示下面的开示既不搅乱因缘所生法,也不以互为缘的方式进行。但在这里,大长老以某种意图作搅乱与转折而说,摩诃俱絺罗长老正是要通过这一意图来阐明,故他说“刚才我们……”等。因此说“这位长老……”等。显示巴利原文
67. Sattame kasmā pucchatīti mahākoṭṭhikatthero sayaṃ tattha nikkaṅkho samāno kasmā pucchatīti adhippāyo. Ajjhāsayajānanatthanti idampi tassa mahāsāvakassa paracittajānanena appāṭihīraṃ siyā, tena taṃ aparitussanto ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha dve aggasāvakāti sīlādiguṇehi uttamasāvakāti attho, na hi mahākoṭṭhikatthero aggasāvakalakkhaṇappatto, atha kho mahāsāvakalakkhaṇappatto. Idāneva kho mayantiādi heṭṭhā paccayuppannaṃ anāloḷentena dassetvā desanā āhaṭā, na aññamaññapaccayatāvasena, idha pana yenādhippāyena taṃ āloḷetvā nivattetvā kathitaṃ mahātherena, tamevassa adhippāyaṃ teneva pakāsetukāmo mahākoṭṭhikatthero āha ‘‘idāneva kho maya’’ntiādi. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ thero’’tiādi.
「在此范围内」:从最初的开始,即“朋友,究竟如何……”等起,直至“(识)灭没”这一句为止,即在此范围之内。由于说法时并未直接取无明与行,而是依“名色缘识”的方式来阐述,因此说“这是依缘已生的五蕴有而宣说的开示”。「把握果时,因即被把握」:因为在把握识的同时,行以及作为行之因的无明也一并被把握了,所以说“在下面已经解答的十二处当中”。「在每一句中」:指在每一句里。「依三三」:依于经中所出现的“他开示了为了灭尽的法”“为了灭尽而修行”“为了灭尽而成为无取解脱者”这三组,每组三句的格式。「如同‘以十八事’等」的说法,此处「事」是“原因”的同义词,因此说“以三十六种原因”。第一种,是随喜的方式。说法师的功德,是以不分对象的施设来说明的,也就是观的领域。在其余二者(有学地、无学地)中,道理亦同。第二种,是随喜;第三种,是随喜:应当随所对应之义而说。开示的成就被说出,是因为经中说了“开示了为了厌离……等的法”。有学地被说出,是因为经中说了“为了厌离……等而修行”。无学地被说出,是因为经中说了“为了灭尽而成为无取解脱者”。显示巴利原文
Ettake ṭhāneti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho āvuso’’tiādinā paṭhamārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva ‘‘nirodho hotī’’ti padaṃ, ettake ṭhāne. Avijjāsaṅkhāre aggahetvā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti desanāya pavattattā ‘‘paccayuppannapañcavokārabhavavasena desanā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Phale gahite kāraṇaṃ gahitamevā’’ti viññāṇe gahite saṅkhārā, tesañca kāraṇabhūtā avijjā gahitā eva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhā vissajjitesu dvādasasu padesū’’ti. Ekekasminti ekekasmiṃ pade. Tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasenāti ‘‘nirodhāya dhammaṃ desesi, nirodhāya paṭipanno hoti, nirodhā anupādāvinimutto hotī’’ti evamāgatānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vārānaṃ vasena. ‘‘Aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhī’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 468) viya idha vatthusaddo kāraṇapariyāyoti āha ‘‘chattiṃsāya kāraṇehī’’ti. Paṭhamo anumodanāvidhi. Dhammakathikaguṇoti vipassanāvisayo abhedopacārena vutto. Sesadvayesupi eseva nayo. Dutiyo anumodanā, tatiyaṃ anumodananti abhidheyyānurūpaṃ vattabbaṃ. Desanāsampatti kathitā ‘‘nibbidāya…pe… dhammaṃ desetī’’ti vuttattā. Sekkhabhūmi kathitā ‘‘nibbidāya…pe… paṭipanno hotī’’ti vuttattā. Asekkhabhūmi kathitā ‘‘nibbidā …pe… anupādāvimutto hotī’’ti vuttattā.
第八 《憍赏弥经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Kosambisuttavaṇṇanā
68 六十八. 第八经中:「因信受他人而接受」:指因相信他人的话语而接受,由此说“那个人说‘那是真实的’,便执取它”。因为他依从他人,智慧受他人所引导。「某个(自己推断的)理由」:指自己思考过的对象。「喜好」:依着自己的思惟模式,认为“此事将会如此,不会是别样”而产生的喜好。「由喜好而执取」:指并非依从他人,而是自己如此地认同、喜好而执取。「传闻」:靠着辗转听闻、长久流传的传闻,生起“此事如何成立?为什么这是真的?”的想法,以传闻而执取。「思惟寻思(理性推论)」:指正在推想“这件事将会如此”。「一种理由在心中现起」:指如所假设的对象在心中现前。「思惟推究其相状」:指依着自己构想出的相状而执取它。「一种(固执的)见解生起」:对于所假设的任何义理,生起了一种强烈的执取倾向,认定“正是如此,决非别样”。「他的那种(见解)」:指那个人由于那种见解。「审察思虑」:指如同面对现前之物一般,仔细观察、思惟。「适合(执取)」:指变得极适合领受、执取。因此说:“他……等而执取”。显示巴利原文
68. Aṭṭhame parassa saddahitvāti parassa vacanaṃ saddahitvā. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ esa bhaṇati, taṃ bhūtanti gaṇhātī’’ti. Parapattiyo hi eso paraneyyabuddhiko. Yaṃ kāraṇanti yaṃ attanā cintitavatthu. Ruccatīti ‘‘evametaṃ bhavissati, na aññathā’’ti attano matiyā cintentassa ruccati. Ruciyā gaṇhātīti parapattiyo ahutvā sayameva tathā rocento gaṇhāti. Anussavoti ‘‘anu anu suta’’nti evaṃ cirakālagatāya anussutiyā labbhamānaṃ ‘‘kathamidaṃ siyā, kasmā bhūtameta’’nti anussavena gaṇhāti. Vitakkayatoti ‘‘evametaṃ siyā’’ti parikappentassa. Ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ upaṭṭhātīti yathāparikappitavatthu cittassa upaṭṭhāti. Ākāraparivitakkenāti attanā kappitākārenā taṃ gaṇhāti. Ekā diṭṭhi uppajjatīti ‘‘yathāparikappitaṃ kiñci atthaṃ evametaṃ, nāññathā’’ti abhinivisantassa eko abhiniveso uppajjati. Yāyassāti yāya diṭṭhiyā assa puggalassa. Nijjhāyantassāti paccakkhaṃ viya nirūpetvā cintentassa. Khamatīti tathā gahaṇakkhamo hoti. Tenāha ‘‘so…pe… gaṇhātī’’ti. Etānīti saddhādīni. Tāni hi saddheyyānaṃ vatthūnaṃ gahaṇahetubhāvato ‘‘kāraṇānī’’ti vuttāni. Bhavanirodho nibbānanti navavidhopi bhavo nirujjhati ettha etasmiṃ adhigateti bhavanirodho, nibbānaṃ. Svāyaṃ bhavo pañcakkhandhasaṅgaho tabbinimutto natthīti āha ‘‘pañcakkhandhanirodho nibbāna’’nti. Bhavanirodho nibbānaṃ nāmāti ‘‘nibbānaṃ nāma bhavanirodho’’ti esa pañho sekkhehipi jānitabbo, na asekkheheva. Imaṃ ṭhānanti imaṃ yāthāvakāraṇaṃ.
「善见」:指“有灭尽即是涅槃”这一真实,已被我以正慧如实善见——如实照见了“有”的逼迫性、有为性、热恼性、变异性,以及“有灭尽”的出离性、远离性、无为性、不死性。安住于不还果者,实际上即是安住于不还道者,因为尚未证得更高的道果,故说“由于住于不还道的缘故”。这位长老虽然也有以涅槃为所缘而生起的智,但并非名为“观察涅槃”的那种智,因而说“十九种……等观察智”。以此指出:这不似(无学位的)涅槃观察智,而是带有残余部分(有学位)的智。如此说明之后,此处的井喻便也应能领会其用意了。「以观察智」:指以观察残余烦恼,或仅以观察涅槃本身为内容的观察智。「未来证阿拉汉果时」:因为未来将成就,将证得阿拉汉果,所以了知:“我如此寻求它,必将自作证涅槃”。显示巴利原文
Suṭṭhu diṭṭhanti ‘‘bhavanirodho nibbāna’’nti mayā suṭṭhu yāthāvato diṭṭhaṃ, bhavassa pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhānaṃ, bhavanirodhassa ca nissaraṇavivekāsaṅkhatāmataṭṭhānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya diṭṭhattā. Anāgāmiphale ṭhito hi anāgāmimagge ṭhito eva nāma uparimaggassa anadhigatattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘anāgāmimagge ṭhitattā’’ti. Nibbānaṃ ārabbha pavattampi therassetaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘‘nibbānaṃ paccavekkhatī’’ti vuttañāṇaṃ viya na hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ekūnavīsatiyā…pe… paccavekkhaṇañāṇa’’nti. Etena etaṃ nibbānapaccavekkhaṇā viya na hoti sappadesabhāvatoti dasseti. Evañca katvā idha udapānanidassanampi samatthitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇenāti avasesakilesānaṃ, nibbānasseva vā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena. Upari arahattaphalasamayoti upari sijjhanato arahattapaṭilābho tathā atthi. ‘‘Yenāhaṃ taṃ pariyesato nibbānaṃ sacchikarissāmī’’ti jānāti.
第九 《趣上经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Upayantisuttavaṇṇanā
69 在第九经中,「于水增长之时」:指一切时日中,大海之内有巨大的月光宝珠山,因月光触照的激发,水便流出,致使海水增长之时。「向上行进」:意思是水越过原本的界限,继续向上行进。「向上导引」:指让水在那里一再向上增长。当水如此增长时,便称为“增长、充满”,故说‘意思是增长、充满’。因为缘法在成就其自身果报的聚合缘时,对于该果报仿佛在其之上安立、有支配力一般,所以说“无明向上行进”。这正是依其缘法的地位而说的,因此说“能成为诸行的缘”。「离去」:指正在消退、离散。因此说「退下」:即不再增长,正在衰减、衰退。显示巴利原文
69. Navame udakavaḍḍhanasamayeti sabbadivasesu mahāsamuddassa anto mahantacandakantamaṇipabbatānaṃ juṇhasamphassena pahatattā jalābhisandanavasena udakassa vaḍḍhanasamaye. Upari gacchantoti pakatiyā udakassa tiṭṭhaṭṭhānassa tato upari gacchantoti attho. Upari yāpetīti udakaṃ tattha uparūpari vaḍḍheti. Tathābhūto ca taṃ brūhento pūrentoti vuccatīti āha ‘‘vaḍḍheti pūretīti attho’’ti. Yasmā paccayadhammā attano phalasamavāyapaccaye honte tassa upari ṭhito viya hoti tassa attano vase vattāpanato, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjā upari gacchantī’’ti. Paccayabhāvena hi sā tathā vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo bhavituṃ sakkuṇantī’’ti. Apagacchanto yāyanto. Tenāha ‘‘osaranto’’ti, avaḍḍhanto parihīyamānoti attho.
第十、《须师摩经》的注释显示巴利原文
10. Susimasuttavaṇṇanā
70 「受尊重」:因成就了那些作为尊贵之因的最胜功德的极致,以不共他人的尊重而受尊重。「受敬仰」:因正行而受敬仰。正是由于那样的行道令智者悦意,故说‘以心受喜爱’。而以四资具供养而‘受崇敬’,此仅为义释之说。结集者们为说明此义,在此经开头置入‘尔时,世尊受尊重……’等语,应知这是以标举要义的方式所说。其余诸句亦依此类推。「从肩峰处」:指以郁多罗僧衣覆双肩后,站立时从右肩峰处,或从两侧脱下。他因通达圣典而成为博学的游方者,由此后来才获得殊胜;又因以种种善巧方便说法,故被称为‘诗魁’。显示巴利原文
70. Dasame garukatoti garubhāvahetūnaṃ uttamaguṇānaṃ matthakappattiyā anaññasādhāraṇena garukārena garukato. Mānitoti sammāpaṭipattiyā mānito. Tāya hi viññūnaṃ manāpatāti āha ‘‘manena piyāyito’’ti. Catupaccayapūjāya ca pūjitoti idaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Yadatthaṃ saṃgītikārehi ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sakkato hotī’’tiādinā imassa suttassa nidānaṃ nikkhittaṃ, tassa atthassa ulliṅgavasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Aṃsakūṭatoti uttarāsaṅgena ubho aṃsakūṭe paṭicchādetvā ṭhitā dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato, ubhayato vā apanenti. Paricitaganthavasena paṇḍitaparibbājako, yato pacchā visesabhāgī jāto. Vicittanayāya dhammakathāya kathanato ‘‘kaviseṭṭho’’ti āhaṃsu.
「具大光辉者」:即具有广大光辉的人。因世尊饭前等日常义务有确定性,故被称为「致力规律者」。这里在观相中所说的‘智’,即指此而言。「法」:是指在各个集会中,长老不在场时所宣说的法。他将其取来而讲说,因为那是从最殊胜者(佛陀)那里领受而来的。显示巴利原文
Tejussadoti mahātejo. Purebhattakiccādīnaṃ niyatabhāvena niyamamanuyutto. Vipassanālakkhaṇamhīti ñāṇaṃ tattha kathitaṃ. Dhammanti tassaṃ tassaṃ parisāyaṃ therassa asammukhā desitaṃ dhammaṃ. Āharitvā katheti tathā varassa dinnattā.
虽然须师摩并不像富楼那等人那样自称是导师,但外道们认为:“这位婆罗门出家者,有智慧、通达吠陀支”,便将他安置在教团之师的位置上,并且这样崇敬他。因此说“他自称‘我是导师’”,并非因为他持常见。也正因如此,他才有能力来到世尊面前。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi susimo pūraṇādayo viya satthupaṭiñño na hoti, titthiyehi pana ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇapabbajito paññavā vedaṅgakusalo’’ti gaṇācariyaṭṭhāne ṭhapito, tathā cassa sambhāvito. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ satthāti paṭijānanto’’ti, na sassatadiṭṭhikattā. Tathā hesa bhagavato sammukhā upagantuṃ asakkhi.
“了知”(Aññā):是阿拉汉果的名称,因为它在已知根(aññindriya)修习圆满之后才转起。“听闻其转起”:是指听闻了他人所说的了知记别。“对于须师摩而言,最上无量”(paramappamāṇa):指最高的顶点。“教师秘意”(ācariyamuṭṭhī):指老师紧握不传之法。显示巴利原文
Aññāti arahattassa nāmaṃ aññindriyassa ciṇṇante pavattattā. Taṃ pavattinti yaṃ aññabyākaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sutvā. Assa susimassa, paramappamāṇanti uttamakoṭi. Ācariyamuṭṭhīti ācariyassa muṭṭhikatadhammo.
“因支的寂静”(aṅgasantatāya):由于盖等敌对法被远离,诸禅支得以寂静。正是因为止息了一切不安与热恼,那些禅那才显得更为殊胜。“因所缘的寂静”(ārammaṇasantatāya):所缘由于似相消失而变得微细、柔软,故是寂静的。正是通过修习增上而成就的这微细相所缘是寂静的,才可了知禅支的寂静。或者,因所缘寂静,而以彼所缘为境的法也随之寂静,这可以藉由以出世间法为所缘的省察来说明。“无色解脱”(āruppavimokkhā):即无色界禅那之想解脱。这只是就慧解脱而言,并非俱分解脱。诸法的安住性,即是它们的自性,称为法住,此即无常、苦、无我性;对此的智称为法住智,因此说“观智”。由此世尊说:“须师摩!先有法住智,后有涅槃智”等等。显示巴利原文
Aṅgasantatāyāti nīvaraṇādīnaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ vidūrabhāvena jhānaṅgānaṃ vūpasantatāya. Nibbutasabbadarathapariḷāhatāya hi tesaṃ jhānānaṃ paṇītatarabhāvo. Ārammaṇasantatāyāti rūpapatibhāgavigamena saṇhasukhumādibhāvappattassa ārammaṇassa santabhāvena. Yadaggena hi tesaṃ bhāvanātisayasambhāvitasaṇhasukhumappakārāni ārammaṇāni santāni, tadaggena jhānaṅgānaṃ santatā veditabbā. Ārammaṇasantatāya vā tadārammaṇadhammānaṃ santatā lokuttaradhammārammaṇāhi paccavekkhaṇāhi dīpetabbā. Āruppavimokkhāti arūpajjhānasaññāvimokkhā. Paññāmatteneva vimuttā, na ubhatobhāgavimuttā. Dhammānaṃ ṭhitatā taṃsabhāvatā dhammaṭṭhiti, aniccadukkhānattatā, tattha ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti āha ‘‘vipassanāñāṇa’’nti. Evamāhāti ‘‘pubbe kho, susima, dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, pacchā nibbāne ñāṇa’’nti evamādi.
“即使离定”:这是就纯观乘者而言,指那些已得止相、先已成就的人,即使不依于定也能证得。依所说方式,此处的“离定”既不是定的等流(不像次第住那样),也不是定的殊胜(不像世间神通那样),也不是定的完成(不像到达一切有的最顶端那样)。观的完成才是道或果——此处正作此联结。显示巴利原文
Vināpisamādhinti samathalakkhaṇappattaṃ purimasiddhaṃ vināpi samādhinti vipassanāyānikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evanti vuttākārena. Na samādhinissando anupubbavihārā viya. Na samādhiānisaṃso lokiyābhiññā viya. Na samādhissa nipphatti sabbabhavaggaṃ viya. Vipassanāya nipphatti maggo vā phalaṃ vāti yojanā.
对色等诸法,依三相辗转解说的教示,称为“三转教示”。他提出质问:“‘须师摩!你如今证得阿罗汉果,已彻底通达缘起,于缘起断除一切迷惑’——难道不是这样说过吗?”为了清楚地说明:“须师摩,正如你是一位思择者、干观者,善于安住于观察诸漏的灭尽,这些比丘也是如此;因此你不应以‘然而尊者们……’这样的话去再三质问他们。”显示巴利原文
Rūpādīsu cetesu tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ parivattanavasena desanā teparivaṭṭadesanā. Anuyogaṃ āropentoti nanu vuttaṃ, susima, idāni arahattādhigamena sabbaso paccayākāraṃ paṭivijjhitvā tattha vigatasammohoti anuyogaṃ karonto. Pākaṭakaraṇatthanti yathā tvaṃ, susima, nijjhānako sukkhavipassako ca hutvā āsavānaṃ khayasammasane suppatiṭṭhito, evametepi bhikkhū, tasmā ‘‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto’’tiādinā na te tayā anuyuñjitabbāti.
8. 沙门婆罗门品显示巴利原文
8. Samaṇabrāhmaṇavaggo
1. 老死等经注释显示巴利原文
1. Jarāmaraṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
71-72 每一部经单独开示,共说了十一部经。之所以如此,是因为依无明而说的教示尚未出现,同时也因在此是以四谛为纲,逐句引出。虽然别处确有“由漏的集起而有无明的集起”这样的经句,但须知在此是随顺所化者的意乐而未那样说。显示巴利原文
71-72.Ekekaṃ suttaṃ katvā ekādasa suttāni vuttāni avijjāya vasena desanāya anāgatattā, tathānāgamanañcassā catusaccavasena ekekassa padassa uddhaṭattā. Kāmañca ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti attheva aññattha suttapadaṃ, idha pana veneyyajjhāsayavasena tathā na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
9. 间歇品显示巴利原文
9. Antarapeyyālavaggo
1. 师等经注释显示巴利原文
1. Satthusuttādivaṇṇanā
73 为什么说这是“师”?因为为了圣道的利益而教导、随教诫解脱法,故称为师。“修学”指以增上戒为首的三种修学。“修习”指修习的实践。“欲”是能导向的,即想要去做的善欲。“能承担一切者”:能承担修习中的一切危难,或者能承担、运载它的一切利益,故称能承担一切者。“不退转”:即不退转,故称不退转。“热勤”:能克服障碍、除去愚痴的精进,它烧尽烦恼,故称热勤。“精进”:依其方式应被策动、应被转起,故称精进。“相续”:持续转起的修习之业称为相续,因此说为“持续之业”。“正是那样的”:正如所说的念一样,正是那样的智,即依老死等而把握四谛的智。显示巴利原文
73.Ayaṃsatthā nāmāti ayaṃ ariyamaggassa atthāya sāsati vimuttidhammaṃ anusāsatīti satthā nāma. Adhisīlādivasena tividhāpi sikkhā. Yogoti bhāvanānuyogo. Chandoti niyyānetā kattukamyatākusalacchando. Sabbaṃ bhāvanāya parissayaṃ sahati, sabbaṃ vāssa upakārāvahaṃ sahati vāhetīti sabbasahaṃ. Appaṭivānīti na paṭinivattatīti appaṭivānī. Antarāya sahanaṃ mohanāsanavīriyaṃ ātappati kileseti ātappaṃ. Vidhinā īretabbattā pavattetabbattā vīriyaṃ. Satataṃ pavattiyamānabhāvanānuyogakammaṃ sātaccanti āha ‘‘satatakiriya’’nti. Tādisamevāti yādisī sati vuttā, tādisameva ñāṇaṃ, jarāmaraṇādivasena catusaccapariggāhakaṃ ñāṇanti attho.